HomeMy WebLinkAboutADDENDUM NO. 3 - 20-00866 - BYUI Engineering Technology Center (ETC) - Remodel
BYU Idaho Engineering Technology Center (ETC)
MS Project #: 20.0220
BYU Idaho Project #: 12005
BID Addendum No. 3
BID ADDENDUM NO. 3
Date: November 13, 2020
PROJECT: BYU Idaho Engineering Technology Center (ETC) ARCHITECT: Method Studio, Inc.
Rexburg, ID 160 West 2nd South, Ste. 201
Rexburg, Idaho 83440
p.208-701-0068
OWNER: BYU Idaho ARCHITECT’S
BYU Idaho Project #: 12005 PROJECT NO.: 20.0220
TO ALL BIDDERS:
This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated October 27, 2020. Receipt of
this Addendum must be acknowledged to Headwaters Construction and by Headwaters Construction.
Questions / Comments:
1. BYUI Review (item #3) - Sheet M101 - All the thermostats and HVAC controls need to be updated to work with JCI 10 not just
the new components
Response: This is already covered in the drawings. All new and existing HVAC equipment will have updated
controls.
2. BYUI Review (item #4) - Sheet MI - Mechanical control sequence and schedule pages are missing. I think we need to review and
have a plan for the building controls and the snow melt controls.
Response: See attached updated control specifications and sequence of operation from JCI.
3. BYUI Review (item #5) - Sheet M101 - In the tool room, I remember having a new unit hang from the ceiling that utilized hot
water and a DX unit for cooing. similar to the one in the engine lab. Did I misunderstand or did it change? I would like to
reconsider this option. Then we can discuss not using Carrier as a manufacturer for RT 9 (M302)
Response: If the decision is made to delete all the existing Steam unit heaters and replace with hot water, we will
change this room to an air handler with D/X condensing unit similar to the engine lab. This may have to be a post bid
addendum change.
4. BYUI Review (item #6) - Sheet M - I would like to Discuss a full hot water system instead of a partial steam system in the building
as an add alternate or a change in design. I think in the long run it is the best solution.
Response: We will evaluate these costs and propose to BYUI. This may have to be a post bid addendum change.
5. BYUI Review (item #7) - Sheet M302 - Remove wording 3 way mixing valve & arrow
Response: 3 Way valve in snow melt detail E has been deleted.
6. BYUI Review (item #8) - Sheet M302 - Run vent to the outside, not to the ceiling. Also condensate return should connect to
pressurized condensate back to the Central Energy Facility. It says "to existing heat exchanger in mezzanine mechanical room"
Response: Refer to attached mechanical documents.
7. BYUI Review (item #9) - Sheet MD100 - We need to discuss the option about making the heating system from steam to
hydronics. Demo all steam unit heaters and associated piping.
Response: We will evaluate these costs and propose to BYUI. This may have to be a post bid addendum change.
BYU Idaho Engineering Technology Center (ETC)
MS Project #: 20.0220
BYU Idaho Project #: 12005
BID Addendum No. 3
8. BYUI Review (item #10) - Sheet P100 - Install heating water convertor and pumps to recirculate hot water to each unit heater.
Install new heating coil unit heaters and associated hot water supply and return piping to each unit heater
Response: We will evaluate these costs and propose to BYUI. This may have to be a post bid addendum
change.
9. BYUI Review (item #11) - Sheet P301 - Add an isolation valve on 3/4" cold water line before/upstream of interior hose bibb.
Response: Isolation valve has been added as requested to detail D. See attached mechanical documents.
10. Site Walkthrough Questions from subcontractors on 11/11/20
a. Questions regarding carpet came up
Response: Carpet will be selected and installed by the owner and will not be part of the bid. A note has
been added to attached finish schedule for clarity.
b. Who is going to provide construction for plastic laminate ceiling clouds?
Response: Headwaters will clarify who provides installation. See attached RCP details and finish schedule
for cloud finish clarification.
c. RB-1 and RB-2 is called out in the schedule. Where is RB-1 being called out in the drawings?
Response: RB-01 can be seen in the finish plans and interior elevations, RB-02 + RB-03 will be at the millwork
and has been keynoted in interior elevations. Note has been added to finish schedule and updated locations in
drawings are clouded and tagged.
d. Existing mechanical mezzanine room 202 shows sealed concrete. Is this correct?
Response: No, this will be epoxy and will roll up the wall as a base to help seal the room. See attached
finish plans.
e. Is there information on epoxy’s in the specifications?
Response: Yes, see attached added specification.
f. Is there a roof spec?
Response: Yes, see attached added roof specification
g. Do new masonry walls need to go all the way to existing deck?
Response: No, there will be a gap. See C1 & D1/SE-511. Provide Insulation in gap.
h. Electrical – Please clarify where exterior lights are going to be demolished and replaced.
Response: Refer to attached electrical documents.
i. Electrical – Electrical demolition is to general. Please clarify.
Response: Refer to attached electrical documents.
j. Electrical – need clarification on note 11 of sheet EE101b. Tunnel does not extend to new IT room.
Response: Refer to attached electrical documents.
k. Electrical – Data in High Bay shop, is it exposed with j-hooks, or is there a cable tray?
Response: Refer to attached electrical documents.
l. Does existing roof have warranty?
Response: Yes, patch and repair will need to be identical and follow all manufacturer instructions to
maintain existing warranty. The following information has been added to the roofing specifications
regarding the existing roof:
BYU Idaho Engineering Technology Center (ETC)
MS Project #: 20.0220
BYU Idaho Project #: 12005
BID Addendum No. 3
To the best of our understanding and knowledge, the existing record drawings provided by the Owner
indicate that the existing roof is a Sarnifil roofing system with a fully adhered 60 mil PVC membrane and
a vapor barrier under the insulation. The Contractor shall inspect the existing roofing system, including
existing substrate and roof deck conditions, and provide a full report to the Architect and the Owner of
all existing conditions, including those that are not in conformance with current adopted building codes
and manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations of the roofing system. As part of the
inspection, the Contractor shall engage a technical representative of the roofing system to inspect the
existing roofing system and report on the roofing system’s compliance with the warranty requirements of
the manufacturer.
As indicated in the drawings, the existing roofing system (including, roofing insulation, vapor barrier,
decks, etc.) is to be modified to receive various appurtenances, including skylights, walkway pads, and
other elements. Where modification of the existing roofing system is required per contract
documents, the Contractor shall modify the existing roofing system in such a manner and in accordance
with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations to maintain existing warranty.
Additionally, where the existing roofing system transitions to new roofing system, the Contractor shall
install a weathertight transition in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and
recommendations that will not void warranty for existing roofing system.
m. Question from owner – can we revise the purchasing printer location and the layout of the new reception area?
Response: Yes, see attached sheet AI101b for clarification.
11. Contractor RFI 03 – (Timeless Tile Traditions email via Headwaters – 11/12/20) – TL-03 calls out 2 tiles in one. Looking for
clarification on whether it is a mix or what their intentions are on that.
Response: The tile will be Retro Active 2.0 Patterns, just the patterned tile not a mix of both. See attached revised
finish schedule.
12. Contractor RFI 04 – (OEC Construction email via Headwaters – 11/12/20) – Collection of Questions
a. Corner Guards: 1) Spec calls for corner guards “at all outside gypsum board corners” in 1.2/A/1 (summary and 2.2./A.
2) Spec then calls for them at “all exposed outside corners building wide except at lobby” in 3.5/A (schedule). 3)
Finally, the plans call for them “All exposed finish corners in high traffic areas, QTY4” in the finish schedule AF601. So,
where do they go? My initial instinct was to only quote them as 1), but I’m worried that’ll look bad.
Response: Corner guard locations have been clarified on sheet AF101.
b. Grab bars: Accessory schedule on AF601 shows the 18” and 36” grab bars as Bobrick’s 68616 series grab bars, but
those are “L” shaped bars 1-1/2” OD while the details on AE401 make a pretty convincing case for just straight grab
bars. Additionally, the 42” grab bar is called out as Bobrick’s 5806 series which is 1-1/4” OD. My plan is to bid these
all as 5806 series straight grab bars.
Response: Bid 5806 Series. See updated schedule.
c. Janitor Room: No mop/broom holder? Say the Bobrick 239-34 or similar?
Response: Mop/broom holder will be owner furnished and owner installed.
d. No spec for interior signage:
Response: All wayfinding signage is owner provided and owner installed. There will be some branding
signage that is not considered wayfinding signage (Details D2, D4 & D5/GI004). This branding signage will
need to be submitted in a submittal process with shop drawings for approval. This will be submitted to the
owner (University communications) and to the architect prior to purchasing and installation. See attached
revised signage note on sheet GI004.
BYU Idaho Engineering Technology Center (ETC)
MS Project #: 20.0220
BYU Idaho Project #: 12005
BID Addendum No. 3
e. Fire extinguisher cabinets: Spec calls JL Industries Cosmopolitan series as the BoD, in cold-rolled steel cabinet and
stainless door and trim, but plans point to JL industries Academy series, an aluminum cabinet. My plan is to bid the
Cosmopolitan cabinet unless you want the Academy cabinet.
Response: Provide Academy (aluminum) cabinet per the drawings as the basis of design.
f. Roller Window Shades: Spec calls these at the south and west walls, but the south end of the Engines Lab is missing
the 12.05 callout at its window. Should it get a shade?
Response: Yes, this got missed. Also added a keynote for the north west existing high bay shop windows
to have window shades. See updated attached drawings.
g. Mirrors: Accessories Schedule shows these as 24”x42” frameless but scaling the drawing on AE401 puts them at
24”x40”. 2” won’t make that large an impact on pricing at this point, but I’d like to get you as accurate a proposal as
possible.
Response: The schedule has been updated to be 24”x40”. See attached.
13. Contractor RFI 05 – (Headwaters Construction email – 11/12/20) – The following equipment is called to be contractor
furnished, contractor installed. No other information has been provided for these pieces of equipment, i.e. manufacture,
product model, detail, etc. We either needs this information to accurately price or we need to come up with an allowance to
include tor these items. Let me know how you would like to proceed.
Sheet AI101a
Mark A-1 – 2’x5’ Work Bench
Mark AT-7 – Task Chair
Mark A-12 – Heavy duty shelving
Mark A-19 – Heavy Duty Delivery Shelf
Mark AT-1 – Heavy duty shelving
Sheet AI101b
Mark AT-1 – Heavy duty shelving
Marl EL-1 – 2’x5’ Work Bench
Mark EL-8 – White Board (are these the same as MB-02 from sheet AF601?)
Mark EL-9 – Shop Stool
Mark CS-1 – 5’x5’ Wood top project table
Mark CS-3 – 3’x8’ stainless steel teaching work bench
Mark CS-34 – 5’x5’ stainless steel project table
Mark CS-40 – 2’x5’ stainless steel top worktable
Response: These items have all been revised to be OFOI (owner furnished and owner installed), except for the white
board. The white board will be contractor furnished and contractor installed. The specifications for this have been
added to the drawings. Please see this and additional changes to equipment and furniture in the attached drawings.
14. Contractor RFI 06 – (Headwaters Construction email – 11/12/20) – I am working with Kyle from McGee. We are confused. The
equipment schedule calls out a Mohawk lift, but doesn’t provide any further information. The lift you reference below doesn’t
appear to be the same type. Can you help clean this up? What lift are we supposed to pursue pricing for?
Response: Use Rotary two post hoist – Model number SP012U7T5 (12,000 lb capacity). This has been revised on
equipment sheet. See attached.
DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS:
Civil:
1. See attached civil documents.
BYU Idaho Engineering Technology Center (ETC)
MS Project #: 20.0220
BYU Idaho Project #: 12005
BID Addendum No. 3
Architectural:
1. Specification adjustments –
a. Section 033543 – 3.5.C.4: Change 3000 (grit grinding/polishing pad) to “, up to 3,200”. Note that the Protective Application
Treatment is to be the integral sealer as provided by the manufacturer. Proposed gloss and aggregate exposure to be
determined and approved by Architect during mock-up.
b. Section 044200- 2.3.B.1: Change from match existing to “As indicated in drawings and approved by Architect during
submittal process.”
c. Section 055000- 2.7.A.1: Change steel tops to concrete filled and rounded concrete top.
d. Section 055000- 2.8.A: Refer to drawings for overall dimensions.
e. Section 055213- Exterior handrail and railings to be steel and to be powder-coated per specified color. Color and finish to
be approved by Architect during submittal process.
f. Section 064116- 2.3.C.1: Replace Architect’s sample with “As indicated in drawings.”
g. Section 064116- 2.2.J.1: Replace Match Architect's sample, see finish schedule with “As indicated in drawings.”
h. Section 123661.19 “Solid Surface Countertops”: Omit.
2. Architectural specifications related to the attached Table of Contents have been added.
3. Sheet GI002 – Added missing architecture tags symbols
4. Sheet GI004 – Adjusted signage note for clarification
5. Sheet GI101 – Removed rating for room 142, added fire extinguisher and adjusted square footage for room tags in east wing.
6. Sheet AD101 – Clarification in keynotes for existing refrigerator and cabinets and an added general note. Items to be salvaged
for re-use will not be returned to owner. Added area for concrete demolition where new concrete curing closet is going to go.
7. Sheet AD131 – Clarification on ceiling and light fixtures in RCP demo plan and revised keynote.
8. Sheet AE101 – Added keynotes to infill areas in north west offices and conference room.
9. Sheet AE111 – Added area to pour new concrete to allow floor drain in new concrete curing room. Also added keynotes on east
side clarifying that the slab needs to pour over existing foundation.
10. Sheet AE121 – Revised note in right column.
11. Sheet AE131- Added ceiling tags and window shade keynotes.
12. Sheet AE201 – Adjusted grading lines and adjust foundation to be visible graphically in elevations. Removed foundation detail
from upper wall on elevation B1.
13. Sheet AE311 – adjusted keynotes to show aluminum wood look soffit to match RCP’s.
14. Sheet AE401 – Mop/broom holder added as owner furnished and owner installed.
15. Sheet AE421 – Marker board clarification and rubber base clarification
16. Sheet AE421, AE422, AE423, AE424 – Added casework key tag to interior elevation sheets
17. Sheet AE422 – Revised keynote for columns in high bay shop to be new columns.
18. Sheet AE424 – Added elevations with FRP to all walls in auto storage room and base clarification
19. Sheet AE501 – Revised gypsum board description for wall types PS6a, PS6b, PS3a, PS3b, to be cement backer board where
there is tile.
BYU Idaho Engineering Technology Center (ETC)
MS Project #: 20.0220
BYU Idaho Project #: 12005
BID Addendum No. 3
20. Sheet AE521 – Provided damp proofing in lieu of water proofing at foundation in detail D5 and clarified title of D1 detail to be for
restrooms.
21. Sheet AE522 – Wood ceiling cloud material clarification. B6 detail clarified to be non-structural metal stud detail.
22. Detail D1/AE571 – Adjusted tile backer to have double layer of fiber cement board for detail D1. Clarified and added additional
support to bench in detail A5.
23. Detail A1/AE901 – Clarified countertop materials
24. Sheet AF101 – Clarification to finish in auto storage room.
25. Sheet AF102 – Revised finish to mechanical room 202 to be epoxy and roll up wall as base.
26. Sheet AF601 – Clarifications, additions and adjustments made to finish and accessory schedule.
27. Sheets AI101a and AI101b – revised CFCI, OFCI AND OFOI information. Revised information on automotive lifts.
Structural:
1. Refer to attached Structural Documents.
Mechanical:
2. Refer to attached Mechanical Documents.
Electrical:
2. Refer to attached Electrical Documents.
END OF ADDENDUM THREE
1
Addendum #3
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL SITE WORK
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
14 Nov 2020
Following is discussion of changes made to the Drawings and specifications for the Civil/Site
Work on the BYUI Engineering Technology Center (DTC).
DRAWINGS
The following changes have been made to the Civil/Site Work Drawings as a part of Addendum
#3. Changes to the Drawings are noted with a revision cloud for quick identification.
C101 – showed reference to protective bollard to be constructed at the northeast corner of the
building by the new stairway access.
Showed a reference to a connecting pipeline for a 4” roof drain from the mechanical room in the
southeast building extension that runs north to an existing storm drain catch basin.
Included an aerial photograph of the facility under the Drawing line work for better visualization
of the work and existing conditions.
C102 – added asphalt cut lines coinciding with the new 4” roof drain line on the east side. Note
that this only includes the portion that is additional to the asphalt removal areas previously
shown.
Clarification is also given that the excavation quantity showed in the “Estimated In-Place
Quantities” on this Drawing does not include excavation associated with the 4” sewer service
line or the 4” roof drain line.
C103 – showed reference to the protective bollard, and also to constructing the 4” roof drain line
to be connected to the existing catch basin on the east side.
Increased the quantity for asphalt repair and construction to reflect the additions. Added line
items and quantities for the 8” bollard and 4” roof drain.
C104 – no changes.
C105 – added a detail for the protective bollard.
Adjusted the riser and tread dimensions on the stairway to be reconstructed.
SPECIFICATIONS
The following changes have been made to the Civil/Site Work Specifications as a part of
Addendum #3.
Site Work – clarification is given in the “Clearing and Grubbing” section that the University will
remove the 3” caliper oak tree previously called to be removed by the contractor to facilitate
widening of the north driveway. It is the only tree of its kind on campus and the University will
relocate it to another preferred location.
2
Protective Bollard – add the following in reference to the protective bollard. It is required to
construct an 8” protective bollard off the new access stairway at the northeast corner of the
building. Follow the detail given on the Drawings and locate the center of the bollard 16”
northeast of the stairway corner.
Use Schedule 40 steel pipe for the bollard. Paint the exterior of the bollard in two coats of
epoxy paint, safety yellow color, extending a minimum of 12” below the ground surface. Fill the
bollard with concrete during placement and finish with a slightly curved dome in the concrete at
the top of the bollard extending 1.5” above the top of the bollard at the center. Place the
foundation concrete as shown on the Drawings, noting the requirement for 6” of concrete under
the bottom of the bollard.
Roof Drain – add the following in reference to the roof drain. It is required to extend a 4” roof
drain coming out through the new mechanical room on the southeast building addition
northward under the parking lot pavement to connect with the existing storm drain catch basin
approximately 120 ft. to the north. Work includes excavation, furnishing and placing the
pipeline, and backfill.
Use Schedule 40 PVC for the pipeline and provide a long-radius sweep for the 90° bend where
the pipeline alignment turns northward. Use non-shrink grout for the connection of the pipeline
to the existing concrete catch basin structure.
Follow the provisions of the Standard Specifications for the installation of the roof drain pipeline,
considering it to be a storm drain pipeline. Begin by conducting excavation at the existing catch
basin to determine the necessary connection elevation and conditions for making an appropriate
connection.
Determine the pipeline slope necessary to assure adequate drainage in the new pipeline while
maintaining maximum possible depth below the asphalt parking lot surface and new
improvements to be constructed in the area. Coordinate with the work of the plumbing trade to
establish the proper elevation of the roof drain piping coming out from the building through the
new foundation that will be necessary to meet these conditions of slope and cover.
Core drill the existing south catch basin wall at the location and elevation necessary to make
proper connection. Grout the pipeline in place and take particular precaution to properly backfill
and support the pipeline in the area adjacent to the catch basin structure and also near the new
concrete building foundation. Provide sand or crusher rejects for bedding of the pipeline at least
2” below the pipe bottom and 2” above the top of pipe for shading.
Backfill the pipeline to the subgrade elevation of the asphalt repair section shown on the
Drawings. Compact the backfill and pipe bedding to 96% of optimum density. The University
will provide compaction testing.
Then place the pit run gravel, crushed gravel, and asphalt pavement associated with the asphalt
repair section to complete the trench backfill and repair. Follow the provisions of the
specifications for construction of the asphalt repair section.
Measure the location of the 90° bend to at least two surface landmarks and record the
information on the record drawings of the construction.
-- End of Civil/Site Work Addendum #3 Information --
METHOD STUDIO TABLE OF CONTENTS
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
Addendum #3 Specifications:
062023 Interior Finish Carpentry
071113 Bituminous Dampproofing
072100 Thermal Insulation
072500 Weather Barriers
072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers
074213.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels
075419 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing
076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
077200 Roof Accessories
079200 Joint Sealants
071800 Traffic Coatings
071900 Water Repellants
086200 Unit Skylights
086250 Tubular Daylighting Devices
099123 Interior Painting
099600 High-Performance Coatings
102113.19 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments (omit Phenolic Toilet Compartments)
104413 Fire Protection Cabinets
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior trim
2. Plastic-laminated interior plywood paneling.
3. Fire-rated plastic-laminated interior plywood paneling ceiling system.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other
carpentry work not exposed to view.
2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and back priming of interior finish
carpentry.
3. Section 092216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing” for framing of suspension
systems for interior fire-rated plastic-laminated plywood ceiling system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E119; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include
construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative
retained. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for
finishing treated material.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels
specified.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors,
profiles, or textures.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied
finish, with half of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber
and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels.
2. For foam-plastic moldings, with half of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. (300
sq. cm).
3. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-
applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250
mm) for panels.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to
provide air circulation.
1. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored.
2. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions comply
with requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials
must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental
conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials
until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and
nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, comply with applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified
by the American Lumber Standard Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Grade
lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC's Board of Review to inspect and grade
lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit
grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading
agency.
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying
with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,
and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the
burners at any time during the test.
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or
less when tested according to ASTM D3201/D3201M at 92 percent relative
humidity.
3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested
according to ASTM D5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be
calculated according to ASTM D6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not
less than span ratings specified.
C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not
use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of
qualified testing agency.
E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following: CL8.
2.3 INTERIOR TRIM
A. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish):
1. Species: Match existing as approved by Architect.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent.
3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
4. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color.
5. Base Pattern: BYI-Idaho Standard base.
6. Finish: Match existing stain and finish.
2.4 PANELING
A. Plywood Paneling:
1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 or PS 2
2. Construction: Veneer core.
3. Plywood Thickness: As indicated in drawings.
4. Panel Size: As indicated in drawings.
5. Glue Bond: Type II (interior).
B. Fire-Rated High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Nevamar Type NK61, grades as
indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard.
1. Flame spread index and smoke developed index; ASTME-84 or UL 723.
a. Class B
b. Flame spread index 50; smoke developed index 35-85
2. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Edges: Grade HGS.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
5. Pattern Direction: As approved by Architect.
6. Adhesive: As required by plastic laminate manufacturer to meet fire spread index
and smoke developed index.
a. Panolam Industries International Technical Bulletin (07/2018): Cascophen
G1131/Cascoset G1131B 2-part Resorcinol glue.
7. All work should be assembled and installed in compliance with current adopted
fire codes.
C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not
indicated, as required by quality standard.
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
3. Edges: Grade HGS.
4. Pattern Direction: As approved by Architect.
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As indicated in drawings.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of
type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure
attachment, concealed where possible.
B. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written instructions for
adhesives.
C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation, complying with ASTM D3498, that is
recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except those with ends exposed in
finished work:
1. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-
mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-
inch (3-mm) radius.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet,
moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing
humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound; warped; improperly treated or finished;
inadequately seasoned; too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements; or
with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.
1. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
2. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts
as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and
sand unless otherwise indicated.
4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and
plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum
offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal
installation.
5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to
it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish
carpentry.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Install trim with minimum number of joints as is practical, using full-length pieces from
maximum lengths of lumber available.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary.
2. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim.
3. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce
tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint.
4. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
5. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where
necessary for alignment.
6. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish)
across joints.
7. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed.
8. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to
prevent splitting.
9. Fasten to prevent movement or warping.
10. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PANELING
A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable
variations in grain character and color between adjacent panels.
1. Leave 1/4-inch (6-mm) gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings.
2. Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
3. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and
fasteners.
4. Space fasteners and adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer.
5. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
6. Nailing: Space fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. at panel perimeter and 8 inches
(200 mm) o.c. at intermediate supports unless otherwise noted.
7. Install in full lengths without end joints.
8. Fasten paneling with trim screws, set below face and filled.
9. Refer to Section 092216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing” for framing of
suspension systems for interior fire-rated plastic-laminated plywood paneling
ceiling system.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with
requirements.
1. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with
requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
B. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
B. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes if any.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during
construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 062023
METHOD STUDIO BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
071113 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
2. Application: All below-grade footings, foundations, and walls for both concrete
and concrete masonry units.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for bituminous vapor retarders under
slabs-on-grade.
2. Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for mortar parge coat on masonry
surfaces.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in
enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
METHOD STUDIO BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
071113 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single
source from single manufacturer. Provide protection course and auxiliary materials
recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having
jurisdiction unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
1. BASF Corporation
2. Henry Company
3. W.R. Meadows, Inc.
B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D1227, Type II, Class 1.
C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D1227, Type II, Class 1.
D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing.
B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water
as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D1668/D1668M, Type I.
D. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended in
writing by dampproofing manufacturer.
E. Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C578,
Type X, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
METHOD STUDIO BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
071113 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
F. Protection Course: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with ASTM D6380/D6380M,
Class S, Type III.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for surface smoothness, maximum surface moisture content, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have
been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for dampproofing application.
B. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or
coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging
weep holes and drains.
C. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to dampproofing work; fill
voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any.
D. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time
between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless otherwise indicated.
1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection.
2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a
smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage.
B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to
top of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm)
over outside face of footing.
1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not
extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.
METHOD STUDIO BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
071113 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,
changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where indicated as
"reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated
glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding
fabric is in addition to other coats required.
C. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap
dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer
ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe.
1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs
that interrupt inner wythe.
2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto shelf angles supporting veneer.
D. Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply two brush or
spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.6 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100
sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, one fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3
gal./100 sq. ft. (1.2 L/sq. m), or one trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft.
(1.6 L/sq. m).
E. Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one trowel coat at not less
than 5 gal./100 sq. ft. (2 L/sq. m).
F. Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not
less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m).
G. Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray
coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m).
H. Concrete Backup for Brick Veneer Assemblies: Apply one brush or spray coat at not
less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).
I. Masonry Backup for Brick Veneer Assemblies: Apply primer and one brush or spray
coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).
J. Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat
at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m).
3.4 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with
dampproofing-material and protection-course manufacturers' written instructions for
attaching protection course.
1. Support protection course over cured coating with spot application of adhesive
type recommended in writing by protection-board manufacturer.
METHOD STUDIO BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
071113 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Correct dampproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, and
reapply dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 071113
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 071800 - TRAFFIC COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes traffic coatings and pavement markings for the following applications:
1. As indicated on the Drawings.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include installation instructions and details, material descriptions, dry or wet film
thickness requirements, and finish.
B. Shop Drawings: For traffic coatings.
1. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck
penetrations, and other termination conditions that are not included in
manufacturer's product data.
2. Include plans showing layout of pavement markings, lane separations, and
defined parking spaces. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility,
spaces allocated for people with disabilities.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on rigid backing.
1. Provide stepped Samples on backing to illustrate buildup of traffic coatings.
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of traffic coating.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup for each traffic coating and substrate to receive traffic coatings.
2. Size: 200 sq. ft. of each substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and
crack treatment, thickness, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and
substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic
coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F, when
relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F
above dew point.
1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather
conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only
when frost-free conditions occur throughout the depth of substrate.
B. Do not install traffic coating until items that penetrate membrane have been installed.
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces
and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials,
and not exceeding 95 deg F.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coating that
fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Adhesive or cohesive failures.
b. Abrasion or tearing failures.
c. Surface crazing or spalling.
d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids
into deck substrate.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain traffic coating system, including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint
sealants, and substrate repair materials from single manufacturer.
2. Obtain pavement-marking paint from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base coat, intermediate coat, and topcoat; and
accessory materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
2.3 TRAFFIC COATING
A. Traffic Coating to meet or exceed BYU-Idaho standard requirements. Manufacturer's
standard, traffic-bearing, seamless, high-solids-content, cold liquid-applied,
elastomeric, water-resistant membrane system with integral wearing surface for
pedestrian traffic vehicular traffic and equipment-room floor; according to
ASTM C 957/C 957M.
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Basis of Design: Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
b. Or equivalent as approved by Architect.
B. Primer: Liquid primer as recommended in writing for substrate and conditions by
traffic-coating manufacturer.
1. Material: Epoxy.
C. Preparatory and Base Coats: epoxy.
1. Thicknesses: Minimum dry- film thickness as recommended in writing by
manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated.
D. Intermediate Coat: epoxy.
1. Thicknesses: Minimum dry- film thickness as recommended in writing by
manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, measured excluding
aggregate.
2. Aggregate Content: As recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer
for substrate and service conditions indicated.
E. Topcoat: epoxy.
1. Thicknesses: Minimum dry- film thickness as recommended in writing by
manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, measured excluding
aggregate.
2. Aggregate Content: As recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer
for substrate and service conditions indicated.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Aggregate: Manufacturer's standard aggregate for each use indicated of particle sizes,
shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic-coating
manufacturer.
G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic-coating materials with the
fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products according
to test method below for deck type and slopes indicated by an independent testing and
inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Class A roof covering according to ASTM E 108.
H. ENERGY STAR Listing: Provide traffic coating that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY
STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
I. Energy Performance: Provide traffic coating with an initial Solar Reflectance Index of
not less than 0.70 and emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to
CRRC-1.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
B. Sheet Flashing: Nonstaining sheet material recommended in writing by traffic-coating
manufacturer.
1. Thickness: Minimum 60 mils .
C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.
D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic-coating
manufacturer.
2.5 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
complying with AASHTO M 248, Type N; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952.
1. Color: As approved by Architect from manufacturer’s full selection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, surface smoothness, and other
conditions affecting performance of traffic-coating work.
B. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.
1. Test for moisture according to ASTM D 4263.
2. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by traffic-coating
manufacturer.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of traffic-coating work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Begin coating application only after substrate construction and penetrating work
have been completed.
2. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete-curing and -drying period
recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer has passed and after
substrates are dry.
3. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
instructions to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic-coating application.
Remove projections, fill voids, and seal joints if any, as recommended in writing by
traffic-coating manufacturer.
B. Priming: Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, prime
substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by traffic-coating material on same
day. Reprime areas exposed for more time than recommended by manufacturer.
C. Schedule preparation work so dust and other contaminants from process do not fall on
wet, newly coated surfaces.
D. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings to prevent overspray, spillage,
leaking, and migration of coatings. Prevent traffic-coating materials from entering deck
substrate penetrations and clogging weep holes and drains.
E. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade surface to a uniform profile acceptable to
manufacturer, according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.
1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners,
form-release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating
adhesion.
4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces
according to ASTM D 4258.
3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through
traffic coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127
and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, floor-to-wall
butt joints.
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
C. Terminate edges of floor-to-floor expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip.
D. Install sheet flashings at floor-to-wall joints, and bond to floor and wall substrates
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Extend traffic coating system 4 inches minimum vertically, at all wall conditions, where
traffic coating system is designated, unless noted otherwise.
3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127
and manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust
and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
B. Apply reinforcing strip in traffic-coating system where recommended in writing by
traffic-coating manufacturer.
3.5 TRAFFIC-COATING APPLICATION
A. Apply traffic coating according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Apply coats of specified compositions for each type of traffic coating at locations as
indicated on Drawings.
C. Start traffic-coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
D. Verify that wet-film thickness of each coat complies with requirements every 100 sq.
ft..
E. Uniformly broadcast and embed aggregate in each coat indicated to receive aggregate
according to manufacturer's written instructions. After coat dries, sweep away excess
aggregate.
F. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height
indicated; omit aggregate on vertical surfaces.
G. Cure traffic coatings. Prevent contamination and damage during coating application
and curing.
3.6 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint for striping and other markings until layout,
colors, and placement have been verified with Architect and traffic coating has cured.
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
C. Apply pavement-marking paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of
dimensions indicated with uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's
recommended rates for a minimum wet-film thickness of 15-mils .
1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly
secured to surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to
prevent paint application beyond stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath
stencil.
2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement-marking paint at a rate of 6
lb/gal. .
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Provide an allowance to engage a qualified testing agency to perform
the following field tests and inspections:
1. Materials Testing:
a. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
b. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using
applicable referenced testing procedures.
c. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic-coating
application for each 600 sq. ft. of installed traffic coating or part thereof.
2. Electronic Leak-Detection Testing:
a. Testing agency shall test each deck area for leaks using an electronic
leak-detection method that locates discontinuities in the traffic-coating
membrane.
b. Testing agency shall perform tests on abutting or overlapping smaller areas
as necessary to cover entire test area.
c. Testing agency shall create a conductive electronic field over the area of
traffic coating to be tested and electronically determine locations of
discontinuities or leaks, if any, in the traffic coating.
d. Testing agency shall provide survey report indicating locations of
discontinuities, if any.
B. Final Traffic-Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic-coating manufacturer's technical
personnel to inspect membrane installation on completion.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
C. Waterproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
METHOD STUDIO TRAFFIC COATINGS
071800 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071800
METHOD STUDIO WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 071900 - WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and
horizontal surfaces:
1. Cast-in-place concrete.
2. Concrete unit masonry
3. Brick
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of water repellent and substrate indicated.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
B. Field Sample:
1. Install at Project site or pre-selected area of building an area for field sample, as
directed by Architect.
2. Provide mockup of at least 100 square feet to include surface preparation,
sealant joint, and juncture details and allow for evaluation of repellent
performance and finish.
3. Conduct RILEM test before and after field sample has cured three days. Adjust
application until required repellent performance is achieved.
4. Apply material in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written application
instructions.
5. Obtain Architect’s written approval of field sample before start of material
application, including approval of aesthetics, color, texture, and appearance.
6. Manufacturer’s representative will review surface preparation, application, and
workmanship.
7. Field sample will be standard for judging workmanship on remainder of Project.
METHOD STUDIO WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
8. Field sample must be maintained during construction for workmanship
comparison.
9. Field sample must not be altered, moved, or destroyed until Work is completed
and approved by Architect.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent
under any of the following conditions, except with written instructions from the
manufacturer:
1. Ambient air and surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
2. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured less than 28 days.
3. Rain or temperatures below 50 degrees F are predicted within 24 hours.
4. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surface has been wet.
5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
6. Windy conditions exist that may cause water repellent to be blown onto surface
not intended to be coated.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in the article shall not deprive the
owner of other rights the owner may have under other provisions of the contract
documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the contractor under requirements of the contract documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the applicator and water
repellent manufacturer, covering materials, agreeing to repair or replace materials that
fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not
include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of
prepared and treated substrate, formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1.5
mm (1/16 inch) wide, fire, vandalism or abuse by maintenance equipment.
C. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Contractor Verification - Applicator must comply with manufacturer’s warranty
requirements providing written verification of total size of surface area covered and
total gallons of product applied. This document will be accompanied with copies of
invoices for product applied to project, including credits for any returned merchandise.
E. Final Inspection - Manufacturer will issue the Special Warranty after completing final
inspection of the Project confirming that the performance of the sealer is equal to the
test wall and after receiving the completed Contractor Verification documents.
METHOD STUDIO WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS
A. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend
with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. OKON Co., Inc., Division of Rust-Oleum
b. ZINSSER Co., Inc., an RPM company; S-20.
c. Prosoco Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent
manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in representative
locations by method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or
performance of water repellents.
3. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be
trapped beneath the application of water repellent.
4. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water
repellent.
B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that
could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for
joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and
cured.
METHOD STUDIO WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
C. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints
adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and
cured.
1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion
and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent,
and sealant materials identical to those required.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on
the product and application method to be used.
B. LOCATIONS: Apply water repellent at all exposed interior and exterior concrete,
concrete masonry unites, and brick. Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water
repellent, on surfaces required for treatment by the Architect, using low-pressure spray
to the point of saturation. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle
beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application
procedure unless otherwise indicated.
C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and
after precipitation and/or wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's
technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or
damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work
of other trades caused by water-repellent application.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 1900
METHOD STUDIO THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
3. Acoustical blanket insulation.
4. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for each product.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
METHOD STUDIO THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation
and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials
to Project site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in
each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum
compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1.DiversiFoam Products.
2.Dow Chemical Company (The).
3.Owens Corning.
4.Pactiv Building Products.
2. Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa).
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.CertainTeed Corporation.
2.Johns Manville.
3.Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
METHOD STUDIO THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. CertainTeed "CertaPro AcoustaTherm Batts"
2. Johns-Mansville "Sound Control Batts"
3. Owens Corning "Sound Attenuation Fire Batt Insulation/ MW
B. Unfaced acoustical insulation batts produced by combining mineral-glass fibers with
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665, Type I.
1. Thickness: Nominal 3-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Minimum density: 2 lb/cu.ft to 3 lb/cu.ft
3. Outlet Box Pads: As specified in Section 07 9219 “Acoustical Joint Sealants”
4. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9219 “Acoustical Joint Sealants”.
2.3 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION
A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1.BASF Corporation.
2.Dow Chemical Company (The).
3.Gaco Western Inc.
4.Henry Company.
2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h
x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (43 K x m/W at 24 deg C).
B. Spray Applied Intumescent Thermal Barrier for sprayed foam insulation: Product to be
compatible with manufacturer of sprayed polyurethane insulation and have a current
ESR Report available. Apply at all locations where spray foam insulation is exposed
without other thermal barrier.
1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.Icynene Inc. (DC 315)
2. Equivalents as approved by Architect.
2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle;
capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with
self-locking washer in place.
1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
METHOD STUDIO THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.
2.Gemco; Spindle Type.
2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by
2 inches (50 mm) square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm)
in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and
substrates.
1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.
2.Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders,
including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere
with insulation attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
METHOD STUDIO THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm)
below exterior grade line.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support
of units.
B. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members
according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths
that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures
not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438
mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by
taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
C. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits,
wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and
other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied,
make flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or
METHOD STUDIO THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and
protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07 2100
METHOD STUDIO WEATHER BARRIERS
072500 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Flexible flashing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 072726 " Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers " for air barrier system.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE FLASHING
A. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of
a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a cross-laminated polyethylene film
with release liner backing to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch
(40 mil).
1.Provide flexible flashing recommended by air barrier manufacturer to produce a
complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.
2. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according
to NFPA 285.
METHOD STUDIO WEATHER BARRIERS
072500 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended in writing by flexible flashing
manufacturer for substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for air barrier system to form a seal with adjacent construction and
maintain a continuous air barrier.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing and air barrier manufacturer.
2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches.
3. Lap flashing at all sides of openings in accordance with air barrier manufacturer
written requirements and recommendations.
4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to
ensure that flashing is completely adhered to form a seal and maintain a
continuous air barrier.
END OF SECTION 072500
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-permeable membrane air barriers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for weather barriers, including flexible
flashing
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the
movement of air.
B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides
continuity.
C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials
applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to
control air movement through the wall.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-
leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers
air barriers.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of
products.
B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.
1. Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and
cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners,
terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.
2. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air
barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in
contact with the barrier.
C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
each substrate; technical data; dry film thickness; and tested physical and
performance properties of products.
B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.
1. Show locations and extent of air-barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies
specific to Project conditions.
2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips,
penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining
construction.
3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly as shown on Drawings,
incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront,
door frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to
demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrier
assembly.
a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection by Owner's testing
agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.
b. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and
foundation wall intersection.
c. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements,
reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.
1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier
performance.
2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or
mist.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to
repair or replace air barrier system that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which air barrier
manufacturer agrees to furnish materials to repair or replace those that do not comply
with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure from the
following:
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable
to design or construction resulting in stresses on the air barrier exceeding
manufacturer's written specifications.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design
specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories
from single source from single manufacturer.
B. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24) and complying with VOC content limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable
air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior
incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of
accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control
joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter
conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57
lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 283 or ASTM E 783.
2.3 VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER
A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified
bituminous or synthetic polymer membrane.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane:
1)BASF Corporation; MasterSeal AWB 660 Air/Water-Resistive Barrier.
2)Henry Company; Air-Bloc 17.
3)Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air-Shield LMP.
4)Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 220R.
b.Synthetic Polymer Membrane:
1)Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Barritech VP.
2)Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier VP.
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3)Henry Company; Air-Bloc 33.
4)Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 230.
2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.0012 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq.
ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96.
c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a
complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by air-
barrier material manufacturer.
C. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting
of 32 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil-thick, cross-laminated
polyethylene film with release liner backing.
D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.
E. Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
F. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place,
polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or
less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner
recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.
G. Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Vapor-permeable, 17-mil-thick, self-adhering strip
consisting of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance value
of 37 perms.
H. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50
(low modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint
substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
I. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric
liquid; trowel grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or
other contaminants.
2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended
by air-barrier manufacturer.
3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and
other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp
corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane
to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to
provide continuous support for air barrier.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply air barrier to substrate, fastener heads, joints, rough openings, penetrations, and
all other appurtenances as required by manufacturer’s written instructions and
recommendations.
B. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate
according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove
dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating
surfaces.
1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's
recommended preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each
side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material and
embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
C. Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and
air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air-barrier
material at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a
second layer of fluid air-barrier material over joint reinforcing strip.
3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION
A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier
manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and
maintain a continuous air barrier.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas
that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed
for more than 24 hours.
1. Prime sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond,
with adequate drying time between coats.
C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane
air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing
and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers,
exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using
accessory materials.
D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate
with termination mastic.
E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's
recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply modified bituminous transition strip so that a minimum of
3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact
over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
1. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors,
and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.
H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations
with termination mastic.
I. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch-wide,
counterflashing strip.
J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not
concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches
beyond repaired areas in strip direction.
3.5 FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips
and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written
instructions. Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended
application temperature ranges.
1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same
day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
3. Prime sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond,
with adequate drying time between coats.
B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to
substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full
contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.
1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as
recommended in writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements
applied in one or more equal coats.
C. Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air-barrier material or
strip and transition strip over cured air-barrier material overlapping 3 inches onto each
surface according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing
agency.
E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection
for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:
1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building
envelope with no gaps or holes.
2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided.
3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities,
protrusions, and mortar droppings.
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been
maintained.
5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.
6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable.
7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements
and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on
exposed edges), with no fishmouths.
8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.
9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate.
10. Compatible materials have been used.
11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been
provided.
12. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with
requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support,
integrity, and continuity of seal.
13. All penetrations have been sealed.
C. Tests: Provide allowance for the following tests:
1. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for minimum air-barrier
adhesion of 30 lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of
installed air barrier or part thereof.
D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified
above.
E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of
construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as
required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days,
remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier
application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according
to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not
approved by air-barrier manufacturer.
B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the
completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer
of affected construction.
METHOD STUDIO FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 10
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
C. Remove masking materials after installation.
END OF SECTION 072726
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal composite
material panel Installer, metal composite material panel manufacturer's
representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces
with or affects metal composite material panels, including installers of doors,
windows, and louvers.
2.Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
3.Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel
installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
4.Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including
alignment between and attachment to structural members.
5.Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and
condition of other construction that affect metal composite material panels.
6.Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and
tests and inspections if applicable.
7.Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel
assembly during and after installation.
8.Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.
9.Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and
furnish copy of record to each participant.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1.Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels;
details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment
assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
2.Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not
less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated with
factory-applied color finishes.
1.Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.Build mockup of typical metal composite material panel assembly as shown on
Drawings or as directed by Architect, including corner, soffits, supports,
attachments, and accessories.
2.Water-Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of mockup of metal composite
material panel assembly, testing for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
4.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items
so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for
protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered
with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material
panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal
composite material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during
installation.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be
performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work,
flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2.Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that
show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty
period.
1.Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to
ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2.Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of
withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to
ASTM E 330:
1.Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3.Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.
B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according
to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material
surfaces.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -
assembled, metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings
that are bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for
installation method indicated. Include attachment assembly components, panel
stiffeners, and accessories required for weathertight system.
1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.3A Composites USA, Inc.; Alucobond.
b.Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond FR.
c.Alucoil North America; Larsen FR.
d.Mitsubishi Plastics Composites America; Alpolic Aluminum Faced
Composite Panel.
e. Petersen Aluminum Corporation; PAC-CLAD
2.Wall Panel System Manufacturers:
a. Noorda BEC (Building Envelope Contractor), Series NRS-2000 System,
2160 West 1700 South, Salt Lake City, Utah 84104, 801.503.3000, Fax
801.503.3004, www.noorda.com.
b. Steel Encounters, Inc.
c. Lindford Contract Glazing.
d. Engineered Wall Systems.
B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch-thick, coil-coated
aluminum sheet facings.
1.Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch.
2.Core: Standard.
3.Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer where indicated.
a. Color: From manufacturer’s full range as approved by Architect.
C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.
D. Attachment Assembly: Rainscreen principle system.
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
E. System Type:
1.Provide an open joint rout and return drained/back ventilated rainscreen system.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel
system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of
metal composite material panels unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal
composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs,
corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and
fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal composite
material panels.
C. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide
exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by
means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing
washers for exposed fasteners.
D. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material
panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal composite
material panel manufacturer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the
factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill
indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with
indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with
manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
1.Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to
accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
4.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners
are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by
metal panel manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness
of metal being secured.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of
other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and
are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:
1.Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other
structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within
alignment tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel
manufacturer.
2.Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing
or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal
composite material wall panel manufacturer.
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over
sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water
penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite
material panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of
metal composite material panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written
instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels
perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite
material panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions
for thermal and structural movement.
1.Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels.
2.Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings.
Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-
resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite
material panels are installed.
3.Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4.Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5.Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds.
6.Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7.Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets,
bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and
similar elements with self-tapping screws.
8.Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1.Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces
exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces
exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material
panel manufacturer.
D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal
composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system,
including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and
anchor channels.
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-
material joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
E. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations,
spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance
requirements specified.
1.Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Rainscreen-Principle Installation: Install using manufacturer's standard assembly with
vertical channel that provides support and secondary drainage assembly, draining at
base of wall. Notch vertical channel to receive support pins. Install vertical channels
supported by channel brackets or adjuster angles and at locations, spacings, and with
fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach metal composite material wall panels
by inserting horizontal support pins into notches in vertical channels and into flanges of
panels. Leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal.
1.Install wall panels to allow individual panels to be installed and removed without
disturbing adjacent panels.
2.Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.
G. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.
1.Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel
assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by
metal composite material panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types
recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.
H. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.
Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.
1.Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that
is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof
performance.
2.Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and
trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed
within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).
METHOD STUDIO METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 - 10
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units
within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and
location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of
alignment of matching profiles.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
field tests and inspections.
B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Architect for
water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
test and inspect completed metal composite material wall panel installation, including
accessories.
D. Metal composite material wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass
test and inspections.
E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal
composite material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's
written installation instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel
installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal composite material
panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage
channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213.23
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 075419 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adhered polyvinyl chloride (PVC) roofing system.
2. Vapor retarder.
3. Roof insulation.
4. Cover board.
5. Walkways.
B. Section includes installation of sound-absorbing insulation strips in ribs of roof deck.
Sound-absorbing insulation strips are furnished under Section 053100 "Steel Decking."
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and
blocking.
2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and
counterflashings.
4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint
preparation.
5. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to work of this Section.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct
conference at Project site.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting
agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work
interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-
mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including
flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
B. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting
agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work
interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-
mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with
requirements, including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM
Approvals' RoofNav and SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies listing.
B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work,
including the following:
1. Layout and thickness of insulation.
2. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
3. Flashing details at penetrations.
4. Tapered insulation thickness and slopes.
5. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof
membrane, fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing
system.
6. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
7. Tie-in with air barrier.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Roof membrane and flashing, of color required.
2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
D. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind
uplift performance requirements.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Product data for each component and accessory.
C. Manufacturer Certificates:
1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer,
certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying
that all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.
D. Product Test Reports: For roof membrane and insulation, tests performed by
independent qualified testing agency indicating compliance with specified
requirements.
E. Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Certified statement from existing roof membrane manufacturer stating that existing roof
warranty has not been affected by Work performed under this Section.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed listed in FM
Approvals' RoofNav and listed in SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies for roofing
system identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to
receive manufacturer's special warranty.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other
components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its
stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by
sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting
during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid
permanent deflection of deck.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's
written instructions and warranty requirements.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing
system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation,
fasteners, cover boards, and other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end
of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all
components of roofing system such as roof membrane, base flashing, roof insulation,
fasteners, cover boards, vapor retarders, and walkway products, for the following
warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional design professional, licensed in the
state of the Project, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design
the roofing system.
B. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Roof system and flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of
exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested
according to ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272/D4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot
Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.
C. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and
adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as
demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
D. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift
pressures when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897.
E. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component
materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470
as part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Class 1 or
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals
Certification markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90 minimum.
2. Hail-Resistance Rating: FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-34
MH.
F. SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and
component materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM
Approvals 4470 as part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in SPRI's Directory of
Roof Assemblies for roof assembly identical for that specified for this Project.
G. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance of not less
than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D4434/D4434M, Type II, Thermoplastic membrane, fiberglass scrim
reinforced, with lacquer coating, and factory-applied felt backing.
1. Manufacturer: Sika Corporation
a. Sarnafil G410-60
2. Thickness: 60 mils (minimum thickness)
3. Exposed Face Color: White.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane
manufacturer or manufacturers approved by roof membrane manufacturer.
2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with other roofing components.
1. Adhesives and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type,
reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet.
C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
D. Roof Vents: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
1. Size: Not less than 4-inch diameter.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or
aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing
components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap
sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D4397, 10 mils thick, minimum
1. Manufacturer: Sika Corporation
a. Sarnavap-10
2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, listed by FM Approvals for
vapor retarder application.
2.5 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by PVC roof membrane
manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assemblies,
and approved for use in SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies listed roof assemblies.
1. Manufacturer: Sika Corporation
a. Sarnatherm ISO Fiber Reinforced Felt Facer
b. Sarnatherm ISO Coated Glass Facer
c. Sarnatherm EPS
d. Sarnatherm XPS
2. Thickness:
a. Base and Upper Layers: As required for R-value (thermal resistance) of
rigid insulation indicated in Drawings.
B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards.
1. Material: Match roof insulation.
2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Slope:
a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
intended use and compatibility with other roofing system components.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof
insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to
attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer
D. Coated Primed Cover Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant
gypsum board:
1. Manufacturer: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC
a. DensDeck Prime Roof Board.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch minimum.
3. Surface Finish: Factory primed.
2.7 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D312/D312M, Type III.
2.8 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-
textured walkway pads or rolls, provided by roofing system manufacturer.
1. Size: Approximately 36 by 60 inches minimum.
2. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced,
and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck
at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."
4. All roof surfaces, including parapets and adjoining surfaces, shall be free of
water, ice, and snow.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
system installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from
spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when
no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Install sound-absorbing insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions,
FM Approvals' RoofNav, SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies listed roof assembly
requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent
water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when
rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on
adjoining roofing.
C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie into existing roofing to maintain
weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.
D. Coordinate installation and transition of roofing system component serving as an air
barrier with air barrier specified under Section 072726 "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air
Barriers."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over
area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 4 and 6
inches, respectively.
1. Seal to all roof penetrations and at perimeter area.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 10
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2. Extend vertically up parapet walls and projections to a minimum height equal to
height of the insulation and cover board.
3. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to
prevent air movement into roofing system.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation, other sources or moisture, or left exposed at end of workday.
B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install insulation to achieve required thickness and R-value. Use at least 2 layers of
insulation when total insulation thickness exceeds 2.7 inches.
E. Installation Over Metal Decking:
1. Install base layers of insulation staggered in both directions not less than 12
inches between layers.
a. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit
tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
b. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
width.
c. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
d. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
e. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and
penetrations.
f. Install base layer of insulation to metal decks in accordance with the
following:
1) Install each layer of insulation to substrate at the spacing rate and
application according to manufacturer’s written requirements, FM
Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements for specified
Windstorm Resistance Classification, and SPRI's Directory of Roof
Assemblies listed roof assembly requirements for specified Wind
Uplift Load Capacity and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-29.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 11
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2) Where fasteners are used, fasteners shall not penetrate bottom flute
on steel decks.
2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer
offset both directions not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
a. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit
tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
b. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
width.
c. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
d. Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and
penetrations.
g. Install each layer of insulation to substrate at the spacing rate and
application according to manufacturer’s written requirements, FM
Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements for specified
Windstorm Resistance Classification, and SPRI's Directory of Roof
Assemblies listed roof assembly requirements for specified Wind Uplift
Load Capacity and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS
A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 12
inches in each direction.
1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight
to intersecting sloping roof decks.
2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump.
a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.
3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations.
4. Install cover board to substrate at the spacing rate and application according to
manufacturer’s written requirements, FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof
assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, and
SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies listed roof assembly requirements for
specified Wind Uplift Load Capacity and FM Global Property Loss Prevention
Data Sheet 1-29.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 12
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.7 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED ROOF MEMBRANE
A. The surface of the insulation or substrate shall be inspected prior to installation of the
roof membrane. The substrate shall be clean, dry, free from debris and smooth with no
surface roughness or contamination. Broken, delaminated, wet or damaged insulation
boards shall be removed and replaced.
B. Accurately align roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
D. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Make sure seam areas are free of debris, dirt, and dust, overlap membrane sheets,
and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to
manufacturer's most current requirements to ensure a watertight seam installation.
1. Verify in-field weld strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, repair seam
sample areas.
2. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity.
3. If any tears or voids in lapped seams are found repair using appropriate
approved technique.
F. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.
G. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
H. Adhesive: Install roof membrane as required by manufacturer’s written instructions and
recommendations.
I. Install roofing membrane at deck-drain flanges of roof drains as required by
manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF BASE/FIELD FLASHING
A. Install all sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories according to roofing
system most current manufacturer's written instructions and requirements.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at the
manufacturer’s required rate. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and inside/outside corners with appropriate prefab flashing
components as provided by manufacturer. Custom in-field fabrications shall be
approved by the Architect and manufacturer’s technical representative prior to
installation.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 13
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
D. Firmly roll membrane flashing into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to
ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air
weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate by
approved manufacturer’s most current roofing details and associated required and
recommended accessories.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations:
a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit.
b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting
rooftop unit locations.
c. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting
rooftop unit locations.
d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder.
e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path
connecting rooftop unit locations.
f. Locations indicated on Drawings.
g. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.
2. Provide minimum clearance between adjoining pads as required by
manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.
3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible
adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Provide allowance to engage a qualified testing agency to inspect
substrate conditions, surface preparation, roof membrane application, sheet flashings,
protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion, in presence of Architect, and to prepare
inspection report.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 14
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to
warranty requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing
system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written
report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.12 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. Provide the following roofing installer’s warranty or equivalent:
B. WHEREAS _______________________________ of
___________________________, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed
roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
1. Owner:
2. Address:
3. Building Name/Type:
4. Address:
5. Area of Work:
6. Acceptance Date: _________________.
7. Warranty Period:
8. Expiration Date: __________________.
C. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or
indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective
materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
D. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions
herein set forth, that during Warranty Period Roofing Installer will, at Roofing Installer's
own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of
said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary
to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
E. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of
the building, and to building contents, caused by:
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 15
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
a. lightning;
b. peak gust wind speed exceeding ( );
c. fire;
d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement,
excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the
work;
f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors,
maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or
unauthorized by Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be
null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until
cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible
party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but
is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting
from leaks or faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than
Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with
penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this
Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the
extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages
Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and
void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner
in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely
damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or
termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used
for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled
surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally
specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but
only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected
leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for
Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects,
or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said
work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and
resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this
Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for
performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract
Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or
a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
METHOD STUDIO POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075419 - 16
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
F. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________
day of ___________________, ________________.
1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________.
2. Name: ______________________________________.
3. Title: _______________________________________.
END OF SECTION 075419
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
2. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.
3. Formed equipment support flashing.
4. Formed overhead-piping safety pans.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and
blocking.
2. Section 075419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing" for installation of sheet metal
flashing and trim integral with roofing system.
3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports,
roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall
materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment
curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and
trim.
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing
installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and
accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed
details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and
location in Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing
of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
8. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes,
crickets, and counterflashings as applicable.
9. Include details of special conditions.
10. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
11. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12
inches.
C. Samples for Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with
factory-applied finishes.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is
ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a
record of successful in-service performance.
1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested
and FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required
details as tested and approved.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to
demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and
installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof edge, including fascia, approximately 10 feet long,
including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and
accessories.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that
might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing
and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
1. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and
masonry.
2. Protect stored sheet metal flashing and trim from contact with water.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure
to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal
flashing and trim installation.
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet
metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to
ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to
ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen,
and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for
dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings that are listed in FM Approvals'
"RoofNav" and approved for the windstorm classification as required by the Owner’s
Insurance Carrier. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by
FM Approvals.
D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings capable of resisting
required design pressures according to SPRI ES-1 and project wind design
requirements.
1. Wind Design Requirements: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Sheet Flashing and Trim for Specified Roofing System
1. PVC-Coated Heat-Weldable Steel Sheet: Provide 24-gauge zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; with
a 20 mil (0.5 mm) unsupported membrane compromised of the same material of
the manufacturer’s roof membrane, laminated to one side.
a. Manufacturer: Sika Corporation
1) Sarnaclad
b. Surface: Smooth, flat.
c. Exposed Finish:
1) PVC Sheet: ASTM D4434/D4434M, Type II, Thermoplastic
membrane with lacquer coating
d. Color: Match color of PVC-Roofing Membrane.
e. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Miscellaneous flashing and trim: Wall and curb flashing, reglets, perimeter edge
flashing, corner flashings, penetration flashings, post flashings, drain flashings,
and all other miscellaneous flashings and trim to be obtained from specified
manufacturer for roofing system.
3. Source Limitations: Obtain, provide, and install all necessary and required
components for flashing and trim associated with the roofing system from
specified roof membrane manufacturer.
C. Other Sheet Flashing and Trim Conditions:
1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide 22-gauge zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet according to ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; pre-painted by coil-
coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.
a. Surface: Smooth, flat.
b. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
1) Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both
color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
d. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-
colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and
wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2. Pre-Manufactured Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed
to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and
compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and
junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as
reglet.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)Cheney Flashing Company.
2)Fry Reglet Corporation.
3)Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
b. Material: 0.022 inch-thick., zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according
to ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; pre-painted by coil-coating
process to comply with ASTM A 755.
c. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to
substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and
with channel for sealant at top edge.
d. Accessories:
1) Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber
accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does
not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings
show reglet without metal counterflashing.
2) Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed
before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's
lower edge.
e. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
1) Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both
color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
f. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
g. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-
colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and
wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Specified Roofing System: Provide all necessary and required materials, components,
fasteners, tape, sealants, adhesives, and all other miscellaneous items as required for
the complete and fully functional roofing flashing and trim system installation as
required in accordance with the written instructions and recommendations by
manufacturer, performance, and warranty requirements of specified roofing system.
B. Other Sheet Flashing and Trim Conditions: In general, provide materials and types of
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Underlayment Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Rubberized-Asphalt
Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a cross-laminated polyethylene film
with release liner backing to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040
inch (40 mil) specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath
metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of
underlayment manufacturer.
a.Provide flexible flashing recommended by air barrier manufacturer to
produce a complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-
barrier material and single-ply roofing system.
b. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested
according to NFPA 285.
c. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or
higher.
d. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus
20 deg F or lower.
2. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-
locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand
design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or
manufactured item.
3. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic
caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC
sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable
for metal being fastened.
4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel
or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153 or ASTM F 2329.
5. Solder:
a. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent
tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead
with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent.
6. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing
and trim and remain watertight.
7. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown
and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,
geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet
metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply
with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each
application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use
exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on
Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated by the Architect.
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to
provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal
standard.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet
metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for
application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for
intended use.
H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2.5 FLASHING AND TRIM FABRICATIONS FOR SPECIFIED ROOFING SYSTEM
A. All flashings and trim shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job
progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval
of the Architect and manufacturer’s technical representative.
1. If any water and/or moisture is allowed to enter under the newly completed
roofing due to incomplete flashings, the affected area shall be removed and
replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
B. Details, fabrication practices, and installation methods shall conform to the
requirements of the following:
1. Specified Roofing Manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.
2. Performance and warranty requirements of the specified roofing system.
3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
(SMACNA) - latest issue.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and
securely anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle
free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 10
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap
side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover
underlayment within 14 days.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous
items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal
standard.
1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating
where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner
or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 11
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and
locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as
required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of
joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely
conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40
and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust
setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not
install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints for flashing and trim for the specified roofing system in accordance
with the requirements of the specified roofing manufacturer’s written instructions
and recommendations.
3. Prepare other joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in
Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide and install roofing flashing and trim and all other required and
necessary appurtenances to comply with performance and warranty requirements of
specified roofing system, roofing manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
cited sheet metal standards. Set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with
laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. All work
is to be installed to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FM Approvals' listing for
required windstorm classification. All work includes roof edge flashing, copings, pipe
and post counterflashing, counterflashing, reglets, counterflashing, equipment-support
flashing, roof penetration flashing, and all other miscellaneous flashing and trim.
3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate
installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as
windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry."
3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from structure above, independent of
other overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise
METHOD STUDIO SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 12
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage
system.
3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and
within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess sealants.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing
and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove
unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing
and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during
construction.
C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
END OF SECTION 076200
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof curbs.
2. Equipment supports.
3. Pipe and duct supports.
4. Pipe portals.
5. Preformed flashing sleeves.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed
flashing and miscellaneous trim and accessories.
2. Section 086200 "Unit Skylights" for single- and double-glazed domed plastic
skylights with curb frame.
3. Division 23 for associated mechanical equipment and components.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base
flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.
1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and
field-assembled work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared
on Samples of size to adequately show color.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For all roof accessories and shall comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof-mounted items to roof structure.
Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
2. Wind-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind restraints.
Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration
of anchors.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and
roof-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment,
ductwork, piping, and conduit.
4. Required clearances.
B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence
of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to
ASTM D2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to
ASTM D4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: All roof accessories shall meet all performance and warranty
requirements of the specified roofing system, including wind-restraint, exposure to
weather, and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or
fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design roof curbs and equipment supports
to comply with wind performance requirements, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
2.2 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed
live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on
Drawings, bearing continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance
requirements; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, straight
sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
1.Provide roof curbs that are compatible and acceptable to specified roofing
system manufacturer.
B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of
equipment to be supported.
C. Supported Load Capacity: Coordinate load capacity with information on Shop
Drawings of equipment to be supported.
D. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.125 inch thick, minimum.
1. Finish: Factory prime coating.
2. Color: As indicated in drawings. Match adjacent painted surfaces.
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
E. Construction:
1. Curb Profile: Profile as indicated on Drawings compatible with roofing system.
2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
3. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping deck-
mounting flange or by use of leveler frame.
5. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter
curb height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter
curb is level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water
flow.
6. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch-thick glass-fiber board insulation.
7. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
8. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer under top flange on side of curb, continuous
around curb perimeter.
9. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint
straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at
perimeter of curb, of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.
10. Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide
weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch-thick plywood covered with metal
sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.
11. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same
metal and finish as curb.
12. Security Grille: Provide for as required by Architect.
13. Damper Tray: As required, provide damper tray or shelf with opening size as
required by the mechanical engineer.
2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced perimeter or rail-type metal equipment
supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads between structural
supports, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings,
spanning between structural supports; capable of meeting performance requirements;
with welded corner joints, and integrally formed structure-mounting flange at bottom.
B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of
equipment to be supported.
C. Supported Load Capacity: Coordinate load capacity with information on Shop
Drawings of equipment to be supported.
D. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.125-inch-thick minimum.
1. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
E. Construction:
1. Curb Profile: Profile as indicated on Drawings compatible with roofing system.
2. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch-thick glass-fiber board insulation.
3. Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness
and finish.
4. Nailer: Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches minimum wide
under top flange on side of curb, continuous around support perimeter.
5. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint
straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at
perimeter of curb of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.
6. Platform Cap: Where portion of equipment support is not covered by equipment,
provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch-thick plywood covered
with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.
7. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same
metal and finish as equipment support.
8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
9. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing
surface unless otherwise indicated.
10. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with
height to accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each
other. Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water
flow.
11. Security Grille: As required by Architect. Contractor shall coordinate and confirm
locations with Architect.
2.4 PIPE AND DUCT SUPPORTS
A. Fixed-Height Cradle-Type Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand accommodating up
to 1-1/2-inch-diameter pipe or conduit; with provision for pipe retainer and with
manufacturer's support pad or deck plate as recommended for penetration-free
installation over roof membrane type; as required for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
B. Fixed-Height Roller-Bearing Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand with stainless
steel roller carrying assembly accommodating up to 7-inch-diameter pipe or conduit;
with provision for pipe retainer and with manufacturer's support pad or deck plate as
recommended for penetration-free installation over roof membrane type; as required
for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
C. Adjustable-Height Roller-Bearing Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand base, pipe
support, and roller housing, with stainless steel threaded rod designed for adjusting
support height, accommodating up to 18 inch diameter pipe or conduit; with provision
for pipe retainer and with manufacturer's support pad or deck plate as recommended
for penetration-free installation over roof membrane type; as required for quantity of
pipe runs and sizes.
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
D. Adjustable-Height Structure-Mounted Pipe Supports: Extruded-aluminum tube, filled
with urethane insulation; 2 inches in diameter; accommodating up to 7-inch-diameter
pipe or conduit, with provision for pipe retainer; with aluminum baseplate, specified
roofing system compatible base seal, manufacturer's recommended hardware for
mounting to structure or structural roof deck as indicated, stainless steel roller and
retainer, and extruded-aluminum carrier assemblies; as required for quantity of pipe
runs and sizes.
E. Curb-Mounted Pipe Supports: Galvanized steel support with welded or mechanically
fastened and sealed corner joints, straight sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting
flange at perimeter bottom; with adjustable-height roller-bearing pipe support
accommodating up to 20-inch-diameter pipe or conduit and with provision for pipe
retainer; as required for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
F. Duct Supports: Extruded-aluminum, urethane-insulated supports, 2 inches in diameter;
with manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof
deck.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2.5 PIPE PORTALS
A. Curb-Mounted Pipe Portal: Insulated roof-curb units with welded or mechanically
fastened and sealed corner joints, straight sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting
flange at perimeter bottom; with weathertight curb cover with single or multiple collared
openings and pressure-sealed conically shaped protective caps, compatible with
specified roofing system. Base sized for piping indicated, with stainless steel snaplock
swivel clamps.
B. Flashing Pipe Portal: Formed aluminum membrane-mounting flashing flange and
sleeve with collared opening and pressure-sealed conically shaped protective cap
compatible with specified roofing system and sized for piping indicated, with stainless
steel snaplock swivel clamps.
2.6 PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES
A. Exhaust Vent Flashing: Double-walled metal flashing sleeve or boot, insulation filled,
with integral deck flange, 12 inches high minimum, with removable metal hood and
slotted metal collar.
1. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch minimum thickness.
2. Diameter: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Vent Stack Flashing: Metal flashing sleeve, uninsulated, with integral deck flange.
1. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch (1.60 mm) thick.
2. Height: As required.
3. Diameter: As indicated on Drawings.
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2.7 METAL MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Pre-painted by the coil-coating process to comply
with ASTM A755/A755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer
and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight.
2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a
minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), manufacturer's standard alloy for finish
required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 2605. System consisting of primer
and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight.
2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a
minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
C. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), manufacturer's
standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used;
otherwise mill finished.
D. Stainless Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturers for a complete installation.
B. Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, manufacturer's
standard, Type UVA (formulated with UV absorber), Finish 1 (smooth or polished).
C. Polycarbonate Glazing: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets
manufactured by extrusion process, burglar-resistance rated according to UL 972 with
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
an average impact strength of 12 to 16 ft-lbf/in. of width when tested according to
ASTM D256, Method A (Izod).
D. Insulation:
1. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C208, Type II, Grade 1, thickness as
required.
2. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft. (48
kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K
x m/W at 24 deg C), thickness as required.
3. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, thickness and thermal
resistivity as required.
E. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
F. Security Grilles: 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter, ASTM A1011/A1011M steel bars spaced
6 inches (150 mm) o.c. in one direction and 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. in the other;
factory finished as follows:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if any, from uncoated steel,
complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-
SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below
immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
3. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and
chromate-free, universal primer; selected for resistance to normal atmospheric
corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system
indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied
topcoats under prolonged exposure.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D1187/D1187M.
H. Underlayment:
1. Felt: ASTM D226/D226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated.
2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with
ASTM D4397.
3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.
4. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm)
thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer
of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold
applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
I. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for
application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed
fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300
stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or
ASTM F2329.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Stainless Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
J. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC,
or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
K. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant as required and
recommended by roofing membrane and accessory manufacturers for installation
indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal
joints and remain watertight.
L. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
M. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, asbestos free, of consistency
required for application.
2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual
locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 10
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without
warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting
indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required
to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof accessories
with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or
cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's
recommended slip sheet.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of roofing cement (compatible with specified roofing
system) where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof
performance.
C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level
with each other.
E. Roof-Hatch Installation:
1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating
mechanism and hardware.
2. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.
3. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Pipe Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-89. Install supports
and attachments as required to properly support piping. Arrange for grouping of parallel
runs of horizontal piping, and support together.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Space supports for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
METHOD STUDIO ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 11
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
G. Preformed Flashing-Sleeve and Flashing Pipe Portal Installation: Secure flashing
sleeve to roof membrane according to flashing-sleeve manufacturer's written
instructions; flash sleeve flange to surrounding roof membrane according to roof
membrane manufacturer's instructions.
H. Security Grilles: Weld bar intersections and, using tamper-resistant bolts, attach the
ends of bars to structural frame or primary curb walls.
I. Seal joints with approved sealant as required by roof membrane and accessory
manufacturers.
3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing according to ASTM A780/A780M.
B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting
according to Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Clean off excess sealants.
E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully
repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077200
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.
4. Latex joint sealants.
5. Butyl-rubber sealants.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide
Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-
inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces
adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct
the testing indicated.
C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and
installation methods specified in this Section.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been
removed from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do
not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to
repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint
sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other
atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to
ASTM C1248.
B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag,
plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use,
neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50,
Uses T and NT.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning
b.Pecora Corporation.
c.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division.
d. Tremco Incorporated.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and
minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.Pacific Polymers International, Inc.
b. Sika Corporation, Constructin Products Division.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with
fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.
B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-
component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability,
nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning
b.Pecora Corporation.
c.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division.
d. Tremco Incorporated.
2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.Pecora Corporation.
b.Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
c.Tremco Incorporated.
2.6 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C1311.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning
b. Tremco Incorporated.
c.Pecora Corporation.
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin) or any other types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint
application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials
or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any
way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints
with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant
manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or
primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application, and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs
below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair
damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas
are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Joints between different materials listed above.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints between metal panels.
e. Joints between different materials listed above.
f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors,
windows, and louvers.
g. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
h. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
METHOD STUDIO JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry concrete walls and
partitions.
d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces not subject to significant movement.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
windows.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and
horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
G. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Aluminum thresholds.
b. Sill plates.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
END OF SECTION 079200
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 08 62 00 – UNIT SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Dynamic dome unit skylight with formed curb counterflashing for mounting on site-
built or prefabricated roof curbs, for flat, low-slope and steep-slope roofing
applications.
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Division 07 roofing section for flashing and roofing terminations at unit skylight curbs.
B. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for manufactured metal roof curbs for unit
skylights.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. General: Applicable edition of references cited in this Section is current edition
published on date of issue of Project specifications, unless otherwise required by
building code in force.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (www.aama.net), Window &
Door Manufacturers Association (www.wdma.com), Canadian Standards
Association (www.csagroup.org/us/en/services)
1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/
Specification for Windows, Doors, and Skylights (NAFS)
2. CSA A440S1-09 – Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440
3. AAMA 502 – Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed
Fenestration Products
4. AAMA 2603 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum and Panels
C. ASTM International: www.astm.org:
1. ASTM D1003 – Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance
of Transparent Plastics
2. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified
Pressure Differences Across the Specimen
4. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference
5. ASTM E408 - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces
Using Inspection-Meter Techniques
6. ASTM E1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s)
and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials
7. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne
Debris in Hurricanes
D. Code of Federal Regulations:
1. 29 CFR 1910.23 (e) (8) - Occupational Safety and Health Standards for
Walking-Working Surfaces to Guard Floor and Wall Openings and Holes
E. Factory Mutual (FM): www.fmglobal.com
1. FM 4430 - Approval Standard for Heat and Smoke Vents
2. FM 4431 - Approval Standard for Skylights
F. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA): www.ies.org:
1. IESNA – The Lighting Handbook.
G. National Fenestration Rating Council: www.nfrccommunity.org:
1. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors
2. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain
Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
H. National Fire Protection Association: www.nfpa.org:
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
I. Underwriters Laboratory: www.ul.com
1. UL 793 – Standard for Automatically Operated Roof Vents for Smoke and
Heat
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate dimensions, locations, and details of skylight curbs specified in Section
077200 "Roof Accessories" with unit skylight curb flashings. Verify requirements for
roofing system terminations.
B. Coordinate unit skylight interior termination locations with structural layout, ceiling
layouts, and other ceiling-mounted items.
1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site prior to delivery of
unit skylight and installation of roof deck.
1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For unit skylights. Include standard construction details, product
performance characteristics, and material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
1. Include test reports of qualified independent testing agency or third-party
certificates verifying compliance with performance requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and connections to supporting structure and other adjoining work.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting
structure and other adjoining work.
C. Aluminum Finish Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in a
representative section of each prismatic unit skylight in manufacturer's standard
size.
D. Glazing Samples: For each color and finish of glazing indicated, 12 inches (300 mm)
square and of same thickness indicated for the final Work.
1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data.
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating prismatic unit
skylights that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of
documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and
calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to prismatic unit skylight
manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of skylights that fail in materials or
workmanship under normal use within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Uncontrolled water leakage.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
c. Yellowing of acrylic glazing.
d. Breakage of polycarbonate glazing.
e. Deterioration of insulating-glass hermetic seal.
2. Warranty Period:
a. 15 Years: Polycarbonate dome skylights including hail breakage for
hailstones 2 inches and less in diameter. Mill finished aluminum skylight
frames.
b. 10 Years: Yellowing of acrylic and polycarbonate skylight domes.
c. 5 Years: Acrylic and impact modified acrylic dome skylights, skylight
model CDS with polycarbonate dome, aluminum curbs, external safety
cage, internal safety screen accessory, internal security bars accessory,
ventilation curb extension.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of VELUX America LLC, Greenwood, SC 29648; www.VELUXusa.com;
(800) 878-3589, specifications@veluxusa.com.
B. Substitutions: None allowed by Owner.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain unit skylights through single source from single
manufacturer.
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2.2 DYNAMIC DOME UNIT SKYLIGHT (Model CD-2)
A. System Description: Dynamic dome, curb mounted fixed skylight utilizing extruded
aluminum frame counter-flashing with welded corners, an interior 100% thermally
broken gasket for condensation drainage, structural sealant, and accessories, as
required to meet installation and performance requirements indicated. Dynamic
dome skylights shall be suitable for installation on roof curbs ranging from 0 degrees
up to 60 degrees from horizontal.
1. Basis of Design: VELUX America LLC, Model CD- 2 Dynamic Dome
Skylight.
B. Dynamic Dome: Height 30% of skylight width, vacuum formed with precise repeating
geometric patterns, and overall shape to maximize strength and daylight at low solar
elevation angles 10 to 40 degrees. Outer dome shall be formed from smooth sheet
and not prismatic in order to transmit all incident daylight through outer dome. Initial
rise of the dome shall be at an angle of at least 60 degrees to horizontal in order to
harvest daylight at low solar elevation angles 10 through 40 degrees. [Provide
polycarbonate domes with integral UV blocking cap layer that prevents long-term
yellowing, and insures material strength and performance stability.] [Light diffusion
100%.]
1. Double dome (2P1C2):
a.Polycarbonate (LuxGuard Plus) - Outer dome polycarbonate, 0.150
inches in thickness, color clear, with UV blocking cap layer. Inner dome
prismatic polycarbonate, 0.118 inches in thickness, color white.
C. Aluminum Frame Counter-flashing: Maintenance-free, extruded aluminum, grade
6063-T5, 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) thick with neutral grey powder coat finish. Counter-
flashing frames completely welded in corners and counter flashes curb a minimum
of 1.625 inches (41 mm). Provide aluminum frame with at least 0.75 inch (19 mm)
continuous ledge on each side of the skylight that is a pinch free access for stacking,
manual transportation and mounting of skylights.
1. Unit Sizes: As indicated on Drawings.
D. 100% Thermally Broken Gasket for Condensation Drainage: Factory applied black
thermoplastic gasket encapsulates the entire interior aluminum frame assembly
providing a thermal break weather seal and drainage for condensation. The gasket
design allows positive condensation to the exterior of the curb without exposed
drainage openings in the aluminum frame that can introduce air infiltration into the
skylight. The thermally broken gasket construction allows for a dry installation of
skylight to the curb, eliminating weather seal strips or caulking at the top of the curb.
E. Structural Sealant: Factory applied silicone sealant, gray color, bonding the dome
to the aluminum frame and suitable for external exposure.
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
2.3 CURBS:
A. Aluminum Curb: Factory insulated aluminum curb, 1.5 inches in thickness with 20
gauge mill finished aluminum exterior and 22 gauge mill finished aluminum interior.
Curb factory insulated with 1.5 inches of polyisocyanurate board providing an R-
value of 8.5. Width and length of curb shall be coordinated with unit sizes as
indicated with 12 inch minimum curb height. Curb roof mounting flange shall be a
minimum 2.75 inches in width. Basis of Design: VELUX America LLC, Model
CCAM.
2.4 FALL PROTECTION AND SECURITY ACCESSORIES
A. Interior safety screen accessory: Fall protection safety screen constructed from
0.1875 inch steel mesh with a 6 inch on center grid spacing welded to 18 gauge
steel z-bar support frame continuous on each side with welded corners. Interior
safety screen frame mounts to top of 1.5 inches curb with safety screen mesh
located not more than 1.5 inches below top of curb. Safety screen factory primed
with white finish. Safety screen shall meet fall protection requirements by supporting
a minimum static load of 400 pounds per square foot. Interior safety screen
accessory width and length designation shall be as indicated on drawing. Basis of
Design: VELUX America LLC, Model CRGA ICD.
2.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Unit Skylight Standard, Dynamic Dome model [CD-] [CE-] certified to
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (NAFS-11 or previous) as follows:
1. Performance Grade (Primary Designator): SKP-PG30 1670 x 2885 (66 x102)
2. Design Pressure (DP): Minimum DP = +/- 30 psf (+/- 14.40 KPa). Dome shall
not invert at positive design pressure.
3. Water Test Pressure: Minimum 4.6 psf (220 Pa) with no leakage at 5 gallons
per minute spray rate.
4. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum 0.05 cfm/ft
2 (0.3 L/s/m2)
B. Daylighting: Provide daylighting photometric performance comparable to basis of
design product at layout indicated, based upon daylighting profile of March 21, 9:00
am local time, at Project location by simulation in accordance with IESNA guidelines.
C. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through tested size of 0.05 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3
L/s/sq. m) of fixed area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-
pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75Pa.)
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
D. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through
unit when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a static-air-pressure differential of 4.6
lbf/sq. ft. (220 Pa).
E. Windborne-Debris Resistance:
1. Provide unit skylights capable of resisting impact from windborne debris,
based on the pass/fail criteria as determined from testing glazed units
representative of those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and
ASTM E 1996. Missile Level D, and +65/-65 psf cycle pressure.
F. Fire Testing for Roof Assemblies with Fire Classifications: Unit skylight tested in
accordance with and listed as passing Class B Burning Brand test as described in
ASTM E 108.
G. Dome Burn Rate: Tested in accordance with ASTM D 635 with a documented rating
of CC1 for LuxGuard Plus (polycarbonate).
H. Dome Smoke Density Rating: Testing in accordance with ASTM D 2843 with a
documented performance value less than or equal to 75.
I. Dome Self-Ignition Temperature: Tested in accordance with ASTM D 1929 with a
documented performance value greater than or equal to 650 degrees Fahrenheit.
J. Factory Mutual: Skylights Factory Mutual 4431 approved.
K. Dome Hail Resistance: Exterior dome tested in accordance with Factory Mutual
4430 to meet severe hail with 2.0 inch ice balls.
L. Energy Performance ratings for any size commercial curb mounted unit skylight with
dynamic dome as follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum U-factor:
a. Double Dome:
1) Impact Modified Acrylic (1S1N2): 0.74
2) LuxGuard and LuxGuard Plus (3P1C2 and 2P1C2): 0.73
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum SHGC:
a. Double Dome:
1) Impact Modified Acrylic (1S1N2): 0.48
2) LuxGuard and LuxGuard Plus (3P1C2 and 2P1C2): 0.46
3. Visible Transmittance (Vt) and Percent Haze: ASTM D 1003:
a. Double Dome:
1) Impact Modified Acrylic (1S1N2): Vt = 68.9%, Haze = 100%
2) LuxGuard (3P1P2): Vt = 61.9%, Haze = 100%
3) LuxGuard Plus (2P1P2): Vt = 61.1%, Haze = 100%
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
M. Fall Protection Standard Compliance: 29 CFR 1910.23: Skylight dome and safety
screen tested to support a minimum of 400 pounds over 1 square foot of the surface.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
B. Mastic Sealants: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
nonmigrating sealant.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if
they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with unit skylight installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit skylights in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved
shop drawings. Coordinate installation of units with installation of substrates, air and vapor
retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each
element of the Work performs properly and that finished installation is weather tight.
1. Anchor unit skylights securely to supporting substrates.
2. Install unit skylights on curbs specified in another section with tops of curbs
parallel to finished roof slope.
B. Where metal surfaces of unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive
substrates, including preservative-treated wood, apply bituminous coating on
concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation recommended in
writing by unit skylight manufacturer.
METHOD STUDIO UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
C. For custom flashings, install unit skylight curb counter-flashing to produce
weatherproof seal with curb and overlap with roofing system termination at top of
curb.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Provide allowance to engage testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
1. Test for water leaks according to AAMA 502 after installation and curing of sealants
but prior to installation of interior finishes.
2. Perform test for total area of each unit skylight.
B. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess
sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
B. Replace glazing that has been damaged during construction period.
C. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting
from construction operations.
END OF SECTION 086200
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 086250 - TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tubular daylighting devices and accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 07 roofing section for flashing and roofing terminations at unit skylight
curbs.
B. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for manufactured metal roof curbs for unit
skylights.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate.
B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
C. ASTM A 463/A 463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by
the Hot Dip Process.
D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated
(Galvanized), by the Hot Dip Process.
E. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 percent
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
G. ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen.
H. ASTM E 308 - Standard Practice for Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the
CIE System.
I. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
Doors.
J. ASTM E 547 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors and Curtain walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Difference.
K. ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and
Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.
L. ASTM E 1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne
Debris in Hurricane.
M. ASTM D 635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of
Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
N. ASTM D 1929 - Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics.
O. ASTM D 2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or
Decomposition of Plastics.
P. ASTM F 1642 - Standard Test Method for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to
Airblast Loading.
Q. ASTM F 2912 - Standard Specification for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to
Airblast Loading.
R. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors,
and Unit Skylights; 2011.
S. FM Standard 4431 - The Approval Standard for Skylights.
T. FEMA P-361 - Safe Rooms for Tornadoes and Hurricanes.
U. ICC 500 - Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters.
V. UL 2108 - Low Voltage Lighting Systems.
W. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products
X. ANSI C63.4-2014 - American National Standard for Methods of Measurement of
Radio-Noise Emissions from Low-Voltage Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the
Range of 9 kHz to 40 GHz
Y. ICC-ES AC-16 - Acceptance Criteria for Plastic Skylights; 2008.
Z. Florida Building Code TAS 201 - Impact Test Procedures.
AA. Florida Building Code TAS 202 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non Impact
Resistant Building Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure
Loading.
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
BB. Florida Building Code TAS 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind
Pressure Loading.
CC. IBC Section 1710 - Load Test Procedure for Wind Load Testing on Rooftop Daylight
Collecting System - Structural Performance Testing - Devised by ATI PE); 2012.
DD. IBC Section 2606.7.2 - Installation - Diffuser Fall Out Test (Devised by PE); 2012.
EE. OSHA 29 CFR - 1910.23 (e)(8) (Guarding Requirements for Skylights); 1926
Subpart M (Fall Protection); 1926.501(b)(4)(i); 1926.501(i)(2); 1926.501(b)(4)(ii).
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. SOLAMASTER 330 DS-O / 330 DS-C (OPEN/CLOSED CEILING)
1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/IS2/A440, Class CW-PG80, size tested 21 inch (530
mm) diameter, Type TDDOC and Type TDDCC.
a. Air Infiltration Test:
1) Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure
delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 283.
b. Water Resistance Test:
1) Passes water resistance; no uncontrolled water leakage with a
pressure differential of 10.7 psf (512 Pa) or 15 percent of the
design load (whichever is greater) and a water spray rate of 5
gallons/hour/sf for 24 minutes when tested in accordance with
ICC-ES AC-16, ASTM E 547 and ASTM E 331.
c. Uniform Load Test: All units tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive
pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in
accordance with ASTM E 330.
1) No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or
damage to make daylighting system inoperable or cause
excessive permanent deflection of any section when tested at a
Positive Load of 150 psf (7.18 kPa) or Negative Load of 70 psf
(3.35 kPa).
2. Hurricane Resistance:
a. Meets Florida Building Code TAS, 201, TAS, 202 and TAS 203 for
Impact and non-impact components or HVHZ and non-HVHZ
applications.
b. Meets ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E1996 for missile and cyclic pressure
differential testing for TDI Windstorm zones.
3. Fire Testing:
a. Fire Rated Roof Assemblies:
1) When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet
fire rating requirements as described in the International Building
Code for Class A, B, and C roof assemblies.
b. Self-Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM D-
1929.
c. Smoke Density: Rating no greater than 450 per ASTM E 84 in way
intended for use. Classification C.
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
d. Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min (62
mm/min) Classification CC-2 per ASTM D 635.
e. Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm)
Classification CC-1 per ASTM D 635.
4. Fall Protection Performance:
a. Passes fall protection test: No penetration of dome or curb cap when
subject to 400 lb (160 Kg)/42 inch (1066 mm) impact drop test when
tested in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.506(c) Safety Net
Systems.
b. Passes fall protection test: California State OSHA Fall Protection Code
of Regulations, Title 8, Section 3212 (e)(1) Skylight Screens.
5. LED Light Kit:
a. TUVus Marking and Certification for North American Market
b. FCC: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Data sheets showing roof dome assembly, flashing base, reflective tubes,
diffuser assembly, and accessories.
4. Installation requirements.
C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product
components, including rough opening and framing dimensions, anchorage, roof
flashings and accessories.
D. Electrical wiring diagrams and recommendations for power and control wiring.
E. Verification Samples: As requested by Architect.
F. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying
compliance with specified performance requirements.
G. Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed
information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed
accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly
marked with all proposed features:
1. LED Luminaires: Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80
test data.
2. In order to meet LM-80 lifetime projections, LM-80 Max Drive Current must not
be exceeded. Lumen maintenance and lifetime predictions are valid for drive
current and case temperature conditions used for LM-80 testing as included in
the applicable LM-80 test report for these products.
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be
supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in the
top lighting industry. Secondary products shall be acceptable to the primary
manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products shall be installed by a single installer with a
minimum of five years demonstrated experience, with adequate equipment, skilled
workers, and practical experience to meet the project schedule.
C. Skylights shall conform with authorities having jurisdiction and be designed to meet
design criteria of the project location and the following:
1. Skylights must be certified by NFRC.
2. Skylights must be Tested and labeled in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440.
3. Skylights must have Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Class Number 4431.
4. On projects which fall under the jurisdiction of the Florida Building Code,
Skylights are required to have a current Florida Building Code (FBC) Number
to meet the High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) requirements and are
required for acceptance of Work specified in this section. Skylight must
comply with the jurisdictional code body's submittal data and supporting
drawings and documentation. Where the code body's acceptance criteria
differs from these specifications regarding components and hardware, the
code body's requirements shall govern.
5. Meet or exceed OSHA 200 pound (90 kg) Drop Tests expressed in 29 CFR
1910.23(e)(8)
6. Skylights shall provide minimum 69 psf (3.30 kPa) design load.
D. LED Lighting and controls shall be designed to meet criteria of the project, and
conform with authorities having jurisdiction, and the following:
1. Integration with Building Management Systems (BMS) and Heating,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment.
2. Product Safety Marking, Certifying compliance with:
a. UL 1598 - Luminaires
b. UL 2108 - Low Voltage Lighting Systems.
c. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting
Products
3. FCC Rules Part 15
E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Contractor shall convene a pre-installation meeting on the
project site minimum one week before beginning work of this Section. The meeting
shall include the Architect or Owner's Representative and representatives of all
related trades to:
1. Coordinate between the at least the following trades.
a. Roofing to install the flashing, skylight, and LED Light Kit (when
specified)
b. Electrical to wire components and program lighting controls.
2. Verify project requirements and site logistics.
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3. Assess integrity of the roofing system and building structure.
4. Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and
labels intact.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate delivery schedule with the Contractor and project schedule to minimize
on site storage.
B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
C. Store materials in a dry area, protected from freezing, staining, contamination or
damage.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years.
B. Electrical Parts: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 5 years, unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc., which is located at: Solatube
International 2210 Oak Ridge Way; Vista, CA 92081-8341; Toll Free Tel: 888-765-
2882; Tel: (760) 477-1120; Fax: (760) 597-4488; Email:request info
(commsales@solatube.com); Web:http://www.solatube.com
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of
Section 01600.
2.2 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and
self-flashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring
sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICC AC-16.
B. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 330 DS, 21 inch (530 mm) Daylighting System:
1. Model:
a. Solatube Model 330 DS-O Open Ceiling. AAMA Type TDDOC.
2. Capture Zone:
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with
flashing base supporting dome and top of tube.
1) Dome Glazing: Type DP, 0.115 inch (3 mm) minimum thickness
polycarbonate classified as CC1 material.
2) Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch (2.3 mm)
nominal thickness injection molded high impact PVC; to prevent
thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel
condensed moisture out of tubing. Attached to the base of the
dome ring using butyl glazing rope 0.24 inch (6 mm) diameter; to
minimize air infiltration.
3) Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip, 0.63 inch (16 mm) tall
by 0.28 inch (7 mm) wide.
4) LightTracker Reflector, made of aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015
inch (0.4 mm) with Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the dome to
capture low angle sunlight.
b. Dome Options:
1) Security Bar: Type B Security Bar 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) stainless
steel bar across flashing diameter opening.
2) Security Kit: Type SK Dome Security Kit, rivets with nylon spacers
to replace dome screws.
3) Dome Edge Protection Band: Type PB, for fire rated Class A, B or
C roof applications. Galvanized steel. Nominal thickness of 0.039
inch (1 mm). For use with all flashings types.
4) Secondary Diffuser: Type SS, Acrylic plastic classified as CC2
material. Thickness shall not be less than 0.100 inches.
c. Flashings:
1) Roof Flashing Base:
a) One Piece: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing
functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Sheet
steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653/A
653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M or ASTM A792/A 792M,
0.028 inch (0.7 mm) plus or minus .006 inch (.015 mm)
thick.
1) Base Style: Type F4, Self Mounted, 4 inches (102
mm) high.
d. Curbs: Metal Insulated Roof Curb: Corrosion resistant 18 Gauge hot-
dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 653 G90 with
continuous welded seams, integrated base plate for water tightness and
extra strength, lined with 1-1/2 inch fiberglass fireproof sound
attenuating thermal insulation, factory installed 2 by 2 treated wood
nailer secured to top ledge of curb. Curb designed for single-ply roofing,
lightweight fill or tapered insulation low slope roof types.
1) C12- 12-inch-high minimum metal insulated curb
2) Flashing Options:
a) Flashing Insulator: Thermal isolation material is for use
under the following flashing types: Type F4, F8, or F11.
b) Roof Flashing Turret Extensions: Provide manufacturer's
standard extension tubes for applications as requiring:
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1) Type T48: Additional lengths of 48 inches (1200 mm)
extension.
3. Transfer Zone:
a. Extension Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch (0.5 mm).
1) Reflective Tubes:
a) Reflective extension tube, Type EXX and Type EL with total
length of run as indicated on the Drawings.
b) Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction
Technology combining ultra-high Visible Light reflectance
with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance.
2) Tube Options
a) Extension Tube Angle Adapter: Provide manufacturer's
standard adapters for applications requiring:
1) Type A1 one 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle
adapter.
2) Type A2 two 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle
adapters.
b) Top Tube Angle Adapter: Type TA, reflective 45 degree
adjustable Top Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches (406 mm)
long.
c) Top Tube Angle Adapter and Bottom Tube Angle Adapter
Kit: Type AK, reflective 45 degree adjustable top and bottom
angle adapters (one each), 16 inches (406 mm) long
d) Bottom Tube Angle Adapter: Type BA, reflective 45 degree
adjustable Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches (406 mm)
long.
e) Thermal Insulation Panel: Type TIP, high-performance dual-
glazed, thermally-broken tube insulation system.
f) Open ceiling trim ring: Type R, ABS Plastic, White; nominal
thickness of 0.04 inch (1 mm).
g) Wire Suspension Kit: Type E, Use the wire suspension kit
when additional bracing to the structure is required.
4. Delivery Zone:
a. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Not Penetrating Ceilings (Open Ceiling):
Solatube Model 330 DS-O. 21 inch (530 mm) diameter diffuser attached
directly to bottom of tube.
1) Lens: Type L2, Prismatic lens designed to maximize light output
and diffusion. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90
percent at 0.100 inch (2.5 mm) thick. Classified as CC2.
2) Diffuser Seal: Open cell foam, acrylic adhesive backed, 0.75 inch
(19 mm) wide by 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick to minimize
condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283.
3) Diffuser Trim Ring: Injection molded acrylic. Nominal wall
thickness 0.172 inches (4.4 mm).
b. Delivery Zone Options
1) Daylight Dimmer - 0 to 10 V Dimmer Control: Provide an electrical
actuator dimmer controller, auxiliary switch(s), and cable as
specified in Section 13800; Common Work Results Electrical
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
Section 16000; and Lighting Equipment and Controls Section
16500.
a) Low Voltage Daylight Dimmer: Type D1, is an Electro-
mechanically actuated daylight valve; 0-10 V Control, Class-
2, UL Listed. Low voltage Daylight Dimmer, an electrical
actuator provides for programmable (0 to 10VDC) scene-
based dimming control for daylight output between 2 and
100 percent, auxiliary 12VDC dimming control for daylight
output between 2 and 100 percent, or auxiliary ON/OFF
control. Input voltage: 24VAC at 50 or 60 Hz.
1) Programmable (0 to 10VDC) Control: requires
electrical actuator controller or building automation
controller capable of producing a signal between 0
and +10 VDC (Min 50mA) to incrementally modulate
up to 50 daisy chained Daylight Dimmers (Current
Sinking) between fully closed at 0 to 1 volts to fully
open at 9 to 10 volts.
2) Auxiliary 12VDC Dimming Control: requires 12VDC
Dimming Switch (Current Sourcing; 12VDC power
supply not required).
a) Requires CL-2 (Min), 18AWG, stranded copper,
two conductor, twisted cable from lighting
controller to first dimmer and interconnecting
between subsequent dimmers.
3) Auxiliary ON/OFF Control: requires commercial or
residential single pole electric light switch.
a) 12VDC dimming control requires CL-2 (Min), 22
AWG, stranded, three conductor, twisted cable
from switch to first dimmer and CL-2 (Min), 18
AWG, stranded copper, two conductor, twisted
cable; interconnecting subsequent dimmers.
b) Power can be transformed from line voltage through use of
a UL Listed Class-2, 24VAC Transformer.
2) LED Light Kit: Including driver and light engine two piece field
assembly, bracket mounted inside system, cTUVus Listed.
a) Type (LED); Long-lasting, high performance, non-
replaceable light source, LED integrated in Light Engine.
b) Electrical Input (AC~) 100-240V, 1.1A, 50/60Hz; 277V, 0.5A,
50/60Hz
c) Light Engine: CCT 4,000 degrees K, CRI 80, at 1440 mA
Nom Drive Current and Tc 25 degrees C: Typ Pulsed Flux
12,075 lm
d) LED Output: 10,000 delivered lumens.
e) Lumen Maintenance Rating (L70): =60,000 Hr/105 degrees
C Case Temp: (87.66%) of Initial (lm), Per (TM-21)
5. Accessories
a. Optional Low-voltage Transformer: Solatube Remote Transformer, Type
TR20, is a 20VA, 24VAC, 50/60HZ, UL Listed, UL Category XOKV7, CE
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 10
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
Marked, Class-2 Transformer with cover plate mounting system
configured for easy field assembly onto standard 4.06 inch by 4.06 inch
(103 mm by 103 mm) square junction box: Inherently Limited, Primary:
120VAC, 208VAC, 240VAC, and 277VAC. For use with Daylight
Dimmer Type D1 only.
b. Optional Switch: Type S1, is a Low-voltage 0-10V Class 2 control switch
(white) required to operate 0-10V Daylight Dimmer. Note: only one
switch is required per set of up to 50 synchronously controlled dimmers.
For use with 0-10V Daylight Dimmer, Type D1, only.
6. Catalog Number: S330DS-O-DP-B-SK-SS-PB-F4-T48-FI-AK-EXX-A1-A2-E-
TIP-R-TA-BA-L2-D1-TR20-S1-LED-C12
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-
corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.
B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application
and ceiling system requirement.
C. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions.
C. If substrate and rough opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer,
notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit and wiring.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Coordinate installation with substrates, air and vapor retarders, roof insulation,
roofing membrane, and flashing to ensure that each element of the Work performs
properly and that finished installation is weather tight.
METHOD STUDIO TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 086250 - 11
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1. Install flashing to produce weatherproof seal with curb and overlap with
roofing system termination at top of curb.
2. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building
insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of
thermal barriers.
3. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material.
C. Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or
corrosive substrates, including preservative-treated wood, provide permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturer
D. Align device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances.
E. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct
water test in presence of Owner, Architect, or Contractor, or their designated
representative. Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent
units.
F. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify
operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess
sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
B. Replace glazing that has been damaged during construction period.
C. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting
from construction operations.
END OF SECTION 086250
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 099123 – INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1.Exposed interior items and surfaces.
2.Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are
in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other
Sections.
B.Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface
or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not
specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If
the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard
colors and finishes available.
1.Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed
metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
C.Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces,
operating parts, and labels.
1.Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a.Architectural woodwork and casework.
b.Acoustical wall panels.
c.Metal toilet enclosures.
d.Metal lockers.
e.Finished mechanical and electrical equipment-electrical panels exposed
in walls other than storage rooms, electric room, mechanical room or
other utility type room may not be painted, all others to match wall
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
surface color.
f.Light fixtures.
g.Distribution cabinets.
2.Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following
generally inaccessible spaces:
a.Foundation spaces.
b.Furred areas.
c.Ceiling plenums.
d.Utility tunnels.
e.Pipe spaces.
f.Duct shafts.
g.Elevator shafts.
3.Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a.Anodized aluminum.
b.Stainless steel.
c.Chromium plate.
d.Copper.
e.Bronze and brass.
4.Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a.Valve and damper operators.
b.Linkages.
c.Sensing devices.
d.Motor and fan shafts.
5.Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual
(FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D.Related Sections include the following:
1.Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop primed and
prefinished interior architectural woodwork.
2.Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors
and frames.
3.Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors” for prefinished doors.
4.Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation
for gypsum board.
5.Divisions 22, 23 and 26: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is
specified in these Divisions respectively.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
E.Reference the Painting and Decorating Contractor's of America (PDCA)
Technical Manual as a reference for a "type 1 standard job".
F.When epoxy or lacquer materials are specified, include a requirement for providing
positive ventilation of the spaces, and a requirement that the application be made
after 5:00pm on Friday (to allow odors to dissipate over the weekend, or other
acceptable time).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1.Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15
when measured at an 85-degree meter.
2.Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
3.Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
4.Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and
65 when measured at a 60-degree meter.
5.Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1.Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate
each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and
application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and
general classification.
2.Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information,
including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying
each coating material proposed for use.
3.Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with
local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
B.Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture
to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual
substrate.
1.Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers
and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2.Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample.
Label each sample for location and application.
3.Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of
color and texture only:
a.Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- square samples of each color
and material on hardboard.
b.Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of natural- or
stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces specified.
c.Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- square samples of flat metal and two
8-inch- long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
d.Gypsum Wallboard: Provide paint draw-downs for each color and finish
specified, labeled with paint type (name and number) and Color (name
and number).
e.Acoustical Speaker Cloth Fabric: Provide a minimum 24 inch by 24 inch
piece of fabric painted with specified paint color to match gypsum
wallboard Theater “clouds” with acrylic waterbased paint and airsprayed
to preserve acoustical transparency.
C.Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed
projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and
owners, and other information specified.
D.The contractor shall submit "as-built" color and material schedule for each
substrate and finish system with the project closeout documents, including:
1.Descriptive location (room number, etc.)
2.Manufacturer
3.Paint type (name and number)
4.Color (name and number)
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed
painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for
this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for
each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C.Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of
each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with
procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces
and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted.
a.Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface.
b.Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area
as required.
2.After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been
activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the
Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each
surface.
a.After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface
to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.
3.Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages
and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following
information:
1.Product name or title of material.
2.Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3.Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4.Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5.Thinning instructions.
6.Application instructions.
7.Color name and number.
8.VOC content.
B.Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at
a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage
in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags
and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work
areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,
mixing, and application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted
and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
B.Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted
and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C.Do not apply when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures
less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to
be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified
by manufacturer during application and drying periods.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the
materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in
unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels
describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
1.Quantity: Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities
indicated below:
a.Interior, Satin Acrylic Finish: One case of each color applied.
b.Interior, Satin Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied.
2.Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than
1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat
materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
B.Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various
coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable. Top-of-the-line products for
approved manufacturers are:
1.Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.ICI Paints.
3.Kelly-Moore Paints.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
4.Kwal-Howells Paint.
5.Porter Paints.
6.Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
7.As specified in drawings
8.Or equivalent
C.Colors: Provide color specified in finish schedule or matching color as approved
by the Architect. See finish schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under
which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application
requirements.
1.Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2.Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces
and conditions within a particular area.
B.Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to
ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible
primers.
1.Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials
specified over substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall
items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B.Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates
of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and
grease before cleaning.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C.Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and
as specified.
1.Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2.Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete and concrete masonry block,
surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils,
and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or
sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a.Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by
paint manufacturer.
b.Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do
not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
c.Clean concrete floors to be sealed with a 5 percent solution of muriatic
acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove
acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before
sealing.
3.Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with
scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces
exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of
white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or
plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
b.Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including
cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
c.When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d.Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or
other wet wall construction occurs on backside.
e.Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy
coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
4.Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not
been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other
foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC)
recommendations.
a.Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system
manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10.
b.Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal
treatment wash coat before priming.
c.Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint
manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
5.Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-
based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants.
Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil
stock by mechanical methods.
D.Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
2.Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir
as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If
necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.
3.Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
E.Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat
when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match
the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of
undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A.General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
1.Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2.Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces,
or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3.Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4.The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 10
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to
maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
5.Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as
similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint
surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat
only.
6.Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where
visible through registers or grilles.
7.Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to
match exposed surfaces.
8.Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior
faces.
9.Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework
to match exterior.
10.Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
11.The color of each coat shall be slightly varied.
B.Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,
pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after
preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1.The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless
of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat
has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to
produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written
instructions, sand between applications.
2.Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup
painted.
3.If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint,
apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and
appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that
of flat surfaces.
4.Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or
feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another
coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C.Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or
other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush
of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
2.Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 11
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
D.Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire
system as recommended by the manufacturer.
E.Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is
limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
F.Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2.Heat exchangers.
3.Tanks.
4.Ductwork.
5.Insulation.
6.Motors and mechanical equipment.
7.Accessory items.
G.Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.Conduit and fittings.
2.Switchgear.
3.Panelboards.
H.Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to
ensure complete coverage with pores filled.
I.Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as
recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or
finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to
ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J.Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide
a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
K.Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth
surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color
irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1.Provide low sheen finish for final coats.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 12
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
L.Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave
no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other
surface imperfections.
M.Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and
coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with
requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and
as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being
applied:
1.The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to
sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the
Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the
Contractor.
2.The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following
characteristics as required by the Owner:
a.Quantitative material analysis.
b.Abrasion resistance.
c.Apparent reflectivity.
d.Flexibility.
e.Washability.
f.Absorption.
g.Accelerated weathering.
h.Dry opacity.
i.Accelerated yellowness.
j.Recoating.
k.Skinning.
l.Color retention.
m.Alkali and mildew resistance.
3.The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show
material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The
Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing,
and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary,
the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously
painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are
incompatible.
4.The Owner will preform inspection after each primer and finish coat, prior
to application of the succeeding coat.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 13
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.5 CLEANING
A.Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and
other discarded paint materials from the site.
1.After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces.
Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch
or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A.Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
approved by Architect.
B.Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing
painting operations.
1.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and
restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures
specified in PDCA P1.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE (see drawings for location of finishes and colors)
A.Gypsum Board and CMU: Provide the following finish systems over interior
gypsum board and CMU surfaces:
1.Semigloss, Hybrid Waterborne Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a
primer, typical as indicated in drawings.
a.Gypsum Board Primer: Premium latex-based, interior primer applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
b.CMU Block Primer: Water Blocking, interior primer applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness 2.4-3.6 mils.
c.First and Second Coats: Semigloss, hybrid waterborne alkyd-enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve
a total dry film thickness of 2.5 – 3.5 mils.
B.Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum
board surfaces:
1.Satin or eggshell, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer, typical
unless noted otherwise.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 14
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
a.Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.0 mil.
b.First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex,
interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8
mils.
2.Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer, typical in Toilet
and Janitor rooms.
a.Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness
of not less than 1.2 mils.
b.First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve
a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils.
3.Water Based Satin Primer:: 2 finish coats.
a.First and Second Coats: Satin, acrylic, polymer interior water based
primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to
achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3 mils.
1)Rosco: Tough-prime.
C.Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over
new, interior wood surfaces; noted as paint (opaque) finish.
1.Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a.Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
b.First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve
a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils.
2.Water Based Satin Primer:
a.First and Second Coats: Satin, acrylic polymer, watre based primer
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve
a total dry film thickness of not less than 3 mils.
D.Stained and Dyed Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 15
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
new, interior woodwork:
1.Alkyd-Based, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-
satin varnish over a sealer coat and an alkyd-based, interior wood stain.
a.Stain Coat: Alkyd-based, interior wood stain applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer.
b.Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
c.First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd-based or polyurethane varnish, as
recommended by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
2.Aniline Wood Dye, Satin Varnish Finish: 2 Finish coats of an alkyd-
based, clear-satin varnish over Aniline dyed wood. Colors as per Finish
Schedule.
E.Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new, interior
woodwork:
1.Alkyd-Based, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-
satin varnish over a sanding sealer.
a.Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
b.First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd-based or polyurethane varnish, as
recommended by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
F.Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1.Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel
undercoater and a primer.
a.Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer,
as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
b.Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss,
acrylic-latex, interior enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for
this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3
mils.
c.Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total
dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
METHOD STUDIO INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 16
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
G.Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:
1.Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a.Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness
of not less than
1.2 mils.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve
a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils.
END OF SECTION 099123
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance
coating systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.Gloss Level 5: 35-70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B.Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C.Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements
and application instructions.
B.Samples: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of
topcoat indicated.
1.Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2.Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3.Label each coat of each Sample.
C.Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2.VOC content.
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1.Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions
for application of each coating system specified in Part 3.
a.Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b.Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional
mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to
Owner.
3.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from
the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect
specifically approves such deviations in writing.
4.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas
with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2.Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
B.Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures
less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C.Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
2.Or Equivalent as approved by Architect.
B.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part
2 articles for the paint category indicated.
2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL
A.Material Compatibility:
1.Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with
one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
2.For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing
by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate
indicated.
3.Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
B.VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and, for interior coatings applied at project site, the following VOC
limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40
CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1.Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2.Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3.Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
4.Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
5.Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
6.Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
7.Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
C.Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 METAL PRIMERS
A.Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, high build catalyzed polyamide/bisphenol epoxy.
1.Sherwin Williams (SW), Recoatable Epoxy Primer, B67, applied at the rate of
6.0 to 9.0 mils wet/4.0 to 6.0 mils dry.
2.4 POLYURETHANE COATINGS
A.Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):
1.Sherwin Williams (SW), Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane, B65-600/V600,
applied at the rate of 4.5 to 9.0 mils wet/3.0 to 6.0 mils dry per coat.
2.5 EPOXY COATINGS
A.Epoxy, High-build, Two-Component, Semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5):
1.Sherwin Williams (SW), Macropoxy 646-100, B58-600 Series, at 5.0 to 10 mils
(0.127 to 0.254 mm) dry, per coat.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the
following procedure:
1.Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample
coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present
when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to
Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified,
sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2.Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3.Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show
materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor
shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for
testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be
required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on
recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility
with existing finishes and primers.
C.Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
1.Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of
substrates and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1.After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied
protection.
B.Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust,
dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers
or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.
C.Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean
using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than
the following:
1.SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."
D.Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized
sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces
that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings.
3.3 APPLICATION
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
A.Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions
and recommendations.
1.Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
2.Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently
fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3.Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4.Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or
equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
B.Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if
multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match
color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.
C.If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats
until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
D.Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce
sharp glass lines and color breaks.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing
and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.
1.Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.
2.If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply
with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay
for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness
that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other
discarded materials from Project site.
B.After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage
adjacent finished surfaces.
C.Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect,
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 7
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
and leave in an undamaged condition.
D.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced coated surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A.Steel Substrates:
1.Pigmented Polyurethane over High-Build Epoxy System:
a.Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal.
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Recoatable Epoxy Primer, B67, applied at
the rate of 6.0 to 9.0 mils wet/4.0 to 6.0 mils dry.
b.Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss.
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/V600, applied at the rate of 7.0 to 13.5 mils wet/5.0 to
10.0 mils dry.
c.Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 6).
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane,
B65-600/V600, applied at the rate of 4.5 to 9.0 mils wet/3.0 to
6.0 mils dry per coat.
B.Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.Pigmented Polyurethane System:
a.Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal.
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Recoatable Epoxy Primer, B67, applied at
the rate of 6.0 to 9.0 mils wet/4.0 to 6.0 mils dry.
b.Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss
(Gloss Level 6).
c.Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 6).
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane,
B65-600/V600, applied at the rate of 4.5 to 9.0 mils wet/3.0 to
6.0 mils dry per coat.
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 8
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A. CMU Substrates:
1. Epoxy System:
a. Block Filler:
1) S-W Cement-Plex 875 Acrylic Block Filler B42 Series, at 10 to 20
mils (0.254 to 0.508 mm) dry, per coat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Epoxy, high-build, semi-gloss:
1) S-W Macropoxy 646-100, B58-600 Series, at 5.0 to 10 mils (0.127 to
0.254 mm) dry, per coat.
B.Steel Substrates:
1.Pigmented Polyurethane over High-Build Epoxy System:
a.Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, rust inhibitive, for metal.
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Recoatable Epoxy Primer, B67, applied at
the rate of 6.0 to 9.0 mils wet/4.0 to 6.0 mils dry.
b.Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss.
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/V600, applied at the rate of 7.0 to 13.5 mils wet/5.0 to
10.0 mils dry.
c.Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 6).
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane,
B65-600/V600, applied at the rate of 4.5 to 9.0 mils wet/3.0 to
6.0 mils dry per coat.
C.Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
2.Pigmented Polyurethane System:
a.Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, as recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturer.
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Recoatable Epoxy Primer, B67, applied at
the rate of 6.0 to 9.0 mils wet/4.0 to 6.0 mils dry.
METHOD STUDIO HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
099600 - 9
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
b.Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss
(Gloss Level 6).
c.Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 6).
1)Sherwin Williams (SW), Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane,
B65-600/V600, applied at the rate of 4.5 to 9.0 mils wet/3.0 to
6.0 mils dry per coat.
END OF SECTION 099600
METHOD STUDIO SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.19 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 102113.19 - SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Solid plastic toilet compartments including the following:
a. Floor mounted overhead-braced toilet compartments.
b. Floor mounted urinal screens.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue
dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
2. ASTM B 85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings.
3. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests
for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide layout drawings and installation details with location and
type of hardware required.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color
METHOD STUDIO SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.19 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples representing
actual product, color, and patterns.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of
products specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use
under similar service conditions for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in installation of products
specified in this Section, with a minimum of 5 years experience.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Fire Resistance: Partition materials shall comply with the following
requirements, when tested in accordance with the ASTM E 84: Standard Test
Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials:
a. Class A flame spread/smoke developed rating, tested to ASTM E84.
2. Material Fire Ratings:
a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 286: Pass.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines
for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments
designated as accessible.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns,
ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field
measurements before fabrication.
B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
METHOD STUDIO SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.19 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer guarantees its plastic against breakage, corrosion, and delamination
under normal conditions for 25 years from the date of receipt by the customer. If
materials are found to be defective during that period for reasons listed above, the
materials will be replaced free of charge. (Labor not included in warranty.)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Scranton Products, which is located at: 801 E. Corey St.;
Scranton, PA 18505; Toll Free Tel: 800-445-5148; Fax: 855-376-6161;
Email:request info (info@scrantonproducts.com);
Web:http://www.scrantonproducts.com
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.2 MATERIAL
A. Plastic Panels: High density polyethylene (HDPE) suitable for exposed applications,
waterproof, non-absorbent, and graffiti-resistant textured surface;
1. Fire-resistance Rating: Class A.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6463-T5 alloy and temper.
C. Aluminum Die Castings: ASTM B85, A380 alloy.
D. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A167, Type 304.
E. Rubber: Abrasion resistant Styrene Butadiene Rubber, 65 to 80 Shore A durometer,
black.
2.3 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS AND SCREENS
A. Basis of Design: Eclipse Toilet Partitions as manufactured by and supplied by
Scranton Products.
1. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor mounted overhead-braced.
2. Urinal-Screen Style: Floor anchored.
B. Doors, Panels, and Pilaster Construction: High density polyethylene (HDPE),
fabricated from SEQ CHAPTER 1extruded polymer resins, forming single thickness
panel.
1. Waterproof and nonabsorbent, with self-lubricating surface, resistant to marks
by pens, pencils, markers, and other writing instruments.
2. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Edges: Shiplap.
C. Panel Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
METHOD STUDIO SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.19 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
D. Doors and Dividing Panels Options (final selection and approval by Owner and
Architect):
1. Standard Privacy:
a. Height: 55 inches (1397 mm) high and mounted at 14 inches (356 mm)
above the finished floor.
2. High Privacy:
a. Height: 62 inches (1575 mm) high and mounted at 8 to 14 inches (203
to 356 mm) above the finished floor.
3. Extra Privacy:
a. Height: 71-1/2 inches (1816 mm) high and mounted at 4 inches (102
mm) above the finished floor.
E. Metal Posts: 82.75 inches (2102 mm) high, heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear
anodized finish, fastened to foot with stainless steel tamper resistant screw.
F. Urinal-Screen Post: Square aluminum tube with clear anodized finish; with shoe and
sleeve cap match that on compartments.
G. Hidden Shoe (Foot): One-piece molded polyethylene invisible shoe inserted into
metal post and secured to metal post with stainless steel tamper resistant screw.
H. Headrail Cap and Corner Cap: One-piece molded polyethylene secured to metal
post with stainless steel tamper resistant screw; adjustable to level headrail to
finished floor.
I. Wall Brackets: Continuous heavy-duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish,
inserted into slotted panel and fastened to panels with stainless steel tamper
resistant screws.
1. Type: Single Ear bracket aluminum.
2. Type: Double ear bracket aluminum.
3. Options:
a. Length: 54 inches (1372 mm).
b. Length: 65 inches (1651 mm).
c. Length: 71 inches (1803 mm).
J. Headrail: Heavy duty extruded aluminum, designer anti-grip design, clear anodized
finish, fastened to headrail bracket with stainless steel tamper resistant screw and to
headrail cap or corner cap with stainless steel tamper resistant screw.
1. Headrail Brackets: Heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish,
secured to wall with stainless steel tamper screws.
K. Door Hardware:
1. Hinges:
a. Edge-mounted helix style stainless steel continuous hinge.
1) Closing degree: 5 degrees.
2) Comes to a full close on its own weight
2. Occupancy Indicator Latch and Housing:
a. Material: Satin stainless steel.
METHOD STUDIO SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.19 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
b. Occupancy indicators: Green for occupied and red not occupied.
c. Slide bolt and button.
3. Coat Hook and Door Bumper Combination:
a. Material: Chrome plated Zamak
b. Handicap Door: Equip with second door pull and door stop.
4. Door Pulls: Chrome plated Zamak
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Examine areas to receive toilet partitions, screens, and shower compartments for
correct height and spacing of anchorage/blocking and plumbing fixtures that affect
installation of partitions. Report discrepancies to the architect.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all parts, components, fasteners, and all other appurtenances as required to
install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved Shop
Drawings.
B. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level.
C. Locate bottom edge of doors and panels above finished floor as required by
regulatory accessibility requirements.
D. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not
exceed 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
E. No evidence of cutting, drilling, and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work.
F. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of imperfections.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and latches to operate correctly.
3.5 PROTECTION
METHOD STUDIO SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113.19 - 6
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 102113.19
METHOD STUDIO FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 1
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.Section Includes:
1.Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a.Portable fire extinguishers.
B.Related Requirements:
1.Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."
1.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets including,
but not limited to, the following:
a.Schedules and coordination requirements.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style,
and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-,
semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to
surrounding construction.
B.Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
C.Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D.Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed,
semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule
with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
METHOD STUDIO FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 2
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 COORDINATION
A.Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B.Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A.Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
b.JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group;
Cosmopolitan Series.
c.Larsens Manufacturing Company.
d.Potter Roemer LLC.
B.Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C.Cabinet Material: Aluminum sheet.
1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
D.Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer
edge (backbend).
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.
E.Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet.
F.Door Material: Aluminum sheet.
G.Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
H.Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I.Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for
METHOD STUDIO FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 3
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch.
2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to
open 180 degrees.
J.Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities
of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.
a.Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
1)Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2)Application Process: Silk-screened.
3)Lettering Color: Black.
4)Orientation: Vertical.
K.Materials:
1. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M) for extruded shapes and aluminum sheet, with
strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet.
a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color
densities.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
a.Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish.
3. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3,
3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).
2.2 FABRICATION
A.Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
2. Weld joints and grind smooth.
3. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
4. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
METHOD STUDIO FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 4
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
B.Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from
materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.
2. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design,
minimum 1/2 inch thick.
3. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.
4. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C.Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and
ground smooth.
2.3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from
damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
D.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they
are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where
semirecessed cabinets will be installed.
B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and
size of cabinet and trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated
or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:
1.Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.
B.Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
METHOD STUDIO FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
104413 - 5
BYUI
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER
PROJECT # 12005
16 NOVEMBER 2020
1.Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square
and plumb.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection
cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B.Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices operate properly.
C.On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior
surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D.Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored
to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or
furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E.Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 104413
ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS
REVISION CLOUD
CLOUDED AREA
DELTA MARKER
AE101.a
A1
WINDOW/CURTAIN WALL TAG
DOOR TAG
S3x
NORTH ARROW
ROOM TAG
ROOM NAME
ROOM NUMBER
?
DETAIL CALLOUT
VIEW ON SHEET
SHEET NUMBER
VIEW TITLE
VIEW NAME
DRAWING SCALE
VIEW ON SHEET
SHEET NUMBER
INTERIOR/EXTERIOR ELEVATION
VIEW ON SHEET
SHEET NUMBER
A1
AE101
SIM
BUILDING SECTION
VIEW ON SHEET
SHEET NUMBER
A1
AE101
SIM
AE101.a
A1 DETAIL
VIEW ON SHEET
SHEET NUMBER
WALL TAG
Name
Elevation LEVEL DATUM
LEVEL NAME
LEVEL ELEVATION
KEYNOTE TAG
A
B
1 2
GRID REFERENCE MARK
A1 STARTS AT LOWER LEFT CORNER
(NATIONAL CAD STANDARD); NUMBERS
ARE VERTICAL GRIDS (READ LEFT TO
RIGHT) LETTERS ARE HORIZONTAL GRIDS
(BOTTOM TO TOP) LETTERS "I" AND "O"
ARE EXCLUDED FROM GRID NAMING
CONVENTION
AE101a SHEET NUMBERING SYSTEM
DISCIPLINE
SHEET TYPE
SHEET NUMBER SEQUENCE
(CONSULTING ENGINEERS TO FOLLOW SAME)
(SEE RESPECTIVE DISCIPLINES FOR
SYMBOLS NOT DEFINED HERE)
A1
AE101
SIM
C1 10' - 0"CEILING TAG
CEILING TYPE
CEILING HEIGHT
VIEW NUMBER
A1
AE101
SIM
WALL SECTION
VIEW ON SHEET
SHEET NUMBER
BUILDING SECTION -PARTIAL
000x
A1 View Name
1/8" = 1'-0"
CURTAIN PANEL TAGA
AE101
1 Ref
1 Re
f
1 Ref
1Re
f
SHEET NUMBER (AREA PLANS)
R1
F1 FLOOR TAG
ROOF TAG
REFER TO CASEWORK DESIGN SERIES
(CDS) OF THE ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK STANDARDS (AWS) FOR A
FULL DESCRIPTION OF CASEWORK
TYPES. SEE SHEET SERIES AE900 FOR
CASEWORK DETAILS.
CASEWORK TAG
XX
FINISH SYMBOL
MATERIAL FINISH CODE
ARROWS REPRESENT
EXTENT OF SCOPE
01.01
STRUCTURE TYPE
SIZE OF STRUCTURAL LAYER (INCHES)
CONFIGURATION
SEE WALL TYPE SHEET (AE500 SERIES) FOR A
COMPLETE LIST OF WALL TYPES
CSI DIVISION (00-49) [DOT SEPARATOR)
KEYNOTE #
AREA (SF) (CODE PLANS)
OCCUPANT LOAD (CODE PLANS)
SPOT ELEVATION
SF01
101M
AWS STANDARD CASEWORK TYPE
MODIFIED CASEWORK TYPE
Room name
101
F
B
W
ROOM NAME
ROOM NUMBER
WALL FINISH
BASE FINISH
FLOOR FINISH
FINISH ROOM TAG
EARTH (existing)
02 SITE CONSTRUCTION
EARTH (backfill)
DRAINAGE FILL
CONCRETE -
CAST-IN-PLACE
03 CONCRETE
CONCRETE -
PRECAST
BRICK
04 MASONRY
CONCRETE
MASONRY UNITS
STEEL
05 METALS
ALUMINUM
06 WOODS AND PLASTICS
CONTINUOUS WOOD
INTERMITTENT WOOD/BLOCKING
SHEATHING
FINISH WOOD
HARDBOARD
PARTICLE BOARD
07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
BATT INSULATION
LOOSE FILL INSULATION
RIGID INSULATION
09 FINISHES
GYPSUM BOARD
MATERIAL LEGEND
COMPACTED FILL
FIRE SPRAY
GROUT
1. THE PROJECT MANUAL, UNDER SEPARATE COVER, IS AN INTEGRAL PART OF
THESE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS.
2. PLANS, SECTIONS, ELEVATIONS, DETAILS AND DIMENSIONS LABELED
"TYPICAL" SHALL APPLY TO ALL SITUATION OCCURRING THAT ARE THE SAME
OR SIMILAR TO THOSE SPECIFICALLY KEYED ON THE DRAWINGS.
3. ALL WORK, MATERIALS, AND METHODS SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE
CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS OF ALL GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES
HAVING JURISDICTION AT THE PROJECT LOCATION.
4. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AS
BEING NOT IN CONTRACT (N.I.C.) OR EXISTING, ALL ITEMS, MATERIALS AND
INSTALLATION OF SAME ARE PART OF THE CONTRACT AS DEFINED BY THE
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND
INSTALL ALL ACCESSORIES, COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED FOR
THE WORK DEPICTED OR SPECIFIED.
5. CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL WORK REGARDLESS OF THE
LOCATION OF THE INFORMATION ON THE DOCUMENTS.
6. KEEP SITE CLEAN AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS AND IN ORDERLY CONDITION THAT
DOES NOT DETRACT FROM THE SURROUNDING SITE AND REPAIR ANY
DAMAGE CAUSED BY WORK OF THE CONTRACT.
7. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE FACE OF METAL OR WOOD STUD FRAMED
WALLS AND TO THE FACE OF CONCRETE AND MASONRY WALLS AS SHOWN,
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
8. INSTALL SEALANT AT EXTERIOR SIDE OF ALL JOINTS, SEAMS, CONNECTIONS
OR OPENINGS WHICH WOULD ALLOW WATER OR AIR INFILTRATION EXCEPT
AS NOTED OTHERWISE. SEALANT COLOR TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE.
COLOR REQUIRES ARCHITECTS APPROVAL.
9. DOOR OPENINGS IN FRAME CONSTRUCTION WHICH ARE NOT DIMENSIONED
ARE EITHER CENTERED IN THE WALL, FACE OF JAMB OR LOCATED 4" FROM
THE FACE OF STUD TO THE FINISHED JAMB.
10. ALL SPECIAL ACCESSIBLE FACILITIES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH APPROVED
SIGNAGE.
11. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCING A WEATHER TIGHT
BUILDING, DETAILS AND OMISSIONS TO DRAWINGS NOTWITHSTANDING. ALL
DRAWING CONFLICTS WHICH MAY NOT ALLOW A WEATHERTIGHT CONDITION
SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT.
12. DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN ACTUAL CONDITIONS AND PLANS SHALL BE
BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL
SUBMIT SPECIFIC DISCREPANCIES FOR ARCHITECT REVIEW.
13. PROVIDE FULL METAL BACKING PLATE (16 GAUGE X 6" HIGH SECURED TO 3
STUDS MIN.) OR WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO SECURELY ANCHOR ALL
WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT (CABINETS, TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES,
HARDWARE, ETC.). BLOCKING SHALL PROVIDE A RIGID CONNECTION CAPABLE
OF SUPPORTING DESIGN LOADS. PROVIDE A 16 GAUGE X 6" STL. STUD/TRACK
SECURED TO 2 STUDS TO SECURELY SUPPORT ALL WALL STOPS (DOOR
BUMPER).
14. COORDINATE WITH ALL TRADES, SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS
FOR MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, EQUIPMENT
PADS OR BASES, AS WELL AS ELECTRIC POWER, WATER, AND DRAIN
INSTALLATIONS, BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL
PROVIDE COORDINATION DRAWINGS FOR PROPER PLACEMENT OF ALL
TRADES' WORK. ANY CONCERNS, SPACE LIMITATIONS OR STRUCTURAL
CONFLICTS, SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT. A
REASONABLE RESPONSE TIME SHALL BE ALLOWED AS NOTED IN THE
SPECIFICATIONS.
15. ALL FLOOR OR WALL OPENINGS REQUIRED FOR PIPES, DUCTS,
CONDUITS,ETC. SHALL BE SEALED IN AN APPROVED MANNER.
16. FIRE SPRINKLER DESIGN TO BE DONE BY A CERTIFIED SUB-CONTRACTOR AND
WILL REQUIRE APPROVALS BY THE CITY AND STATE FIRE MARSHAL.
APPROVALS BY THE FIRE MARSHAL ARE TO BE OBTAINED BY THE
CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL TO ARCHITECT. SUBMITTAL TO THE
ARCHITECT ALSO INDICATES THAT THE CONTRACTOR HAS REVIEWED AND
COORDINATED FIRE-SPRINKLER PIPING LOCATIONS WITH ALL TRADES.
17. ROOMS ENCLOSED WITH RATED WALLS REQUIRE RATED DOORS. ANY DUCTS
PASSING THROUGH WALLS REQUIRE FIRE DAMPERS AND OR FIRE/SMOKE
DAMPERS. ANY CONDUIT OR PIPING REQUIRES RATED SEALANT AT JOINTS.
18. GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES GOVERN TYPICAL CONDITIONS WHETHER OR
NOT SPECIFICALLY DETAILED OR NOTED.
19. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO COORDINATE AND LOCATE
ELECTRICAL, DATA AND PHONE RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, ETC. TO AVOID
CASEWORK, DOORS, ETC.
20. THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF THE
PROJECT IN TERMS OF THE ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DESIGN
CONCEPT. THE DIMENSIONS OF THE BUILDING, THE TYPE OF STRUCTURAL,
MECHANICAL, ELECTICAL AND UTILITY SYSTEMS AND MAJOR ARCHITECTURAL
ELEMENTS OF CONSTRUCTION AS "SCOPE" DOCUMENTS.
21. THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS DO NOT NECESSARILY INDICATE OR
DESCRIBE ALL WORK REQUIRED FOR THE FULL PERFORMANCE AND
COMPLETION OF THE WORK. CONTRACTS SHALL BE LET ON THE BASIS OF
SUCH DOCUMENTS, WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT THE CONTRACTOR IS
TO FURNISH ALL ITEMS REQUIRED FOR PROPER COMPLETION OF THE WORK
WITH OUT ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT PRICE. IT IS INTENDED THAT THE
WORK TO BE OF SOUND AND QUALITY CONSTRUCTION AND THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE INCLUSION OF
ADEQUATE AMOUNTS TO COVER INSTALLATION OF ALL ITEMS INDICATED,
DESCRIBED OR REASONABLY IMPLIED.
22. OWNER WILL PROVIDE ANY NEEDED STUDY AND REMOVAL OF ASBESTOUS
PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION.
23. OWNER WILL REMOVE ALL FURNITURE, SHELVING AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO
CONSTRUCTION.
MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL NOTES
•FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM PLANS
•FIRE ALARM PLANS
DEFERRED ITEMS
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
GI002
General
Information
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
ABBREVIATION SCHEDULE
IE INVERT ELEVATION
INSUL INSULATION
INT INTERIOR
INTX INTERSECTION
INV INVERT
J
JB JUNCTION BOX
JCT JUNCTION
JST JOIST
JT JOINT
L
L ANGLE
L LENGTH
LC LENGTH OF CURVE
LDC LEAD COVERED
LL LIVE LOAD
LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL
LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL
LT LIGHT
M
MAS MASONRY
MATL MATERIAL
MAX MAXIMUM
MECH MECHANICAL
MET METAL
MFR MANUFACTURER
MH MANHOLE
MIN MINIMUM
MISC MISCELLANEOUS
MO MASONRY OPENING
MTD MOUNTED
MTG MOUNTING
MULL MULLION
MWP MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
N
N NORTH
NA NOT APPLICABLE
NE NORTHEAST
NEC NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE
NEUT NEUTRAL
NIC NOT IN CONTRACT
NO NUMBER
NOM NOMINAL
NTS NOT TO SCALE
NW NIORTHWEST
O
OA OUTSIDE AIR
OA OUTSIDE AIR
OC ON CENTER
OFCI OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED
OFOI OWNER FURNISHED, OWNER INSTALLED
OPP OPPOSITE
OVHD OVERHEAD
P
PI POINT IF INTERSECTION
PL PLATE
PLAS PLASTER
PLYWD PLYWOOD
PNL PANEL
PNT PAINT
PRELIM PRELIMINARY
PRESS PRESSURE
PRIM PRIMARY
PRTN PARTITION
PT POINT, POINT OF TANGENT
Q
QT QUARRY TILE
R
R RADIUS
RA RETURN AIR
RB RESILIENT VINYL BASE
RCP REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
RD ROOF DRAIN
RECP RECEPTACLE
REINF REINFORCEMENT
REQD REQUIRED
REV REVISION
RF ROOF
RFLCP REFLECTIVE CEILING PLAN
RM ROOM
RVT RESILIENT VINYL TILE
S
S SOUTH
SCH SCHEDULE
SD STORM DRAIN
SE SOUTHEAST
SECT SECTION
SHT SHEET
SIM SIMILIAR
SL SLOPE
SPEC SPECIFICATION
SQ SQUARE
STL STEEL
SUSP SUSPENDED
T
T TOP
T&B TOP AND BOTTOM
TEL TELEPHONE
TEMP TEMPORARY
TERM TERMINAL
THK THICK/THICKNESS
THRSLD THRESHOLD
TO TOP OF
TOS TOP OF STEEL, TOP OF SLAB
TOW TOP OF WALL
TYP TYPICAL
U
UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
V
VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
VENT VENTILIATING
VERT VERTICAL
VEST VESTIBULE
VWC VINYL WALL COVERING
W
W WIDTH, WEST
W/ WITH
W/O WITHOUT
WC WATER CLOSET
WD WIDTH
WT WEIGHT
WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC
X
X TRANSFORMER
ABBREVIATION SCHEDULE
0
# NUMBER OR POUND
& AND
2:1 SL 2 HORIZONTAL TO 1 VERTICAL SLOPE
@ AT
[ CHANNEL
± PLUS MINUS
≤ LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO
≥ GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO
A
AB ANCHOR BOLT
AC APSHALTIC CONCRETE
ACST ACOUSTIC
AD AREA DRAIN
ADJ ADJUSTABLE
AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR
AL ALUMINUM
ALT ALTERNATE
ARCH ARCHITECTURAL, ARCHITECT, ARCHITECTURE
ASPH ASPHALT
B
B BASELINE
B BOTTOM
BEJ BRICK EXPANSION JOINT
BLDG BUILDING
BLK BLOCK
BM BEAM
BO BOARD
BRG BEARING
BSMT BASEMENT
C
C&G CURB & GUTTER
CAP CAPACITY
CEM CEMENT
CG CORNER GUARD
CIP CAST IN PLACE, CAST IRON PIPE
CIR CIRCULATING
CJ CONTROL JOINT
CL CENTERLINE
CL CENTERLINE
CLG CEILING
CLR CLEAR
CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
COL COLUMN
CONC CONCRETE
CONN CONNECTION
CONST CONSTRUCTION
CONT CONTINUOUS
CPT CARPET
CSK COUNTERSUNK
CT CERAMIC TILE
CTR CENTER
D
D DEPTH
DET DETAIL
DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN
DIA DIAMETER
DIM DIMENSION
DN DOWN
DS DOWNSPOUT
DWG DRAWING
E
E EAST
E/P EDGE OF PAVEMENT
EA EACH
EL ELEVATION
ELECT ELECTRICAL
ELEV ELEVATOR
EMER EMERGENCY
EQ EQUAL
EQUIP EQUIPMENT
EW EACH WAY
EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
EXIST EXISTING
EXP EXPANSION
EXP JT EXPANSION JOINT
EXT EXTERIOR
F
F.V. FIELD VERIFY
FD FLOOR DRAIN
FDN FOUNDATION
FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
FFE FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION
FH FIRE HYDRANT
FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET
FIN FINISH
FLR FLOOR
FR FRAME
FTG FOOTING
FXTR FIXTURE
G
G GROUND
GA GA
GALV GALVANIZED
GL GLASS
GR GRADE
GRD GROUND
GWB GYPSUM WALL BOARD
H
HB HOSE BIBB
HC HANDICAPPED
HDW HARDWARE
HGT HEIGHT
HORZ HORIZONTAL
HR HOUR
HW HOT WATER
I
ID INSIDE DIAMETER
DRAWING INDEX
AI101c Unnamed
GENERAL
GI001 Cover Sheet
GI002 General Information
GI003 ADA Building Blocks
GI004 Signage and Blocking Details
GI101 Code Analysis & Code Plan Level 01
GI102 Code Plan Mezzanine Level
GI103 Phasing Plan
GI110 UL Listings
CIVIL
-------------- CIVIL DRAWIINGS WILL BE SUBMITTED NOVEMBER 6, 2020 --------------
ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION
AD100 Site Demolition Plan
AD101 Demolition Plan - Level 1
AD102 Demolition Plan - Mezzanine
AD131 Reflected Ceiling Demolition Plan - Level 1
AD132 Reflected Ceiling Demolition Plan - Mezzanine
AD141 Roof Demolition Plan
ARCHITECTURAL SITE
AS101 Architectural Site Plan
ARCHITECTURAL
AE111 Slab Edge Plan
AE312 Wall Sections
AE401 Enlarged Plans & Interior Elevations
AE411 Stair Plans & Sections
AE423 Interior Elevations
AE424 Interior Elevation
AE431 Enlarged Ceiling Plans
AE511 Wall Section Details
AE522 General Construction Details
AE531 Door & Window Details
AE571 Interior Details
AE572 Interior Details
AE901 Casework Details
AE100 Floor Plan - Level 00 & Tunnels
AE101 Floor Plan - Level 1
AE102 Floor Plan - Mezzanine
AE121 Wall Type and Dim Plan - Level 1
AE122 Wall Type and Dim Plan - Mezzanine
AE131 Reflected Ceiling Plan - Level 1
AE132 Reflected Ceiling Plan - Mezzanine
AE141 Roof Plan
AE201 Exterior Elevations
AE301 Building Sections
AE311 Wall Sections
AE421 Interior Elevations
AE422 Interior Elevations
AE501 Wall Types & Horizontal Assemblies
AE521 General Construction Details
AE601 Door Schedule/ Types & Window Types
ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES
AF101 Finish Plan - Level 1
AF102 Finish Plan - Mezzanine
AF601 Finish, Accessory, Appliance, & Transition Schedule
ARCHITECTURAL INTERIORS
AI101a Interior Furnishings & Equipment
AI101b Interior Furnishings & Equipment
MECHANICAL
M101 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN
M102 MEZZANINE MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN
M201 MECHANICAL SECTIONS
M301 MECHANICAL DETAILS
M302 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
MD100 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN
PLUMBING
P100 FOUNDATION MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLAN
P101 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN
P201 LARGE SCALE PUMBING PLANS
P301 PLUMBING DETAILS
P302 PLUMBING DETAILS AND SCHEDULES
PD100 PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN
ELECTRICAL
EG000 Electrical Symbols, Details & Site Plan
ED101 Level 1 - Existing Electrical Plan
ED102 Level 2 & Roof - Existing Electrical Plan
ED131 Level 1 - Existing Lighting Plan
ED132 Level 2 - Existing Lighting Plan
EE101a Level 1 - Power/Data Plan - Area 'A'
EE101b Level 1 - Power/Data Plan - Area 'B'
EE102 Level 2 & Roof - Electrical Plan
EE131 Level 1 - Lighting Plan
EE132 Level 2 - Lighting Plan
EF101 Level 1 - Fire Alarm Plan
EE601 Power Riser Diagrams & Schedules
EE602 Electrical Schedules
EE603 Electrical Details
SE-001 GENERAL NOTES
SE-002 SCHEDULES CONCRETE/STEEL
SE-003 SCHEDULES MASONRY
SE-004 BEARING STUD WALL SCHEDULES
SE-101 FOUNDATION PLAN
SE-111 LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN
SE-121 HIGH ROOF FRAMING PLAN
SE-501 FOUNDATION DETAILS
SE-511 FRAMING DETAILS
SE-521 FRAMING DETAILS
STRUCTURAL
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3
3
1" RAISED WHITE
LETTERS, ON RED
BACKGROUND
SANDBLASTED, CLEAR
ANODIZED ALUMINUM
SIGN W/ 4 EPOXY
PIN ANCHORS
FDC SIGN
FIRE
DEPARTMENT
CONNECTION
IN CASE OF
FIRE
DO NOT USE ELEVATORS
USE STAIRWAYS
ELEVATOR SIGN
- SETON STYLE NO. 25639 OR EQ.
2"
LETTERS
1" LETTERS,
TYP. UNO
1" LETTERS,
TYP. UNO
MAXIMUM
OCCUPANCY
NOT TO EXCEED
370 PERSONS
OCCUPANT LOAD SIGN
- SETON STYLE NO. 43355 OR EQ.
STAIR
WOMEN
MEN
ROOM NAME
315
TYPE A.1
TYPE A.2
TYPE A.3
TYPE B
TYPE C
PICTOGRAMS (SYMBOL)
RAISED 1/32" OFF FACE, TYP.
3/4" HIGH LETTERING,
RAISED 1/32", TYP.
GRADE 2 BRAILLE
APPLIED TO FACE, TYP.
315
SANDBLASTED, CLEAR
ANODIZED
ALUMINUM PANEL
3/4" HIGH LETTERING,
RAISED 1/32", TYP.
GRADE 2 BRAILLE
APPLIED TO FACE, TYP.
SANDBLASTED, CLEAR
ANODIZED
ALUMINUM PANEL
SANDBLASTED, CLEAR
ANODIZED
ALUMINUM PANEL
SANDBLASTED, CLEAR
ANODIZED
ALUMINUM PANEL
SANDBLASTED, CLEAR
ANODIZED
ALUMINUM PANEL
TRANSPARENT, MOLDED
POLYCARBONATE
UPDATEABLE PANEL
3/4" HIGH LETTERING,
RAISED 1/32", TYP.
GRADE 2 BRAILLE
APPLIED TO FACE, TYP.
SIGNAGE LEGEND
3/4" HIGH LETTERING,
RAISED 1/32", TYP.
GRADE 2 BRAILLE
APPLIED TO FACE, TYP.
PICTOGRAMS (SYMBOL)
RAISED 1/32" OFF FACE, TYP.
PICTOGRAM (SYMBOL)
RAISED 1/32" OFF FACE, TYP.
TYPE D - EXTERIOR DOOR SIGNAGE
ROOM NAME
315
SANDBLASTED, CLEAR
ANODIZED
ALUMINUM PANEL
3/4" HIGH LETTERING,
RAISED 1/32", TYP.
TYPE E
TYPE F
TYPE G
UNISEX
TYPE A.4 SANDBLASTED, CLEAR
ANODIZED
ALUMINUM PANEL
3/4" HIGH LETTERING,
RAISED 1/32", TYP.
GRADE 2 BRAILLE
APPLIED TO FACE, TYP.
PICTOGRAMS (SYMBOL)
RAISED 1/32" OFF FACE, TYP.
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
8
1
/
2
"
2
1
/
2
"
8
1
/
2
"
6"
6"
2
1
/
2
"
6
"
2
1
/
2
"
6
"
9"
9"
5"
H
I
G
H
1'-0" WIDE
8
1
/
2
"
6"
2
1
/
2
"
6
"
6" WIDE
7"
H
I
G
H
1'-0" WIDE
8 1
/
2
"
H
I
G
H
SIGN
60
"
M
A
X
48
"
M
I
N
ACTIVE LEAF INACTIVE LEAF ACTIVE LEAF ACTIVE LEAF
SIGN HEIGHT ABOVE THE FLOOR. TACTILE CHARACTERS
SHALL BE 48 INCHES MINIMUM ABOVE THE FLOOR.
MEASURED TO THE BASELINE OF THE LOWEST TACTILE
CHARACTER AND 60 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE
FLOOR. MEASURED TO THE BASELINE OF THE HIGHEST
TACTILE CHARACTER. (ICC/ANSI 703.3.10)
SIGN LOCATION. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED
AT A DOOR. THE SIGN SHALL BE ALONGSIDE THE
DOOR AT THE LATCH SIDE. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS
PROVIDED AT DOUBLE DOORS WITH ONE ACTIVE LEAF.
THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE INACTIVE LEAF.
WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED AT DOUBLE
DOORS WITH TWO ACTIVE LEAVES. THE SIGN SHALL
BE TO THE RIGHT OF THE RIGHT HAND DOOR. WHERE
THERE IS NO WALL SPACE ON THE LATCH SIDE OF A
SINGLE DOOR, OR TO THE RIGHT SIDE OF DOUBLE
DOORS. SIGNS SHALL BE ON THE NEAREST ADJACENT
WALL. SIGNS SHALL BE ON THE NEAREST SHALL BE
LOCATED SO THAT A CLEAR FLOOR AREA 18 INCHES
MINIMUM BUY 18 INCHES MINIMUM, CENTERED ON THE
TACTILE CHARACTERS, IS PROVIDED BEYOND THE ARC
OF THE ANY DOOR SWING BETWEEN THE CLOSED
POSITION AND 45 DEGREE OPEN POSITION. (ICC/ANSI
703.311)
SIGNAGE LOCATIONS
BRAILLE AREA, TYP
2"
OR AS REQ'D
8" ±
NOTE:
-ROOM SIGNAGE AND WAYFINDING BY OWNER
-CHARACTER SIZE AND BRAILLE
LOCATION PER ANSI A117.1, CH. 7
EXIT SIGN
WALL CONSTRUCTION
ACCESSORY
MOUNTED OVER
FINISHED WALL
GYPSUM BOARD
NOTE:
1. TYPICAL BLOCKING
REQUIRED BEHIND
WALL MOUNTED
ACCESSORIES AND
EQUIPMENT
(OPTION 1) 20 GA x 6"
FLAT STEEL BLOCKING.
ATTACH W SELF TAPPING
PAN HEAD SCREWS
(OPTION 3) SISTER
16 GA. STL. STUD
ATTACH FIXTURE TO
SISTER STUD W/
SELF TAPPING
SCREWS OR
ANCHORS
(OPTION 2) INLAID
FIRE RETARDANT
WOOD BLOCKING
(COMPLY WITH
IBC 2006 2303.2)
STUDS SHOWN @ 16" O.C. SEE WALL TYPES
FOUNTAIN
20 GA x 6" FLAT
STEEL
BLOCKING
20 GA x 6" FLAT
STEEL
BLOCKING
16 GA SUPPORT
STUD
FOR STL. ANGLE
BRACING
WATER
COOLER/
FOUNTAIN
PROVIDE FULL VERTICAL
BLOCKING AT
CENTERLINE OF URINAL
NAPKIN
TAMPON
HAND DRYER
20 GA x 6" FLAT
STEEL
BLOCKING
TYPICAL BLOCKING DETAILS
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
11
'
-
0
"
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
T Y P .
3/8
"
1' - 0"
9 1/2"
TY
P
.
1 1
/
2
"
BLACK VINYL DIRECTLY
ADHERED TO WALL
ALIGN EDGE OF
SIGNAGE W/ EDGE OF
WALL
FONT: ARAL
5' - 7 1/2"
9"
8"
9"
6"
5 1/2"3' - 6"
2' - 0 1/2"5 1/2"3' - 2"
3/4" ACRYLIC PAINTED W/ PNT-03; RE:
FINISH SCHEDULE. SEE INTERIOR
ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS
DIRECTLY ADHERED TO WALL
TYP.
1/2"
FONT: ARIAL BOLD & ARIAL OUTLINED
AL
I
G
N
W
I
T
H
E
D
G
E
O
F
M
I
L
L
W
O
R
K
7'
-
8
"
8"
3/4" ACRYLIC PAINTED W/
PNT-03; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE. SEE INTERIOR
ELEVATIONS FOR
LOCATIONS.
DIRECTLY ADHERED TO
WALL
4"
FONT: ARIAL BOLD
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
GI004
Signage and
Blocking
Details
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
3/4" = 1'-0"D5 Student Collaboration Signage Detail
3/4" = 1'-0"D2 Student Collaboration Signage Detail 2
3/4" = 1'-0"D4 Student Collaboration Signage - Student Work
* *NOTE: ALL ROOM AND WAYFINIDING SIGNAGE IS BY OWNER. PROVIDE BRANDING SIGNAGE
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS TO OWNER (UNIVERSITY COMMUNICATIONS) AND ARCHITECT
FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO PURCHASING AND INSTALLATION
* *NOTE: ALL ROOM AND WAYFINIDING SIGNAGE IS BY OWNER.
PROVIDE BRANDING SIGNAGE SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
TO OWNER (UNIVERSITY COMMUNICATIONS) AND ARCHITECT FOR
APPROVAL PRIOR TO PURCHASING AND INSTALLATION
* *NOTE: ALL ROOM AND WAYFINIDING SIGNAGE IS BY OWNER.
PROVIDE BRANDING SIGNAGE SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
TO OWNER (UNIVERSITY COMMUNICATIONS) AND ARCHITECT FOR
APPROVAL PRIOR TO PURCHASING AND INSTALLATION
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3 3
UP
UP
UP
REF.
RE
F
.
CR
CODE ANALYSIS
APPLICABLE CODES
International Building Code:
International Mechanical Code:
International Plumbing Code:
International Fire Code:
International Energy:
Conservation Code
National Electrical Code:
Uniform Code for Building:
Conservation
ADA Accessibility Guidelines:
A.Occupancy and Group:
Change in Use:YES NO Mixed Occupancy: YES NO
Special Use and Occupancy (i.e. High Rise, Covered Mall):
B.Seismic Design Category:Design Wind Speed:
C.Type of Construction (circle one):
D.Fire Resistance Rating -Requirements for the Exterior Walls based on the fire separation distance (in hours):
North: East: South: West:
E.Mixed Occupancies:Non-separated Uses:
F.Sprinklers:
Required:Provided:Type of Sprinkler System:
G.Number of Stories:Building Height:
H.Actual Area per Floor (square feet):
J.Tabular Area:
K.Area Modifications -
a)Single Occupancy (multistory buildings):
Aa = [At + (NS x If)] x Sa If = [F/P -0.25] W/30
b)Mixed Occupancy (multistory buildings):
Aa = [At + (NS x If)]If = [F/P -0.25] W/30
c)Sum of the Ratio Calculation for Mixed Occupancies
Actual Area/Allowable Area ≤1
d)Total Allowable Area for:
1)One Story:
2)Two Story: Aa(2)
2)Three Story: Aa(3)
e)Unlimited Area Building -No Code Section:
L.Fire Resistance Rating Requirements for Building Elements (hours) -
M.Design Occupant Load:
Exit Width Required:
Exit Width Provided:
N.Minimum Number of Plumbing Fixtures (see tables within code plans for calculations and counts based on
Occupancy Use Classification).
FOOTNOTES:
1)In case of conflict with the U.S. Department of Justice Federal Registers Parts I through V -ADA Guidelines and
specific reference to the International Building Code Accessibility Chapters, the more restrictive requirement shall
govern.
2)Additional Code Information shall be provided at the discretion of the Building Official for Complex Buildings,
including, but not limited to -
a.High Rise Requirements
b.Atriums
c.Performance Base Criteria
d.Means or Egress Criteria
e.Fire Assembly Locator Sheet
f.Exterior and Interior Accessibility Route
g.Fire Stopping, including tested design number
h.Fire Penetration Details
3)See Code Plan sheets for Additional information.
I
A
I
B
II
A
II
B
III
A
III
B
IV
A
IV
B
V
A
V
B
2018
2017
2015
2015
2015
2017
A117.1.2009
C 112 mph
0 0 0 0
0 SF / 0 SF =
560
SEE CODE PLAN
SEE CODE PLAN
1 21' -4"
25000
ELEMENT HOURS ASSEMBLY
LISTING
Primary Structural Frame
Bearing Walls -Exterior
Bearing Walls -Interior
Nonbearing Walls/Partitions -Interior
Nonbearing Walls/Partitions -Exterior
Floor construction and associated secondary members
Roof construction and associated secondary members
Exterior Doors & Windows
Shaft Enclosures
Fire Walls
Fire Partitions
Smoke Partitions
Fire Barriers
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A N/A
X X
NO
Yes Yes NFPA 13
B, F-1 B, F-1
31,220 sf
N/A EXISTING TO
REMAIN
ENGINES LAB
143
1170 SF / 24 OCC
AUTO STORAGE
142
153 SF / 1 OCC
CE STORAGE
140
421 SF / 2 OCC
AUTOMOTIVE SHOP
138
12140 SF / 243 OCC
HIGH BAY SHOP
137
4039 SF / 81 OCC
CM / CE LAB
132
2446 SF / 49 OCC
VESTIBULE
101
AUTO TOOL ROOM
138B
572 SF / 12 OCC
BREAK ROOM
130
123 SF / 9 OCC
OFFICE
129
121 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
128
120 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
127
120 SF / 1 OCC
FIRE RISER
132B
28 SF / 1 OCC
CURING CLOSET
137B
80 SF / 2 OCC
CM/CE TOOL ROOM
132A
216 SF / 5 OCC
STUDENT
COLLABORATION
136
594 SF / 41 OCC
I.T.
135
85 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
133
122 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
134
121 SF / 1 OCC
CUSTODIAL
138A
98 SF / 2 OCC
MECH
141
121 SF / 1 OCC
WOMEN'S
117
MEN'S
115
JANITOR
116
50 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
121
120 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
124
119 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
122
180 SF / 2 OCC
OFFICE
123
129 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
119
120 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
120
120 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
125
120 SF / 1 OCC
SEATING
126
60 SF / 4 OCC
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
109
128 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
108
125 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
107
125 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
106
125 SF / 1 OCC
CONFRENCE ROOM
(N.I.C.)
114
367 SF / 25 OCC
RECEPTION
102
170 SF / 2 OCC
OFFICE
104
117 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
105
125 SF / 1 OCC
OFFICE
112
300 SF / 4 OCCOFFICE
110
157 SF / 2 OCC
OPEN OFFICE
111
704 SF / 5 OCC
CONCRETE TOOLS
137A
112 SF / 3 OCC
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
28"
36"
140
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
29.8"
36"
149
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
18.4"
72"
92
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
9.2"
36"
46
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
5.6"
36"
28
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
5.4"
27
30" X 48" EXTERIOR
AREA FOR
ASSISTED RESCUE
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
15.4"
36"
77
168'-0" TD
12
1
'
-0"
T
D
91
'
-0"
C
P
E
122'-0" TD
90'-0" TD30'-0" CPE
CM TOOL STORAGE
137C
160 SF / 4 OCC
28'-0" CPE
84'-0" CPE
199'-0" TD
77'-0" CPE
80'-0" TD75'-0" TD
50'-0" CPE
87
'
-0"
C
P
E
CORRIDOR
131
CORRIDOR
118
CORRIDOR
103
SOILS STORAGE
AND COMPACTION
144
442 SF / 2 OCC
TOOL BOX
STORAGE
138C
172 SF / 4 OCC
BREAK ROOM
111B
134 SF / 9 OCC
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
113
129 SF / 1 OCC
VESTIBULE (N.I.C.)
111A
245'-0" TD
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
0.3"
44"
1
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
0.6"
36"
2
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
0.9"
36"
3
96
'
-0"
T
D
EXISTING SEMI-RECESSED
CABINET W/ FIRE EXTINGUISHER
EXISTING SEMI-RECESSED
CABINET W/ FIRE EXTINGUISHER
FE2
FE1
FE1
FE1
FE2
FE2
FE
1
FE
1
EXISTING SEMI-RECESSED
CABINET W/ FIRE EXTINGUISHER
125' - 8 1/2"
103' - 6 3/4" >1/3rd DIAGONAL DISTANCE
5 5' - 3 1/2" >1 /3 rd DI AG O N A L D ISTANCE
7 1 ' - 3 3 /8 "
7 6 ' - 8 "
64' - 2 7/8" >1/3rd DIAGONAL DISTANCE
212' - 4 3/8"
152' - 8 5/8" >1/3rd DIAGONAL DISTANCE
FE2
3
3
3
3
3
FE2
GRAPHIC LEGEND
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
PATH OF EGRESS
FE1FIRE EXTINGUISHER IN SEMI-RECESSED
CABINET
FE
2FIRE EXTINGUISHER SURFACE MOUNTED
ON WALL HOOK
COMMON PATH OF EGRESS (CPE)
TRAVEL DISTANCE (TD)
POINT AT WHICH A CHOICE OF 2
EXITS BECOMES AVAILABLE
ALLOWABLE DISTANCE = 100'-0"
ALLOWABLE EXIT DISTANCE (F-1 & B) = 250'-0"
TOTAL USED DISTANCE = 91'-0"
TOTAL USED EXIT DISTANCE = 245'-0"
as per 2018 IBC Table 1017.2
as per 2018 IBC Table 1006.2.1
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
2"
DOOR
36"
10
EXIT WIDTH TAG
REQUIRED AND PROVIDED DOOR
OPENING SIZE (IN INCHES) BASED OFF
NUMBER OF EXITING OCCUPANTS
as per 2018 IBC Section 1005.3.2
OCC.
Req.
Prov.
3"
STAIR
60"
10
REQUIRED AND PROVIDED STAIR
OPENING SIZE (IN INCHES) BASED OFF
NUMBER OF EXITING OCCUPANTS
as per 2018 IBC Section 1005.3.1
GENERAL NOTE: SEE SERIES AE500 SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL
WALL TYPES
FIRE BARRIER RATING
1 HOUR RATED WALL FIRE BARRIER, UL263
2 HOUR RATED WALL FIRE BARRIER, UL ####
Occupancy Group # of Occupants W.C.s Urinals Lavs.Drinking
Fountains Showers Serv. Sinks
F
B
438
127
Totals
Req'd:
Prov:
M
F
M
F
M = 219
F = 219
M = 63.5
F = 63.5
2.19
2.19
2.27
2.27
4.46
4.46
3
6
0
-
0
-
0
-
3*
-
*Urinals may be substituted for up to 67% of the required water closets in assembly and educational occupancies, and may be
substituted for up to 50% of the required water closets in all other occupancies. (Ch 424.2 International Plumbing Code)
1.59
2.19
1.59
2.19
3.78
3.78
6
6
2
1.09
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Plumbing Fixture Counts
(34 tot.)
2 1
1
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
GI101
Code
Analysis &
Code Plan
Level 01
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
3/32" = 1'-0"A1 Level 01 Code Plan
OCCUPANT LOAD SCHEDULE BY ROOM LEVEL 01
Room
#Room Name Function of Space
Area Per
Occupant
# of
Occupants
Occupancy Use &
Classification
126 SEATING Assembly without fixed seats - Unconcentrated (tables and chairs) 15 SF 4 Group B
127 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
128 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
129 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
130 BREAK ROOM Assembly without fixed seats - Unconcentrated (tables and chairs) 15 SF 9 Group B
131 CORRIDOR Circulation 0 SF 0 Group B
132 CM / CE LAB Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 49 Group F
132A CM/CE TOOL ROOM Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 5 Group F
132B FIRE RISER Accessory Storage Areas, Mechanical Equipment Room 300 SF 1 Group B
133 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
134 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
135 I.T.Accessory Storage Areas, Mechanical Equipment Room 300 SF 1 Group B
136 STUDENT COLLABORATION Assembly without fixed seats - Unconcentrated (tables and chairs) 15 SF 41 Group B
137 HIGH BAY SHOP Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 81 Group F
137A CONCRETE TOOLS Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 3 Group F
137B CURING CLOSET Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 2 Group F
137C CM TOOL STORAGE Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 4 Group F
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 243 Group F
138A CUSTODIAL Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 2 Group F
138B AUTO TOOL ROOM Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 12 Group F
138C TOOL BOX STORAGE Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 4 Group F
139 CORRIDOR Circulation 0 SF 0 Group B
140 CE STORAGE Accessory Storage Areas, Mechanical Equipment Room 300 SF 2 Group F
141 MECH Accessory Storage Areas, Mechanical Equipment Room 300 SF 1 Group F
142 AUTO STORAGE Accessory Storage Areas, Mechanical Equipment Room 300 SF 1 Group F
143 ENGINES LAB Educational - Shops and other Vocational room areas 50 SF 24 Group F
144 SOILS STORAGE AND COMPACTION Accessory Storage Areas, Mechanical Equipment Room 300 SF 2 Group F
Level 1 559
OCCUPANT LOAD SCHEDULE BY ROOM LEVEL 01
Room
#Room Name Function of Space
Area Per
Occupant
# of
Occupants
Occupancy Use &
Classification
Level 1
101 VESTIBULE Circulation 0 SF 0 Group B
102 RECEPTION Business Areas 150 SF 2 Group B
103 CORRIDOR Circulation 0 SF 0 Group B
104 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
105 OFFICE (N.I.C.) Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
106 OFFICE (N.I.C.) Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
107 OFFICE (N.I.C.) Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
108 OFFICE (N.I.C.) Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
109 OFFICE (N.I.C.) Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
110 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 2 Group B
111 OPEN OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 5 Group B
111A VESTIBULE (N.I.C.) Circulation 0 SF 0 Group B
111B BREAK ROOM Assembly without fixed seats - Unconcentrated (tables and chairs) 15 SF 9 Group B
112 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 4 Group B
113 OFFICE (N.I.C.) Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
114 CONFRENCE ROOM (N.I.C.) Assembly without fixed seats - Unconcentrated (tables and chairs) 15 SF 25 Group B
115 MEN'S Restrooms / Mothers Room 0 SF 0 Group B
116 JANITOR Accessory Storage Areas, Mechanical Equipment Room 300 SF 1 Group B
117 WOMEN'S Restrooms / Mothers Room 0 SF 0 Group B
118 CORRIDOR Circulation 0 SF 0 Group B
119 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
120 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
121 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
122 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 2 Group B
123 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
124 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
125 OFFICE Business Areas 150 SF 1 Group B
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
(E)
(E)
(E)
REF.
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
BB
CC
1
1
8
8
AA
DD
EE
45
'
-
0
"
32
'
-
0
"
36
'
-
0
"
40
'
-
0
"
33' - 0"28' - 0"28' - 0"32' - 0"28' - 0"28' - 0"33' - 0"
24' - 0"
02.0102.01
02.03
02.04
02.05
02.0602.06
02.0702.07
02.07
02.07
02.08
02.0802.08
02.08
02.15
02.15
02.15
02.16
02.16 02.15 02.1702.17
02.1802.18
02.15
02.15
02.15
02.0902.09
02.19
02.20 02.20
02.20
02.24
02.1502.15
02.15
02.1602.16
02.25
02.23
02.15
02.15
02.1502.15
02.15
02.1502.1502.1502.15
02.15
02.15
02.1702.1702.26
02.26
02.07
02.07
02.08
02.2602.26
02.2602.26
02.2602.26
02.27
02.05
02.16
02.26
02.26
02.2702.27
TYP.
02.27
TYP.
02.27
TYP.
02.27
TYP.
02.27
02.1502.15
02.17
02.27
02.27
02.15
02.26
02.15
02.26
02.15 02.26
02.17
02.2602.26
02.27
02.2702.27
TYP.TYP.
02.27
02.1502.15
02.28 02.2802.28
02.26
02.26
02.26
02.15
02.15
02.15
02.26
02.26 02.26
02.15
02.17
02.1702.17
02.29
02.1502.15
02.2602.2602.2602.26
02.2602.2602.2602.26
02.2602.2602.26
02.1502.1502.15
02.1502.15
02.28
02.2602.26
02.27
02.2602.2602.2602.28
02.15
02.1502.15
02.2602.26
02.1502.15
02.26
02.2602.26
02.26
02.05
02.16
02.15
02.1502.1502.15
02.26
02.26
02.26
02.28
02.1502.15
02.28
02.26
02.2602.26
02.15
02.2602.26
02.2602.26
02.27
TYP.
02.16
02.30
02.2602.26
02.26
02.17
02.17
02.17
02.1502.17
02.20
02.26 TYP.
02.1702.17
02.2602.26
02.2602.26
02.17
02.26
02.31
02.07 02.07
02.07
02.07 02.07 02.20
15' - 0" 12' - 6"
25
'
-
3
1
/
2
"
4"
02.05
02.05
02.05
02.05
02.04
02.50
02.50
02.16
02.50
02.50
02.51
02.51
02.51
02.51
02.04
02.53
02.52
02.54
02.54
02.56
02.57
02.17
02.03
11' - 4 3/8"
02.62
02.62
02.63
02.64 02.64
1'
-
8
"
3'
-
8
"
8'-
7
"
3'
-
8
"
1' -
2
"
3'
-
6
"
RELOCATE
EQ
EQ
4'
-
2
"
02.05
02.05
02.70 02.70
02.70
02.70
02.70
02.71
02.71
02.71
02.71
02.71
02.71
02.71
02.71
02.7102.7102.71
02.71
02.71
02.7102.71
02.71
02.7102.71
02.72
02.7202.72
02.70
(TYP OF 8)
02.71
02.73
3
EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN
DEMOLITION LEGEND
DEMOLISH EXISTING WALLS, SEE KEYNOTES
DEMOLISH EXISTING, SEE KEYNOTES
EXISTING TO REMAIN
DEMOLISH EXISTING ROOF / FLOOR /
CEILING, SEE KEYNOTES
GENERAL NOTES
1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS, MATERIALS, FINISHES,
AND DIMENSIONS BEFORE AND AFTER DEMOLITION AND CONTACT THE ARCHITECT WITH ANY
UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS OR DISCREPANCIES
2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE/ASSEMBLIES/EQUIPMENT AS
REQUIRED FROM DEMOLITION WORK. REPAIR, PATCH AND/OR REPLACE EXISTING
CONSTRUCTED ITEMS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE TO REMAIN AS REQUIRED FOR NEW
CONSTRUCTION. NEW FINISHES TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT FINISHES
3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH AND REPAIR TO MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT WALLS,
FLOORS, CEILINGS/SOFFITS, ETC... AS REQUIRED IN ARES NOT SPECIFICALLY CALLED OUT IN
THE DRAWINGS BUT ARE IMPACTED BY CONSTRUCTION
4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH/REPAIR ALL AREAS RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION AND
PREPARE SUCH SURFACES TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES
5. CAP ALL PLUMBING IN FLOORS AND WALLS TO BE DEMOLISHED. CAPS TO BE BELOW FLOOR
SLAB OR INSIDE WALLS TO REMAIN. REMOVE ALL WIRING AND DEVICES IN FLOORS AND WALLS
TO BE REMOVED. RE-ROUTE LINES AS REQUIRED
6. REFER TO MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL
DEMOLITION COORDINATION
7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PREVENT WATER BUILD-UP AND/OR DAMAGE FOUNDATIONS ON
THE CONSTRUCTION SITE OR ADJACENT AREAS
8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO KEEP AN ACTIVE PEDESTRIAN PATHWAY TO AND AT EGRESS
ROUTES FREE OF OBSTRUCTIONS AT ALL TIMES. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE
PROTECTION TO PEDESTRIANS BEFORE DEMOLITION (IBC 3303)
9. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO MAINTAIN EXITS, EXISTING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, APPLIED
FIREPROOFING PROTECTION DEVICES, AND SANITARY SAFEGUARDS AT ALL TIMES DURING
DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION
10. REFER TO SITE DEMOLITION PLAN FOR LOCATION OF LIMIT OF DISTURBANCE
11. OWNER WILL HAVE ALL EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS AND SHELVING REMOVED BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE EXISTING EQUIPMENT LOCATION IN NEW LAYOUT WITH FLOOR
PLANS AND OWNER
12. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROTECT IN-FLOOR DUCTING AND UTILITIES TO REMAIN AT ALL
AREAS WHERE THE FLOOR SLAB IS INDICATED TO BE REMOVED
13. AT ALL AREAS WHERE FLOOR TILE IS TO BE REMOVED, GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE
ADDITIONAL SETTING MATERIAL AS REQUIRED TO ENSURE NEW FLOOR FINISH TRANSITIONS
WILL BE LEVEL
14. PRESERVE AND PROTECT ALL EXISTING MECHANICAL CONTROL LINES DURING ALL PHASES OF
DEMOLITION AND NEW CONSTRUCTION.
15. SALVAGE ALL DOORS THAT WORTH RE-USING (VERIFY W/ OWNER) AND RE-USE WITHIN
PROJECT WHERE POSSIBLE / FIT PROJECT PARAMETERS
16. SALVAGE ALL EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (IF RE-USABLE). COORDINATE W/ NEW
LOCATIONS, RE: CODE FLOOR PLANS
17. TUNNEL LOCATIONS IN TUNNEL PLAN ON SHEET AE100
18. EXISTING OPENINGS THAT WILL REQUIRE INFILL HAVE EXISTING ANGLE IRON TO SUPPORT
THAT OPENING. LEAVE ANGLE IRON IN PLACE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS
19. ANY SHELVING OR FURNITURE LEFT BEHIND AND IS NOT NOTED TO BE SALVAGED, PLEASE
CHECK WITH OWNER FIRST TO SEE IF IT IS TO BE SAVED AND RE-USED.
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AD101
Demolition
Plan - Level 1
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Level 01 Demolition Plan
KEYED NOTES
02.01 REMOVE LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT - ANGLE IRON AND FLANGE WELDED TO ANGLE IRON TO REMAIN.
PREPARE VOID FOR CONCRETE INFILL, RE: STRUCTURAL
02.03 EXISTING ROOF DRAIN PIPE TO REMAIN
02.04 EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET TO REMAIN
02.05 SAW CUT EXISITNG CONCRETE FLOOR FOR NEW TRENCH FLOOR DRAIN, NEW SLAB, NEW UTILITIES OR
NEW FOOTINGS. COORD. W/ FLOOR PLAN/STRUCTURAL.
02.06 REMOVE INTERIOR INSULATION AND PANELING AT WALLS AND CEILING
02.07 REMOVE EXISTING COLUMN
02.08 REMOVE STAIRS & MEZZANINE STRUCTURES
02.09 REMOVE MEZZANINE WALLS, FLOOR, CEILING AND STAIRS, TYP.
02.15 REMOVE EXISTING DOOR
02.16 REMOVE EXISTING OVERHEAD DOOR
02.17 CUT NEW ROUGH OPENINGS FOR EITHER NEW OVERHEAD DOOR, MAN DOOR, WINDOW AND/OR WALL
OPENING. COORD. W/ FLOOR PLAN AND STRUCTURAL - SALVAGE ALL CMU POSSIBLE TO LATER BE USED
FOR INFILL
02.18 FLOOR ELEVATION IN THIS ROOM TO BE LOWERED TO 100'-0". SO THAT IT WILL MATCH MAIN BUILDING -
REMOVE CONCRETE AND PAVING TO PREPARE FOR NEW CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE
02.19 STEAM AND MAIN ELECTRICAL CONDUIT TO REMAIN, RE: MECH & ELEC - SALVAGE EXISTING UNISTRUTS
AND RE-USE ON NEW WING WALL FOR SUPPORT. SEE FLOOR PLANS
02.20 REMOVE EXISTING ROOF AND STRUCTURE
02.23 REMOVE EXISTING GAURDRAIL, PATCH AND REPAIR CONCRETE.
02.24 REMOVE EXISTING WINDOW
02.25 SALVAGE AND RELOCATE EXISTING PROJECTOR. RE: FLOOR PLAN
02.26 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING WALL
02.27 REMOVE EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES, TOILET ACCESSORIES, PARTITION WALLS, COUNTERS, ETC.-
COORDINATE DISPOSAL OR REUSE AND RELOCATION WITH OWNER
02.28 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING WINDOW SYSTEM
02.29 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING VESTIBULE AND STRUCTURE. PATCH AND REPAIR WALLS,
SIDEWALK, ETC. AS NEEDED.
02.30 EXISTING OVERHEAD DOOR TO REMAIN.
02.31 REMOVE EXISTING CABINETRY, COUNTERS, ETC.
02.50 REMOVE WEATHER SEAL, BUMPER GUARD AND ADJUSTABLE CLOSURE AROUND LOADING DOCK DOOR
02.51 REMOVE MANIFOLD AND GLYCOL SYSTEM PIPES W/ COVERS TO HEATED PAD. PATCH AND REPAIR
EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL WHERE HOLE IS CREATED FROM REMOVING PIPE
02.52 SALVAGE REFRIGERATOR FOR RE-USE
02.53 PROVIDE CUT UNDER NEW CMU AND STEEL COLUMN LOCATIONS THAT SUPPORT MEZZANINE
02.54 REMOVE TOP, EXISTING REFRIGERATOR CONCRETE SLAB AND FOAM GLASS LAYER DIRECTLY
UNDERNEATH. LEAVE BOTTOM, CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE
02.56 PIPE TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION
02.57 FIRE RISER EQUIPMENT WILL BE UPDATED PER DELEGATED DESIGN
02.62 REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR REGISTER(S)
02.63 EXISTING STAIRS TO REMAIN
02.64 EXISTING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN
02.70 SALVAGE EXISTING CABINETS AND COUNTERTOP FOR RE-USE. SEE FLOOR PLANS AND ELEVATIONS FOR
NEW LOCATIONS.
02.71 SALVAGE EXISTING CABINETS AND SHELVING FOR RE-USE.
02.72 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING COUNTERTOPS. SALVAGE EXISTING CABINETS FOR RE-USE. SEE
FLOOR PLANS AND ELEVATIONS FOR NEW LOCATIONS.
02.73 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF ALL FREEZER EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING FREON.
1 Addendum #1 11/5/20
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
BB
CC
1
1
8
8
AA
DD
EE
BREAK
ROOM
EXTENT OF
INTERIOR
DEMOLITION
02.10
02.20
02.20
02.20
02.20
02.10
02.29
02.32
02.33
02.33
02.33
02.65
02.66
02.67 02.67
02.67 02.67
02.16
02.16
02.26
02.26
02.26
02.16
02.26
02.26
02.26
02.26
02.08
02.26
02.09
02.09
EXISTING LIGHT FIXUTES IN
THIS ROOM ARE TO REMAIN
3
EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN
DEMOLITION LEGEND
DEMOLISH EXISTING WALLS, SEE KEYNOTES
DEMOLISH EXISTING, SEE KEYNOTES
EXISTING TO REMAIN
DEMOLISH EXISTING ROOF / FLOOR /
CEILING, SEE KEYNOTES
GENERAL NOTES
1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS, MATERIALS, FINISHES,
AND DIMENSIONS BEFORE AND AFTER DEMOLITION AND CONTACT THE ARCHITECT WITH ANY
UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS OR DISCREPANCIES
2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE/ASSEMBLIES/EQUIPMENT AS
REQUIRED FROM DEMOLITION WORK. REPAIR, PATCH AND/OR REPLACE EXISTING
CONSTRUCTED ITEMS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE TO REMAIN AS REQUIRED FOR NEW
CONSTRUCTION. NEW FINISHES TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT FINISHES
3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH AND REPAIR TO MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT WALLS,
FLOORS, CEILINGS/SOFFITS, ETC... AS REQUIRED IN ARES NOT SPECIFICALLY CALLED OUT IN
THE DRAWINGS BUT ARE IMPACTED BY CONSTRUCTION
4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH/REPAIR ALL AREAS RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION AND
PREPARE SUCH SURFACES TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES
5. CAP ALL PLUMBING IN FLOORS AND WALLS TO BE DEMOLISHED. CAPS TO BE BELOW FLOOR
SLAB OR INSIDE WALLS TO REMAIN. REMOVE ALL WIRING AND DEVICES IN FLOORS AND WALLS
TO BE REMOVED. RE-ROUTE LINES AS REQUIRED
6. REFER TO MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL
DEMOLITION COORDINATION
7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PREVENT WATER BUILD-UP AND/OR DAMAGE FOUNDATIONS ON
THE CONSTRUCTION SITE OR ADJACENT AREAS
8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO KEEP AN ACTIVE PEDESTRIAN PATHWAY TO AND AT EGRESS
ROUTES FREE OF OBSTRUCTIONS AT ALL TIMES. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE
PROTECTION TO PEDESTRIANS BEFORE DEMOLITION (IBC 3303)
9. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO MAINTAIN EXITS, EXISTING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, APPLIED
FIREPROOFING PROTECTION DEVICES, AND SANITARY SAFEGUARDS AT ALL TIMES DURING
DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION
10. REFER TO SITE DEMOLITION PLAN FOR LOCATION OF LIMIT OF DISTURBANCE
11. OWNER WILL HAVE ALL EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS AND SHELVING REMOVED BEFORE
CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE EXISTING EQUIPMENT LOCATION IN NEW LAYOUT WITH FLOOR
PLANS AND OWNER
12. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROTECT IN-FLOOR DUCTING AND UTILITIES TO REMAIN AT ALL
AREAS WHERE THE FLOOR SLAB IS INDICATED TO BE REMOVED
13. AT ALL AREAS WHERE FLOOR TILE IS TO BE REMOVED, GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE
ADDITIONAL SETTING MATERIAL AS REQUIRED TO ENSURE NEW FLOOR FINISH TRANSITIONS
WILL BE LEVEL
14. PRESERVE AND PROTECT ALL EXISTING MECHANICAL CONTROL LINES DURING ALL PHASES OF
DEMOLITION AND NEW CONSTRUCTION.
15. SALVAGE ALL DOORS THAT WORTH RE-USING (VERIFY W/ OWNER) AND RE-USE WITHIN
PROJECT WHERE POSSIBLE / FIT PROJECT PARAMETERS
16. SALVAGE ALL EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (IF RE-USABLE). COORDINATE W/ NEW
LOCATIONS, RE: CODE FLOOR PLANS
17. TUNNEL LOCATIONS IN TUNNEL PLAN ON SHEET AE100
18. EXISTING OPENINGS THAT WILL REQUIRE INFILL HAVE EXISTING ANGLE IRON TO SUPPORT
THAT OPENING. LEAVE ANGLE IRON IN PLACE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN STRUCTURAL
DRAWINGS
19. ANY SHELVING OR FURNITURE LEFT BEHIND AND IS NOT NOTED TO BE SALVAGED, PLEASE
CHECK WITH OWNER FIRST TO SEE IF IT IS TO BE SAVED AND RE-USED.
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AD131
Reflected
Ceiling
Demolition
Plan - Level 1
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Level 1 Reflected Ceiling Demolition Plan
KEYED NOTES
02.08 REMOVE STAIRS & MEZZANINE STRUCTURES
02.09 REMOVE MEZZANINE WALLS, FLOOR, CEILING AND STAIRS, TYP.
02.10 REMOVE AND SET ASIDE CEILING SYSTEM AND LIGHT FIXTURES IN EXISTING PURCHASING AREA. SAFELY
STORE CEILING TILES, LIGHT FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT SO THAT THEY CAN BE REINSTALLED.
02.16 REMOVE EXISTING OVERHEAD DOOR
02.20 REMOVE EXISTING ROOF AND STRUCTURE
02.26 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING WALL
02.29 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING VESTIBULE AND STRUCTURE. PATCH AND REPAIR WALLS,
SIDEWALK, ETC. AS NEEDED.
02.32 REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING CEILING
02.33 REMOVE EXISTING SOFFIT AND LIGHT FIXTURES AND PREP FOR NEW SOFFIT AND LIGHT FIXTURES. RE:
ELECTRICAL FOR NEW LIGHT FIXTURES.
02.65 REMOVE EXISTING PLYWOOD SHEATHING. PROTECT EXISTING TRUSSES FROM DAMAGE
02.66 REMOVE EXISTING METAL CEILING, PROTECT EXISTING TRUSSES FROM DAMAGE
02.67 PREPARE, DEMO EXISTING CEILING / ROOF / STRUCTURE FOR NEW SKYLIGHT, RE: ROOF PLAN AND RCP
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
UP
UP
FSTS
TS
JCD1 JCD1 JCD1
JCD1JCD1JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
(E)
(E)
JCD1
JCD1
J
CD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
(E)
JCD1 JCD1
F
F
CR
F
F F
F
DC
DC
DC
F F
F F F
F
F
F
F
CR
CRCR
F
F
F
CR
F
F
F
F F F F
F
FF
F F FF
F
F
F
F
CR
DC
S
RT-5
S
RT-1
S AH-1
S
RT
-
2
S
RT-4
S
RT-7
S
RT-6
SFC
-
4
S
RT-8
S
FC-8
S
FC
-
9
S
FC-7
UP
REF.
RE
F
.
CR
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
BB
CC
1
1
8
8
AA
DD
EE
AE201 E1
AE201
B1
AE201D1
AE201
A1
A1
AE301
A1
AE301
B1
AE301
B1
AE301
ENGINES LAB
143
AUTO STORAGE
142
CE STORAGE
140
AUTOMOTIVE SHOP
138
HIGH BAY SHOP
137
CM / CE LAB
132
VESTIBULE
101
AUTO TOOL ROOM
138B
BREAK ROOM
130
OFFICE
129
OFFICE
128
OFFICE
127
FIRE RISER
132B
CM/CE TOOL ROOM
132A
STUDENT
COLLABORATION
136
CORRIDOR
139
I.T.
135
OFFICE
133
OFFICE
134
CUSTODIAL
138A
CURING CLOSET
137B
MECH
141
D1
AE301
D1
AE301
WOMEN'S
117
MEN'S
115
JANITOR
116
120 SF
OFFICE
121
OFFICE
124
OFFICE
122
OFFICE
123
120 SF
OFFICE
119
120 SF
OFFICE
120
OFFICE
125
CORRIDOR
118
CORRIDOR
131
SEATING
126
CONCRETE TOOLS
137A
CM TOOL STORAGE
137C
1
(ELECTRIC
CHARGING
STATION)
2
(ELECTRIC
CHARGING
STATION)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13141516171819202122232425
26
AE401
D1
AE424
B2
AE421
C4
D1
C1
C2
AE421 B4A1
AE424 B1
BREAK ROOM
111B
OPEN OFFICE
OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE RECEPTION
102
CONFRENCE ROOM
(N.I.C.)
OFFICE
112
OFFICE
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
TOOL BOX
STORAGE
138C
03.01
03.01
03.01
05.0105.01
26.01 26.01
02.11
08.01
11.01
11.05
130 129 128 127
131
124125
123
122121120119
115
116
117
132.1137.1
133
134
135
138.1
137B
132.2
138.2
138.3
143.1
142.2141
138.4
138.5
137.2
137.3
138C
137A
144
137C
SF
0
1
SF
0
1
SF
0
4
SF
0
3
SF
0
2
SF
0
6
SF05
SF01
132A
132B
140.2
142.1
116.1112
AE421
A506.04
11.03 11.03 11.03 11.03 11.03
11.0411.0411.0411.0411.0411.04
22.08
22.08
22.09 22.09
22.10
AE421
B1
B2
08.01
SF
0
7
05.03
(TYP OF 6)
AE421
A3
442 SF
SOILS STORAGE
AND COMPACTION
144
A2A4
AE422
A1
AE422
E1
AE423
C1
AE401
B1
SF
0
8
08.02
CORRIDOR
103
140.1
B3
C1
B5
B1
A4
B1
AE423
D1
A1
AE424 A1A4
AE411
A1
AE411
A3
AE411
A5
AE521
A1
AE521
A2
138.6
SF
0
9
10.21
138B
F1
AE521
D3
26.01
A3
AE511
22.15
04.04
05.10
21.01
21.01
21.0121.02
21.02
21.02
21.03
21.03
04.04
09.32 22.2022.20
05.1605.16
10.21
10.21
04.04
AE421
D3
1'
-
4
"
16
'
-
3
"
21.02
22.25
103
AE424C4
C3
C1
C2
06.04
06.04
06.04
3
3
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE101
Floor Plan -
Level 1
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
GENERAL NOTES - FLOOR PLAN
1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND SHALL REPORT
TO THE ARCHITECT ANY UNKNOWN CONDITIONS, ERRORS, OR CONFLICTS IN THE
DRAWINGS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK
2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS
3 ALL EXPOSED INTERIOR COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED
4 ALL EXPOSED EXTERIOR STEEL TO BE GALVANIZED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
5 SEE SHEET GI003 FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING IN
WALLS FOR ALL WALL-MOUNTED ITEMS WHETHER BLOCKING IS DEPICTED IN
DRAWINGS OR NOT.
6 COORDINATE ALL EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ITEMS THAT ARE
OFOI, WITH OWNER
7 SEE SHEET SERIES AE500 FOR WALL AND ASSEMBLY TYPES
8 SEE SHEET SERIES AE600 FOR DOOR & WINDOW TYPES
9 ALL EXPOSED INTERIOR COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED WITH INTUMESCENT PAINT
10 SEE WALL SECTION SHEET SERIES AE310 FOR WALL TYPES AT SPECIFIED
LOCATION
11 SEE ELEVATIONS AND FINISH SCHEDULES FOR SURFACE TREATMENTS AT WALLS
12 SEE ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL WALL CONSTRUCTION
INFORMATION
13 ALL DEMOLITION TO BE COORDINATED WITH PHASING PLAN SHEET GI103
KEYED NOTES
02.11 EXISTING STEAM LINE TO REMAIN
03.01 BACKFILL EXISTING LOADING BAY RECESSES AND TOP WITH CONCRETE
04.04 CMU CONTROL JOINT
05.01 NEW LANDING, STAIRS AND GUARDRAIL AND RAILING (POWDER COATED - COLOR TO BE SELECTED
BY OWNER AND ARCHITECT.)
05.03 COLUMN WRAP PROTECTION - SENTRY CONCRETE WRAP CW0244-48
05.10 NEW MEZZANINE ABOVE
05.16 STEEL DOWNSPOUT PROTECTOR, RE: E1/AE521
06.04 INFILL WALLS WITH FRAMING AND GYP BD. FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING, TYP.
08.01 NEW OPENING IN EXISTING WALL
08.02 36" x 36" TUNNEL / FLOOR ACCESS HATCH W/ DETENTION LOCK
09.32 PAINTED, STRIPED WALKING PATH
10.21 ADA ACTUATOR
11.01 DUMPSTER LOCATION
11.03 12' X 16' STALL WITH 2" PAINTED STRIPING
11.04 12' X 18' STALL WITH 2" PAINTED STRIPING
11.05 CONCRETE WASH OUT. RE: INTERIOR FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT PLANS AND SCHEDULES
21.01 EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET
21.02 NEW, SURFACE-MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER
21.03 NEW SEMI-RECESSED EXTINGUISHER CABINET
22.08 FLOOR DRAIN, RE PLUMBING
22.09 HAND WASH SINK, RE: PLUMBING
22.10 EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION, RE: PLUMBING
22.15 LAMBS TONGUE DRAIN / SECONDARY DRAINAGE, RE: PLUMBING
22.20 EXISTING ROOF DRAIN LINE
22.25 SALVAGED, RELOCATED SINK, RE: PLUMBING
26.01 TELEVISION MONITOR. OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED.
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Floor Plan - Level 1
1 Addendum #1 11/5/20
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
BB
CC
1
1
8
8
AA
DD
EE
F1
F1
03.01
F2
F2
F2
120' - 4 1/8"
20
'
-
8
"
4' - 7 5/8"18' - 8 3/8"4' - 8"
11
'
-
5
3
/
4
"
26
'
-
8
"
38
'
-
1
3
/
4
"
7'
-
4
"
2'
-
4
"
6'
-
4
"
7'
-
4
"
8'
-
8
"
7'
-
4
"
11' - 0"
03.01
03.01
17
'
-
0
"
1'
-
4
"
AL
I
G
N
100' - 0"
100' - 0"
100' - 0"
100' - 0"
100' - 0"
6 1/8"
4'
-
9
"
1'
-
2
"
D6
AE521
D6
AE521
99' - 10"
15' - 0" 12' - 6"2' - 10"
25
'
-
7
1
/
2
"
F1
D5
AE521
99' - 10"
F1
6" 6' - 3"
4'
-
2
"
3' -
5
"
3'
-
8
"
2'
-
9
"
3'
-
8
"
3'
-
5
"
4'
-
2
"
03.09
03.10
03.10
03.12 03.12 03.12
NEW CONCRETE IN THIS AREA. SEE DEMOLITION
PLANS, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL AND
PLUMBING.
NOTE THAT SOME OF THE NEW CONCRETE
IS OVER AN EXISTING TUNNEL. SEE
SHEET AE100 AND STRUCTURAL
NEW HATCH LOCATION SEE
FLOOR PLANS AND DETAILS
F1
6' - 6 7/8"8' - 6 1/2"
100' - 7"
100' - 0"
100' - 0"
SLOPE FLOOR TO FLOOR DRAIN AT
MINIMAL SLOPE IN CONCRETE CURING
ROOM. SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR WALL
LOCATIONS.
3
03.12 03.12
33
NEW FLOOR, SEE FLOOR TAG FOR TYPE
SEE SHEET FOR FLOOR ASSEMBLIES
FLOOR LEGEND
AE501
NEW FLOOR, RECESS 2" FOR TILE TO SLOPE TO DRAINS
SEE STRUCTURAL FOR CLARIFICATION
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE111
Slab Edge
Plan
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
GENERAL NOTES - SLAB EDGE
1 COORDINATE SLAB EDGE PLANS WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
2 COORDINATE SLAB EDGE PLANS WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR
HOUSEKEEPING PADS, SIZE, AND EXACT LOCATION
3 COORDINATE SLAB EDGE PLANS WITH WALL TYPES FOR ACOUSTIC ISOLATION
TREATMENTS
4 SLAB EDGE SHOWS MAIN AREAS OF CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE, IT DOES NOT
SHOW ALL LOCATIONS FOR PATCH AND REPAIR - COORDINATE THESE WITH
MECHAINCAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
KEYED NOTES
03.01 BACKFILL EXISTING LOADING BAY RECESSES AND TOP WITH CONCRETE
03.09 CONCRETE STEP. VERIFY HEIGHT WITH FUTURE SURVEY AND CIVIL DRAWINGS. RE: STRUCTURAL
03.10 RECESSED SLAB AREA, RE: STRUCTURAL
03.12 SLAB TO ROLL OVER CONCRETE AT DOORS.
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Slab Edge Plan - Level 1
1 Addendum #1 11/5/20
2 Addendum #2 11/9/2020
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
JJJ
2' x 2' LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL TILE & SUSPENSION SYSTEM;
ACP-01, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
CEILING LEGEND
CL1
SUPPLY DIFFUSER, SEE MECHANICAL
RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL
2'x4' LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL
GYPSUM BOARD ON SUSPENSION SYSTEM, PAINTED
PNT-02; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
CL4
RETURN GRILLE, SEE MECHANICAL
2'x2' LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL
1'x4' LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL
CL8 WOOD CLOUD ON SUSPENSION SYSTEM, RE: DETAIL
2'x8' ACOUSTIC PANEL; ACP-03, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
CL5
GYPSUM BOARD ON SUSPENSION SYSTEM
WITH INSULATION ABOVE, PAINTED PNT-02; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
CL6 GYPSUM BOARD ON METAL FRAMING, PAINTED PNT-02;
RE: FINIH SCHEDULE
2' x 2' LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL TILE & SUSPENSION SYSTEM
WITH INSULATION ABOVE; ACP-01, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
CL2
CL7 GYPSUM BOARD ON METAL FRAMING WITH INSULATION
ABOVE, PAINTED PNT-02; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL
2'x4' ACOUSTIC PANEL; ACP-04, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
CL9 WOOD-LIKE, ALUMINUM PANELS -KNOTWOOD OR EQUAL
EXPOSED STRUCTURE E
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
BB
CC
1
1
8
8
AA
DD
EE
A1
AE301
A1
AE301
B1
AE301
B1
AE301
D1
AE301
D1
AE301
OPEN TO ABOVE
SEE AE132 FOR LEVEL 2 CEILING PLAN
SEE AE132 FOR LEVEL 2
CEILING PLAN
OPEN TO ABOVE
SEE AE132 FOR LEVEL 2 CEILING PLAN
OPEN TO ABOVE
SEE AE132 FOR LEVEL 2 CEILING PLAN
ENGINES LAB
143
AUTO STORAGE
142CE STORAGE
140
AUTOMOTIVE SHOP
138
HIGH BAY SHOP
137
CM / CE LAB
132
VESTIBULE
101 BREAK ROOM
130
OFFICE
129
OFFICE
128
OFFICE
127
FIRE RISER
132B
CURING CLOSET
137B
CM/CE TOOL ROOM
132A
STUDENT
COLLABORATION
136
CORRIDOR
139
I.T.
135
OFFICE
133
OFFICE
134
CUSTODIAL
138A
MECH
141
WOMEN'S
117
MEN'S
115
JANITOR
116
OFFICE
121
OFFICE
124
OFFICE
122
OFFICE
123
OFFICE
119 OFFICE
120
OFFICE
125
CORRIDOR
118
CORRIDOR
131
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
109
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
108
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
107
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
106
CONFRENCE ROOM
(N.I.C.)
114
RECEPTION
102
OFFICE
104
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
105
OFFICE
110
OPEN OFFICE
111
OFFICE
112
CORRIDOR
103
CONCRETE TOOLS
137A
CM TOOL STORAGE
137C
CL6 8' - 0"
CL2 8' - 0"CL2 8' - 0"CL2 8' - 0"
CL2 8' - 0"CL2 8' - 0"CL2 8' - 0"CL2 8' - 0"
CL2 8' - 0"CL2 8' - 0"
CL2 8' - 0"CL2 8' - 0"
CL2 8' - 10"
CL2 8' - 10"
CL2 8' - 0"
CL6 8' - 0"
CL5 8' - 0"
CL5 8' - 0"
CL7 8' - 0"
CL1 8' - 0"
CL1 8' - 0"
CL1 8' - 0"
CL4 8' - 0"CL4 8' - 0"
SEE AE132 FOR
LEVEL 2
CEILING PLAN
TOOL BOX
STORAGE
138C
CL9 10' - 0"
CL2 8' - 0"
26.02
26.02
26.02
26.02
08.03
CL9 10' - 0"
09.16
26.02
(TYP OF 5)
11.11
TYP
TYP
8'
-
6
"
16
'
-
2
1
/
2
"
TYP. 5
CORRIDOR
131
3'
-
8
"
3' - 7"
3' - 6"
3'
-
8
"
AE431
A1
AE431
A2
CL
CL
SOILS STORAGE
AND COMPACTION
144
AUTO TOOL ROOM
138B
AE431
A3
TYP. 3
26.02
TYP. 3
CL8 10' - 6"
7' - 6"
EQ
6' -
0
"
6' -
0
"
EQ
CL2 8' - 0"
26.02 26.02
26.02 26.02 26.02
26.02
26.02
26.02
26.02
26.02
26.02
26.02
09.16
4' -
3
1
/
2
"
5'
-
0
"
5' - 0" 5' - 6"5' - 0"
5' - 0"5' - 6 1/4"5' - 0"
5'
-
0
"
3'
-
9
5
/
8
"
09.25
09.25
09.25
08.06 08.06
EQ 6' - 0"EQ
E
E E
E
12.05
12.05
12.05
12.0512.0512.05
12.05
08.0708.07
C3
AE522
C3
AE522
C3
AE522
C3
AE522
C3
AE522
C3
AE522
C3
AE522
12.05
E
E
E
3
3
3
PAINTED EPOXY FINISH ON
EXPOSED CONCRETE CEILING,
TO MATCH WALLS.
3
12.0512.05
C3
AE522
C3
AE522
3
E
CL6 9' - 0"
CL6 9' - 0"
3
CL9 10' - 0"8' -0"
3
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE131
Reflected
Ceiling Plan -
Level 1
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
GENERAL NOTES - CEILING PLAN
1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND SHALL REPORT TO THE
ARCHITECT ANY UNKNOWN CONDITIONS, ERRORS, OR CONFLICTS IN THE DRAWINGS BEFORE
BEGINNING WORK
2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS
3 CEILING GRID SHOWN IS ONLY A GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION OF CEILING. CONTRACTOR SHALL
VERIFY ACTUAL GRID LAYOUT/LOCATION IN THE FIELD. CONTRACTOR SHALL CENTER GRIDS IN
ROOMS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
4 VERIFY AND COORDINATE ALL MECHANICAL DUCT, GRILLE, DIFFUSER, AND VENT LOCATIONS, LAYOUT,
AND QUANTITIES WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.
5 VERIFY AND COORDINATE ALL ELECTRICAL FIXTURE, LIGHT, SMOKE DETECTOR, AND EXIT DEVICE
LOCATIONS, LAYOUT, AND QUANTITIES WITH ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
6 CONTRACTOR TO MAXIMIZE CEILNG HEIGHT DEPENDENT ON DUCTWORK LOCATIONS.
7 SEE SHEET SERIES AE530 FOR TYPICAL FIXTURE SUPPORT, CLIP ANGLES, AND SEISMIC BRACING
DETAILS
8 PROVIDE DEFLECTION TRACKS AT TOP OF ALL COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING WALLS; SEE SHEET
SERIES AE500
KEYED NOTES
08.03 3' x 8' SKYLIGHT - COORDINATE LOCATION WITH EXISTING ROOF TRUSSES, ELEC / STRUCT AND
INTERIORS. VERIFY LOCATION W/ ARCHITECT BEFORE DEMOLITION AND INSTALLATION.
08.06 NEW RIGID SUN TUNNEL / TUBE SKYLIGHT W/ BAFFLES - COORDINATE LOCATIONS W/ EXISTING ROOF
TRUSSES AND LIGHTING. CENTER IN ROOM (BOTH WAYS). VERIFY LOCATION W/ ARCHITECT PRIOR TO
INSTALLATION. RE: ELECTRICAL FOR BAFFLE INFORMATION
08.07 NEW RIGID SUN TUNNEL / TUBE SKYLIGHT W/ NO BAFFLES - COORDINATE LOCATIONS W/ EXISTING ROOF
TRUSSES AND LIGHTING. VERIFY LOCATION W/ ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
09.16 NEW METAL SOFFIT AND SIDING. CANOPY FRAMING IS TO REMAIN. REMOVE AND REPLACE LIGHT
FIXTURES, RE: ELECTRICAL
09.25 NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM TO MATCH EXISTING, ADJACENT CEILING IN FINISH, COLOR, LAYOUT
AND HEIGHT
11.11 AUTOMOTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM, RE: MECHANICAL
12.05 ROLLER SHADE, RS-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
26.02 LIGHT FIXTURE, RE: ELECTRICAL
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Ceiling Plan - Level 1
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
Level 1
100' -0"
T.O. Upper Wall
121' -4"
BC
Level 2
110' -4"
ADE
A1
AE301
A1
AE301
B1
AE301
B1
AE301
SF08
138.2
138.3SF04
132.2
SF01SF01
131
Mezzanine Level
109' -4"
26.02 26.02 26.02 26.02
26.0226.02
26.0226.02
09.29 09.29
09.29 09.29 09.29
09.28
09.28
09.28
09.28
09.28 09.2809.2804.03 04.0304.03 04.07
3
Level 1
100' -0"
T.O. Upper Wall
121' -4"
B C
Level 2
110' -4"
A D EA1
AE301
A1
AE301
Top of Lower Wall
114' -0"
B1
AE301
B1
AE301
SF0605.01
Mezzanine Level
109' -4"
138.6SF09
22.15
05.15
26.02
26.02 26.02
09.29
09.2909.29 09.29
09.28
09.31
09.31
09.31
09.29
03.06
05.07
09.27
09.29
09.27
04.03
09.30
04.03
26.0226.02
AE521
B4
04.07
Level 1
100' -0"
T.O. Upper Wall
121' -4"
234567 18
D1
AE301
D1
AE301
140.1
141142.2
138.5
138.4
04.03
26.02
26.02
26.0226.0226.0226.02
26.02
09.27 09.27
09.27
09.2909.2909.29
09.27
09.29
09.27
09.29
09.27
09.2809.28 09.28
05.14
22.15
D6
AE521
09.29
05.1505.01 32.06
3
3
Level 1
100' -0"
T.O. Upper Wall
121' -4"
2 3 4 5 6 7
Level 2
110' -4"
1 8
D1
AE301
D1
AE301
SF01
Mezzanine Level
109' -4"
A3
AE511
09.2809.27 09.27
09.28
09.29 09.29 09.29 09.29 09.29
09.28 09.2809.29 09.29
09.27 09.27 09.27 09.27 09.27 09.27
22.15
NORTH SIDE
26.02 26.02
26.02
00.01
09.27 09.27 09.27 09.27
09.29
09.29
09.28
09.30
04.05
09.28
09.2809.28
09.28
26.02
09.27
09.28
09.29
GENERAL NOTES
A. ALL EXPOSED STRUCTURAL EXTERIOR STEEL SHALL BE GALVANIZED WITHOUT CHROMATE
COATING, SHOP PRIMED WITH HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING
B. SEE SHEET SERIES AE500 FOR WALL AND ASSEMBLY TYPES
C. SEE SHEET SERIES AE600 FOR DOOR AND WINDOW TYPES
D. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND SHALL REPORT TO THE
ARCHITECT ANY UNKNOWN CONDITIONS, ERRORS, OR CONFLICTS IN THE DRAWINGS BEFORE
BEGINNING WORK
E. DO NOT SCALE THE DRAWINGS
F. COORDINATE ALL EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ITEMS THAT ARE OWNER
FURNISHED, OWNER INSTALLED
G. SEE SECTIONS, AND DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL WALL CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION
H. EXISTING PLANTS AND TREES ARE NOT REPRESENTED IN THE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS. OWNER
WILL PROVIDE ANY TREE RELOCATION OR TRIMMING THAT IS NEEDED. COORDINATE WITH
OWNER
J.ALL SMOOTH EXISTING AND INFILL CMU BLOLCK WILL BE PAINTED. COLORS TO BE SELECTED
BY ARCHITECT AND OWNER
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE201
Exterior
Elevations
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
KEYED NOTES
00.01 ADA PUSH PLATE ACTUATOR, RE: ELECTRICAL AND ARCHITECTURAL
03.06 PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
04.03 INFILL WITH SALVAGED CMU - MATCH ADJACENT (WHERE APPLIES), RE: DIMENSION PLANS AND WALL
TYPES
04.05 4" THICK SPLIT-FACE CMU BLOCK TO MATCH EXISTING, ADJACENT
04.07 NEW, FLUTED BLOCK TO MATCH EXISTING OR USED FROM SALVAGED BLOCK
05.01 NEW LANDING, STAIRS AND GUARDRAIL AND RAILING (POWDER COATED - COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY
OWNER AND ARCHITECT.)
05.07 NEW COLUMN, PRIME IN FACTORY AND PAINT IN FIELD. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY OWNER AND
ARCHITECT, RE: STRUCT
05.14 STEEL ANGLE AT MASONRY OPENING, PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT CMU, RE: STRUCTURAL
05.15 NEW 6" DIAMETER STEEL BOLLARD (CONCRETE FILLED / CONCRETE DOME TOP), PAINT (COLOR TO BE
SELECTED BY OWNER / ARCHITECT)
09.27 FLUTED, SPLIT FACE CMU - NO PAINT
09.28 PAINT ALL LOWER, EXISTING OR NEW RECESSED CMU FIELD COLOR "A" - COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY
OWNER AND ARCHITECT
09.29 PAINT ALL UPPER, SMOOTH CMU BLOCK FIELD COLOR "B" - COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY OWNER AND
ARCHITECT
09.30 ACM PANEL SYSTEM
09.31 EXISTING MATERIALS / COLORS TO REMAIN
22.15 LAMBS TONGUE DRAIN / SECONDARY DRAINAGE, RE: PLUMBING
26.02 LIGHT FIXTURE, RE: ELECTRICAL
32.06 NEW CHAINLINK FENCE, RE: SITE PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"D1 South Exterior Elevation
1/8" = 1'-0"E1 North Exterior Elevation
1/8" = 1'-0"B1 East Exterior Elevation
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 West Exterior Elevation
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
ASSEMBLY TYPES
ROOF R1
F2
F3
F4
FLOOR 6" CONCRETE
CONCRETE ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK (5 1/4" TOTAL THICKNESS)
CONCRETE (5 1/4" THICK)
5" RIGID INSULATION ON 1 1/2" METAL DECK
NOTE: SEE AE500 SHEET SERIES FOR COMPLETE ASSEMBLY TYPES
Level 1
100' -0"
T.O. Footing
96' -0"
R1
ES6a
AE521
A3
AE511
C1
AE531
C1
Level 1
100' -0"
T.O. Upper Wall
121' -4"
A
AE521
A4
F1
R1
Level 1
100' -0"
E
Top of Lower Wall
114' -0"
AE511
A2
02.36
05.07
05.0805.09
R1
07.01
03.06
02.38
AE511
A1
02.39
26.04
26.04
AE511
A3
02.39
02.41 02.41
CL9 8' - 0"
CL9 10' - 0"
CL6 8' - 0"
3
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE311
Wall Sections
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
KEYED NOTES
02.36 EXISTING STOREFRONT / DOOR SYSTEM TO REMAIN
02.38 EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL TO REMAIN
02.39 EXISTING FOUNDATION TO REMAIN
02.41 EXISTING STEAM TUNNEL TO REMAIN
03.06 PRECAST CONCRETE CAP
05.07 NEW COLUMN, PRIME IN FACTORY AND PAINT IN FIELD. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY OWNER AND
ARCHITECT, RE: STRUCT
05.08 NEW BEAM, RE: STRUCT
05.09 NEW ROOF FRAMING, RE: STRUCT
07.01 ROOF / OVERFLOW DRAIN, RE: ROOF PLAN AND PLUMB.
26.04 RECESSED LIGHTING, RE: ELECTRICAL
3/4" = 1'-0"A1 Wall Section
3/4" = 1'-0"A2 Wall Section
3/4" = 1'-0"A3 Entry Canopy Section
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
F
WOMEN'S
117
MEN'S
115
JANITOR
116
AE401
D3
AE401
C3
C5
C1
E4
E3
AE401
B4
B5
C2
D4
D4
AE521
115
116
117
22.03
10.10
09.08
10.14 22.0710.06
CL CL CL CL CL CL
TYP. 3
TYP. 2 TYP. 3
10.08
TYP. 3
7'
-
0
"
09.03
A3
AE572
TYP
IN FOREGROUND
A4
AE572
TYP
1' - 6"5' - 1"3' - 1"3' - 1"3' - 1"3' - 1"
10.09
3' - 10"
10.07
10.11
10.15
CL
09.08
09.03
7'
-
0
"
3' - 4"
CL
A3
AE572
TYP
CLCLCLCLCL
10.01
10.05
TYP. 5
10.03
TYP. 5
TYP. 2
09.03
05.04
09.09
7'
-
0
"
2'
-
1
0
"
3' -
2
"
3'
-
1
0
"
10.17
TYP. 5
1' - 0"
1' - 0"1' - 0"
1' - 0"
1' - 7"
EQ 2' - 6"2' - 6"2' - 6"2' - 6"EQ
CL CL CL CL CL
2' - 6"2' - 6"2' - 6"2' - 6"4' - 4"
7' - 6"1' - 8"
CL CL
A1
AE901
TYP A3
AE572
TYP
D1
AE571
TYP
AE571
D4 TYP.
12.01
09.08
TYP. 6
116.1
4'
-
0
"
22.01
09.03
2' - 3 1/2"
22.0109.13
1'
-
1
"
06.06
08.02
26.021' - 10"
5'
-
0
"
10.22
3
CL
2' - 3 1/2"
4'
-
0
"
22.01
09.03
22.10
06.06
1'
-
1
"
09.13
EQEQ
10.05
TYP. 5
10.03
TYP. 4
2' -
1
0
"
TYP. 2
12.01
1' - 8"7' - 5 113/256"
10.01
7'
-
0
"
09.08
09.0309.09
05.04
3'
-
2
"
CL CL
2' - 6"2' - 6"2' - 6"2' - 6"4' - 4"
CL CL CL CL CL
10.17
TYP. 5
1' - 0"
1' - 0"1' - 0"
1' - 0"
1' - 7"
3' -
1
0
"
EQ 2' - 6"2' - 6"2' - 6"2' - 6"EQ
A3
AE572
TYP
D1
AE571
TYP
A1
AE901
TYP
AE571
D4 TYP.
TYP. 6
22.03
10.06
09.08
10.10
10.08
TYP.6
TYP.6
CL CL CL CL CL CL
09.03
7' -
0
"
1' - 6"5' - 1"3' - 1"3' - 1"3' - 1"3' - 1"A3
AE572
TYP
IN FOREGROUND
A4
AE572
TYP
CL CL
10.13
10.07
2' - 1"1' - 2"
CL
09.03
7' -
0
"
10.15
3' - 10"
A3
AE572
TYP
09.08
AE401 B2
B3
CUSTODIAL
138A
4'
-
0
"
1'
-
1
"
22.01
09.23
06.062' - 4"
26.02
04.02
10.22
2' - 9"
5'
-
0
"
CL
3
22.01
09.23
1'
-
1
"
4'
-
0
"
06.06
2' - 4"
04.02
1157'
-
0
"
09.08
09.03
A3
AE572
TYP
117
09.08
09.03
7'
-
0
"
A3
AE572
TYP
NEW & EXISTING WALL LEGEND
NEW CMU INFILL TO MATCH EXISTING CMU WALL
EXISTING CMU WALL
NEW CMU WALL
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE401
Enlarged
Plans &
Interior
Elevations
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
GENERAL NOTES - INT PLAN/ELEV
1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND SHALL REPORT
TO THE ARCHITECT ANY UNKNOWN CONDITIONS, ERRORS, OR CONFLICTS IN THE
DRAWINGS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK
2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS
3 SEE SHEET GI003 FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING IN
WALLS FOR ALL WALL-MOUNTED ITEMS WHETHER BLOCKING IS DEPICTED IN
DRAWINGS OR NOT.
4 UPPER, LOWER, AND TALL MILLWORK CABINETS NOT TO EXCEED 36" IN WIDTH
5 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, MATCH UPPER CABINET WIDTH DIMENSIONS TO BASE
CABINETS - TYP.
6 ALL ELECTRICAL AND DATA OUTLETS ABOVE COUNTER TOPS SHOULD BE
MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY
7 PROVIDE SAFETY INSULATION ON ALL EXPOSED SUPPLY WATER LINES AND WASTE
LINES
8 PROVIDE ALUMINUM EDGE MOULDING @ ALL TILE TO H.M. DOOR TRANSITIONS
9 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL OUTSIDE EDGES ON TILE WALLS. SEE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
10 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL TILE TO FLOOR TRANSITIONS. SEE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11 ALL EXPOSED STEEL COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL
12 ALL MILLWORK INTERIOR FINISH TO BE WHITE MELAMINE, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
13 COUNTERTOP EDGE PROFILES TO BE SQUARE EDGE. IF SHOWN IN ELEVATION,
PROVIDE 4" BACKSPLASH
14 ALL WOOD WALLCOVERING GRAIN TO RUN VERTICALLY, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
15 CALLED OUT RESTROOM ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED AT EVERY STALL
16 PAINT CMU WALLS CLEANLY TO GROUND
KEYED NOTES
04.02 NEW CMU WALL - MATCH EXISTING
05.04 HOT ROLLED STEEL, MP-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
06.06 FIBER-GLASS REINFORCED PANEL, FRP-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
08.02 36" x 36" TUNNEL / FLOOR ACCESS HATCH W/ DETENTION LOCK
09.03 FIELD PAINT, PNT-01 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.08 TILE TL-02, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.09 TILE TL-03, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.13 RUBBER BASE, RB-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.23 EPOXY PAINT, PNT-06, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
10.01 MIRROR, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.03 SOAP DISPENSER WALL MOUNTED, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.05 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.06 TOILET PARTITION, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.07 BABY CHANGING STATION, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.08 TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.09 18" GRAB BAR, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.10 36" GRAB BAR, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.11 42" GRAB BAR, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.13 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.14 URINAL PARTITION, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.15 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.17 COAT HOOK, RE; ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.22 MOP/BROOM HOOK, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
12.01 QUARTZ, QTZ-01 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
22.01 MOP SINK, RE: PLUMBING
22.03 TOILET FIXTURE, RE: PLUMBING
22.07 URINAL, RE: PLUMBING
22.10 EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION, RE: PLUMBING
26.02 LIGHT FIXTURE, RE: ELECTRICAL
3/8" = 1'-0"D1 Enlarged Plan - Restroom
1/4" = 1'-0"C1 Men's Restroom - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"C5 Men's Restroom - Elev 4
1/4" = 1'-0"C3 Men's Restroom - Elev 3
1/4" = 1'-0"B5 Janitor - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"B4 Janitor - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"D3 Women's Restroom - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"E3 Women's Restroom - Elev 3
1/4" = 1'-0"E4 Women's Restroom - Elev 4
3/8" = 1'-0"B1 Enlarged Plan - Custodial
1/4" = 1'-0"B2 Custodial - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"B3 Custodial - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"D4 Men's Restroom - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"C2 Women's Restroom - Elev 2
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
IN FOREGROUND
09.03
09.21
OPEN TO
BEYOND
OPEN TO
BEYOND8'
-
0
"
TYP. 3
A3
AE571
TYP
TYP.
26.02
A1
AE522
TYP
9' - 9 3/8"
06.01
09.05
26.06
3'
-
6
"
4'
-
6
"
2' -
1
0
"
115 116 117
IN BACKGROUND
7' -
4
"
09.09
FU
L
L
T
I
L
E
09.03
09.03
22.05
09.21
TYP.
TYP.
26.02
TYP. 3
A5
AE572
TYP
A3
AE572
TYP
IN BACKGROUND
A
09.05
06.01
06.01
09.14
09.13
05.04
6'
-
6
"
1'
-
6
"
1'
-
6
"
(TYP. 6)
34
"
222222222
FILLER 29 1/2"36"36"FILLER
06.0112.01
4"
1'
-
0
"
4"
1'
-
0
"
4"
1'
-
0
"
4"
1'
-
0
"
4"
1'
-
0
"
9' - 9 3/8"1' - 11 7/8"
A5
AE571
8"
4"
EQ
SEAM LOCATION
EQEQ
09.20
26.02
23.01
26.02
13
'
-
4
"
26.09 22.22
22.2122.21
OPEN TO
BEYOND
09.05
05.04
B
8'
-
0
"
2' - 1 1/2"
09.03
09.13
1'
-
6
"
10.20
06.01
12.01
5'
-
2
"
CL
CL
EQ EQ
IN FOREGROUND CL
5'
-
0
"
CL11.06
06.01
GI004
D5
GI004
D2
09.19
26.02
TYP.
5' - 6 1/2"
23.01
TYP.
B1
AE522
TYP
09.05
09.03
06.01
96
"
13
'
-
4
"
99"
A4
AE901
04.01
09.13
26.02
23.01
23.01
26.05
TYP.
22.22
TYP.
09.20
137.1
06.01
05.04
09.03
09.05
6'
-
6
"
1'
-
6
"
1'
-
6
"
09.13
09.14
13
'
-
4
"
26.02
12' - 9 1/2"
A5
AE571
EQ
SEAM LOCATION
EQ EQ
2' - 1 1/2"
AL
I
G
N
W
I
T
H
E
D
G
E
O
F
M
I
L
W
O
R
K
11
'
-
0
"
10
'
-
8
"
10
'
-
2
"
11
'
-
7
"
D2
AE571
TYP
TYP.
17' - 10"2' - 1"
1' - 0"
2' - 6"
8'
-
0
"
A1
AE571
TYP
GI004
D4
23.01
26.02
TYP.
34
"
30
"
18
"
254 222
301 302
48"24"
24"48"
302
152
48"
48"
06.02
12.01
06.02
09.03
11.07
18
"
FILLER
FILLER
12.01 22.12
09.24
11.10
3 3
3
OPEN TO
BEYOND
09.13
09.15
26.03
BOPEN TO
BEYOND
05.04
10.16
09.03
09.13
6'
-
5
"
EQ 8' - 0"12' - 0"
9"
6'
-
5
"
TYP.
TYP.
A4
AE571
A4
AE571
EQ
4' - 0"4' - 0"4' - 0"4' - 0"4' - 0"
9"
EQ EQ
FILLER 21"21"21"
211 211 254
301301301301301301
21"21"21"21"21"12"FILLER
06.02
12.01
06.02
09.03
34
"
20
"
30
"
09.13
FILLER
11.09
11.10
TYP.
12.01
09.24
338"21"36"FILLER
301 302 301
FILLER 36"
FILLER
21"36"12"FILLER
254 152
302
12
"
18
"
30
"
20
"
34
"
06.02
09.03
06.02
11.07
22.12
TYP.
12.0112.01
09.24
3
FILLER 21"21"21"
54
"
30
"
301 301 301
06.02
09.03
09.13
NEW & EXISTING WALL LEGEND
NEW CMU INFILL TO MATCH EXISTING CMU WALL
EXISTING CMU WALL
NEW CMU WALL
04.01
04.02
26.02
4' -
0
"
1' -
0
"
6"6"6"6"6"6"6"6"6"6"6"6"6"6"1' - 0"
10.17
TYP. 15
09.23
CASEWORK TAG KEY
REFER TO CASEWORK DESIGN SERIES (CDS) OF THE
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK STANDARDS (AWS) FOR A
FULL DESCRIPTION OF CASEWORK TYPES. SEE SHEET
SERIES AE900 FOR CASEWORK DETAILS.
101M
AWS STANDARD
CASEWORK TYPE
DENOTES
MODIFIED
CASEWORK TYPE
Extra ShelfDESCRIPTION OF
CASEWORK
MODIFICATION
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE421
Interior
Elevations
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
GENERAL NOTES - INT PLAN/ELEV
1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND SHALL REPORT
TO THE ARCHITECT ANY UNKNOWN CONDITIONS, ERRORS, OR CONFLICTS IN THE
DRAWINGS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK
2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS
3 SEE SHEET GI003 FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING IN
WALLS FOR ALL WALL-MOUNTED ITEMS WHETHER BLOCKING IS DEPICTED IN
DRAWINGS OR NOT.
4 UPPER, LOWER, AND TALL MILLWORK CABINETS NOT TO EXCEED 36" IN WIDTH
5 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, MATCH UPPER CABINET WIDTH DIMENSIONS TO BASE
CABINETS - TYP.
6 ALL ELECTRICAL AND DATA OUTLETS ABOVE COUNTER TOPS SHOULD BE
MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY
7 PROVIDE SAFETY INSULATION ON ALL EXPOSED SUPPLY WATER LINES AND WASTE
LINES
8 PROVIDE ALUMINUM EDGE MOULDING @ ALL TILE TO H.M. DOOR TRANSITIONS
9 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL OUTSIDE EDGES ON TILE WALLS. SEE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
10 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL TILE TO FLOOR TRANSITIONS. SEE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11 ALL EXPOSED STEEL COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL
12 ALL MILLWORK INTERIOR FINISH TO BE WHITE MELAMINE, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
13 COUNTERTOP EDGE PROFILES TO BE SQUARE EDGE. IF SHOWN IN ELEVATION,
PROVIDE 4" BACKSPLASH
14 ALL WOOD WALLCOVERING GRAIN TO RUN VERTICALLY, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
15 CALLED OUT RESTROOM ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED AT EVERY STALL
16 PAINT CMU WALLS CLEANLY TO GROUND
KEYED NOTES
04.01 EXISTING CMU WALL
04.02 NEW CMU WALL - MATCH EXISTING
05.04 HOT ROLLED STEEL, MP-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
06.01 PLASTIC LAMINATE; PL-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
06.02 PLASTIC LAMINATE; PL-02 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.03 FIELD PAINT, PNT-01 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.05 ACCENT PAINT, PNT-03 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.09 TILE TL-03, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.13 RUBBER BASE, RB-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.14 UPHOLSTERY, FB-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.15 WALL GRAPHIC, LEVEL 5 FINISH
09.19 CEILING CLOUD, SEE DETAIL A5/AE531 & A3/AE531
09.20 RUBBER BASE, RB-02 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.21 CARPET BASE, CB-01 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.23 EPOXY PAINT, PNT-06, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.24 RUBBER BASE, RB-03, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
10.16 TACK BOARD DISPLAY, RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.17 COAT HOOK, RE; ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
10.20 MARKER BOARD, MB-02; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11.06 TELEVISION MONITOR; RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
11.07 REFRIGERATOR, RE: APPLIANCE SCHEDULE
11.09 COPY MACHINE, OWNER PROVIDED OWNER INSTALLED
11.10 MICROWAVE, RE: APPLIANCE SCHEDULE
12.01 QUARTZ, QTZ-01 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
22.05 ADA DRINKING FOUNTAIN, RE: PLUMBING
22.12 UNDERMOUNT SINK, RE: PLUMBING
22.21 STEAM PIPES, RE: PLUMBING
22.22 WATER LINE, RE: PLUMBING
23.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT RE: MECHANICAL
26.02 LIGHT FIXTURE, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.03 ELECTRICAL OUTLET, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.05 ELECTRICAL PANEL, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.06 EXIT SIGN, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.09 ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, RE: ELECTRICAL
1/4" = 1'-0"B4 Seating - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"A1 Seating - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"C1 Student Collaboration - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"C2 Student Collaboration - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"C4 Student Collaboration - Elev 3
1/4" = 1'-0"D1 Student Collaboration - Elev 4
1/4" = 1'-0"A5 Breakroom 144
1/4" = 1'-0"B1 Corridor - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"B2 Corridor - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"A3 Breakroom 130 - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"A2 Breakroom 130 - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"A4 Breakroom 130 - Elev 3
1/4" = 1'-0"D3 Tool Room
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3
3
3
09.23
203
22.04
TYP. 2
IN FOREGROUND
38
"
30
"
18
"
48
"
15' - 0"
32"32"29"29"29"29"
12.03
12.0212.02
TYP. 6
04.02
26.02
23.02
12.03 TYP. 2
4' - 0"4' - 0"
7' - 0"
3' - 3"
2' - 0"09.13
09.13
TYP.
A3
AE901
TYP
22.23
22.22
TYP.
22.05 22.04
09.23
TYP. 3
137A
IN FOREGROUND04.03
04.01
09.13
09.23
26.03
TYP.
23.01TYP.
26.02TYP.
A
A
A
A
22.23 TYP.
22.22
TYP.
26.09TYP.
132B
12.0222.10IN FOREGROUND
09.23
34
"
48"
142
22.14
06.02
09.13
04.03
04.01
21.01
23.01
26.02
23.02
TYP.11.12 26.05
22.05
26.05
23.01
TYP.
TYP.
TYP.
TYP.
09.24
24' - 3"
8'
-
0
"
09.23
22.22
22.24
22.22 22.23
26.10
SF04
132.2
IN FOREGROUND12.03
12.02 TYP.
TYP. 7
09.13
24"24"29"36"36"36"36"36"36"36"
6' - 5"21' - 0"
36
"
36
"
04.01
12.02
12.03
TYP. 2
100
26.06
26.03 TYP.
09.23
09.13
26.02
TYP.
23.01
TYP.
22.10IN FOREGROUND 36"36"
36
"
12.03
12.02
TYP.
09.13
12.02
04.02
26.06
23.01
26.02
TYP.
D114
23.01
09.23
09.13
26.02
D115
A
AA
A
09.23
137.2
137.3
IN BACKGROUND 30"30"30"30"30"30"30"30"
20' - 0"
36
"
12.03
TYP. 8
36
"
34"34"34"
8' - 6"12.03
TYP. 3
12.04 12.04
09.23
TYP.
AE521
A5 04.02
04.01
09.1309.13
23.01
26.0226.02
TYP.
03.08
23.0123.01
137B 137.1
AE521
B2
05.03
04.02
03.08
23.0126.02
TYP.TYP.
AE521
B1
AE521
B1
09.13 26.07 26.0626.03
TYP.
09.23
26.02
04.04
05.07 05.07
33
NEW & EXISTING WALL LEGEND
NEW CMU INFILL TO MATCH EXISTING CMU WALL
EXISTING CMU WALL
NEW CMU WALL
CASEWORK TAG KEY
REFER TO CASEWORK DESIGN SERIES (CDS) OF THE
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK STANDARDS (AWS) FOR A
FULL DESCRIPTION OF CASEWORK TYPES. SEE SHEET
SERIES AE900 FOR CASEWORK DETAILS.
101M
AWS STANDARD
CASEWORK TYPE
DENOTES
MODIFIED
CASEWORK TYPE
Extra ShelfDESCRIPTION OF
CASEWORK
MODIFICATION
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE422
Interior
Elevations
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
KEYED NOTES
03.08 EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN
04.01 EXISTING CMU WALL
04.02 NEW CMU WALL - MATCH EXISTING
04.03 INFILL WITH SALVAGED CMU - MATCH ADJACENT (WHERE APPLIES), RE: DIMENSION PLANS AND WALL
TYPES
04.04 CMU CONTROL JOINT
05.03 COLUMN WRAP PROTECTION - SENTRY CONCRETE WRAP CW0244-48
05.07 NEW COLUMN, PRIME IN FACTORY AND PAINT IN FIELD. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY OWNER AND
ARCHITECT, RE: STRUCT
06.02 PLASTIC LAMINATE; PL-02 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.13 RUBBER BASE, RB-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.23 EPOXY PAINT, PNT-06, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.24 RUBBER BASE, RB-03, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11.12 EXISTING PROJECTOR SCREEN, RE: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
12.02 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOP, ST-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
12.03 EXISTING CASEWORK
12.04 EXISTING BUTCHER BLOCK COUNTERTOPS
21.01 EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET
22.04 UTILITY SINK, RE: PLUMBING
22.05 ADA DRINKING FOUNTAIN, RE: PLUMBING
22.10 EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION, RE: PLUMBING
22.14 EXISTING SINK
22.22 WATER LINE, RE: PLUMBING
22.23 AIR LINE, RE: PLUMBING
22.24 VENT PIPING, RE: PLUMBING
23.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT RE: MECHANICAL
23.02 AIR HOSE, RE: MECHANICAL
26.02 LIGHT FIXTURE, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.03 ELECTRICAL OUTLET, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.05 ELECTRICAL PANEL, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.06 EXIT SIGN, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.07 CARD READER, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.09 ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.10 LIGHT SWITCH, RE: ELECTRICAL
GENERAL NOTES - INT PLAN/ELEV
1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND SHALL REPORT
TO THE ARCHITECT ANY UNKNOWN CONDITIONS, ERRORS, OR CONFLICTS IN THE
DRAWINGS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK
2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS
3 SEE SHEET GI003 FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING IN
WALLS FOR ALL WALL-MOUNTED ITEMS WHETHER BLOCKING IS DEPICTED IN
DRAWINGS OR NOT.
4 UPPER, LOWER, AND TALL MILLWORK CABINETS NOT TO EXCEED 36" IN WIDTH
5 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, MATCH UPPER CABINET WIDTH DIMENSIONS TO BASE
CABINETS - TYP.
6 ALL ELECTRICAL AND DATA OUTLETS ABOVE COUNTER TOPS SHOULD BE
MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY
7 PROVIDE SAFETY INSULATION ON ALL EXPOSED SUPPLY WATER LINES AND WASTE
LINES
8 PROVIDE ALUMINUM EDGE MOULDING @ ALL TILE TO H.M. DOOR TRANSITIONS
9 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL OUTSIDE EDGES ON TILE WALLS. SEE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
10 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL TILE TO FLOOR TRANSITIONS. SEE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11 ALL EXPOSED STEEL COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL
12 ALL MILLWORK INTERIOR FINISH TO BE WHITE MELAMINE, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
13 COUNTERTOP EDGE PROFILES TO BE SQUARE EDGE. IF SHOWN IN ELEVATION,
PROVIDE 4" BACKSPLASH
14 ALL WOOD WALLCOVERING GRAIN TO RUN VERTICALLY, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
15 CALLED OUT RESTROOM ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED AT EVERY STALL
16 PAINT CMU WALLS CLEANLY TO GROUND
1/4" = 1'-0"A1 CM/CE Lab - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"E1 High Bay Shop - Elev 3
1/4" = 1'-0"A4 CM/CE Lab - Elev 3
1/4" = 1'-0"B1 CM/CE Lab - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"B5 High Bay Shop - Elev 4
1/4" = 1'-0"C1 High Bay Shop - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"B3 High Bay Shop - Elev 2
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
A
138.1
445
IN BACKGROUND
22.10
22.09 22.09 22.10
AE401
B304.03
04.01
23.02 TYP.04.03
04.02
09.23
26.07
26.02
TYP.
26.03 TYP.
26.02
04.04 22.2122.21
TYP.
22.2422.24
03.08
22.22
22.23
TYP.
22.22
A
04.04
137.2
137.3
IN FOREGROUND
TYP.TYP.
23.02
26.0223.01 04.02
04.01
09.23
TYP.
26.02
TYP.
26.0204.04 22.23
TYP.
11.13
TYP.
22.21
142.1 143.1
04.03 23.02
09.23
23.01
TYP.
TYP.
26.02
TYP.
26.02
23.0122.21
TYP.
138.5
138.4138C138B
21.0104.03
04.01
23.01
09.23
26.05
TYP.
26.03
TYP.
TYP.
TYP.
23.02
TYP.
26.02
TYP.
26.0226.02
TYP.
26.06
22.21
TYP.
23.01
TYP.
22.23
TYP.
22.23
NEW & EXISTING WALL LEGEND
NEW CMU INFILL TO MATCH EXISTING CMU WALL
EXISTING CMU WALL
NEW CMU WALL
CASEWORK TAG KEY
REFER TO CASEWORK DESIGN SERIES (CDS) OF THE
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK STANDARDS (AWS) FOR A
FULL DESCRIPTION OF CASEWORK TYPES. SEE SHEET
SERIES AE900 FOR CASEWORK DETAILS.
101M
AWS STANDARD
CASEWORK TYPE
DENOTES
MODIFIED
CASEWORK TYPE
Extra ShelfDESCRIPTION OF
CASEWORK
MODIFICATION
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE423
Interior
Elevations
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
KEYED NOTES
03.08 EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN
04.01 EXISTING CMU WALL
04.02 NEW CMU WALL - MATCH EXISTING
04.03 INFILL WITH SALVAGED CMU - MATCH ADJACENT (WHERE APPLIES), RE: DIMENSION PLANS AND WALL
TYPES
04.04 CMU CONTROL JOINT
09.23 EPOXY PAINT, PNT-06, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11.13 EXISTING CORD REEL
21.01 EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET
22.09 HAND WASH SINK, RE: PLUMBING
22.10 EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION, RE: PLUMBING
22.21 STEAM PIPES, RE: PLUMBING
22.22 WATER LINE, RE: PLUMBING
22.23 AIR LINE, RE: PLUMBING
22.24 VENT PIPING, RE: PLUMBING
23.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT RE: MECHANICAL
23.02 AIR HOSE, RE: MECHANICAL
26.02 LIGHT FIXTURE, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.03 ELECTRICAL OUTLET, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.05 ELECTRICAL PANEL, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.06 EXIT SIGN, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.07 CARD READER, RE: ELECTRICAL
GENERAL NOTES - INT PLAN/ELEV
1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND SHALL REPORT
TO THE ARCHITECT ANY UNKNOWN CONDITIONS, ERRORS, OR CONFLICTS IN THE
DRAWINGS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK
2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS
3 SEE SHEET GI003 FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING IN
WALLS FOR ALL WALL-MOUNTED ITEMS WHETHER BLOCKING IS DEPICTED IN
DRAWINGS OR NOT.
4 UPPER, LOWER, AND TALL MILLWORK CABINETS NOT TO EXCEED 36" IN WIDTH
5 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, MATCH UPPER CABINET WIDTH DIMENSIONS TO BASE
CABINETS - TYP.
6 ALL ELECTRICAL AND DATA OUTLETS ABOVE COUNTER TOPS SHOULD BE
MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY
7 PROVIDE SAFETY INSULATION ON ALL EXPOSED SUPPLY WATER LINES AND WASTE
LINES
8 PROVIDE ALUMINUM EDGE MOULDING @ ALL TILE TO H.M. DOOR TRANSITIONS
9 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL OUTSIDE EDGES ON TILE WALLS. SEE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
10 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL TILE TO FLOOR TRANSITIONS. SEE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11 ALL EXPOSED STEEL COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL
12 ALL MILLWORK INTERIOR FINISH TO BE WHITE MELAMINE, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
13 COUNTERTOP EDGE PROFILES TO BE SQUARE EDGE. IF SHOWN IN ELEVATION,
PROVIDE 4" BACKSPLASH
14 ALL WOOD WALLCOVERING GRAIN TO RUN VERTICALLY, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
15 CALLED OUT RESTROOM ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED AT EVERY STALL
16 PAINT CMU WALLS CLEANLY TO GROUND
1/4" = 1'-0"C1 Automotive Shop West - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"D1 Automotive Shop West - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"B1 Automotve Shop East - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"A1 Automotive Shop East - Elev 1
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
IN FOREGROUND
12.02
34
"
36"36"
222 222 06.02
09.23
12.02
04.01
26.02
TYP.
23.01
TYP.
09.24
26.03
TYP.
22.22
143.1
6' - 6"6' - 6"7' - 0"6' - 6"6' - 6"11' - 0"CL CL CL CL CL CL
TY
P
.
7'
-
0
"
09.23
04.01
04.0323.0126.03
TYP.
23.01
10.20 11.06 10.20 10.20 11.06 10.20
ALIGN
138.2
138.3
04.01
05.03
04.0304.03
23.01
26.02
TYP.
03.08
TYP.
09.23
26.05
TYP.
23.01
TYP.
26.06
A
26.08
22.21
TYP.
TYP.
22.21
IN FOREGROUND IN FOREGROUND
04.02
04.01
138.6
04.03
TYP.
09.23
23.01
TYP.
08.0423.01
26.02
TYP.
B
AA
AA
A A
05.03
03.08
NEW & EXISTING WALL LEGEND
NEW CMU INFILL TO MATCH EXISTING CMU WALL
EXISTING CMU WALL
NEW CMU WALL
CASEWORK TAG KEY
REFER TO CASEWORK DESIGN SERIES (CDS) OF THE
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK STANDARDS (AWS) FOR A
FULL DESCRIPTION OF CASEWORK TYPES. SEE SHEET
SERIES AE900 FOR CASEWORK DETAILS.
101M
AWS STANDARD
CASEWORK TYPE
DENOTES
MODIFIED
CASEWORK TYPE
Extra ShelfDESCRIPTION OF
CASEWORK
MODIFICATION
22.2222.22
09.23
5'
-
0
"
06.06
142.1
5'
-
0
"
06.06
09.23
142.2
5'
-
0
"
06.06
09.23
26.03
09.23
06.06
5'
-
0
"
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE424
Interior
Elevation
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
KEYED NOTES
03.08 EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN
04.01 EXISTING CMU WALL
04.02 NEW CMU WALL - MATCH EXISTING
04.03 INFILL WITH SALVAGED CMU - MATCH ADJACENT (WHERE APPLIES), RE: DIMENSION PLANS AND WALL
TYPES
05.03 COLUMN WRAP PROTECTION - SENTRY CONCRETE WRAP CW0244-48
06.02 PLASTIC LAMINATE; PL-02 RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
06.06 FIBER-GLASS REINFORCED PANEL, FRP-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
08.04 OVER HEAD DOOR TRACK
09.23 EPOXY PAINT, PNT-06, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
09.24 RUBBER BASE, RB-03, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
10.20 MARKER BOARD, MB-02; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11.06 TELEVISION MONITOR; RE: ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
12.02 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOP, ST-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
22.21 STEAM PIPES, RE: PLUMBING
22.22 WATER LINE, RE: PLUMBING
23.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT RE: MECHANICAL
23.02 AIR HOSE, RE: MECHANICAL
26.02 LIGHT FIXTURE, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.03 ELECTRICAL OUTLET, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.05 ELECTRICAL PANEL, RE: ELECTRICAL
26.06 EXIT SIGN, RE: ELECTRICAL
GENERAL NOTES - INT PLAN/ELEV
1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND SHALL REPORT
TO THE ARCHITECT ANY UNKNOWN CONDITIONS, ERRORS, OR CONFLICTS IN THE
DRAWINGS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK
2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS
3 SEE SHEET GI003 FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING IN
WALLS FOR ALL WALL-MOUNTED ITEMS WHETHER BLOCKING IS DEPICTED IN
DRAWINGS OR NOT.
4 UPPER, LOWER, AND TALL MILLWORK CABINETS NOT TO EXCEED 36" IN WIDTH
5 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, MATCH UPPER CABINET WIDTH DIMENSIONS TO BASE
CABINETS - TYP.
6 ALL ELECTRICAL AND DATA OUTLETS ABOVE COUNTER TOPS SHOULD BE
MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY
7 PROVIDE SAFETY INSULATION ON ALL EXPOSED SUPPLY WATER LINES AND WASTE
LINES
8 PROVIDE ALUMINUM EDGE MOULDING @ ALL TILE TO H.M. DOOR TRANSITIONS
9 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL OUTSIDE EDGES ON TILE WALLS. SEE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
10 PROVIDE METAL TRIM AT ALL TILE TO FLOOR TRANSITIONS. SEE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11 ALL EXPOSED STEEL COLUMNS TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL
12 ALL MILLWORK INTERIOR FINISH TO BE WHITE MELAMINE, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
13 COUNTERTOP EDGE PROFILES TO BE SQUARE EDGE. IF SHOWN IN ELEVATION,
PROVIDE 4" BACKSPLASH
14 ALL WOOD WALLCOVERING GRAIN TO RUN VERTICALLY, UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
15 CALLED OUT RESTROOM ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED AT EVERY STALL
16 PAINT CMU WALLS CLEANLY TO GROUND
1/4" = 1'-0"B1 Auto Tool Room - Elev 2
1/4" = 1'-0"B2 Engines Lab - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"A1 Automotive Shop - South
1/4" = 1'-0"A4 Automotive Shop - North
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3
1/4" = 1'-0"C4 Auto Storage - Elev 4
1/4" = 1'-0"C3 Auto Storage - Elev 3
1/4" = 1'-0"C1 Auto Storage - Elev 1
1/4" = 1'-0"C2 Auto Storage - Elev 2
3
1.REFER TO AE100 SHEET SERIES FOR LOCATION OF WALL TYPES.
2.REFER TO SCHEDULES & DETAILS FOR FINISHES.
3."LINE OF STRUCTURE" AS SHOWN AT THE HEAD CONDITIONS OF EACH
WALL TYPE IS DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY AND DOES NOT INDICATE THE EXACT
CONSTRUCTION CONDITION. FIRE RATED WALLS ARE TO TERMINATE AT
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITH A FIRE RESISTANT RATING. WHERE REQUIRED
APPROPRIATE FRAMING AND GYP BOARD IS TO BE INSTALLED AND OFFSET
AROUND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OR OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS SUCH AS PIPING
OR DUCTWORK, TO MAINTAIN THE FIRE RESISTANCE RATING. NON-RATED
WALLS THAT CONTINUE TO STRUCTURE ARE TO TERMINATE AT PROPER
LOCATIONS TO MAINTAIN THE INTENT OF THE CONTINUOUS PLANE OF ONE
LAYER OF GYP BOARD AS A NOISE, SMOKE OR OTHER TYPE OF BARRIER. SEE
HEAD AND SILL DETAILS FOR MORE INFORMATION.
4.ALL RATED WALLS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED FIRST AND HAVE CONTINUITY
PRIORITY OVER NON-RATED WALLS. SECONDARY, OR NON-RATED WALLS,
ARE TO ABUTT, BUT NOT PENETRATE THE RATED WALLS.
5.FIRESTOPPING TO BE PROVIDED AT ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED
WALLS AS SPECIFIED. COORDINATE WITH CODE PLANS.
6.APPROPRIATE SUBMITTAL INFORMATION MUST BE PROVIDED TO
SUBSTANTIATE THAT THE MATERIALS AND ASSEMBLY USED BY THE
CONTRACTOR HAVE BEEN TESTED BY A RECOGNIZED TESTING AGENCY TO
MEET THE FIRE RESISTANCE RATING SCHEDULED ON THESE WALL TYPES.
7.ALL GYPSUM WALL BOARD MUST BE MOISTURE RESISTANT AT THE
FOLLOWING LOCATIONS:
a.TOILET ROOMS
b.WET WALLS
c.SHOWERS
d.JANITOR'S CLOSETS
8.SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS SHALL EXTEND THE FULL HEIGHT OF THE
WALLS.
9.SPACING OF THE METAL STUDS HAS NOT BEEN INDICATED ON THE WALL
TYPES OR DETAILS. STUD SPACING IS TO BE DETERMINED BY THE HEIGHT OF
THE PARTITION AS SHOWN IN THE TABLE BELOW. EACH STUD GOING TO
STRUCTURE AND EXCEEDING ALLOWABLE HEIGHTS SHALL BE BRACED 45
DEGREES DIAGONALLY 12" ABOVE CEILING WITH EQUAL SIZE METAL STUDS.
THIS TABLE IS TO BE USED FOR THE INTERIOR WALL TYPES ONLY AND DOES
NOT APPLY TO EXTERIOR STUDS. STUDS IN DOUBLE STUD WALL
CONFIGURATIONS ARE TO BE EVENLY STAGGERED RELATIVE TO THE
ADJACENT STUD LAYOUT.
11.REFER TO INTERIOR DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
12.UL DESIGN NUMBERS REFER TO FIRE RESISTANCE IN MOST CURRENT
EDITION OF THE UL DIRECTORY.
13.IN PARTITIONS WITHOUT GYP BOARD ON BOTH SIDES, SUPPORT
INSULATION WITH WIRE MESH TO STRUCTURE .
14.MAINTAIN 1/2" SPACE BETWEEN FLOOR SLAB AND BOTTOM OF GYP BOARD
ON ALL WALLS.
15.STOP STUD 1" BELOW METAL RUNNER (TOP TRACK) TO ALLOW FOR
VERTICAL EXPANSION; DO NOT ATTACH STUDS OR GYP BOARD TO TOP
TRACK.
16.SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTERIOR METAL STUD WALL SPACING,
GUAGES, BRACING, AND CONNECTIONS.
17.PROVIDE NEOPRENE FLASHING BETWEEN ALL DISSIMILAR METALS,
TYPICAL.
18.EXTERIOR SILL PLATES OR TRACKS TO BE SET IN 3 DISTINCT BEADS OF
CONTINUOUS SEALANT.
GENERAL NOTES -WALL TYPES
FACING ON
SIDES OF
STUDS
-HEIGHT IS DISTANCE FROM THE FLOOR TO THE STRUCTURE, NOT
FLOOR TO CEILING
-BRACING AT MIDPIOINT PREQUIRED FOR ALL WALLS OVER 12'-0" HIGH
STUD
SPAC'G ON
CENTER
STUD
DEPTH 2 1/2"
MAX. HT.
STUD
DEPTH 3 5/8"
MAX. HT.
STUD
DEPTH 6"
MAX. HT.
1 LAYER 5/8" GYP
BD -1 SIDE ONLY
1 LAYER 5/8" GYP
BD -EACH SIDE
2 LAYER 5/8" GYP
BD -EACH SIDE
16
24
16
24
16
24
11'-0"
9'-9"
12'-0"
10'-9"
14'-6"
12'-9"
16'-0"
13'-6"
16'-9"
13'-6"
14'-6"
12'-9"
16'-0"
13'-6"
20'-0"
15'-0"
3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING
@ 16" O.C. SPACING
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD. PROVIDE 5/8"
CEMENT BACKER BOARD AT TILE
LOCATIONS.
3 1/2" FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION
(WHERE APPLIES)
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD. PROVIDE 5/8"
CEMENT BACKER BOARD AT TILE
LOCATIONS.
3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING
@ 16" O.C. SPACING
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD. PROVIDE 5/8"
CEMENT BACKER BOARD AT TILE
LOCATIONS.
3 1/2" FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION
(WHERE APPLIES)
4X8X16 CMU BLOCK SPLIT FACE W/ 3/8"
VERTICAL JOINT @ 4" O.C. (3 SCORE
SPLIT FACE BLOCK) W/ FLUSH
HORIZONTAL JOINTS. BLOCK TO BE
APPROVED BY OWNER AND ARCHITECT
BEFORE PURCHASE AND INSTALLATION
6" METAL STUD FRAMING, RE:
STRUCTURAL
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
7/16" SHEATHING, SEE STRUCTURAL
CORE
EXTERIOR
INTERIOR
METAL PANEL SYSTEM
1/2" PLYWOOD EXTERIOR SHEATHING
5/8" GLASSMAT SHEATHING
6" METAL STUD FRAMING
(DELEGATED DESIGN)
CORE
EXTERIOR
INTERIOR
FLUID APPLIED AIR AND WATER
RESISTIVE BARRIER, VAPOR
PERMEABLE BARRIER
THERMAL ISOLATED CLIP
EXTRUSION CLIP
(BY ACM CONTRACTOR)
MASONRY TIE, RE: STRUCTURAL
FLUID APPLIED AIR AND WATER
RESISTIVE BARRIER, VAPOR
PERMEABLE BARRIER
R-10 (2") RIGID INSULATION
6" METAL STUD FRAMING
(DELEGATED DESIGN)
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD. PROVIDE 5/8"
CEMENT BACKER BOARD AT TILE
LOCATIONS.
5 1/2" FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION
(WHERE APPLIES)
EXTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLIES
6" METAL STUD FRAMING
@ 16" O.C. SPACING
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD. PROVIDE 5/8"
CEMENT BACKER BOARD AT TILE
LOCATIONS.
5 1/2" FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION
(WHERE APPLIES)
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD. PROVIDE 5/8"
CEMENT BACKER BOARD AT TILE
LOCATIONS.
PARTITION WALL ASSEMBLIES
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PS3a
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PS3b UL263
45
1 HR
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
ES6a
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
ES6b
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PS6a
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PS6b
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PM8
CMU WALL ASSEMBLIES
8" X 8" X 16" CMU WALL
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PS1a
7/8" HAT CHANNEL FRAMING
@ 16" O.C. SPACING
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
SE
E
P
L
A
N
F
O
R
WA
L
L
T
Y
P
E
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PM12
12" X 8" X 16" CMU WALL
5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING
3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING
@ 16" O.C. SPACING
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PS3c
5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING
R-13 MINIMUM CLOSED CELL SPRAY
FOAM INSULATION
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PS2a
1 5/8" METAL FRAMING
@ 16" O.C. SPACING
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
1/2"
SE
E
P
L
A
N
F
O
R
WA
L
L
T
Y
P
E
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
S1
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
S2
PS3d -PLYWOOD ONLY ON ONE SIDE
3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING
@ 16" O.C. SPACING
FIRE RATING:
FIRE TEST:
SOUND RATING:
SOUND TEST:
PS3e UL V497
1 HR
(2) LAYERS OF 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
SALVAGED 12" X 8" X 16"
FLUTED SPLITFACE CMU
BLOCK. STACK BOND
SALVAGED 10" X 8" X 16"
CMU BLOCK. STACK
BOND. PAINTED, COLOR
TO BE SELECTED BY
OWNER AND ARCHITECT.
FILL CAVITY WITH
PERLITE INSULATION
FILL CAVITY WITH
PERLITE INSULATION
3
3
3
3
3
3
ROOF ASSEMBLIES FLOOR ASSEMBLIES
CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE
FREE DRAINING GRAVEL
R1 5" Rigid Insulation on 1 1/2" Metal Deck F4 Concrete (5 1/4" Total Thickness), re: structural F2 6" or 8" Concrete, re: structural
F1 5" Slab on Grade on 4" Gravel Layer
CONCRETE
SELF ADHERED PVC ROOFING
MEMBRANE
METAL DECK, RE: STRUCTURAL
R-30 MINIMUM RIGID INSULATION
CONCRETE
F3 Concrete on 1 1/2" Metal Deck (5 1/4" Total Thickness)
CONCRETE
METAL DECK
VAPOR BARRIER
VAPOR BARRIER
EARTH; RE: STRUCTURAL NOTES
RE
:
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
A
L
RE
:
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
A
L
GENERAL NOTES -
HORIZONTAL ASSEMBLIES
A. FIRESTOPPING TO BE PROVIDED AT ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED ROOFS AND FLOORS
AS SPECIFIED. COORDINATE WITH CODE PLANS
B. APPROPRIATE SUBMITTAL INFORMATION MUST BE PROVIDED TO SUBSTANTIATE THAT THE
MATERIALS AND ASSEMBLY USED BY THE CONTRACTOR HAVE BEEN TESTED BY A
RECOGNIZED TESTING AGENCY TO MEET THE FIRE RESISTANCE RATING SCHEDULED ON
THESE ROOF AND FLOOR TYPES
C. REFER TO AE300 SERIES FOR BUILDING AND WALL SECTIONS
D. UL DESIGN NUMBERS REFER TO FIRE RESISTANCE IN MOST CURRENT EDITION OF THE UL
DIRECTORY
E. MAINTAIN 1/2" SPACE BETWEEN FLOOR SLAB AND BOTTOM OF GYP BOARD ON ALL WALLS
F. STOP STUD 1" BELOW METAL RUNNER (TOP TRACK) TO ALLOW FOR VERTICAL EXPANSION; DO
NOT ATTACH STUDS OR GYP BOARD TO TOP TRACK
G. PROVIDE NEOPRENE FLASHING BETWEEN ALL DISSIMILAR METALS, TYPICAL
H. CRICKET AT ALL MECHANICAL ITEMS, SKYLIGHTS, AND ROOF HATCHES; 1/4" PER FOOT
BACKSLOPE MINIMUM
I. PROVIDE ROOFTOP WALKING PAD PATHWAY TO ALL AIR HANDLER UNITS, EXHAUST FANS, AND
SPLIT UNITS ON ROOF
CRICKET DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
LENGTH TO WIDTH RATIOS & VALLEY SLOPES
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE501
Wall Types &
Horizontal
Assemblies
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
2x NAILER
SKYLIGHT, INSTALL PER MANUF. USE VELUX
DYNAMIC DOME AS BASIS OF DESIGN
RIGID INSULATION
PREFAB ALUMINUM CURB, INSTALL PER MANUF
2X4 AT SKYLIGHT OPENING, RE: STRUCTURAL
R1 8"
COUNTER FLASHING
RETURN ROOFING
MEMBRANE UP WALL
TERMINATION BAR
6"
3'
-
6
"
3"
2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE SLEEVE
W/ BOTTOM; PAINT
STEEL BEAM,
RE: STRUCTURAL
STEEL ANGLE, RE:
STRUCTURAL
1/4" CONT. WELD AROUND
PIPE SLEEVE TO STEEL ANGLE
1/4" CONT. WELD VERTICAL RAIL TO PIPE
SLEEVE
1/2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE,
VERTICALS @ 4'-0" O.C.
MAX SPACING; PAINT
1 1/2" DIA. STEEL PIPE; PAINT
Top of Lower Wall
114' -0"
R1
ES6a
STEEL ROOF JOIST,
RE: STRUCTURAL
FLUID APPLIED AIR
AND WATER
RESISTIVE BARRIER,
VAPOR PERMEABLE
BARRIER
RUN ROOF
MEMBRANE UP
UNDER PARAPET CAP
8
A
ES6a
FLUID APPLIED AIR AND WATER
RESISTIVE BARRIER, VAPOR
PERMEABLE BARRIER
ES6a
PM8
FLUID APPLIED AIR AND WATER RESISTIVE
BARRIER, VAPOR PERMEABLE BARRIER
RETURN BRICK
BACK TO CMU WALL
1" TYP.
11" MIN.
7"
M
A
X
CONCRETE FILLED STAIR PANS, TYP
SUPPORT ANGLE WELDED
TO STRINGER AND TREAD
STRINGER, RE: STRUCTURAL
CONCRETE ON METAL DECK -
RE: STRUCT
STEEL ANGLE -RE: STRUCT
STEEL BEAM -RE: STRUCT
STRINGER
NOTCH STRINGER AROUND
FLOOR PLATE
WELD STRINGER TO FACE OF
EDGE ANGLE, TYP
CONT. WELDED RISER AND
STAIR NOSING TO TOP OF EDGE
ANGLE: GRIND SMOOTH, TYP
THICKENED SLAB,
RE; STRUCTURAL
EMBEDED PLATE,
RE: STRUCTURAL
SUPPORT ANGLE WELDED
TO STRINGER AND BOLTED
TO FLOOR
3'
-
6
"
3"
6"
A5
AE521
5' - 0"
TYPICAL; GRIND ALL WELDS
SMOOTH, PRIME AND PAINT ALL
RAIL SYSTEMS (PNT-04)
1 1/2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE HANDRAIL,
GRIND ALL WELDS SMOOTH. PRIME
AND PAINT (PNT-04)
1/2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE
HANDRAIL, GRIND ALL WELDS
SMOOTH. PRIME AND PAINT
(PNT-04)
2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE SLEEVE
W/ BOTTOM; PRIME AND PAINT
(PNT-04)
TYP.
4" MAX
3'
-
6
"
3"
5' - 0" MAX
TYP.
4" MAX TYPICAL; GRIND ALL WELDS
SMOOTH, PRIME AND PAINT ALL
RAIL SYSTEMS (PNT-04)
1 1/2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE
HANDRAIL, GRIND ALL WELDS
SMOOTH. PRIME AND PAINT
INTERIOR RAILINGS (PNT-04)
1/2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE
HANDRAIL, GRIND ALL WELDS
SMOOTH. PRIME AND PAINT
INTERIOR RAILINGS (PNT-04)
SEE STRUCTURAL DETAIL C2/SE-521
FOR POST CONNECTION AT EXTERIOR
APPLICATIONS
FOR EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS,
POWDER COAT -COLOR TO BE
SELECTED BY ARCHITECT AND OWNER
STEEL STRINGER,
RE: STRUCTURAL
METAL PAN CONCRETE
STAIR TREAD
1/4" CONT. WELD TO STAIR
STRINGER
1 1/2" DIA. STEEL PIPE; PAINT
3"
3/4" x 1/2" STEEL BAR
BALUSTER @ 4" MAX. O.C.
WELD TOP AND BOTTOM TO
STEEL PIPES GRIND ALL
WELDS SMOOTH. PRIME AND
PAINT AS SPECIFIED
1 1/4" SQUARE GALVANIZED
STEEL PIPE, TOP AND BOTTOM
RAIL GRIND ALL WELDS
SMOOTH.
1 1/2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE; PAINT
3' -
6
"
3" x 2" x 1/4" STEEL BASE, SECURE W/
(4) 3-3/4" x 1/2" DIA. DOUBLE WEDGE
ANCHORS. PRIME AND PAINT AS
SPECIFIED.
3/4" x 1/2" STEEL BAR BALUSTER @ 4"
MAX. O.C. WELD TOP AND BOTTOM TO
STEEL PIPES GRIND ALL WELDS SMOOTH.
PRIME AND PAINT AS SPECIFIED
1 1/4" SQUARE SCHEDULE 40 STEEL
PIPE HANDRAIL. PLUG ENDS AND
RETURN TO WALL, LEAVING 1/4" GAP
BETWEEN WALL AND FINISH END OF
RAIL. GRIND WELDS SMOOTH,
PRIME AND PAINT PNT-5 AS
SPECIFIED IN FINISH SCHEDULE.
3"
3"
1/
2
"
1/
2
"
1/2" 1/2"
EQ
EQ
EQ EQ
2x NAILER
SKYLIGHT, INSTALL PER MANUF. USE
VELUX DYNAMIC DOME AS BASIS OF
DESIGN
1"
6"
RIGID INSULATION
FINISH INTERIOR FACE W/ 5/8" GYP BD,
RE: FINISH SCHEDULE / RCP
RE: RCP FOR CEILING FINISH
3 5/8" METAL STUD WALL FRAMING
5/8" GYP BD, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE / RCP
PREFAB ALUMINUM CURB, INSTALL PER MANUF
2X4 AT SKYLIGHT OPENING, RE:
STRUCTURAL
3'
-
6
"
3"
6"
A5
AE521
6' - 0"
INDUSTRIAL HINGE, TYP.
GRIND ALL WELDS SMOOTH
TYPICAL; GRIND ALL WELDS
SMOOTH, PRIME AND PAINT ALL
RAIL SYSTEMS (PNT-04)
1 1/2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE
HANDRAIL, GRIND ALL WELDS
SMOOTH. PRIME AND PAINT (PNT-04)
1/2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE HANDRAIL,
GRIND ALL WELDS SMOOTH. PRIME
AND PAINT (PNT-04)
2" SQUARE STEEL PIPE SLEEVE
W/ BOTTOM; PRIME AND PAINT
(PNT-04)
LATCH ON MEZZANINE
SIDE OF GATE
TYP.
4" MAX
EQ EQ
SEPARATE POST FOR GATE
SUPPORT ON EACH SIDE, RE:
STRUCTURAL
Level 1
100' -0"
2'
-
0
"
TWO FEET OF R-7.5 MINIMUM
CONTINUOUS RIGID
INSULATION AT FOUNDATION
PERIMETER
CONC SLAB ON GRADE, RE: STRUCT
NEW FOUNDATION, RE: STRUCT
1/2" FIBRE EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
SCHEDULED WALL, RE: PLANS
SCHEDULED WALL, RE: PLANS
CHAMFERED SILL EDGE/REVEAL, TYP
3/4
"
3/4
"
3/4"
8"6"
DAMP PROOFING
SITE ASPHALT, RE: CIVIL
FOUNDATION WALL,
RE: STRUCTURAL
FLASHING SET IN CONTINUOUS SEALANT
MORTAR DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SELF-ADHERED MEMBRANE FLASHING
CONCRETE COLUMN
5/8" PAINT-GRADE
PLYWOOD SHEATHING,
RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
3 5/8" METAL
STUD FRAMING
EQ
EQ
EQ EQ
1'
-
1
0
"
1' - 10"
ALUMINUM FRAME
W/ ANCHOR FLANGE
LOCK STRIKE
DETENTION SECURITY LOCK
DIAMOND STEEL
PLATE COVER
CONC FLOOR
SUPPORT PLATE
WELDED TO FRAME
FLOOR HATCH,
INSTALL PER MANUF
CONT NEOPRENE
BUMPER AT PERIMETER Level 1
100' -0"
2'
-
0
"
TWO FEET OF R-7.5 MINIMUM
CONTINUOUS RIGID
INSULATION AT FOUNDATION
PERIMETER
CONC SLAB ON GRADE, RE: STRUCT
1/2" FIBRE EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
SCHEDULED WALL, RE: PLANS
CHAMFERED SILL
EDGE/REVEAL, TYP
3/4"
8"
DAMP PROOFING
FOUNDATION WALL,
RE: STRUCTURAL
3
2"X2"X1/4" ANG.
CONTINUOUS WELD
TO TS POST
2"x2"x1/4" TS WELDED TO
2"x8"x1/4" PLATE EPOXY /
BOLTED TO SLAB W/ 1/2"
DIA. ANCHORS, TYP.
2"X2"X1/4" ANG.
BOLTED TO STUD
2x FRAMING
T.S. POST CONDITION STUD SIDE-MOUNT CONDITION
1
"
NOTCH END OF ANGLE
2' - 0"
1'
-
0
"
3"
1/4" STEEL PLATE (MIN) -42" HIGH
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE521
General
Construction
Details
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
3" = 1'-0"B6 Skylight Detail - Shop
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4 Roof Connection - Upper
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A5 Removeable Guard Rail @ Mezzanine
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A3 Roof Connection - Lower
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A1 Plan Detail
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A2 Plan Detail
1 1/2" = 1'-0"C1 Stair Tread Detail
1 1/2" = 1'-0"C2 Top of Stair Detail
1 1/2" = 1'-0"C3 Bottom of Stair Detail
1" = 1'-0"B2 Mezzanine Guardrail
1" = 1'-0"B4 Guardrail
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A6 Stair Handrail Section
3" = 1'-0"C4 Handrail to Wall Detail
3" = 1'-0"B5 Skylight Detail - Seating Area
1" = 1'-0"B1 Mezzanine Guardrail Gate
1 1/2" = 1'-0"D6 Slab Edge at Engines Lab
1 1/2" = 1'-0"D3 Typical Column Wrap / Framing
1 1/2" = 1'-0"D4 Floor Access Hatch
1 1/2" = 1'-0"D5 Slab Edge at Exterior Storage
1" = 1'-0"D1 Hidden Support Bracket @ Restroom Countertops
1 1/2" = 1'-0"E1 Steel Downspout Protector
1 Addendum #1 11/5/20
2 Addendum #2 11/9/2020
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
8" MAX
CREW INTO
MOLDING AT
PERIMETER
ANGLE MOLDING BY
MANUFACTURER
SCHEDULED GYPSUM PANEL
DRYWALL MAIN
RUNNERS OR
CROSS TEE
HANGER 12 GA. @ 4'-0"
O.C. MAX
NOTES:
1.ALL HANGER WIRES TO BE IN LINE WITH ATTACHED
COMPONENT OR SHALL BE COUNTERSLOPED NOT
GRATER THAN 1/6.
2.ALL HANGERS WIRES RO BE TAUT AND TIED BOTH
ENDS W/ MIN, OD 4 TURNS IN 1" OF RUN.
8" MAX 8" MAX8" MAX
FASTEN ON ALL MEMBERS @
TWO ADJACENT WALLS ONLY
PER MFG. REQ.
7/8" SEISMIC CLIP BY
MANUFACTURER
(ARMSTRONG BERC2
OR EQ)
SCHEDULED CEILING TILE
CEILING GRID MAIN
RUNNER OR CROSS
TEE
GRID PERPENDICULAR TO
CEILING NOT ATTACHED
TO CLOSURE ANGLE
(TWO ADJACENT WALLS)
HANGER 12 GA.
@ 4'-0" O.C. MAX.
FIRST LINE OF BRACING
4'-0" OR LESS FROM
WALL BOUNDARY
RUNNER CHANNEL
@ 4'-0" O.C. (TYP)
4'-0" TYP
1 2 '-0 " T Y P
AREAS SMALLER THAN 144 SQ. FT. AND WITH WALLS ON FOUR
SIDES, EXTENDING TO THE STRUCTURE, DO NOT NEED TO BE
BRACED. BOUNDARY WALLS MUST BE BRACED TOP AND BOTTOM
INDEPENDENT OF CEILING TO QUALIFY
12'-0" TYP
NOTE:
METAL FRAMING CHANNEL @
16" O.C. TYP.
9 0°FIRST LINE OF BRACING
6'-0" OR LESS FROM
WALL BOUNDARY
WALL
SPLAY WIRE
COMPRESSION POST
1 2 '-0 " (M A X .)
1
2
'
-
0
"
(
M
A
X
.
)
6 '-0 " M A X .
C1
AE523
CEILINGS SYSTEM
NOTE:
AREAS SMALLER THAN 144 SQ. FT. AND WITH WALLS ON FOUR
SIDES, EXTENDING TO THE STRUCTURE,
DO NOT NEED TO BE BRACED. BOUNDARY WALL MUST BE BRACED
TOP AND BOTTOM INDEPENDENT OF CEILING TO QUALIFY.
5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BD
3/4" FURRING
CHANNELS @ 24" O.C.
12 GA. HANGER SEE SPEC
1 1/2" C.R. CHANNEL @ 48" O.C.C R O S S T E E
HEAVY DUTY MAIN RUNNER
12 GA.
METAL
HANGER
WIRES
HEAVY DUTY MAIN RUNNER
4'-0" TYPICAL
3" MAX TYP.
SLACK
WIRES
#12 WIRE HANGER AT EACH
CORNER OF FIXTURE (TYP.)
INDEPENDENT OF CEILING
SUPPORT SYSTEM
NOTES
1. ALL SPLAY WIRES TO BE IN LINE WITH ATTACHED COMPONENT
2. ALL SPLAY WIRES TO BE TAUT AND TIED BOTH ENDS WITH MINIMUM OF THREE TURNS IN 1" OF RUN
3. COMPLY WITH IBC 2012, ASTM C635, ASTM C636 AND CISCA STANDARDS
4. SPLAY WIRES SHALL ATTACH TO STRUCTURAL GIRDER OR JOIST ONLY, DO NOT ATTACH TO ROOF DECK
5. METAL COMPRESSION POST (STRUT) FASTENED TO THE MAIN RUNNER SHALL BE EXTENDED TO AND FASTENED TO THE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SUPPORTING THE ROOF OR FLOOR ABOVE. COMPRESSION
POSTS & SPLAY WIRES TO BE INSTALLED EVERY 12' O.C. BOTH DIRECTIONS STARTING 6' FROM WALL. SEE COMPRESSION POST ALLOWABLE LENGTHS TABLE FOR SIZES. SEE DETAILS FOR TYPICAL BRACING
6. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE POSITIVELY ATTACHED TO THE SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM. WHEN INTERMEDIATE SYSTEMS ARE USED, ATTACH NO. 12 GAGE HANGERS TO THE GRID MEMBERS WITHIN 3"
OF EACH CORNER OF EACH FIXTURE. LIGHT FIXTURES WEIGHING LESS THAN 56 LBS. SHALL HAVE TWO NO. 12 GAGE HANGERS CONNECTED FROM THE FIXTURE HOUSING TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE. COMPLY
WITH IBC 2012
7. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE POSITIVELY ATTACHED 20 LBS, AND SHALL BE POSITIVELY ATTACHED TO THE CEILING SUSPENSION MAIN RUNNERS. TERMINALS OR SERVICES WEIGHING 20 LBS., BUT NOT
MORE THAT 56 LBS., SHALL IN ADDITION HAVE TWO NO. 12 GAGE HANGERS CONNECTED TO THE CEILING SYSTEM HANGERS OR TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE. TERMINALS OR SERVICES WEIGHING MORE THAN
56 LBS. SHALL BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY FROM THE STRUCTURE ABOVE BY APPROVED HANGERS. COMPLY WITH IBC 2012
8. ALL GRID SYSTEM IN SEISMIC ZONE D OR GREATER ARE REQUIRED TO BE HEAVY DUTY. REFER REQUIREMENTS TO ASCE 7 REQUIREMENTS
9. CEILINGS WITHOUT RIGID BRACING MUST HAVE 2" OVERSIZED TRIM RINGS FOR SPRINKLERS AND OTHER PENETRATIONS, COORDINATE WITH SPECIFICATIONS
STRUCTURE
SPLAY WIRE -SECURE
TO STRUCTURE
MAIN TEE
CROSS TEE
VERTICAL HANGER
WIRE ADJACENT
TO POST
SPRING CLIP INSERTS IN HOLE IN POST
STRUT ASSEMBLY TOP CLIP MECHANICALLY FASTENED
TO DECK PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS
BULB CLIP ATTACHING COMPRESSION POST AND MAIN
RUNNER MECHANICALLY FASTENED PER
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS
A FASTENER OR SPLAY WIRES MAYBE INSERTED INTO
THE TAB OF THE POST AND THROUGH A CONVENIENCE
HOLE IN THE MAIN TEE BULB
COMPRESSION POST -INSTALL WITHIN 2" OF CROSS TEE
INTERSECTION
45° OR LESS
45° OR
LESS 45° OR
LESS
45° OR LESS
COMPRESSION POST ALLOWABLE LENGTHS TABLE
13/16" X 13/32" STRUT 19 GA
MATERIAL TYP. ALLOWABLE LENGTH
24"
1 5/8" X 13/16" STRUT 12 GA 48"
13/16" X 13/16" STRUT 19 GA 54"
1 5/8" X 1" STRUT 12 GA 60"
3 5/8" X 1 1/4" STRUT 16 GA 82"
NOTES
1. THE INFORMATION PROVIDED IS FOR QUICK REFERENCE ONLY. OTHER RESTRICTIONS AND EXEMPTIONS MAY APPLY.
2. WALL MOLDING SHOULD NOT BE USED AS STRUTS.
3. A STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SHOULD BE CONSULTED FOR LENGTHS GREATER THAT 14'.
MATERIAL TYP. ALLOWABLE LENGTH
1 1/4" X 1 1/4" STRUT 14 GA 84"
1 5/8" X 1 3/8" STRUT 12 GA 96"
1 5/8" X 1 5/8" STRUT 12 GA 108"
1 5/8" X 2 7/16" STRUT 12
GA
120"
LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE
LIGHT FIXTURESPEAKER
LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE
SPRINKLER HEAD
LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE
EQ EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ EQ
DE
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
1
/
4
"
M
I
N
.
POWER ACTUATED FASTENER 12" O.C.
STRUCTURE
STEEL PLATE AS NEEDED FOR
CONNECTION TO DECK
CONTINUOUS DEFLECTION TRACK
DEFLECTION CLIP (1) PER STUD
METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C. REF.
WALL TYPES FOR STUD SIZE
5/8" GYPSUM -REF. WALL TYPES
FOR EXTENT OF TRACK HEIGHT
NOTE: RE: STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MASONRY WALL CONNECTION
ANGLE BRACKET, BY MANUF
CEILING (WHERE OCCURS), RE: RCP
ROLLER TUBE AND SHADE
ASSEMBLY, INSTALL PER MANUF,
RE: RCP
FIRE RATED WALL, RE: PLANS
ROLLED EDGE TRIM -PER MANUF
SIDE FRONT
FIRE RATED CABINET TO BE INSTALLED PER MANUF
INSTRUCTIONS. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE STRICTLY
ADHERED TO IN ORDER TO OBTAIN FIRE RATING. JL AMBASSADOR
1015V10-FX2 -ANSI/UL-1479 (ASTM E814). BASIS OF DESIGN.
CABINET -INSTALLED PER MANUF
D2/AE522
3' - 0"
6"
MITERED CORNER4"
TYP.
8"
TYP.
3/4"
BLOCKING &
FRAMING AS REQ'D
SCRIBE TIGHTLY TO
WALL TREATMENT
MOUNT TO SUSPENSION
SYSTEM SCREW PANEL
TO SUSPENSION TO BE
PAINTED PNT-03
TYP. WOOD SLAT: 3/4" FIRE
RATED PLYWOOD CORE
FACED W/ PL-01, RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE FOR FINISH.
SECURE TO SUPPORT FROM
ABOVE, TO CONCEAL
CONNECTION.
SKIRT TO CONTINUE
AROUND ALL SIDES
WALL AS SCHEDULED
RE: FLOOR PLAN
3
TYP.
1' - 0"
REVEAL
3/4"
TYP.
4"ALIGN
WALL AS SCHEDULED.
RE: FLOOR PLANS
MOUNT TO SUSPENSION
SYSTEM SCREW PANEL TO
SUSPENSION TO BE PAINTED
PNT-03
PANEL RUNNER: 1X3 POPLAR.
RUNNER & SCREWS, PAINTED,
PNT-03; RE: FINISH SCHEDLUE
TYP. WOOD SLAT: 3/4" FIRE
RATED PLYWOOD CORE
FACED W/ PL-01, RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE FOR FINISH.
SECURE TO SUPPORT FROM
ABOVE, TO CONCEAL
CONNECTION.
LINEAR LIGHT
FIXTURE; RE: ELECT.
3
WALL AS SCHEDULED.
RE: FLOOR PLANS
MOUNT TO SUSPENSION
SYSTEM SCREW PANEL TO
SUSPENSION TO BE PAINTED
PNT-03
PANEL RUNNER: 1X3 POPLAR.
RUNNER & SCREWS, PAINTED,
PNT-03; RE: FINISH SCHEDLUE
TYP. WOOD SLAT: FIRE
RATED PLYWOOD CORE
FACED W/ PL-01, RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE FOR FINISH.
SECURE TO SUPPORT FROM
ABOVE, TO CONCEAL
CONNECTION.
LINEAR LIGHT
FIXTURE; RE: ELECT.
REVEAL
3/4"
3
CEILING AS
SCHEDULED, SEE RCP
6"
CEILING AS
SCHEDULED, SEE RCP
1"
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
11/26/2019
AE522
General
Construction
Details
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A5 Clip Angle at Gyp Bd Ceiling
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A6 Clip Angle at Lay-In Ceiling
12" = 1'-0"C6 Seismic Bracing - Gyp Bd Ceiling
12" = 1'-0"C5 Seismic Bracing - Lay-In Tile Ceiling
3" = 1'-0"B2 Suspended Ceiling Channels
1/64" = 1'-0"B4 Typical Ceiling Fixture Support
1 1/2" = 1'-0"D3 Typical Seismic Bracing
1 1/2" = 1'-0"C2 Typical Fixture Placement
1 1/2" = 1'-0"B6 Deck Height Connection @ Non-structural Mtl Stud
3" = 1'-0"C3 Recessed Curtain
1" = 1'-0"D1 Fire Extinguisher Cabinet - Elevation
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A1 Wood Cloud @ Seating
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A2 Wood Cloud Detail
1 1/2" = 1'-0"B1 Wood Cloud Detail 2
3" = 1'-0"C1 Ceiling Material Transition
3
5 1/2"
1'
-
6
"
1'
-
6
"
UPHOLSTERED CUSHION, USE
HIGH DENSITY FOAM. UPHOLSTER
W/ FB-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE.
REFER TO PLANS FOR WALL TYPE
16 GUAGE STEEL, MP-01;RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
SCHEDULED FLOOR
BASE AS SCHEDULED, RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
BLOCKING AND FRAMING AS REQ'D
3/4" PLYWOOD CORE FACED W/
PLASTIC LAMINATE, PL-01; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
SE
E
I
N
T
E
R
I
O
R
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
S
2 1
/
4
"
1' - 6 1/2"
2 1
/
4
"
2' - 0"
4"
6'
-
4
1
/
2
"
WINDOW WHEN OCCURS; RE:
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR
LOCAITON
2"X2"X1/4" WELDED STEEL ANGLE; FASTEN EACH
STUD LOCATED @ 16" O.C. PROVIDE (4) #10
SCREWS AT THE TOP AND AT THE BOTTOM OF
EACH ANGLE IRON. PREDRILL HOLES.
2"X2"X3/16" WELDED STEEL ANGLE;
FASTEN TO STUD @ 16" O.C.
UPHOLSTERED CUSHION, USE
HIGH DENSITY FOAM. UPHOLSTER
W/ FB-02; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE.
3"
2 1/2"
10
1.0
0°3/4" PLYWOOD CORE
ATTACH AT TOP W/ #6 SCREW
ATTACH AT BOTTOM W/ #6 SCREW
SCRIBE TIGHTLY TO WALL
DIRECT ATTACH 3/4" PLYWOOD
CORE TO WALL W/ COUNTERSUNK
SCREWS, PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH
ADHERED TO SUBSTRATE ON SITE.
16 GUAGE STEEL, MP-01;RE: FINISH SCHEDULE.
TO WRAP AROUND STEEL ANGLE
2"X2" X1/4" STEEL ANGLE FASCIA; FASTEN AT
FACE BETWEEN EACH STEEL ANGLE
2"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1"
REFER TO PLANS FOR WALL TYPE
3X3X1/8 ANGLE IRON, MP-02; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE. SHROUD ON ALL SIDES, SEE
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS.
SCHEDULED FLOOR, RE: FINISH
FLOOR PLANS
BASE AS SCHEDULED, RE: INTERIOR
ELEVATIONS
BLOCKING AND FRAMING AS REQ'D
BULLETIN BOARD DISPLAY 10.16, RE:
ACCESSORY SCHEDULE. ATTACH PER
MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS
3"
9"
6'
-
5
"
AE571
D3
3X3X1/8 ANGLE IRON,
MP-02; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
3"
BULLETIN BOARD, SEE
ACCESSORY
SCHEDULE. INSTALL
PER MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDATIONS.
WALL AS SCHEDULED
REFER TO PLANS FOR
WALL TYPE
ANGLE IRON ON ALL
SIDES, SEE INTERIOR
ELEVATIONS
3x3x1/8 STEEL ANGLE IRON,
MP-02; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
TILE, TL-03; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
BLOCKING AND FRAMING AS
REQ'D
TILE, TL-02; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
SEE PLANS FOR WALL AS
SCHEDULED
3"
5/8" FIBER CEMENT BOARD
ATTACHED TO STUDS
3X3X1/8 ANGLE IRON,
MP-02; RE: FINISH
SCHEDLE
TILE, TL-03; RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE
MITERED CORNER
TILE, TL-02; RE:
FINISH SCHEDULE
ALIGN
WALL AS SCHEDULE, RE:
FLOOR PLANS
SCHEDULED FLOOR, RE:
FINISH PLANS
3/4" PLYWOOD CORE
FACED WITH PL-01,
RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
AE522
A1
TY
P
.
3/4
"
TY
P
.
8"
3 1
/
2
"
WALL PAINTED PNT-03,
RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
SCRIBE TIGHT TO CEILING
SCRIBE TIGHT TO FLOOR
WALL AS SCHEDULED
REFER TO PLANS FOR
WALL TYPE
10.18, WHEEL DISPLAY
HOOK; RE: ACCESSORY
SCHEDULE. SEE
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
FOR HEIGHTS &
LOCATIONS.
BLOCKING AND FRAMING
AS REQ'D
STEEL DMOUNTED DIRECTLY
TO WALL W/ BOLT
5' - 0"
SE
E
I
N
T
E
R
I
O
R
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
S
PENDANT AS SCHEDULED, SEE
ELECTRICAL. MOUNT TO J-BOX ATTACHED
AT BAR
BLOCKING AND FRAMING AS REQ'D
WALL AS SCHEDULED, RE: FLOOR PLANS
FLOOR AS SCHEDULED, RE: FINISH FLOOR PLANS
BASE AS SCHEDULED, RE: INTERIOR
ELEVATIONS AND FINISH FLOOR PLANS
1'
-
6
"
3X1/8 STEEL, MP-03; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE571
Interior
Details
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A5 Bench w/ Metal Shroud
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4 Student Display Bulletin Board
3" = 1'-0"D3 Display Board Shroud Detail
3" = 1'-0"D1 Restroom Shroud - Plan
3" = 1'-0"D4 Restroom Shroud Corner Detail
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A3 Wood Wall
1 1/2" = 1'-0"D2 Rim Mounting Detail
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A1 Pendants at Student Collaboration
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3
CONCEALED, IN-WALL SPEED BRACE,
AS REQ'D, SEE DETAIL D1/AE521
COUNTERTOP: 3CM QTZ-01, RE: FINISH
SCHEDULE. SQUARE EDGE -SCRIBE
TIGHTLY TO WALL.
REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR WALL TYPES
PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQ'D
UNDER-MOUNT SINK. RE: PLUMBING
INSULATE DRAIN PIPES PER ADA
REQUIREMENTS
FULL HEIGHT TILE BACKSPLASH. SEE
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS.
PLUMBING FIXTURE, SEE PLUMBING
C L R .
2 ' - 3 "
2' - 0"
A .F .F .
2 ' - 1 0 "
FINISHED FLOOR; RE: FINISH
PLAN FOR TYPE
3/4" PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE
PROVIDE BLOCKING AS
REQ'D
(4) ADJUSTABLE SHELVES
INTERIOR CABINET & FRAME:
3/4" PLYWOOD FACED W/
PL-01; RE: FINISH SCHEDULE.
SLIDING GLASS DOORS
WALL AS SCHEDULED
S E E I N T E R I O R E L E V A T I O N S
KEYED LOCKING HARDWARE;
ARCHITECT TO SELECT FROM MAUF.
FULL RANGE OF METAL FINISH
OPTIONS.
SLIDING GLASS DOOR TRACK SYSTEM;
ARCHITECT TO SELECT FROM PRODUCTS
FULL RANGE OF METAL FINISH OPTIONS.
SHELVES, TYP.: 3/8" THICK
GLASS, TEMPERED, WITH FLAT
POLISHED EDGE.
SLIDING GLASS DOOR TRACK
SYSTEM; ARCHITECT TO SELECT
FROM PRODUCTS FULL RANGE OF
METAL FINISH OPTIONS.
1"
2' - 0 1/2"
4"
3"
BASE AS SCHDULED, SEE
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
3"
4"
2'
-
1
0
"
4"
2' - 0"
1'
-
8
"
2'
-
6
"
1' - 0"
SCHEDULED FINISH FLOOR;
RE: FINISH FLOOR PLANS
LOWER CA;BINET
WALL AS SCHEDULED;
RE: PLAN FOR TYPE
UPPER CABINET
WALL AS SCHEDULED;
RE: PLAN FOR TYPE
8x12 SPEED BRACE; RE:
ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
3/4" PLYWOOD SHELF
SE
E
E
L
E
V
A
T
I
O
N
CENTERLINE
OF DOOR STILE
CABINET PULL
HARDWARE
CABINET DOOR
UPPER CABINET DOOR
BASE CABINET DOORS
DRAWER
DRAWER FRONT
DRAWER PULL HARDWARE
TOP OF DOOR STILE
(1 1/2" IF FLAT PANEL)
CENTERLINE
OF DOOR STILE
CABINET PULL
HARDWARE
CABINET DOOR
TOP OF DOOR STILE
(1 1/2" IF FLAT PANEL)
CL
CL
CL
CL
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AE901
Casework
Details
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A1 Restroom Counter @ Sink
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4 Display Case
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A5 Typical Casework Dimensions
1 1/2" = 1'-0"A3 Storage Shelf
3/4" = 1'-0"B1 Millwork Hardware Locations
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3
3
UP
UP
UP
CR
FLOOR FINISH LEGEND
FEILD CARPET
Room name
101
F
B
W WALL FINISH
BASE FINISH
FLOOR FINISH
ROOM NAME
ROOM NUMBER
FINISH KEY
MATERIAL FINISH CODE
ARROWS REPRESENT
EXTENT OF SCOPE
CPT-02
CPT-01
CONCRETE - POLISHED
CONCRETE - SEALED
PSC-01
SC-01
** SEE ENLARGED FINISH PLANS + INTERIOR ELEVATIONS+ FINISH SCHEDULE
SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION *
XX
X
-X
ACCENT CARPET
TILE TL-01
EPOXY FLOORING EP-01
LUXURY VINYL TILE LVT-01
ACCENT CARPET CPT-03
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
BB
CC
1
1
8
8
AA
DD
EE
ENGINES LAB
143
EP-01
RB-01
PNT-01
AUTO STORAGE
142
SC-01
-
PNT-06
CE STORAGE
140
SC-01
-
PNT-06
AUTOMOTIVE SHOP
138
EP-01
-
PNT-06
HIGH BAY SHOP
137
EP-01
-
PNT-06
CM / CE LAB
132
EP-01
-
PNT-06
VESTIBULE
101
CPT-02
-
-
AUTO TOOL ROOM
138B
EP-01
-
PNT-06
BREAK ROOM
130
LVT-01
RB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
129
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
128
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
127
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
FIRE RISER
132B
EP-01
RB-01
PNT-01
CM/CE TOOL ROOM
132A
SC-01
-
PNT-06
STUDENT COLLABORATION
136
PSC-01
RB-01
PNT-01
CORRIDOR
139
PSC-01
RB-01
PNT-01
I.T.
135
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
133
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
134
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
CUSTODIAL
138A
EP-01
-
PNT-06
CURING CLOSET
137B
SC-01
-
PNT-05
MECH
141
SC-01
RB-01
PNT-01
WOMEN'S
117
TL-01
-
**
MEN'S
115
TL-01
-
**
JANITOR
116
SC-01
RB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
121
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
124
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
122
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
123
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
119
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
120
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
OFFICE
125
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
CORRIDOR
118
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
CORRIDOR
131
CPT-01
CB-01
PNT-01
SEATING
126
CPT-03
-
PNT-01
CONCRETE TOOLS
137A
SC-01
-
PNT-06
CM TOOL STORAGE
137C
SC-01
-
PNT-06
1
(ELECTRIC
CHARGING
STATION)
2
(ELECTRIC
CHARGING
STATION)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13141516171819202122232425
26
26
BREAK ROOM
111B
LVT-01
RB-01
PNT-01
OPEN OFFICE
OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE (N.I.C.)OFFICE
RECEPTION
102
CPT-01
WB-01
PNT-01
CONFRENCE ROOM
(N.I.C.)
OFFICEOFFICE
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
TOOL BOX STORAGE
138C
EP-01
-
PNT-06
03.01
03.01
03.01
05.0105.01
02.11
08.01
11.05
SF
0
1
SF
0
1
SF
0
3
SF
0
2
SF
0
6
SF05
SF01
06.04
11.03 11.03 11.03 11.03 11.03
11.0411.0411.0411.0411.0411.04
08.01
SF
0
7
05.03
CP
T
-02
9' -
9
1
/
2
"
8' - 5"
CORRIDOR
103
CPT-01
WB-01
PNT-01
PN
T
-03
PATCH TO MATCH
EXISTING FINISHES
09.33
09.33
09.33
09.33
8' - 6 5/8"
18
'
-
4
"
SOILS STORAGE AND
COMPACTION
144
SC-01
3
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AF101
Finish Plan -
Level 1
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
GENERAL NOTES - FINISH PLAN
1 SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
2 ALL METAL STUDS WALLS TO DECK ABOVE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE; SEE
SHEET SERIES AE500 FOR WALL TYPES
3 PROVIDE DEFLECTION TRACKS AT ALL STUD WALLS, SEE DETAILS ON SHEET
SERIES AE500
4 ALL MATERIALS TO BE INSTALLED PER SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
5 ALL EXPOSED METAL TO BE INSTALLED PER SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER'S
INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS
6 FLOORING MATERIAL TRANSITIONS TO OCCUR AT CENTER LINE OF DOOR
THRESHOLDS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
7 PREPARE FLOORS/WALLS TO RECIEVE FINISH MATERIAL. REFER TO
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SURFACE PREPERATION. NOTIFY
ARCHITECT IF CONDITIONS ARE INADEQUATE FOR REQURED INSTALLATION.
8 REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE AND MATERIAL LEGEND ON SHEET SERIES
AF600 FOR MORE INFORMATION
9 SEE DIMENSION PLAN SHEET SERIES AE120 FOR WALL TYPE LOCATIONS; SEE
SHEET SERIES AE500 FOR WALL TYPE AND ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS
10 CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING AT ALL CASE WORK, FIXED
FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE WITH ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS,
FURNITURE AND FIXTURE SHEETS, AND SPECIFICATIONS. SEE SHEET SERIES AE900
FOR TYPICAL DETAILS
11 CREATE A CLEAN, STRAIGHT TRANSITION LINE FROM POLISHED SEALED CONCRETE
FLOORING TO SEALED CONCRETE FLOORING UNDER DOORS. USE APPROPRIATE
MEANS TO ACHIEVE A CLEAN TRANSITION
12 TILE INSTALLER TO FOLLOW TCNA & ANSI GUIDELINES, SEE SPECIFICAITONS.
13 ALL GROUT TO BE SEALED
14 ALL FLOOR CHANGES TO HAVE TRANSITION STRIP, SEE SCHEDULE.
KEYED NOTES
02.11 EXISTING STEAM LINE TO REMAIN
03.01 BACKFILL EXISTING LOADING BAY RECESSES AND TOP WITH CONCRETE
05.01 NEW LANDING, STAIRS AND GUARDRAIL AND RAILING (POWDER COATED - COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY
OWNER AND ARCHITECT.)
05.03 COLUMN WRAP PROTECTION - SENTRY CONCRETE WRAP CW0244-48
06.04 INFILL WALLS WITH FRAMING AND GYP BD. FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING, TYP.
08.01 NEW OPENING IN EXISTING WALL
09.33 CORNER GUARD CG-01, RE: FINISH SCHEDULE
11.03 12' X 16' STALL WITH 2" PAINTED STRIPING
11.04 12' X 18' STALL WITH 2" PAINTED STRIPING
11.05 CONCRETE WASH OUT. RE: INTERIOR FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT PLANS AND SCHEDULES
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Level 1 Finish Plan
TL
-03
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
UP
UP
FLOOR FINISH LEGEND
FEILD CARPET
Room name
101
F
B
W WALL FINISH
BASE FINISH
FLOOR FINISH
ROOM NAME
ROOM NUMBER
FINISH KEY
MATERIAL FINISH CODE
ARROWS REPRESENT
EXTENT OF SCOPE
CPT-02
CPT-01
CONCRETE - POLISHED
CONCRETE - SEALED
PSC-01
SC-01
** SEE ENLARGED FINISH PLANS + INTERIOR ELEVATIONS+ FINISH SCHEDULE
SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION *
XX
X
-X
ACCENT CARPET
TILE TL-01
EPOXY FLOORING EP-01
LUXURY VINYL TILE LVT-01
ACCENT CARPET CPT-03
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
BB
CC
1
1
8
8
AA
DD
EE
HIGH BAY MEZZANINE
201
SC-01
-
PNT-01
MECH
202
EP-01
EP-01
PNT-01
CE/CM STORAGE
MEZZANINE
203
SC-01
-
PNT-01
OPEN TO BELOW
OPEN TO BELOW
OPEN TO BELOW
OPEN TO BELOW
OPEN TO BELOW
3
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AF102
Finish Plan -
Mezzanine
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
GENERAL NOTES - FINISH PLAN
1 SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
2 ALL METAL STUDS WALLS TO DECK ABOVE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE; SEE
SHEET SERIES AE500 FOR WALL TYPES
3 PROVIDE DEFLECTION TRACKS AT ALL STUD WALLS, SEE DETAILS ON SHEET
SERIES AE500
4 ALL MATERIALS TO BE INSTALLED PER SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
5 ALL EXPOSED METAL TO BE INSTALLED PER SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER'S
INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS
6 FLOORING MATERIAL TRANSITIONS TO OCCUR AT CENTER LINE OF DOOR
THRESHOLDS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
7 PREPARE FLOORS/WALLS TO RECIEVE FINISH MATERIAL. REFER TO
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SURFACE PREPERATION. NOTIFY
ARCHITECT IF CONDITIONS ARE INADEQUATE FOR REQURED INSTALLATION.
8 REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE AND MATERIAL LEGEND ON SHEET SERIES
AF600 FOR MORE INFORMATION
9 SEE DIMENSION PLAN SHEET SERIES AE120 FOR WALL TYPE LOCATIONS; SEE
SHEET SERIES AE500 FOR WALL TYPE AND ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS
10 CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING AT ALL CASE WORK, FIXED
FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE WITH ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS,
FURNITURE AND FIXTURE SHEETS, AND SPECIFICATIONS. SEE SHEET SERIES AE900
FOR TYPICAL DETAILS
11 CREATE A CLEAN, STRAIGHT TRANSITION LINE FROM POLISHED SEALED CONCRETE
FLOORING TO SEALED CONCRETE FLOORING UNDER DOORS. USE APPROPRIATE
MEANS TO ACHIEVE A CLEAN TRANSITION
12 TILE INSTALLER TO FOLLOW TCNA & ANSI GUIDELINES, SEE SPECIFICAITONS.
13 ALL GROUT TO BE SEALED
14 ALL FLOOR CHANGES TO HAVE TRANSITION STRIP, SEE SCHEDULE.
KEYED NOTES
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Level 2 Finish Plan
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
GENERAL NOTES
A. ALL MATERIALS LISTED MUST BE APPROVED BY SUBMITTAL
PROCESS TO THE ARCHITECT
B. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE 3' X 3' ON-SITE PAINT MOCK-UP FOR
COLOR APPROVAL BY ARCHITECT PRIOR TO COMMENCING
PAINTING WORK
C. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, TILE INSTALLER IS TO FOLLOW TNCA
& ANSI STANDARDS; ALL APPROPRIATE TRIM PIECES TO BE
INCLUDED WITH TILE
D. NO SUBSTITUTIONS OR OMISSIONS PERMITTED WITHOUT PRIOR
WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM ARCHITECT
E. ARCHITECT TO SELECT FROM FULL RANGE OF COLORS AND
FINISHES OFFERED BY MANUFACTURERS, INCLUDING CUSTOM
F. USE CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANCE UNDERA ALL TILE
INSTALLATIONS
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AF601
Finish,
Accessory,
Appliance, &
Transition
Schedule
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
SCHEDULED MATERIALS AND FINISHES SHALL BE USED FOR BASIS OF DESIGN U.N.O.
FINISH SCHEDULE
CODE PRODUCT TYPE MANUFACTURER STYLE COLOR SPECIFICATION FINISH NOTES/ REMARKS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
PS-01 POLISHED SEALED CONCRETE UP TO 3200 GRIT HIGH GLOSS POLISHED FINISH, SILICATE HARDENER/SEALER AND PENETRATING
SEALER; SEE SPECIFICATION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. GENERAL CONCRETE FINISH. SEE
FINISH PLAN FOR LOCATIONS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
SC-01 SEALED CONCRETE SEE FINISH PLAN FOR LOCATIONS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
DIVISION 05 - METALS
MP-01 HOT ROLLED STEEL -16 GAUGE STEEL CLEAR COAT SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIOS FOR LOCATION
MP-02 STEEL ANGLE IRON -3X3X1/8 CLEAR COAT SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIOS FOR LOCATION
MP-03 HOT ROLLED STEEL -3X1/8 CLEAR COAT SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIOS FOR LOCATION
DIVISION 06 - WOODS, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES
FRP-01 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANEL MARLITE STANDARD FRP - SMOOTH S 100G WHITE @ JANOTOR & CUSTODIAL, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATION
PL-01 PLASTIC LAMINATE NEVAMAR FIRE RATED HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE GLISTENING TRAILS - WH1000 SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATION
PL-02 PLASTIC LAMINATE WILSONART 78 FINEGRAIN FINISH WITH AEON MONTANA WALNUT @ BREAKROOM & AUTO TOOL ROOM, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS
PL-03 PLASTIC LAMINATE WILSONART 38 FINE VELVET TEXTURE FINISH PEARL SOAPSTONE @ AUTO TOOL ROOM, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS
DIVISION 09 - BASE & TRANSITIONS
CB-01 CARPET WALL BASE INTERFACE 4" FREQUENCY II REPENTED 9422 SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATIONS NIC: SUGGESTED CARPET BASE, OWNER PROVIDED/ OWNER INSTALLED.
RB-01 RUBBER WALL BASE JOHNSONITE 4" TOE 63 BURNT UMBER B SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATIONS
RB-02 RUBBER WALL BASE JOHNSONITE 4" TOELESS TA1 TANNERY WB @ CASEWORK, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS TO BE USED W/ PL-01 CASEWORK
RB-03 RUBBER WALL BASE JOHNSONITE 4" TOELESS 76 CINNAMON @ CASEWORK, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS TO BE USED W/ PL-02 CASEWORK
WB-01 WOOD WALL BASE BYU-IDAHO STANDARD 4"TO MATCH EXISTING SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATIONS WOOD STAINED TO MATCH EXISTING
DIVISION 09 - CEILINGS
ACP-01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL USG HALCYON LOGIX ACOUSTICAL PANELS, 2X2 WHITE SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDATIONS.
SQUARE EDGE. 0.95 NRC RATING.
ACP-03 SPECIALTY CEILING ARMSTRONG TECTUM DIRECT-ATTACH CEILING, 2x8, NO DESIGN TO MATCH DECK PAINT SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDATIONS.
ACP-04 SPECIALTY CEILING ARMSTRONG TECTUM DIRECT-ATTACH CEILING, 2x4, NO DESIGN TO MATCH DECK PAINT SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDATIONS.
DIVISION 09 - FLOORS
CPT-01 CARPET TILE INTERFACE FREQUENCY II, 19X19 REPENTED 9422 @ COORIDORS, LOBBY, RECEPTIONS, SEE FINISH FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALL PER
MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATION
FIELD CARPET; NIC: SUGGESTED CARPET, OWNER PROVIDED/ OWNER
INSTALLED.
CPT-02 CARPET TILE INTERFACE STEP REPEAT SR699, 19x19 IRON @ STUDENT COLLABORATION, SEE FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDATIONS.
ACCENT CARPET; NIC: SUGGESTED CARPET, OWNER PROVIDED/ OWNER
INSTALLED.
CPT-03 CARPET TILE INTERFACE ON LINE 138700AKOO, 9x39 PEPPER 103788 @ SEATING, SEE FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDATIONS.
ACCENT CARPET; NIC: SUGGESTED CARPET, OWNER PROVIDED/ OWNER
INSTALLED.
EP-01 EPOXY FLOORING BYU-IDAHO STANDARD TBD TO MATCH EXISTING SEE FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS.
LVT-01 LUXURY VINYL TILE DALTILE BELLANT, 36x36 BL32 CONCRETE GREY @ BREAKROOMS, SEE FINISH FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER
RECOMMENDATION
DIVISION 09 - PAINT & WALLCOVERING
FW-01 FELT WALLCOVERING FILZFELT RIBSY 24X6X5/8 175 GRAPHITE @ STUDENT COLLABORATION RE: ELEVATIONS FOR DIMENSIONS AND LOCATION. INSTALLATION
PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.
TO BE PRECUT PLANKS.
PNT-01 FIELD WALL PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS -SHELL WHITE (BYU-IDAHO CUSTOM COLOR)FIELD PAINT SEE FINISH PLANS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCAITONS. MEDIUM LUSTER FINISH
PNT-02 CEILING PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS -SHELL WHITE (BYU-IDAHO CUSTOM COLOR)RE: REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR LOCATIONS.MATTE FINISH
PNT-03 CEILING PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS -IRON ORE @ STUDENT COLLABORATION EXPOSED CEILING AND WALL, SEATING AREA WALL RE: INTERIOR
ELEVAITONS AND REFLECTED CEILING PLANS.
MATTE FINISH
PNT-04 DOOR JAMB PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS -IRON ORE @ DOOR, STAIRS, JAMBS, RAILS RE: DOOR SCHEDULE AND FLOOR PLANS SEMI-GLOSS FINISH
PNT-05 2 PART EPOXY WALL PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS PRO INDUSTRIAL HIGH PERFORMANCE EPOXY SHELL WHITE (BYU-IDAHO CUSTOM COLOR)@ CONCRETE CURING ROOM RE: INTERIOR ELEVAITONS AND REFLECTED CEILING PLANS. SEMI-GLOSS FINISH
PNT-06 EPOXY WALL PAINT CLOVERDALE (ALKALIDE ENAMEL)-RENAISSANCE @ SHOPS, RE: INTERIOR ELEVAITONS AND REFLECTED CEILING PLANS. SEMI-GLOSS FINISH
DIVISION 09 - TILE
TL-01 FLOOR TILE DALTILE VERTUO 12X24 MAESTRO VR10 @ RESTROOMS, SEE FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALLATION PER MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDATIONS, 1/8" GROUT JOINT, GROUT TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM FULL
COLOR RANGE
TL-02 WALL TILE DALTILE COLOR WHEEL LINEAR 2X8 MATTE ARCTIC WHITE 0790 @ RESTROOMS, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS. INSTALLATION PER
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, 1/8" GROUT JOINT, GROUT TO BE SELECTED BY
ARCHITECT FROM FULL COLOR RANGE
TL-03 WALL TILE CROSSVILLE RETRO ACTIVE 2.0 PATTERNS, 6x24 ROYAL NAVY PATTERN @ RESTROOMS, DRINING FOUNTAIN, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCAITONS. INSTALLATION
PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, 1/8" GROUT JOINT, GROUT TO BE SELECTED BY
ARCHITECT FROM FULL COLOR RANGE
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
CG-01 CORNER GUARD KOROGARD GS15, 1-1/2"STAINLESS STEEL @ ALL EXPOSED FINISH CORNERS IN HIGH TRAFFIC AREAS, QTY 4. MOUNT AT 5" AFF. INSTALL PER
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. SEE FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATION & QTY.
FC-01 FIRE CABINET JL ACADEMY SEMI-RECESSED ALUMINUM SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS, INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS.
MB-02 MARKER BOARD ADP LEMCO PORCELAIN, 24 GUAGE, ALUMINUM BACKING &
TRIM, 4X6
STANDARD OFF WHITE @ STUDENT COLLABORATION & SHOPS, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATION. INSTALL PER
MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS.
CONTRACTOR PROVIDED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
FB-01 UPHOLSTERY DESIGNTEX BILLIARD CLOTH 3549-804 PEWTER @ STUDENT COLLABORATION, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND CASEWORK DETAILS FOR
LOCATIONS.
FB-02 UPHOLSTERY MOMENTUM SILICA ARCHITECT TO SELECT FROM FULL RANGE OF COLORS @ STUDENT COLLABORATION, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND CASEWORK DETAILS FOR
LOCATIONS.
QTZ-01 QUARTZ COUNTERTOP PENTAL QUARTZ 3CM BC217P SPARKLING GRAY @ BREAKROOMS, STUDENT COLLAB, RESTROOMS, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS.
INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS.
RS-01 MANUAL ROLLER SHADE MECHO 5 MANUAL SHADE - EXTENDED BRACKET EQUINOX BLACKOUT GRAPHITE 0117 @ SOUTH AND WEST WINDOWS, SEE RCP'S FOR LOCATION & QUANTITY. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR
MORE INFORMATION.
0% OPEN
SS-01 SOLID SURFACE CORIAN SOLID SURFACE 3CM WHITE JASMINE @ WINDOW SILLS, SEE WINDOW DETAILS FOR LOCATION
ST-01 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOP -14 GAUGE -@ SHOP COUNTERTOPS, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIOS FOR LOCATION SATIN FINISH
SCEDULED MATERIALS AND FINISHES SHALL BE USED FOR BASIS OF DESIGN U.N.O.
ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
CODE PRODUCT TYPE MANUFACTURER MAKE/MODEL FINISH PROVIDED/INSTALLED BY COMMENTS
05.03 COLUMN WRAP PROTECTION CROWN 351096-040 ROUND YELLOW 12" CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.01 MIRROR - POLISHED EDGE 24"X40" FRAMELESS CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED USE MIRROR ADHESIVE, DIRECT GLUE TO WALL, NO HARDWARE. SEE
ELEVATIONS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS.
10.02 URINAL PARTITION SCRANTON PRODUCTS HINY HIDERS, WALL MOUNTED GREY, ORANGE PEEL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.03 SOAP DISPENSER - WALL MOUNTED WAXIE 1250ML CLEAN TOUCH MANUAL FOAM
DISPENSER #386317
CHROME/BLACK OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.05 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER BOBRICK SURFAC-MOUNTED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER /
B-262
SATIN STAINLESS STEEL OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.06 TOILET PARTITION SCRANTON PRODUCTS HINY HIDERS GREY, ORANGE PEEL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.07 BABY CHANGING STATION BOBRICK / KOALA HORIZONTAL RECESS MOUNTED #KB110-SSRE STAINLESS STEEL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.08 TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER BOBRICK B-221 - SURFACE MOUNTED SATIN STAINLESS STEEL OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.09 18" GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-5806 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.10 36" GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-5806 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.11 42" GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-5806 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.12 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER BOBRICK B37063C / TRIMLINE SERIES RECESSED STAINLESS STEEL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.13 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL BOBRICK B-35139 SURFACE-MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.15 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER BOBRICK B-274 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.16 BULLETIN BOARD DISPLAY FORBO BULLITEN BOARD 90"X48" POTATOE SKIN 2182 CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.17 COAT HOOK RICHELIEU 4" SINGLE METAL COAT HOOK / RH1163011195 BRUSHED NICKLE OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.18 WHEEL DISPLAY HOOK PRESTIGE WHEEL MWDH-100 BLACK CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.19 SPEED BRACE FASTCAP SPEED BRACE WHITE 8X12 CONTRACTOR PROVIDED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
10.22 MOP/BROOM HOOK BOBRICK 239-34 STAINLESS STEEL OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
11.06 TELEVISION MONITOR - -72" SCREEN OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
TRANSITION SCHEDULE
CODE LOCATION MANUFACTURER
PRODUCT
NAME/NUMBER COLOR/FINISH SPECIFICATION
TS-01 CARPET TO
CONCRETE
JOHNSONITE SLIM LINE
TRANSITION
63 BURNT UMBER B HEIGHT TO MATCH MATERIAL THICKNESS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUCTIONS | SUB-CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM SIZE. SEE DETAIL A1/AE572.
TS-02 TILE TO CARPET SCHLUTER RENO-U SATIN ANODIZED ALUMINUM HEIGHT TO MATCH MATERIAL THICKNESS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUCTIONS | SUB-CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM SIZE. SEE DETAIL A2/AE572.
TS-03
TILE EDGE, TILE
CORNER
SCHLUTER JOLLY SATIN ANODIZED ALUMINUM HEIGHT TO MATCH MATERIAL THICKNESS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUCTIONS | SUB-CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM SIZE. SEE DETAILS
A4/AE572, A6/AE572, & B1/AE572.
TS-04 COVE BASE SCHLUTER DILEX-HKS SATIN ANODIZED ALUMINUM HEIGHT TO MATCH MATERIAL THICKNESS. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUCTIONS | SUB-CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM SIZE. SEE DETAIL A3/AE572.
APPLIANCE SCHEDULE
CODE PRODUCT SIZE PROVIDED BY/INSTALLED BY COMMENTS
11.07 REFRIGERATOR 36WX72HX30D OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED @ BREAKROOMS, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS.
11.10 MICROWAVE 24WX14HX19D OWNER PROVIDED/OWNER INSTALLED @ BREAKROOMS, SEE INTIERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS.
1 Addendum #1 11/5/20
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
JCD1
F
CR
F F
F
DC
DC
DC
F F
F F F
F
F
CR
F
F
CR
S
RT-5
S
RT-1
S
AH-1
S
RT
-
2
S
RT-4
UP
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
BB
1
1
8
8
AA
A-14a A-14 A-14
A-14a
AT-1
AT-1 AT-1A-17
A-12 A-12A-12 A-12
A-19
AT-1
A-11
A-9
A-10
A-8
A-8
A-7
EL-2
A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1
A-1A-1A-1A-1A-1A-1A-1A-1A-1A-1A-1A-1
A-1
EL-1 EL-1
EL-1
EL-1
EL-1 EL-1
EL-1 EL-1 EL-1EL-1
EL-1 EL-1
EL-1 EL-1
EL-1 EL-1EL-1 EL-1
EL-3
A-20
A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20
A-20A-20A-20A-20A-20
A-20
A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20 A-20
A-20
A-20
EL-4
AT-6
MATCHLINE MATCHLINE
AUTOMOTIVE SHOP
138
CE STORAGE
140
MECH
141
AUTO STORAGE
142
ENGINES LAB
143
AUTO TOOL ROOM
138B
A-7
EL-1
A-1
A-1
A-1
EL-9 EL-9 EL-9
EL-9EL-9EL-9
EL-9 EL-9 EL-9
EL-9EL-9EL-9
EL-9
EL-9
EL-9 EL-9
EL-9EL-9
EL-9
AT-7AT-7
AT-7
AT-7
AT-7
AT-7
A-1
A-2
A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2
A-2
A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2
A-2A-2A-2A-2A-2A-2A-2A-2A-2A-2A-2A-2
A-3
A-3
A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3
A-3A-3A-3A-3A-3A-3A-3A-3A-3A-3A-3
A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4
A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4A-4
A-4
A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5
A-5A-5A-5
A-5
A-5A-5
A-5
EL-14 EL-14 EL-14 EL-14 EL-14
EL-14EL-14EL-14EL-14 EL-14
EL-6
EL-13
EL-13EL-13EL-13
EL-13
EL-13
EL-13 EL-13 EL-13 EL-13
AT-2
AT-2
AT-2
AT-2
AT-2
AT-2
A-1
TOOL BOX
STORAGE
138C
AT-1
AT-1
AT-1
AT-1
AT-1
AT-1
A-17 A-17
A-17A-17
A-17 A-17
A-17 A-17
A-17A-17
A-17A-17
A-17
A-17
A-6a
EL-9
EL-9EL-9EL-9
EL-9
EL-9
EL-9 EL-9 EL-9
EL-9
A-14a A-14a A-14a
CC-1
CS-26 EL-8EL-8 EL-8 EL-8EL-5 EL-5HB-17
CC-2
CC-4 CC-3
A
KEY PLAN
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AI101a
Interior
Furnishings &
Equipment
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Level 1 Furnishings & Equipment Plan "A"
FURNITURE SCHEDULE - LEVEL 1 AREA A
Room # Room Name
Type
Mark Asset Name Count Existing New Future CFCI OFCI OFOI Special Requirements
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-1 2' x 5' Work Bench 26 ●
138B AUTO TOOL ROOM A-1 2' x 5' Work Bench 3 ●
138B AUTO TOOL ROOM AT-7 Task Chair 6 ●
143 ENGINES LAB EL-1 2' x 5' Work Bench 19 ● Storage Below
143 ENGINES LAB EL-6 Teaching Station w/ Computer 1 ●● Integrated Computer, Monitor & A/V control.
143 ENGINES LAB EL-8 White Board 4 ● ● See schedules on sheet AF601
143 ENGINES LAB EL-9 Shop Stool 28 ●
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - LEVEL 1 AREA A
Room # Room Name
Type
Mark Asset Name
Manufac
turer Model Count
Dimensions
Existing New CFCI OFCI OFOI Special RequirementsH L W
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-2 100' Hose Reel 26 1' - 1 1/4" ● ●
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-3 Exhaust Ventilation Hose Reel 26 1' - 1 1/4" ● ●
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-4 Drop Light w/ Electrical Outlet 26 1' - 1 1/4" ● ●
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-5 Water Hose Reel 13 1' - 1 1/4" ● ●
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-8 Telescoping Transmission Jack Strongway 46203 2 2' - 4"● ●
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-12 Heavy Duty Tool Shelving 4 ● ●
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-14 Two Post Automotive Lift Rotary SP012U7T5 3 ● ● 208-230V, 1PH, 20A, These two (2) lifts are to be part of the construction scope. All necessary connections and services for all eight (8) lift locations to be installed during this project. The exact
stall location for the two lifts to be determined by the owner.
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-14a Two Post Automotive Lift (Optional) Rotary SP012U7T5 5 ● ● 208-230V, 1PH, 20A, These six (6) lifts are optional for the owner. Provide electrical connections, necessary structural bases, and other related services for all eight lift locations. So that if or when
the owner purchases additional lifts, they can install the lifts in the planned stalls.
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-19 Heavy Duty Delivery Shelf 1 ● ●
138 AUTOMOTIVE SHOP A-20 Waste Bin 22 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" ● ●
138B AUTO TOOL ROOM AT-1 Heavy Duty Shelving 10 ● ● `
138B AUTO TOOL ROOM AT-2 Desktop Computer 6 1' - 2"● ●
138B AUTO TOOL ROOM AT-6 Pharos Printing Station Lulzbot MINI 1 2' - 6"● ●
138C TOOL BOX STORAGE A-17 Student Tool Box 15 3' - 0" ●● Student Provided
140 CE STORAGE CC-1 Curing Tank 1 7' - 0" ●● This is in addition to the curing room. This would serve as a submerged curing chamber while the room would be humidity controled. A floor drain in the curing room will be necessary.
140 CE STORAGE CC-2 Cooling Cabinet 1 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" ●●
140 CE STORAGE CC-3 Coating Machine 1 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" ●●
140 CE STORAGE CC-4 Meter 1 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" ●●
140 CE STORAGE CS-26 Chest Freezer 1 3' - 0" ●●
140 CE STORAGE HB-17 Molding Rack 1 16' - 0"● ●
142 AUTO STORAGE A-9 Used Oil Tank New Pig PAK248 1 3' - 4" ●●
142 AUTO STORAGE A-10 Used Coolant Tank New Pig PAK248 1 3' - 4" ●● 240V, 1PH, 20-30A
142 AUTO STORAGE A-11 Sm Parts Washer Cuda Cuda 1 4' - 0" ●● Cold Water Supply Needed
143 ENGINES LAB A-20 Waste Bin 2 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" ● ●
143 ENGINES LAB EL-2 Wheeled Tool Storage Cart 1 3' - 0" ●●
143 ENGINES LAB EL-3 Folding Engine Stand JEGS 80039 1 3' - 6"● ●
143 ENGINES LAB EL-4 Tool Storage Cabinet Matco 4S Triple Bay 25" 1 2' - 1"● ●
143 ENGINES LAB EL-5 Monitor 2 ● ●
143 ENGINES LAB EL-13 Drop Down Electrical Cord 10 1' - 1 1/4" ● ●
143 ENGINES LAB EL-14 Compressed Air Hose Reel 10 1' - 1 1/4" ● ●
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
3
3
4
3
3
UP
UP
REF.
RE
F
.
CR
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
CC
1
1
8
8
DD
EE
HB-9
HB-1 HB-1HB-1
HB-3HB-3 HB-3 CS-33
CS-1 CS-1 CS-1
CS-33CS-33
HB-4
HB-5
HB-7HB-8
HB-11
HB-6
HB-10
HB-12
HB-13 HB-13 HB-13 HB-13 HB-13 HB-13
HB-13
HB-13
HB-13HB-13
HB-14
CT-1
CT-1
A-20
A-20
A-20
A-20
A-20
A-20
A-20
A-20
HB-15
MATCHLINE MATCHLINE
HIGH BAY SHOP
137 STUDENT
COLLABORATION
136
CORRIDOR
139
OFFICE
133
OFFICE
134
I.T.
135
CM / CE LAB
132
CM/CE TOOL ROOM
132A
FIRE RISER
132B
VESTIBULE
101
CORRIDOR
131
SEATING
126
CORRIDOR
118
OFFICE
119
OFFICE
120
OFFICE
121
OFFICE
122
OFFICE
123
OFFICE
124
OFFICE
125
OFFICE
127
OFFICE
128
OFFICE
129
BREAK ROOM
130
JANITOR
116
WOMEN'S
117
MEN'S
115
CORRIDOR
103
RECEPTION
102
OFFICE
104
CONFRENCE ROOM
(N.I.C.)
114
OFFICE
112
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
105
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
106
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
107
OPEN OFFICE
111
OFFICE
110
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
109
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
108
CURING CLOSET
137B
CS-1
CS-38
CS-38
CS-38 CS-38CS-38 CS-5 CS-35
CS-2
HB-28 HB-28 HB-28
CS-6 CS-6 CS-6 CS-6
CS-6CS-6CS-6CS-6
CS-6 CS-6 CS-6 CS-6
CS-6CS-6CS-6CS-6
CS-7
CS-7 CS-7 CS-7
AT-1AT-1AT-1AT-1
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
113
CS-34 CS-34
CS-8
CS-9CS-9CS-9
CS-10
CS-11CS-11CS-11
CS-12
CS-12
CS-12
CS-13 CS-13 CS-13
CS-13
CS-14
CS-15
CS-15
CS-39
CS-16
CS-17CS-18 CS-20 CS-20CS-19
CS-21
CS-22
CS-23
CS-24CS-24
CS-25CS-25
CS-28
CS-32
CS-30
CS-31
HB-13
EL-2
ST-4
CM TOOL STORAGE
137C
160 SF / 4 OCC
CONCRETE TOOLS
137A
112 SF / 3 OCC
CT-1
CT-1
ST-11
ST-11
ST-12
ST-4
OS-5
OS-1
CS-33
CS-3
CS-36
CS-37
CS-22
CS-22
EL-14
EL-14 EL-14 EL-14
EL-14 EL-14 EL-14
EL-14 EL-14
EL-14
EL-14 EL-14
EL-14
EL-14
EL-14
CS-38
CS-38
CS-39
EL-14
CS-29
(ABOVE CS-21)
(UNDER CS-21)
AT-2
CS-4
CS-4
CS-27
CS-24
CS-15
EXISTING SPIGOT AND DRAIN
CS-40
A-20
AT-1
AT-1
EL-14
ST-14
ST-14
ST-15 ST-15
ST-13
ST-13ST-16
ST-16 ST-16 ST-16
CS-41
HB-18 HB-16
HB-16HB-20
HB-19 HB-21HB-21HB-21HB-21HB-21
HB-22HB-22HB-22HB-22HB-22HB-22 (Located in Mezzanine
Above)open shelves
B
KEY PLAN
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005
AI101b
Interior
Furnishings &
Equipment
20.0220
october 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
1/8" = 1'-0"A1 Level 1 Furnishings & Equipment Plan "B"
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - LEVEL 1 AREA B
Room
#
Room
Name
Type
Mark Asset Name
Man
ufac
-ture
r
Mo
del Count
Dimensions
Existing New CFCI OFCI OFOI Mounting Requirements Special RequirementsH L W
132A CM/CE TOOL
ROOM
HB-13 Compound Miter Saw 1 2' - 4"●
132A CM/CE TOOL
ROOM
ST-11 UV Transmitter Meter 2 1' - 0" ●●Stored in cabinet when not in use. One new, one existing.
137 HIGH BAY SHOP A-20 Waste Bin 6 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" ● ●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP CS-27 Sulfer Capping Compound
Melting Pot
1 1' - 6" ●●Cabinet storage space for sulfur compound chips. Fume Hood Required.
137 HIGH BAY SHOP CS-28 Vertical Capper Mold 1 1' - 0" ●●Install below Fume Hood.
137 HIGH BAY SHOP CS-29 Fume Hood Labconc
o
XStrea
m
1 4' - 0" ● ●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP EL-14 Compressed Air Hose Reel 6 1' - 1 1/4" ● ●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-4 Table Saw Delta 36-L35
2
1 4' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-5 Bandsaw Jet JWBS-
16B
1 3' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-6 Jointer Delta 855W4
80
1 4' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-7 Belt Sander Powerm
atic
DS-20-
3
1 2' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-8 Combo Sander Delta 855W4
80
1 3' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-9 Drill Press 1 2' - 6" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-10 Panel Saw Delta 855W4
80
1 10' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-11 Brake Press 70 Tons 1 8' - 1" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-12 Metal Abrasive Chop Saw 1 1' - 6" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-13 Compound Miter Saw 10 2' - 4" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-14 Tile Saw 1 3' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-15 Table Saw Dust Collector 1 2' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-16 Scaffolding 2 6' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-18 Masonry Saw 1 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 2' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-19 Concrete Compression
Tester
1 3' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-20 Concrete Rupture Tester 1 2' - 0" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-21 Ladder 5 10' - 0" 2' - 0" 6" ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-28 Stainless Steel Sink 3 ● ●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP ST-4 Concrete Mixer 1 3' - 4" ●● Bolted to counter top. Will be stored and moved to mixing locations when used. Mixing location should be close to water and
washout.
137 HIGH BAY SHOP ST-13 Heavy Duty Shelving 1 8' - 0" ● ●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP ST-16 Material Storage Rack 4 3' - 0" ●●
137A CONCRETE TOOLS CT-1 Heavy Duty Shelving 4 ● ●Moisture Resistant with Grided Shelf for drainage
137B CURING CLOSET AT-1 Heavy Duty Shelving 2 ● ●
137B CURING CLOSET HB-22 Saw Horse 6 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 1' - 6" ●●
137C CM TOOL
STORAGE
ST-13 Heavy Duty Shelving 1 8' - 0" ● ●
137C CM TOOL
STORAGE
ST-14 Heavy Duty Shelving 2 7' - 0" ● ●
137C CM TOOL
STORAGE
ST-15 Heavy Duty Shelving 2 5' - 0" ● ●
137D HB SHOP OUTSIDE OS-1 Concrete Wash Out 1 6' - 0" ●●Located Outside
137D HB SHOP OUTSIDE OS-5 Dumpster 1 14' - 0" ●●Located Outside
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - LEVEL 1 AREA B
Room
#
Room
Name
Type
Mark Asset Name
Man
ufac
-ture
r
Mo
del Count
Dimensions
Existing New CFCI OFCI OFOI Mounting Requirements Special RequirementsH L W
132 CM / CE LAB A-20 Waste Bin 4 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" ● ●
132 CM / CE LAB AT-2 Desktop Computer 1 1' - 2" ● ●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-4 Soils/Asphalt Oven 2 3' - 0" ●●Exhaust for Ovens, Capping Molds, Melting Pots provided by Mechanical Contractor. See Mechanical
Dwgs.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-5 New Stainless Steel Sink 1 ● ●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-8 Specific Gravity Scale 1 2' - 1" ●●Locate near floor drain
132 CM / CE LAB CS-9 Small Sleeve Shaker 3 1' - 0" ●● Bolted to counter top.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-10 Sleeve Cleaner 1 1' - 1" ●● Sits on counter top (2) 110V Outlets Needed. Needs to be next to a sink for water and drainage. Provide Tempered Water.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-11 Small Balance 3 1' - 0" ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-12 Medium Balance 3 1' - 0" ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-14 Small Soil Mixer 1 1' - 0" ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-15 Large Soil Mixer 3 1' - 3" ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-16 Microwave Oven 1 2' - 0" ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-17 Asphalt Gyratory
Compactor
1 4' - 0" ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-18 Instron Testing Machine 1 6' - 0" ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-19 Instron Computer & Cart 1 2' - 0" ●●Locate next to Instron Testing Machine
132 CM / CE LAB CS-20 Soils Direct Shear Testing
Device
Humbol
dt
2 4' - 0" ●●Must be located near other soils testing equipment that have this note.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-21 Soils Flex Panel Humbol
dt
1 2' - 0" ●● Mounted to counter top Must be located near other soils testing equipment that have this note. Compressed air required.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-22 Vacuum Pump 1 1' - 0" ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-23 De-aired Water Tank Humbol
dt
1 1' - 0" ●● Attaches to the flex panel. One must be located near other soils testing equipment that have this note. The other two must be
located near location for Jar Tests.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-24 Pro-Loader and Triaxial
Cell
Humbol
dt
1 1' - 0" ● ● Needs to be mounted to a small shelf 3' to 6'
above top of flex panel for gravity feed of water
into panel. Need some way to connect to wall to
prevent tipping and falling.
Must be located near other soils testing equipment that have this note. Air, water, vacuum provided
through flex panel.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-25 Consolidometer Humbol
dt
2 2' - 10" ● ● Must be bolted to a solid counter top to support
applied weights. Narrow dimention is toward the
front of the counter and overhangs counter by 7"
to 8".
Must be located near other soils testing equipment that have this note. Air, water, vacuum provided
through flex panel.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-30 Jar Test Apparatus (4 Jars) 1 1' - 6" ●●Must have space to remain set up throughout semester
132 CM / CE LAB CS-31 Jar Test Apparatus (6 Jars) 1 1' - 6" ●●Must have space to remain set up throughout semester
132 CM / CE LAB CS-32 Analytical Balance 1 1' - 0" ●●Must have space to remain set up throughout semester
132 CM / CE LAB CS-35 Existing Stainless Steel
Sink
1 ● ●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-37 Short Throw Projector 1 8' - 0" ● ●Connects with Short Throw Projector
132 CM / CE LAB EL-14 Compressed Air Hose Reel 1 1' - 1 1/4" ● ●
132 CM / CE LAB ST-12 Turbidity Meter 1 1' - 0" ●●Stored in cabinet when not in use. One new, one existing.
132A CM/CE TOOL
ROOM
AT-1 Heavy Duty Shelving 4 ● ●Moisture Resistant with Grided Shelf for drainage
132A CM/CE TOOL
ROOM
CS-7 Heavy Duty Shelving 4 ●●
132A CM/CE TOOL
ROOM
CS-13 Large Balance 4 1' - 0" ●●
132A CM/CE TOOL
ROOM
CS-22 Vacuum Pump 2 1' - 0" ●●
FURNITURE SCHEDULE - LEVEL 1 AREA B
Room
#
Room
Name
Type
Mark Asset Name Count Existing New CFCI OFCI OFOI Special Requirements
132 CM / CE LAB CS-1 5' x 5' Wood Top Project Table 4 ●● New Table, Power Drop Above Each Table.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-3 3' x 8' Stainless Steel Teaching Work Bench 1 ●● Table with Casters
132 CM / CE LAB CS-6 CM/CE Classroom Chair 16 ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-33 5' x 5' Wood Top Project Table 4 ●● Existing Table With Lockers. Power Drop Above Each Table
132 CM / CE LAB CS-34 5' x 5' Stainless Steel Project Table 2 ●● New Table, Power Drop Above Each Table.
132 CM / CE LAB CS-36 Teaching Station w/ Computer 1 ●● Connects with Short Throw Projector
132 CM / CE LAB CS-38 Existing Open Storage Cabinets 2 ●● Existing Casework to be relocated
132 CM / CE LAB CS-39 Existing Open Storage Metal Cabinets 1 ● ● Existing Casework to be relocated
132 CM / CE LAB CS-40 2' x 5' Stainless Steel Top Work Table 1 ●●
132 CM / CE LAB CS-41 3' x 6' Stainless Steel Work Table 1 ●● Table with Casters
137 HIGH BAY SHOP CS-2 2' x 8' Stainless Steel Top Work Table 1 ●●
137 HIGH BAY SHOP CS-38 Existing Open Storage Cabinets 5 ● ● Existing Casework to be relocated
137 HIGH BAY SHOP CS-39 Existing Open Storage Metal Cabinets 1 ● ● Existing Casework to be relocated
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-1 Wood Top Work Table 3 ●● Existing Table With Lockers. Power Drop Above Each Table
137 HIGH BAY SHOP HB-3 2' x 8' Stainless Steel Top Work Table 3 ●● Installed on Casters. Power Drop Above Each Table
3 Addendum #3 11/13/2020
33
3
November 13, 2020
BYUI Engineering Technology Center (ETC) Addendum #3
SE-101
1. Modified recess floor area to match Architect.
SE-501
1. Detail 5/SE-501: Modified depth of concrete on metal deck to 8”. Changed angle to
L8x4x12/4. This was to make adjustments for recess slab for bath rooms.
Thanks,
Donald Lee Barfuss
INDICATES NOTES ARE KEYED ON PLAN.
1.SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR SLOPES AND RECESSES
IN FLOOR SLABS
2.FOR CONCRETE WALL REINFORCING, SEE CONCRETE WALL
SCHEDULE ON SHEET SE-002.
3.FOR CONCRETE PIER/COLUMN REINFORCING, SEE CONCRETE
PIER SCHEDULE ON SHEET SE-002.
4.FOR CORNER, INTERSECTION, AND END BARS IN CONCRETE
WALLS SEE DETAILS A1 AND A2/SE-501.
5.FOR CONTROL JOINTS IN SLABS ON GRADE SEE DETAIL
B4/SE-501.
GENERAL SHEET NOTES
INDICATES NOTES ARE KEYED ON PLAN.
1 DRILL AND EPOXY TO EXISTING. 5" MINIMUM EMBEDMENT.
2 DEMOLISH SLAB TO INSTALL NEW FRENCH DRAIN, SEE SHEET
M301 FOR PIPE RUNNING PARALLEL TO FRENCH DRAIN.
REPAIR AS REQ'D.
3 INFILL MASONRY WALL, SEE DETAIL A1/SE-511
4 INFILL DOCK LEVELER WITH 6" REINFORCED CONCRETE
WALLS AND SLAB WITH #4 AT 18"O.C. EACH WAY. FILL
WITH GRAVEL.
5 DEMOLISH SLAB TO INSTALL NEW FOUNDATION FOR
MEZANINE. REPLACE AS REQ'D.
6 NOT USED.
7 MODIFY FLOOR VENTS, COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL
FILL EXISTNIG VENT OPENINGS WITH 1/4" PLATE THAT
EXTENDS 3" PAST OPENING AND SCREW INTO CONCRETE
WITH 1/4"Ø SIMPSON CONCRETE SCREWS AT 4" O.C.
CUT NEW OPENINGS WITH DRILLED HOLES AT CORNERS
AND CUTTING BETWEEN HOLES. DO NOT OVERCUT CORNERS.
8 PROVIDE NEW 6" CONCRETE SLAB ON 4" FREE DRAINING
GRAVEL. REINFORCE WITH #4 AT 18"O.C. EACH WAY,
CENTER OF SLAB
10 NEW MW-8A REINFORCED MASONRY WALL ON 12"X2' FOOTING.
11 LOWER SLAB TO BE SAME ELEVATION AS MAIN BUILDING.
NEW 6" SLAB ON GRADE.
12. FREEZER SLAB: REMOVE EXISTING TOP SLAB AND FOAM.
FILL WITH GRAVEL AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE 5" SLAB ON
GRADE REINFORCED WITH #4 AT 24"O.C. EACH WAY IN
CENTER OF SLAB.
13.FOR NEW GUARDRAIL AT RETAINING WALL, SEE DETAIL
D4/SE-521.
14.ALL STEEL ANGLES AND PLATES ETC. IN THE TUNNEL AREA
SHALL BE GALV. AFTER FABRICATION.
15.TOP OF FOUNDATION CALLOUTS ARE APPROX. MATCH
EXISTING FOUNDATION TO AVOID ROCK BLASTING.
KEYED SHEET NOTES
LEGEND
INDICATES CONCRETE FILLED STEEL
COLUMN, FILL WITH 4000psi SELF
CONSOLIDATING CONCRETE.
H SS ?? CF INDICATES CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE,
SEE PLAN NOTES.
INDICATES CHANGE IN SLAB ELEVATION
AND DEPTH FROM F.S.E.
INDICATES CONCRETE WALL, SEE
SCHEDULE.
INDICATES RECESSED SLAB, SEE ARCH.
CW-??
INDICATES MASONRY WALL, SEE
SCHEDULE.
MW-??
INDICATES MASONRY BEAM, SEE
SCHEDULE.
MB-??
INDICATES CONCRETE PIER (CP), SEE
SCHEDULESCP-?
INDICATES STEEL HSS (HSS) OR STEEL
WIDE FLANGE (W). COLUMN AND BASE
PLATE, SEE SCHEDULES
BP -?BP -?H SS??W ?X??INDICATES DIFFERENT SLAB THICKNESS
INDICATES RECESS IN CONCRETE
FOUNDATION WALL
CW-??
INDICATES NON-BEARING MASONRY
WALL.
MW-??
SS INDICATES STEP IN WALL
F-????'-??"INDICATES CONCRETE FOOTING TYPE
AND TOP OF FOOTING ELEVATION.
INDICATES CONCRETE FOOTING &
FOUNDATION WALL, SEE SCHEDULES
FOR SIZE AND REINFORCING.
INDICATES ISOLATION JOINT IN SLAB ON
GRADE. SEE DETAIL
?"
INDICATESMASONRY PIER (MP) OR
COLUMN (MC), SEE SCHEDULES
M ?-?
INDICATES CONCRETE ON METAL DECK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
B
C
D
E
CW
-
8
A
96
'
-
0"
F -3C
3
3
3 3 3
3 3
3
2
4
7
5
3
3 3
3
8
10
11
11
7
12
100' -0"F-2C
D6
SE-511
CW
-
1
4
A
96
'
-
0"
F -3C
CW-14A
96' -0"F-3C
CW
-
8
A
96
'
-
0"
F -3C 11
8
10
0
'
-
0"
F -2C
10
0
'
-
0"
F -2C
100' -0"F-2C
10
0
'
-
0"
F -2C
100' -0"F-2C
100' -0"F-2C
OPEN
ADD (4) #6 BOTTOM
IN 24" WIDE STRIPHSS8 X4X1/4 BP -1 H SS 8 X4X1/4 B P -1 C P -2 C P -2
F-3
C P -2
F-3
100' -0"F-2C
C3
SE-501
C3
SE-501
13
C2
SE-501
100' -0"F-2C
10
0
'
-
0"
F -2C
CW-8A
CW
-
8
A
T.W = 102'-0"T.W = 100'-0"
T.W = 102'-0"
T.W = 100'-0"
T.P. = 100' - 0"T.P. = 100' - 0"
1
CW
-
8
A
93
'
-
6"
F -3C
MATCH EXISTING
ELEVATION
C1
SE-501
C1
SE-501
OPP.
MATCH EXISTING
ELEVATION
L8
X
4
X
1
/
2
(2) 5X3½X3/8 ANGLES
LL BACK TO BACK
D5
SE-501
C4
SE-501
C5
SE-501
D2
SE-501
D1
SE-501
D2
SE-501
D3
SE-501
REMOVE THIS AREA
OF SLAB ON GRADE
REMOVE THIS AREA OF TUNNEL SLAB (6" SLAB,
TYP.) REPLACE WITH 6" TOTAL THICKNESS
CONCRETE SLAB REINFORCED WITH #4 AT 18"
O.C. BOTH WAYS, SEE SCHEDULE.
L6
X
4
X
5
/
1
6
D4
SE-501
C5
SE-501
SIM.
D1
SE-501
SIM.
L6X4X5/16
14
E1
SE-501
TYP.
E1
SE-501
TYP.
2"
6-W2-18
REMOVE THIS AREA OF TUNNEL SLAB (6" SLAB,
TYP.) REPLACE WITH 8" TOTAL THICKNESS
CONCRETE SLAB REINFORCED WITH #4 AT 18"
O.C. BOTH WAYS, SEE SCHEDULE.
6-W2-20
A3
SE-501
E2
SE-501
E2
SE-501
E2
SE-501
F.S.E=100'-0"
F.S.E=100'-7"
15
15
15 15
3
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
byu idaho project # : 12006
SE-101
FOUNDATION
PLAN
Oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% Construction
Documents
1/8" = 1'-0"SE-101
A1 FOOTING AND FOUNDATION PLAN
1 Addendum 1 11/5/2020
2 Addendum 2 11/10/2020
3 Addendum 3 11/14/2020
11/13/2020
LS
LS
LS
LS
SEE CONCRETE REINFORCING
LAP SPLICE SCHEDULE FOR "L"
INTERSECTION CORNER
LS
LSLS
LS
CONCRETE WALL
VERTICAL WALL REINFORCING
90º HOOK
"U" TIE SIZE AND SPACING TO MATCH
HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING LAP BARS
PER REINFORCING BAR LAP SLICE SCHEDULE
POUR #1
POUR #2
PLAN
36T MAX
36
T
M
A
X
MAX. LENGTH OF POUR WITHOUT CONTROL JOINTS = 36T COORDINATE JOINT LOCATIONS WITH
ARCH. REQUIREMENTS. MAX WIDTH OF POUR = 108T
10
8
T
M
A
X
TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT
TYPICAL CONTROL JOINT
T = SLAB THICKNESS
1.25L
L CONTROL JOINT MAXIMUM ASPECT RATIO
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
CONTROL JOINT
AT EXPOSED SLAB, PROVIDE 1/4" WIDE
SLOT WITH JOINT SEALER.
FORMED KEY-WAY
T/6
T/
4
T
T/4
SAW CUT JOINT WITHIN FIRST 12
HOURS OF SLAB POUR, USE TOOLED
JOINTS AT EXTERIOR SLABS
VAPOR BARRIER,
WHERE OCCURS
GRANULAR FILL, SEE
SOILS REPORT, 4" MIN.
EXISTING UNDISTURBED GRADE
OR COMPACTED STRUCTURAL
FILL, SEE SOILS REPORT
VAPOR BARRIER (WHERE APPLIES)
4" GRANULAR FILL
EXISTING UNDISTURBED GRADE OR
COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL
CONCRETE SLAB ON
GRADE, SEE PLAN
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
CONTROL JOINT
SLAB REINFORCING TO
CONTINUE THROUGH
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
T
T/4
SLAB REINFORCING,
WHERE OCCURSSAW CUT JOINT WITHIN
FIRST 12 HOURS OF SLAB
POUR, USE TOOLED JOINTS
AT EXTERIOR SLABS
VAPOR BARRIER, WHERE
OCCURS
GRANULAR FILL, SEE
SOILS REPORT, 4" MIN.
EXISTING UNDISTURBED
GRADE OR COMPACTED
STRUCTURAL FILL, SEE
SOILS REPORT
T/
3
NOTE: AT CONTRACTOR'S
OPTION, USE SPEED DOWEL
OR DIAMOND DOWEL PER
MANUFACTURER'S
SPECIFICATIONS
0' - 3"0' - 3"1/8" RADIUS EDGE,
EACH SIDE
T/
3
2 '0'' SQUARE ISOLATION NO
REINF. REQUIRED, POUR AFTER
DEAD LOADS ARE IN PLACE
STEEL COLUMN AND
BASEPLATE (SEE PLAN
AND SCHEDULE) ON 1 1/2"
NON-SHRINK GROUT
WITH LEVELING NUTS
CONCRETE SLAB ON
GRADE, SEE PLAN
FOOTING, SEE PLAN AND SCHEDULE
FOR SIZE AND REINFORCING
3"
M
I
N
.
5/16
STEEL COLUMN AND BASEPLATE
(SEE PLAN AND SCHEDULE) ON 1 1/2"
NON-SHRINK GROUT WITH LEVELING
NUTS
CONCRETE SLAB ON
GRADE, SEE PLAN
FOOTING, SEE PLAN
AND SCHEDULE
FOR SIZE AND
REINFORCING
3"
M
I
N
.
5/16
CONCRETE PIER, SEE PLAN
AND SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND
REINFORCING
DOWELS TO MATCH
VERT. PIER REINF.
A5
SE-501
A5
SE-501
2
'
M
I
N
.
ISOLATION JOINT
COLUMN, SEE PLAN
AND SCHEDULE
(2) #4X4' 0" WHEN NO CONTROL
JOINT OCCURS AT CORNER.
1½" TYP.
EXISTING
CONCRETE WALL
EXISTING
FOOTING
CONCRETE SLAB ON
GRADE, SEE PLAN
EXISTING
MASONRY WALL
#4 AT 24" O.C.
CONCRETE WALL,
SEE PLAN
DOWELS TO MATCH
VERT. WALL REINF.
FOOTING, SEE PLAN
GUARDRAIL,
SEE ARCH.
#4 AT 24" O.C. EMBED 5"
INTO EXISTING WALL
PROVIDE
PROPER FROST
COVER
CONCRETE PIER, SEE
PLAN AND SCHEDULE
STEEL COLUMN AND
BASE PLATE, SEE PLAN
AND SCHEDULE
EXISTING TUNNEL
CONCRETE FOOTING, SEE
PLAN AND SCHEDULE
DOWEL INTO EXISTING
TUNNEL WALL AND FOOTING
WALL SYSTEM,
SEE ARCH.
CHAMFER,
SEE ARCH.
CONCRETE WALL, SEE
PLAN AND SCHEDULE
FOR REINFORCING.
6" METAL STUD WALL WITH
SHEATHING AND 3/4"Ø TITEN
HD AT 16" O.C., SEE PLAN
CONCRETE SLAB ON
GRADE, SEE PLAN
1' - 2"
0' - 8"
3"
M
I
N
.
600S162-68MIL BLOCKING
WITH SIMPSON TITEN 2
SCREW AT 6" O.C.
CONCRETE, SEE PLAN
W2 DECK, SEE PLAN
3/4 12
1½
"
8X4X1/2" ANGLE WITH 5/8"X4"
TITEN HD BOLTS AT 18" O.C.
EXISTING 6" SLAB
3
EXISTING MASONRY
WALL, SEE PLAN
EXISTING CONCRETE
SLAB ON GRADE
EXISTING
FOUNDATION WALL
L6X4X1/2 OR (2)
L5X3½X3/8, SEE PLAN
8" CONCRETE SLAB ON
W2 METAL DECK OR 6"
CONCRETE SLAB WITH 2"
TILE ON W2 METAL DECK
1/4
3/8" PLATE WITH (4) 5/8"X5"
TITEN HD BOLTS (SPACE AT
8" MIN. O.C. BOTH WAYS)
EXISTING MASONRY
WALL, SEE PLAN
EXISTING CONCRETE
SLAB ON GRADE
EXISTING
FOUNDATION WALL
1½
"
34X30" DOWELS AT 24" O.C.,
EMBED 4" IN EPOXY
2" TILE, SEE ARCH.
6" SLAB ON W2 METAL
DECK, SEE PLAN
L4X4X1/4 ANGLE WITH 5/8"X5"
TITEN HD BOLTS AT 24" O.C.
3/4 12
2" TILE, SEE ARCH.
L6X4X5/16 CONT. ANGLE
WITH 1/2"X4" TITEN HD
BOLTS AT 18" O.C.
EXISTING CONCRETE
SLAB OVER TUNNEL
6" CONC. SLAB ON W2
METAL DECK, FOR
REINF. SEE PLAN
2" TILE, SEE ARCH.#4 DOWELS
AT 24" O.C.
3/8"X5" CONT. PLATE WITH
5/8"X4" TITEN HD BOLTS
AT 18" O.C.
EXISTING FOUNDATION WALL.
CUT TOP OF WALL DOWN TO
ALLOW FOR NEW SLAB ON
METAL DECK
1½"
NEW 4" SLAB ON
GRADE WITH #4 AT 24"
O.C. CENTER OF SLAB
2" TILE, SEE ARCH.EXISTING SLAB
ON GRADE
4" SLAB ON GRADE WITH #
4 AT 24" O.C. BOTH WAYS
#4X30" DOWELS AT 24"
O.C.. EMBED 4" IN EPOXY.
BEND AS REQ'D
2" TILE, SEE ARCH.
(2) L5X3½X3/8" ANGLES
1/8 2@8
3/4 12
FT
G
T
H
I
C
K
N
E
S
S
S
E
E
S
C
H
E
D
.
MASONRY WALL, SEE PLAN
AND SCHEDULE
CONCRETE SLAB, SEE PLAN
DOWEL TO MATCH VERT WALL
REINF. ABOVE W/ STD HOOK
INTO THICKENED SLAB
FOOTING. (ALT HOOK DIR.)
ALTERNATE BAR HOOK
DIRECTIONS
THICKENED SLAB FOOTING
SEE PLAN AND SCHEDULE
VARIES, SEE ARCH.
CONCRETE STEPPED SLAB
ON GRADE, SEE PLAN
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
byu idaho project # : 12006
SE-501
FOUNDATION
DETAILS
Oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% Construction
Documents
NO SCALESE-501
A1 TYPICAL WALL INTERSECTION REINFORCING
NO SCALESE-501
A2 TYPICAL WALL END REINFORCING
NO SCALESE-501
B4 TYPICAL SLAB ON GRADE CONTROL JOINT LAYOUT
NO SCALESE-501
B1 TYPICAL CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE JOINTS
NO SCALESE-501
B3 TYPICAL CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE PROFILE
NO SCALESE-501
B2 TYPICAL REINFORCED SLAB ON GRADE JOINTS
NO SCALESE-501
A3 TYPICAL TUBE COLUMN CONNECTION TO FOOTING/PIER
NO SCALESE-501
A5 TYPICAL TUBE COLUMN BLOCKOUT
NO SCALESE-501
C2
NO SCALESE-501
C1
NO SCALESE-501
C3
1 Addendum 1 11/5/2020
3 Addendum 3 11/14/2020
NO SCALESE-501
D5
NO SCALESE-501
C4
NO SCALESE-501
C5
NO SCALESE-501
D2
NO SCALESE-501
D1
NO SCALESE-501
D3
NO SCALESE-501
D4
NO SCALESE-501
E1
NO SCALESE-501
E2
11/13/2020
Addendum #1/1
MECHANICAL ADDENDUM NO.3
November 13, 2020
Project Name: BYU-I ENGINEERING TECH CENTER
This addendum consists of 1 pages and 29 pg. attachment for a total of 30 pages.
Specifications:
Item S1- Replace Spec. 23 0953 Building Automation System with new specifications attached.
Drawings
Item D1- Sheet P301 See revised detail D, attached.
Item D2- Sheet M301 See revised detail O, attached.
Item D3- Sheet M302 See revised detail D, G & H.
Item D4- Sheet P201 Add new detail 6, attached.
Item D5 Sheet M101 See revised detail attached
Item D6 Sheet P100 See revised detail, attached
Item D7 Sheet P101 See revised detail attached
Item D8 Sheet M302 see revised detail attached
Prior Approvals
Dampers & Louvers Pottoroff-OK
Fan Curbs Twin City Fans- OK
Carbon Monoxide Exhaust Systems Car-Mon- OK
Unit Heaters Zehnder Rittling- OK
Gauges & Thermostats Miljoco- OK
Emergency Shower Acorn- OK
Faucets Symmons & Chicago- OK
Trench Drain Jay R Smith & Dura Trench- OK
Flush Valve Delany-OK
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
SECTION 23 0953 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Section 23 0501 apply to this section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) Contractor shall furnish and
install a fully integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital
control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control as herein
specified. System shall be JCI series 10 to match existing BYUI controls in this
building.
B. The system shall only employ BACnet communications in an open architecture with
the capabilities to support a multi-vendor environment. The system shall be capable
of integrating third party systems and utilizing the following standard protocols.
1. BACnet communication according to ASHRAE standard ANSI/ASHRAE 135-
2004.
2. OPC server communications according to OPC Data Access 2.0 and Alarms
and Events 1.0.
C. The FMCS shall be web based and shall provide total integration of the facility
infrastructure systems with user access to all system data either locally over a
secure Intranet within the building or by remote access by a standard Web Browser
over the Internet.
D. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured with standard part numbers and owner’s manuals for this system.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by the manufacturers'
locally authorized representative. The controls contractor shall have factory-trained
technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service
within 24 hours upon receipt of request.
B. At the time of bid, all FMCS Application Specific Controllers and Programmable
Equipment Controllers shall be listed as follows:
1. Underwriters Laboratory, UL 916
2. FCC Regulation, Part 15, Class B
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 6 complete sets of documentation in the following phased delivery schedule:
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
1. SNE and controller schedules
2. Equipment data cut sheets
3. System schematics, including:
a. sequence of operations
b. point names
c. point addresses
d. point to point wiring
e. interface wiring diagrams
f. panel layouts
g. system riser diagrams
4. AutoCAD compatible as-built drawings.
B. Upon project completion, submit operation and maintenance manuals, consisting of
the following:
1. Index sheet, listing contents in alphabetical order
2. Manufacturer's equipment parts list of all functional components of the system,
disk of system schematics, including wiring diagrams
3. Description of sequence of operations
4. As-Built interconnection wiring diagrams
5. Trunk cable schematic showing remote electronic panel locations, and all trunk
data
6. List of connected data points, including panels to which they are connected and
input device (ionization detector, sensors, etc.)
7. Copy of the warranty/guarantee
8. Operating and maintenance instructions
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Johnson Controls Metasys by Johnson Controls Salt Lake City Branch
1. Contact: Bradley Scott 801-974-4502, Bradley.Lee.Scott@jci.com
2.2 The Facility Management Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of a network of
interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers. The FMCS shall incorporate BACnet
MSTP485 or Ethernet in all unitary, terminal and other device controllers. The system
shall include:
A. Series Network Engines (SNE) for distributed system applications, databases and
networking functions.
1. Series Network Engine Large, Dual Trunk
a. The SNE shall support a minimum of:
i. One Hundred (100) BACnet Standard MS/TP controllers per trunk (200
total).
ii. Two Hundred Fifty Five (255) LonWorks FTT10 Free Topology control
devices.
iii. One Hundred (100) N2 control devices per trunk (200 total).
b.The SNE shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following
conditions:
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
i. Power – On/Off.
ii. Ethernet Traffic – Ethernet Traffic/No Ethernet Traffic.
iii. Ethernet Connection Speed – 10 Mbps/100 Mbps/1000 Mbps.
iv. FC Bus A – Normal Communications/No Field Communications.
v. FC Bus B – Normal Communications/No Field Communications.
vi. Peer Communication – Data Traffic between NAE Devices.
vii. Run – SNE Running/NAE in Startup/SNE Shutting Down/Software Not
Running.
viii. Bat Fault – Battery Defective, Data Protection Battery Not Installed.
ix. 24 VAC – 24 VAC Present/Loss of 24 VAC.
x. Fault – General Fault.
c. Communications Ports – The SNE shall provide the following ports for
operation of operator I/O devices, such as industry-standard computers,
modems, and portable operator’s terminals.
i. Two (2) USB port.
ii. Two (2) RS-232 serial data communication port.
iii. Two (2) RS-485 port.
iv. One (1) Ethernet port.
2. Provide Johnson Controls SNE.
B. Programmable Equipment Controllers (PEC’s) for control of primary mechanical
systems and distributed system applications. Controllers shall be fully
programmable to create custom control solutions. System shall use the latest
controller.
1. The PEC’s shall communicate via BACnet communication according to
ASHRAE standard ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004.
a. The PEC software database must be able to execute all of the specified
mechanical system controls functions. The programming software shall be
able to bundle software logic to simplify control sequencing. All values,
which make up the PID output value, shall be readable and modifiable at a
workstation or portable service tool. Each input, output, or calculation result
shall be capable of being shared/bound with any controller or interface
device on the network.
b. Provide programming, engineering, and configuration tools used for the
project duly licensed to the owner for owner’s use.
c. PEC’s shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by
the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines.
d. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data
from any and all other PEC’s on the network. In addition, a single process
shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other PEC’s on the
network.
e. Each PEC shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace
hardware.
f. Each PEC shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, which include
communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all components.
g. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown
of all PEC’s to prevent the loss of database or operating system software.
Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-
time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
h. Upon restoration of normal power, the PEC shall automatically resume full
operation without manual intervention.
i. All PEC’s control programming and databases must be stored in Flash
memory, therefore eliminating data loss, and downtime and re-load time.
j. Provide a separate PEC for each AHU or other HVAC system such that the
inputs, calculations, and outputs shall reside on a single controller.
2. Provide Johnson Controls M4 series,M4-CGM, and MS-IOMXXXX. FEC’s shall
not be allowed.
2.3 MODERN USER INTERFACE
A. The Integrated Automation System shall include a Mobile User Interface which is an
integral part of the IAS server software.
B. The Mobile User Interface shall meet the following requirements, at a minimum:
1. The IAS Mobile User Interface shall be served from the IAS server to any
standard browser and shall be HTML5-compliant, so as to operate on a
wide variety of user interface devices, including PC’s, Apple iMac, IOS
and Android tablets and Smart Phones.
2. The Mobile User Interface shall not require any third-party applications or
software on the Client device for any aspect of functionality
3. Organization of all space, equipment and point information in a familiar way
(using owner-designated equipment names and location descriptions), reducing
the need for extensive training prior to use.
4. The IAS UI shall use and support HTTPS with TLS 1.2, and use self-signed
certificates.
C. The Mobile User Interface shall allow complete operability of the IAS and any
Controllers, devices, or systems integrated with the IAS directly from an HTML5
browser, including such functionality as, but not limited to:
1. Alarm management, including viewing, acknowledging, and clearing alarms, as
per the individual Operators assigned permissions and privileges.
2. Viewing and overriding Schedules, and creating temporary Schedules, as per the
individual Operators assigned permissions and privileges.
3. Viewing and overriding system points, including defined variables, controls
setpoints, output values, using text-based and/or graphical screens, as per the
individual Operators assigned permissions and privileges.
4. Historical trend viewing and report generation, as per the individual Operators
assigned permissions and privileges.
D. The Mobile User Interface shall offer application of the same navigationmechanisms
across any client device (e.g. Smart phone, tablet, personal computer) for
consistency and ease of use. The same user interface elements shall be accessible
from any type of PC or mobile device running any type of operating system
supported (e.g. iOS, Android, Windows®). The Mobile User Interface shall
automatically adapt and optimize the display for the screen size and touch screen
navigation.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
E. The scope of an individual Operator’s view and control over the IAS shall be
described and limited by their account and access level. The IAS contractor will
include and allocate 40 hours in the contract to work with the owner’s personnel to
define, test, and establish unified, documented, standard point naming conventions,
equipment modeling and sequence of operations, alarm sequences, scheduling, and
UI graphics layout and navigation for all systems and devices connected to the site
IAS.
F. The Mobile User Interface shall have a Search field accessible on every page
1. The scope of the Search shall be dependent on the account and access level of
the Operator
2. Searching shall include point and device names, addresses, IP addresses, and
descriptions, at a minimum
3. Searching shall include not just equipment, but locations, including but not
limited to room names, numbers, and descriptions
4. The search field shall automatically list the most relevant results when as little
as 3 successive characters have been entered
5. The search field shall allow wildcards as placeholders for individual characters
as well as for substrings.
6. Search results, as with every other page in the Mobile User Interface, shall
have the capability to be bookmarked, for easy future access
G. The Mobile User Interface shall offer logical, intuitive, relational navigation of both
the physical spaces that the IAS serves and the equipment that the IAS controls
1. When viewing any location or device, relevant information about the space
served as well as the most important information from the relevant equipment
shall be displayed
2. All graphics shall offer direct navigation to both the relevant equipment
graphics (AHU, VAVs, etc) as well as the relevant location graphics (Wing,
floor, etc)
3. Navigation shall be hierarchical in nature, for both equipment and location
navigation
A. The highest level graphics and navigation trees shall display the largest
location grouping (Campus, Building, etc) as well as a summary overview
of that location
B. From there, the Operator can logically navigate to the most granular level
of locations (Campus->Building->Floor->Wing->Room, as an example)
C. Equipment navigation shall be similarly hierarchical
D. Navigation shall also be accomplished via hierarchical tree structures
E. Hierarchical tree structures shall simplify and accelerate the navigation in
order to support text or tabular navigation on Operator interface devices
with small or limited screen sizes, such as a smart phone
H. In addition to the equipment and location navigation trees, the Mobile User
Interface shall also offer an OT Network navigation tree and functionality
1. It shall be possible for qualified users to view a navigation tree of devices
connected to the IAS network in order to enable troubleshooting of equipment
and communications. Clicking or tapping on the Network Icon at the top of the
Navigation Tree will access this alternate view. Users without the necessary
access rights shall not see the Network Icon.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
2. A click or tap on a device in the network tree shall display a dashboard for that
device including information regarding related equipment and access to a
separate focus view of commandable points associated with the piece of
hardware.
3. A click or tap on such a point shall display a control dialogue box allowing the
user to modify or command that point as indicated. The dialog box shall contain
an annotation box for describing why the action was taken or special
circumstances that apply. A user shall also be able to see the current
command priority in the IAS within the point dialog box as well, making it easier
to determine what command priority us currently active on a point object.
4. It shall be possible to hide the Network Tree and return to the Spaces Tree at
any time by clicking on the Spaces Icon above the tree.
5. Specific hardware and software types in the Network tree shall also include
access to one or more the following views in their dashboard depending on
hardware type or network element (e.g. MS/TP trunk):
a. Summary View
b. Diagnostic View
c. Network View
d. Trend View
6. Navigation shall be accomplished logically based on how IAS devices are
networked together on the OT network
I. Cyber Health Dashboard
1. The Mobile User Interface shall provide a dedicated dashboard display that
informs and educates system administrators of relevant and critical user
account and system information related to the cybersecurity health of the IAS.
The Cyber Health Dashboard will use screen scalable reporting “widget” areas:
a User Activity widget, a Security Analysis widget, and a System Status widget.
2. The User Activity widget will contain a graphical bar chart that will show
successful log-in (blue bar), unsuccessful log-in (light blue bar) and locked out
accounts (red bar) along with date and time of log-in event. The color-coded
bar graphic will provide an easy way to view anomalies and high volume of
successful or unsuccessful log-in attempts. User will be able to select from a
historical database to see past data on successful, unsuccessful log-in
attempts and locked out accounts.
3. The Security Analysis widget will show critical issues related to IAS accounts,
including:
A. User accounts that are set to never keep password history (ability to re-
use last 11 passwords)
B. User accounts that have passwords that never expire
C. User accounts are set to never lock out
D. User accounts with inactive session set to never terminate
4. The Security Analysis widget will show potential risks related to IAS accounts,
including:
A. User accounts that are set to never check for user account dormancy
B. User accounts with inactive sessions greater than 30 minutes
C. Dormant user accounts
D. Temporary user accounts
E. User account with an Account Lockout policy set to greater than 3
attempts over a period of greater than 15 minutes (either of these two)
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
5. The Security Analysis widget will show informational data related to IAS
accounts, including:
A. Total number of existing IAS user accounts
B. Total number of active IAS user accounts
C. Total number of accounts with standard access, total number of accounts
with administrator role, total number of accounts with basic access
D. Total number of disabled user accounts
6. A link to best practice policy recommendations will be available beside each
user account analysis mentioned in I. sections 1 to 5 mentioned above.
7. The System Status widget will show an account overview and a supervisory
engine overview.
A. The Account overview will show total IAS user accounts with a count of
active, disabled and admin user accounts.
B. The Engine overview will show number of supervisory devices and how
many are online and offline
C. An Engine detail tab will show supervisory controller name, IP address,
certificate expiration, software version and status
J. Dashboard Displays
1. The Mobile User Interface shall provide the ability to view equipment
visualizations, floor plans, and/or other graphics on mobile or desktop client
devices in a browser environment, without the need for additional plugins or
software. Graphics shall be accessible via a space (for floorplans, campus
maps, etc.) or equipment dashboard.
2. Standard dashboards shall be configured for each defined space including one
of the following predefined or custom elements:
A. Equipment Serving Space
B. Potential Problem Areas
C. Equipment Summary
D. Graphic Display (if specified)
E. Schedule
3. Standard dashboards shall be configured for each system or device (typ.
mechanical or electrical equipment) including the following predefined or
custom elements:
A. Trend
B. Equipment Activity Summary
C. Equipment Relationships Summary
D. Equipment Data
E. Graphic Display (if specified)
F. Schedule
4. Users with appropriate permissions shall have access to a Dashboards
Manager that can change the display order of Summaries and Data elements,
add or remove elements and apply custom dashboards layouts to equipment
and space by type.
5. Dashboard Manager shall apply dashboards to spaces or equipment based on
the viewing platform (Desktop/Tablet or Phone) in order to tailor the user
experience to the needs of the specific user base.
6. Default dashboard displays by space and equipment type shall be created per
the guidelines in this specification or by mutual agreement with the owner’s
representative.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
K. The Mobile User Interface shall include automatically populated dedicated,
interactive summaries which provide detailed information on specific IAS data,
including:
1. Potential problem areas, based on communication faults, overrides, deviations
from setpoints, and/or alarm conditions
a. The Mobile User Interface shall provide a summary of all points in the
system related to the space that are not operating correctly (e.g. alarm,
off normal or not communicating correctly) in order to provide the operator
with a quick update on current conditions.
b. The information shall include:
c. Point status (via color.)
d. Point name.
e. Value of the point when the summary was taken.
f. Equipment that contains the offending point.
g. Space that is served by that equipment.
h. Data points in the summary may be filtered by one or more types of off-
normal condition (e.g. above setpoint, offline and overridden).
i. The summary may be exported in .csv format for inclusion in
spreadsheets or other documents.
2. IAS Historical Trend Data
a. IAS historical trend data and graphical representations with the most
relevant points displayed initially and the ability for the Operator to select
and deselect points to add and remove from the trend
b. The Mobile User Interface shall provide the capability to view historical
trend data from multiple pieces of equipment in both bar and line formats.
c. The user shall have the ability to navigate to a selection list of frequently
viewed trends.
d. Trend graphs shall have to ability to be smartly auto-generated based on
equipment and space relationships.
e. Each graph shall include a dedicated selection icon to export a copy of
the graphic and data in .pdf format or the data only as a .csv file.
3. Equipment Activity Summary
a. The Mobile User Interface shall provide a filterable, single display, of all
activity related to a specific piece of equipment including user changes,
discarded user changes, pending alarms, discarded alarms, and
acknowledged alarms for at least one year of historical data.
b. Items shall be listed in timed order with the latest activity at the top of the
list. Page 8
c. Filters shall allow only specific activities for specific data points occurring
within a specific time and date window to be displayed.
d. It shall be possible to export a .csv copy of the currently displayed
summary by clicking or tapping on the export icon.
e. It shall be possible to create a custom trend graph containing the data
shown in the currently displayed summary by tapping or clicking on the
trend icon in the header bar and selecting the specific points to trend in
the resulting selection panel.
f. Clicking on the information icon in front of any displayed activity listed in
the summary shall expand the display to include the name of the user,
server time, value prior to the activity, the ability to annotate the activity
and a user selectable icon for displaying a trend graph of the point.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
4. Equipment Relationship Summary
a. The Mobile User Interface shall provide a summary of all equipment and
spaces related to the operation of the system or device currently selected
for viewing
b. Include the capability to navigate to the home page of any related piece of
equipment or space with a single click or tap on the desired element.
5. Equipment Data Summary
a. The Mobile User Interface shall provide a summary of all data pertaining
to a particular piece of mechanical or electrical equipment in a tabular
format.
b. Clicking or tapping on any value in the summary shall display a related
command panel allowing the user to command, override, or change
service condition of the point selected and to annotate such actions for
future reference.
c. It shall be possible to export a .pdf copy of the report with a single click on
the associated export icon.
6. Equipment Serving Space Summary
a. The Mobile User Interface shall provide a summary of all mechanical and
electrical equipment as defined in the points list that serves a selected
space from the navigation tree.
b. The summary shall be capable of including a subset of the viewable
points for each system representing the key elements of interest to
operators without subjecting them to long lists of points irrelevant to basic
operation.
c. Clicking or tapping on any item in the summary shall navigate to the
item’s assigned home page in the user interface.
d. It shall be possible to view a custom trend of information contained in the
summary with a single click of the trend icon residing in the title header.
e. It shall be possible to display specific systems and points by filtering
equipment types desired.
7. Graphical Displays
a. The Mobile User Interface shall display an equipment visualization or
graphic within the context of its associated space (building, floor, room,
etc.) or equipment dashboard.
b. Graphics shall include the ability to define individual information layers for
operator selection in order to clarify systems status and simplify operation
on mobile devices. Where desired a master layer may be defined to
include important information about the facility on all graphic screens.
c. Graphics shall support the use of photo-realistic symbols as well as color
change and animation to match the status of the related system control
point.
d. It shall be possible to export a time stamped .pdf file of the graphic being
viewed in order to communicate the current conditions in the space or the
equipment being viewed and to provide a historic record.
8. Scheduling
a. The Mobile User Interface shall provide the capability to display, in a
singular view, all of the effective schedules in the context of the space
(building/floor/room, etc.) or equipment that the schedule effects. The
software should have the ability to display an effective schedule, for the
present, or a future date.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
b. The Mobile User Interface shall provide a report of all schedules affecting
a space or equipment. The report shall provide the user details of events
that comprise the weekly schedule and exception schedule(s). The report
shall provide a means of viewing individual breakout scheduling elements
for Weekly Schedule, Exceptions and Default Commands.
c. The Mobile User Interface shall provide the capability to efficiently change
or modify schedules in mass quantities. This includes the capability to
add, in bulk, exceptions to schedules, in addition to assigning, in bulk,
weekly schedules.
L. Graphics development and management tool
1. An integral graphic manager shall be provided including the following features
and capabilities:
2. Creation and modification of graphics from any HTML5 capable browser
without the need for additional plug-ins or software packages.
3. Access to a full suite of pre-defined templates for air and water sourced HVAC
applications as well as the ability to add custom templates as created for other
use. Pre-aliased graphic templates may be defined and saved for repetitive
representations of common mechanical and electrical equipment.
4. A full suite of pre-defined 3D-like symbols for mechanical and electrical
systems as well as all line, text and shape tools required for integration into a
graphic with zoom and pan capabilities on multiple platforms and in multiple
browsers.
5. The ability to search and replace items in multiple graphics with a single
command.
6. The ability to import and insert photos and images into the graphic.
7. The ability of the graphics manager to create and edit graphics including the
ability to bind graphic elements to the values and conditions of system points
in both an on-line and off-line mode.
M. Alarm Management
1. The user interface shall provide a single display of all potential issues in a
facility including items currently in alarm, warning, override, out-of-service and
offline.
2. The user interface shall provide notification of new alarms, visually and
audibly.
3. The user interface shall provide the ability to view a summary of alarms,
including a chart of the number of alarms in each of the defined alarm priority
ranges. The priority ranges should be filterable.
4. The user interface shall provide the capability to view multiple occurrences of
the same alarm, ultimately providing the ability to acknowledge or discard all
occurrences of the alarm in a single action.
5. The user interface shall provide the capability to view, and filter on, all alarms
present in a well-defined mechanical system using the equipment serving
equipment relationships.
6. The user interface shall provide the capability to acknowledge and discard all
occurrences of at least 1000 alarms in one operation.
7. The user interface shall provide the user with the understanding of what
physical space is being affected when an alarm occurs. The user interface
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
shall provide the ability to filter alarms by physical space affected when the
alarm occurred.
8. The user interface shall provide the capability to monitor alarms 24/7 without
requiring an active login to the system, accessible via segregated web page.
The user interface shall provide the capability to enabled or disable the 24/7
alarm monitor mode if desired.
N. Alarm Escalation
1. The Mobile User Interface will provide a configurable alarm escalation path for
specific alarm occurrences related to equipment or space providing a way to
reduce the risk of a user missing critical alarms. If an alarm has not been
acknowledged or discarded by recipients within a specified period of time, an
additional set of recipients can be notified. Additional notification will be
available through email, printer, SNMP or Syslog. Text messaging can be
achieved by entering recipients 10 digit cellular phone number formatted as a
standard email address (10digit phone number @ cellular carrier’s gateway
domain)
2. For email notification, the alarm notification can be configured to send the
alarm condition out to user defined email address(es). If the alarm has not
been acknowledged/discarded after a user defined length of time (in
hours/minutes), additional escalation of the alarm will be sent out to
additional user defined email address(es)
3. User can filter for alarms tied to specific pieces of equipment / spaces to
enable alarm escalation notifications related to overall systems and space.
4. A test email feature will also allow the system to send out a test email to
confirm that the remote notifications are configured properly and that
recipients are able to receive them, preventing missed notifications due to
misconfiguration.
O. Operator Access Configuration
1. The user interface shall provide the ability to segment access to building data
based on the space(s) or location(s) the user is physically located in and/or
manages. The user interface shall provide the capability to assign “inherited”
space permissions and the ability to assign user’s space based access in bulk.
2. The user interface shall provide the ability to segment access to building data
based on the space(s) or location(s) the user is physically located in and/or
manages. The user interface shall provide the capability to assign “inherited”
space permissions and the ability to assign user’s space based access in bulk.
P. User Interface Security/Passwords
1. Based on owner-configurable access and permissions, the user interface
should provide the ability to perform the actions described below via Internet
browser from any authorized device connected to the Stadium OT
infrastructure to which the network controllers are also connected.
2. Multiple-level passwords access protection shall be provided via roles and
permissions defined by the Stadium management. This feature will allow
access to the system based a user’s job title or role and allow the
user/manager the ability to control, display, and database manipulation
capabilities based on an assigned password.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
3. Roles may be copied and altered to meet specific roles and permissions
based on the particular policies.
4. Each user shall have the following: a user account name (with a maximum of
30 characters), a complex password or passphrase (with a min of 8
characters and a max of 50 characters), other user account policies (such as
session timeout), timesheet access based on day of the week and time of
day, and specific user view.
5. The system shall allow each user to change his or her password at will.
6. When entering or editing passwords, the system shall not echo the actual
characters for display on the monitor.
7. A maximum of 150 categories may be used to determine or assign areas of
responsibilities to each user account. A maximum of 13 (of the 150) named
categories which are specifics such as “No Access, View, Advanced Review,
Operate, Intervene, Diagnostic, Manage Item Events, Manage Every, and
Configure Items”.
8. A minimum of 100 unique passwords shall be supported.
9. Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their
respective passwords. Display of menu selections shall be limited to only
those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.
10. Operators shall be further limited to only access, command, and modify those
buildings, systems, and subsystems for which they have responsibility.
Provide a minimum of 100 categories of systems to which individual
operators may be assigned.
11. The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off and system
activity for each user. Any action that results in a change in the operation or
configuration of the control system shall be recorded, including: modification
of point values, schedules or history collection parameters, and all changes
to the alarm management system, including the acknowledgment and
deletion of alarms.
12. The system shall have the ability to provide a Department of Defense (DoD)
specific warning banner for applicable sites that warns the user they are
accessing a restricted site.
13. After successful login to the Site Management Portal (SMP) the last time and
date that user name was previously logged in is shown on the screen.
14. Each login attempt is recorded in the system Audit Log with the option to
record the IP address of the PC that made the login.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
A. Provide a project manager who shall, as a part of his duties, be responsible for the
following activities:
1. Coordination between the Controls Contractor and all other trades, Owner, local
authorities and the design team.
2. Scheduling of manpower, material delivery, equipment installation and
checkout.
3. Maintenance of construction records such as project scheduling and manpower
planning and AutoCAD or Visio for project co-ordination and as-built drawings.
4. Coordination/Single point of contact
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
3.2 INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Prior to work beginning the Controls Contractor shall provide the Owner with a pre-
installation Performance Verification of the existing system.
1. Performance Verification (PV)
a. The PV shall include:
1) A complete and current Building Automation System site inventory
including the following information at a minimum: a listing of all field and
supervisory controllers with the following key attribute data;
corresponding model numbers, firmware versions, available security
updates, CPU and memory performance data, battery conditions,
integrations, controlled equipment, and device and point counts.
2) A complete, written evaluation of system configuration and performance
in the following categories: Security, Energy Performance and Savings,
Reliability, Comfort and Health, and Standards.
3) The Security evaluation shall include information about controllers that
require security updates and conformance of user accounts to latest
security rules and best practices
4) The Energy Performance and Savings evaluation shall identify
opportunities through schedule and nightly setbacks, economizers,
eliminating simultaneous heating and cooling, and adding variable
speed drives to equipment.
5) The Comfort and Health evaluation shall identify temperature, pressure,
and carbon dioxide values that deviate from desired set points that could
lead to occupant discomfort.
6) The Reliability evaluation shall identify overridden control points, control
points creating excessive alarms, and opportunities to adding control
points and trends to further enable system functionality.
7) The Standards evaluation shall identify conformance to published
standards for point count, network performance and protocol standards
B. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough-
in drawings and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical
products complying with requirements of applicable Division-16 sections of these
specifications.
C. The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit, and
miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or
electronic control devices.
D. To run BACnet on the Ethernet network, the installer is required to run, at minimum,
plenum rated CAT 5e cabling for all runs associated with this network.
E. All exposed wiring, low and line voltage subject to mechanical damage, shall be run
in conduit. Line and low voltage wiring shall be run in separate conduits. Concealed
but accessible wiring, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit
and piping are exposed shall run in UL plenum rated cable as approved by local
codes unless expressly restricted by requirements in Division 16 specification.
F. All Controllers, required for stand-alone control shall be housed in a NEMA 1
enclosure with a lockable door.
3.3 INSTALLATION
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
A. The Vendor shall program all systems at the time of installation with logical
relations to spaces, locations, and related equipment
B. The Vendor shall program these relations, names, tags, and descriptions from
inception, such that the MUI navigation and search shall be automatically
generated and populated
1. Create a point sampling trend to archive the real-time value or status of a
point or object. View the trended value or status of a point or object over
a time interval; create an automated report to email a configured data
trend to a specific email address at a specific time/day.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
C. Verification
Verify that all MUI elements, including but not limited to, graphics, links,
references, addresses, and configurations are installed prior to project
completion
Verify that all Operator controllable MUI elements are clearly identified as such,
and are suitably responsive
Verify that all data is displayed with correct units
Verify all navigability
3.5 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. General: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper
operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative.
A letter shall be submitted to the Architect requesting system acceptance. This
letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have
been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing
will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of
request. When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the
Owner's representative, the system will be accepted. The warranty period will
start at this time.
B. Field Equipment Test Procedures: DDC control panels shall be demonstrated
via a functional end to end test. Such that:
1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.)
and their operation verified.
2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation.
3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field
device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value.
4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest
failed point and all interlocked points.
5. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into
the system and observing the proper corrective system response.
6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the
schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs.
C. As-Built Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, the
Contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the completed project for final
approval. After receiving final approval, supply "6" complete as-built drawing
sets, together with AutoCAD or Visio diskettes to the owner.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit four copies of operation and
maintenance manuals. Include the following
1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters,
controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators,
terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system.
2. An operator's manual that will include detailed instructions for all
operations of the system.
3. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input
points and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable.
4. A copy of the warranty/guarantee.
5. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions.
E. Prior to training, the Controls Contractor shall provide the Owner with a
post-installation Performance Verification of the existing system. The pre-
and post-installation Performance Verifications shall be reviewed during
the training.
1. Performance Verification (PV)
A.The PV shall include:
1) A complete and current Building Automation System site inventory
including the following information at a minimum: a listing of all
field and supervisory controllers with the following key attribute
data; corresponding model numbers, firmware versions, available
security updates, CPU and memory performance data, battery
conditions, integrations, controlled equipment, and device and
point counts.
2) A complete, written evaluation of system configuration and
performance in the following categories: Security, Energy
Performance and Savings, Reliability, Comfort and Health, and
Standards.
3) The Security evaluation shall include information about controllers
that require security updates and conformance of user accounts to
latest security rules and best practices
4) The Energy Performance and Savings evaluation shall identify
opportunities through schedule and nightly setbacks,
economizers, eliminating simultaneous heating and cooling, and
adding variable speed drives to equipment.
5) The Comfort and Health evaluation shall identify temperature,
pressure, and carbon dioxide values that deviate from desired set
points that could lead to occupant discomfort.
6) The Reliability evaluation shall identify overridden control points,
control points creating excessive alarms, and opportunities to
adding control points and trends to further enable system
functionality.
7) The Standards evaluation shall identify conformance to published
standards for point count, network performance and protocol
standards.
3.6 TRAINING
A. Contractor shall provide to the engineer a training class outline prior to any
scheduled training.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
B. Factory trained control engineers and technicians shall provide training
sessions for the Owner’s personnel.
C. The control contractor shall conduct one (1) four-hour training for the
designated owner’s personnel in the maintenance and operation of the control
system.
D. The training shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for
operating the installed system to include as a minimum:
1. HVAC system overview
2. Review of the PV report
3. Operation of Control System
4. Function of each Component
5. System Operating Procedures
6. Programming Procedures
7. Maintenance Procedures
3.7 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. The control system shall be warranted/guaranteed to be free from defects in
both material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year of normal use and
service. This warranty/guarantee shall become effective the date the owner
accepts or receives beneficial use of the system.
B. After completion this contractor shall make adjustments and modification as
necessary for the one year warranty period. During this period the contractor
as directed by the engineer shall make modifications and adjustments to the
building systems at no additional cost or compensation.
3.8 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TOOL:
A. Upon project completion, Performance Verification Tool will be used to used to
generate required reports.
3.9 RELATIONSHIP GENERATION:
A. Use this section for upgrading existing Metasys sites only. Relationship
Generation selections should only be used when adding MUI to an existing
site, or adding a server to an existing SNE-Only site.
B. With new construction sites, adding selections here will add additional hours
that are not required. The operations teams will utilize the RAC Schedule for
site creation which includes MUI configuration.
C.. If estimating for an existing site, adjust the Complexity and Experience Level
selectors to ensure the appropriate labor is included.
PART 4-SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
4.1 SERIES NETWORK ENGINES (SNE)
A. PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TOOL:
1. Upon project completion, Performance Verification Tool will be used to
used to generate required reports.
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
B. RELATIONSHIP GENERATION:
1. Use this section for upgrading existing Metasys sites only. Relationship
Generation selections should only be used when adding MUI to an
existing site, or adding a server to an existing SNE-Only site.
4.2 HOT WATER HX SYSTEM SNOWMELT
A. HOT WATER PUMP CONTROL:
1 The system is all enabled from a relay connected to the Power Logic
Breaker. The HX has a Steam side and a Hot Water Glycol side both
valves will be opened. The pump (BPx-C) will be started. If the pump
status (BPx-S) does not match the command (BPx-C), an alarm will be
generated.
B. ADDITIONAL POINTS MONITORED BY THE FMS:
1. Flow Meter (FLOn-A)
2. HWP (HWPn-A)
3. CVG Control Valves Glycol
4. CVS Steam Valve
4.3 STEAM UNIT HEATERS 10 EXISTING AND 3 NEW
A. OCCUPIED MODE:
1. Occupancy mode will be controlled via a network input (OCC-
SCHEDULE). During occupied mode, the constant speed supply fan (SF-
C) will be started and will run continuously. The Steam heating valve
(SHTG-O) will modulate to maintain the zone temperature setpoint (ZN-
SP).
B. UNOCCUPIED MODE:
1. The unit will cycle on to maintain unoccupied zone setpoints
(CLGUNOCC-SP & HTGUNOCC-SP) during unoccupied periods.
1. Unit Heater Status (UH-S)
2. Unit Heater Enable (UH-Enable)
3. Zone Temp. (Zone-T)
4. Control Valve (CV)
4.4 FAN COIL UNIT WITH DX COOLING 10 EXISTING 1 NEW
A. OCCUPIED MODE:
1. Occupancy mode will be controlled via a network input (OCC-
SCHEDULE). During occupied mode, the constant speed supply fan (SF-
C) will be started and will run continuously. The cooling coil (CLGx-C) will
be staged and the heating coil (HTG-O) will be modulated in sequence to
maintain the zone temperature setpoint (ZN-SP).
2. There is one OAD that will be opened for all Fan Coil Units
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
B. UNOCCUPIED MODE:
1. The unit will cycle on to maintain unoccupied zone setpoints
(CLGUNOCC-SP & HTGUNOCC-SP) during unoccupied periods.
A. Fan Coil Unit Status (FCUH-S)
B. Fan Coil Enable (UH-Enable)
C. Zone Temp. (Zone-T)
D. Control Valve (SCV)
E. DX Enable
F. Actuator OAD
4.5 CHECKOUT EXISTING ROOTOP AIR UNIT 8 EXISTING 1 NEW:
1. Install new Room Temp Sensors verify all points are working
2. The cooling system will automatically start when the system enable
(SYSTEM-EN) is "ON". When the system enable is "OFF", the cooling
system will be disabled.
3.. Install new Room Temp Sensors verify all points are working
A. TEMPERATURE CONTROL:
1. The unit will control to maintain a constant zone air temperature (ZA-T).
B. OCCUPIED MODE:
1. The occupancy mode will be controlled via a network input (OCC-
SCHEDULE). The occupancy mode can also be overridden by a network
input (OCC-OVERRIDE).
C. UNOCCUPIED MODE:
1. The unit will remain off during unoccupied periods.
E. UNIT PROTECTION:
1. Low Temperature Alarm (LT-A) - When in "Alarm", the control sequence
will stop running, the valve(s) will open and the fan(s) will be disabled via
a hard wired shut down circuit.
4.6 EXISTING FAN COIL AND NEW HANDLER CONTROLS
A. Upon a start command the isolation damper(s) will open. When open status is
achieved, the variable speed supply fan (SF-C) will be started based on
occupancy. After the start command is sent (SF-C), the outside air damper will
open, and the unit will start when the damper end switch has proven open status.
When the supply fan status (SF-S) indicates the fan started, the control
sequence will be enabled. The supply fan (SF-O) will modulate to maintain the
discharge static pressure (DA1-P) at setpoint (DAP-SP). Upon a loss of airflow
(SF-C), the supply fan will attempt to automatically restart until positive status is
received.
B. The unit will control to maintain a constant discharge air temperature (DA-T).
BYUI 27 OCTOBER 2020
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY CENTER (ETC)
PROJECT # 12005
METHOD STUDIO BUILDING AUTOMATION 23
C. The occupancy mode will be controlled via a network input (OCC-SCHEDULE).
The occupancy mode can also be overridden by a network input (OCC-
OVERRIDE).
D. The unit will remain off during unoccupied periods.
4.7 PREHEAT COIL
A. The preheat steam coil (PH-O) will enable steam to maintain the discharge air
temperature setpoint (DAT-SP). When the unit is shutdown, The OA shutoff
damper shall be closed and the preheat coil will be commanded to a preset
position should the outdoor air temperature (OA-T) fall below the low outdoor air
temperature setpoint (OALT-SP). Upon a loss of airflow (SF-S), the preheat coil
will be commanded to a preset position should the outdoor air temperature (OA-
T) fall below the low outdoor air temperature
setpoint (OALT-SP).
1. Low Temperature Alarm (LT-A) - When in "Alarm", the control sequence
will stop running, the valve(s) will open and the fan(s) will be disabled via
a hard wired shut down circuit.
4.8 EXHAUST FANS
A. OCCUPIED MODE:
1. Occupancy mode will be controlled via a network input (OCC-
SCHEDULE). During occupied mode, the constant speed supply fan (SF-
C) will be started and will run continuously.
B. UNOCCUPIED MODE:
1. The unit will cycle off
A. Exhaust Fan Enable (EF-E)
B. EF Status (EF-S)
END OF SECTION 23 0953
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B C D E
82
0
1
82
0
2
82
0
4
N
8
2
0
3
82
0
4
82
0
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
33
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
F
C
O
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
F
C
O
222
2
22
22
2 2
2
2
11
2
2
2
2
2
2
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
F
C
O
2 2
CO
T
G
CO
T
G
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4 2
5
2
2
2
DF
-
2
W
C
-
2
FD
-
1
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
1
WC
-
1
WC
-
2
FD
-
1
WC
-
2
6
6
8
6
7
7
JS
-
17
9
10
10
11 11 11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
1213
13
10
10
10
10
10
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
6
"
S
T
E
A
M
S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
N
D
3
"
CO
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
R
E
T
U
R
N
L
I
N
E
S
T
O
CA
M
P
U
S
S
T
E
A
M
S
Y
S
T
E
M
T
O
R
E
M
A
I
N
.
15
1515
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
14
15
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
16 14
15
15
16
16
17
1717
17
4"
W
4"
W
FC
O
20
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
S-2
S-1
WB
-
1
JS
-
1
WB
-
1
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
W
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
2"
W
4"
W
4"
W
8
2118
CO
T
G
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
FS
-
1
CO
T
G
4"
W
CO
T
G
CB
-
1
15
22
23
23
23
2323
23
24
24
1 1
/
4
"
H
W
R
1 1
/
4
"
H
W
S
1 1
/
4
"
H
W
R
1 1
/
4
"
H
W
S
1 1
/
4
"
H
W
R
1 1
/
4
"
H
W
S
FS
-
1
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
25
26
4"
R
O
O
F
D
R
A
I
N
.
R
E
F
E
R
TO
S
I
T
E
P
L
A
N
F
O
R
CO
N
T
I
N
U
A
T
I
O
N
.
CO
T
G
RIS
E
4
"
R
O
O
F
D
R
A
I
N
L
I
N
E
U
P
I
N
C
O
R
N
E
R
O
F
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
R
O
O
M
A
B
O
V
E
.
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
S
H
E
E
T
P1
0
1
A
N
D
T
O
L
A
R
G
E
S
C
A
L
E
P
L
A
N
4
/
P
2
0
1
.
RE
F
E
R
T
O
L
A
R
G
E
S
C
A
L
E
BA
S
E
M
E
N
T
P
L
A
N
5
/
M
2
0
1
F
O
R
CO
M
P
L
E
T
E
P
I
P
I
N
G
A
N
D
EQ
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
I
N
T
H
I
S
A
R
E
A
.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
TD
-
1
72
'
-
0
"
TD
-
1
72
'
-
0
"
TD
-
2
40
'
-
0
"
7
9
9
9
9
7
7
7
DF
-
1
PT
-
1
S-1
&
(3
)
2"
W
2"
W
15
2"
W
NE
W
FL
O
O
R
AC
C
E
S
S
2"
W
2"
W
2"
W
11
S-1
7
L-1
(5
)
L-1
(5
)
CO
T
G
82
0
3
82
0
4
82
0
1
82
0
1
82
0
2
82
0
4
N
8
2
0
3
82
0
4
82
0
2
20
19
19
19
19
9
9
9
9
82
0
3
82
0
4
82
0
1
82
0
1
82
0
2
82
0
5
8
2
0
3
82
0
4
FH
-
1
2"
W
2"
W
2"
V
T
R
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
(3
)
U-1
(3
)
2"
V
2
2"
W2"
W
FD
-
1
2"
W
10/27/20GD A H W5762TA ENAYWSDDTEO C .I S D UFSREPROFNESGIEERTAISONLEEEKSOIREEN Engineered Systems Associates ESA JOB NUMBER 200483 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1 8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2 sheet:title:revisions :p r o j e c t # :d a t e :UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND I S NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS & MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.project:
E D C B A
E D C B A
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6 b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005 P100FOUNDATIONMECHANICALANDPLUMBINGPLAN20.0220 oct. 27,2020BYUIEngineeringTechnologyCenter (ETC)100% construction documentsPLAN NOTES:1 EXISTING COLD WATER SERIVE LINE TO BUILDING TO REMA IN. PROTECT PIPING DURING CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTAIN CONNECTION TO EXISTING FIRE RISER AND DOMESTIC WATE R.EXISTING WASTE PIPING IN TUNNELS AND BELOW FLOOR TO REMAIN. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURE ABO VE AS CALLED OUT ON SHEET PD100. CAP ALL WASTE, WATER AND VENT PIPING IN BELOW FLOOR AS REQUIRED. CONTRACTOR TO FI ELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF EXISTING PIPING AND PROVIDE FITTING AS REQUIRED TO CAP.EXISTING ROOF DRAIN PIPING BELOW FLOOR TO REMAIN. PROTECT PIPING DURING CONSTRUCTION. MAINTAIN CONNECTION TO ALL EXISTING VERTICAL RISERS. REFER TO SHEET P101 FOR R OOF DRAIN PIPING ABOVE FLOOR. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXAC T LOCTIONS AND DEPTH OF EXISTING PIPING AND COORDINAT E WITH NEW WASTE PIPING AND TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM.EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN OR FLOOR SINK TO REMAIN. COVE R EXISTING DRAIN TO KEEP CLEAN. PROTECT DRAIN AND VENT PIPING DURING CONSTRUCTION. MAINTAIN ANY EXISTING COLD WATER PIPI NG TO TRAP PRIMER AND/OR ANY FLOOR CLEAN OUT ASSOCIATED W ITH DRAIN OR FLOOR SINK.EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURE ABOVE TO REMAIN. (REFER T O SHEET PD100.) PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTAIN PI PING CONNECTION TO EXISTING FIXTURE.RISE 2" WASTE LINE UP THRU FLOOR. PIPING TO BE RUN THRU NEW WALLS FOR NEW LAVATORIES ABOVE. REFER TO LARGE SCA LE TOILET ROOM PLAN ON SHEET P201 FOR CONTINUATION.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW PLUMBING FIXTURE AS SPECIFI ED. DROP WASTE PIPING DOWN THRU FLOOR AND CONNECT TO EXISTIN G WASTE PIPING OF EQUAL OR LARGE SIZE. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF EXISTING PIPING . PROVIDE NEW FITTINGS AS REQUIRED FOR CONNECTIONS.CONNECT NEW 4" WASTE LINE FROM NEW PLUMBING FIXTURE S ABOVE TO EXISTING WASTE LINE. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE, LOCATION AND ELEVATION OF EXISTING PIPI NG AND MATCH NEW CONNECTION TO EXISTING.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CUTTING AND PAT CHING OF EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORS FOR NEW WASTE PIPING. COORDINATE NEW PIPING WITH EXISTING PIPING AND WITH EXISTING FOOTINGS AND FOUNDATION WALLS.EXISTING STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN LINES RISING U P THRU FLOOR AND IN PIPE TUNNELS TO REMAIN. PROTECT DURIN G CONSTRUCTION.EXISTING FINTUBE HEATERS ABOVE TO REMAIN. MAINTAIN PIPING CONNECTION TO UNIT. EXISTING ZONE VALVE TO REMAIN S HUT-OFF.DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING FINTUBE HEATER ABOVE FLOOR. (SEE SHEET MD100.) REMOVE EXISTING PIPING THRU FLOO R AND IN PIPE TUNNEL.DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING IN PIPE TUNNEL. CAP EXISTING BRANCH L INE(S) NEAR MAIN PIPE AS SHOWN. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXAC T SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF EXISTING PIPING.EXISTING FLOOR GRILLE AND BOOT TO REMAIN. PROTECT D URING CONSTRUCTION. KEEP GRILLE AND BOOT CLEAN OF ANY DEB RIS. COORDINATE NEW WORK WITH EXISTING GRILLES AND BOOTS .EXISTING FLOOR GRILLE AND BOOT TO BE REMOVED. PROV IDE AND INSTALL NEW FLOOR GRILLES AS CALLED OUT ON SHEET M1 01. COORDINATE PATCHING OF EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR. (REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS.) SEAL ALL UNDERFLOOR DUCTS AIR TIGHT.EXISTING RETURN DUCT BELOW FLOOR TO REMAIN UNLESS N OTED OTHERWISE. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING GRILLES A S CALLED OUT ON SHEET MD100 AND SEAL DUCT AIR TIGHT. PROVIDE NEW RETURN AIR BOOTS UP TO NEW GRILLES AS SHOWN ON SHEET M101. ABANDON ANY UNSED DUCTWORK BELOW FLOOR.EXISTING SNOW MELT SYSTEM IN CONCRETE TO BE ABANDON ED. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING PIPING MANIFOLDS AND METAL COVERS BELOW GRADE. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR PATCHING OF EXISTING CONCRETE PAD. REFER TO SHEET M D100 FOR REMOVAL OF EXISTING PIPING INSIDE BUILDING.PROVIDE AND INSTALL 1000 GALLON SAND AND GREASE INTERCEPTOR AS SPECIFIED. PLACE INTERCEPTOR BELOW G RADE WITH (2) 24" DIAMETER MANHOLE ACCESS POINTS. REFER TO DETAIL N/P301 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION. CONNECT TO NEW TRE NCH DRAIN SYSTEM IN AUTOMOTIVE SHOP.PROVIDE 12" WIDE, SLOPING PRE-FAB TRENCH DRAIN SECT ION AS SPECIFIED WITH END LINE CONNECTION. PROVIDE SLOPING SECTIONS AS INDICATED BY PART NUMBERS. REFER TO DETAIL O/P30 1 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION AND PART NUMBER DIMENSIONS.PROVIDE 12" WIDE, NON-SLOPING PRE-FAB TRENCH DRAIN SECTION AS SPECIFIED WITH BOTTOM OUTLET CONNECTION. REFER T O DETAIL O/P3.1 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION AND PART NUMBER DIM ENSIONS.PROVIDE AND INSTALL 1000 GALLON SOLIDS INTERCEPTOR AS SPECIFIED. PLACE INTERCEPTOR BELOW GRADE WITH (2) 2 4" DIAMETER MANHOLE ACCESS POINTS. CONNECT INTERCEPTOR TO NEW CONCRETE WASH-OUT DRAIN LOCATED IN CONCRETE ARE A ABOVE. REFER TO DETAIL N/P301 FOR SIMILAR INTERCEPT OR INSTALLATION.PROVIDE 24"x24"x24" CONCRETE VAULT BOX IN GROUND FO R SNOWMELT MANIFOLDS AND/OR ZONE VALVES. REFER TO DET AILS ON SHEET M302 FOR TYPICAL MANIFOLD PIPING AND VALVE BO X INSTALLTION.RUN NEW 1-1/4" SNOW MELT SUPPLY AND RETURN LINES TH RU EXISTING PIPING TUNNEL AS SHOWN. COORDINATE NEW PI PING LOCATIONS WITH EXISTING STEAM PIPING, DUCTWORK AND BUILDING STRUCTURE. SUPPORT NEW PIPING ON UNISTRUT SUPPORTS FROM TOP OF TUNNEL. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS.CORE DRILL EXISTING CONCRETE FOUNDATION WALL AS REQ UIRED TO INSTALL NEW SNOWMELT PIPING. SEAL WATER TIGHT A ROUND NEW PIPING. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS.CONNECT NEW 2" WASTE LINE FROM PT-1 ABOVE TO EXISTI NG 2" (OR LARGER) WASTE LINE IN PIPE TUNNEL. FIELD VERIFY EX ACT SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING PIPING. PROVIDE FITTI NGS AS REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION.DROP 1-1/2" WASTE LINE THRU FLOOR FROM DF-1 AND S-1 FIXTURES ABOVE. RUN 2" WASTE LINE IN PIPE TUNNEL AS SHOWN AN D CONNECT TO EXISTING WASTE PIPING OF SAME OR LARGER SIZE. FI ELD VERIFY EXACT SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING PIPING. P ROVIDE FITTINGS AS REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION.2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 3
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m
#
3
1
1
-
1
3
/
2
0
1
P1
0
0
ME
C
H
&
P
L
B
G
F
O
U
N
D
A
T
I
O
N
P
L
A
N
1/
1
6
"
=
1
'
-
0
"
3
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B C D E
10 10
4
A
C
-
1
H
B
-
1
A
C
-
1
H
B
-
1
AC
-
3
A
C
-
1
AC
-
2
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
H
B
-
1
H
B
-
1
WB
-
1
AC
-
3
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
2
A
C
-
1
H
B
-
1
H
B
-
1
WB
-
1
E
S
-
1
JS
-
1
FC 1A
FC 1B
H
B
-
1
AC-1
H
B
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
H
B
-
1
H
B
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
AC
-
1
A
C
-
1
HB
-
1
HB
-
1
H
B
-
1
A
C
-
1
A
C
-
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
3
1
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
FC
O
4
1
3
2
6
2
1
3
2
2
11
11
11
3"
V
T
R
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
FC
O
L
-
1
L
-
1
L
-
1
L
-
1
L
-
1
L
-
1
L
-
1
L
-
1
L
-
1
W
C
-
1
F
D
-
1
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
U
-
1
U
-
1
U
-
2
W
C
-
1
FD
-
1
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
DF
-
2
JS
-
1
EW
-
1
D
F
-
1
S
-
2
S
-
2
S
-
2
S
-
2
54
ES
-
1
13
13
13
13
13
13
AC
-
3
13AC-2 AC-2
AC
-
2
AC
-
1
ES
-
1
1
3
2
12
12
12 12
12
12 1212
12
11
11
12
26
26
4
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
FC
O
RE
F
E
R
T
O
L
A
R
G
E
S
C
A
L
E
TO
I
L
E
T
R
O
O
M
P
L
A
N
O
N
SH
E
E
T
P
2
0
1
F
O
R
P
I
P
I
N
G
A
N
D
FI
X
T
U
R
E
S
I
N
T
H
I
S
A
R
E
A
.
1
6
2 2
2
13
(E
)
C
O
T
G
(E
)
C
O
T
G
2
15
19
15
15
19
15
15
8
19
14
15
19
15
19
15
15
19
14
15
19
15
P
T
-
1
23
21
22
H
B
-
3
HB
-
3
8
3/4
"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
C
W
HB
-
2
(E
)
1
-
1
/
2
"
C
W
(E
)
1
-
1
/
2
"
C
W
(E
)
1
-
1
/
2
"
C
W
3
HB-2
HB
-
3
HB
-
2
AH 1
19
2828
18
17
17
17
17
17
17
3
1
17
18
18
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
2020
18 18
11 11
3/4
"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
11
(E
)
3
"
C
W
4"
V
4"
V
T
R
17
17
19
15
1915
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
17
19
27
19
19
19
19
18 15 19
17
16
12
12
15
15
AC
-
3
3/4" A
3/4
"
A
14
14
3/4
"
A
15
3/4
"
A
3/4
"
A
3/4
"
A
3/4
"
A
12
12
(E
)
3
"
C
W
3/4
"
A
3/4
"
A
3/4
"
A
(E) 3" CW
8
16
1 1
/
4
"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
C
W
3/4
"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
7
7
9
9
6
4"
V
T
R
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
1"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
1"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
3/4" CW1 1/4" A
1 1
/
2
"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
1 1
/
2
"
C
W
19
19
22
3/4
"
H
W
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
3"
V
E
N
T
24
25
25
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
9
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
8
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
7
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
6
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
5
OF
F
I
C
E
10
4
RE
C
E
P
T
I
O
N
10
2
VE
S
T
I
B
U
L
E
10
1
BR
E
A
K
R
O
O
M
13
0
OF
F
I
C
E
12
9
OF
F
I
C
E
12
8
OF
F
I
C
E
12
7
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
13
1
OF
F
I
C
E
12
4
OF
F
I
C
E
12
5
OF
F
I
C
E
12
3
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
11
8
SE
A
T
I
N
G
12
6
ME
N
'
S
11
5
JA
N
I
T
O
R
11
6
OF
F
I
C
E
11
9
OF
F
I
C
E
12
0
OF
F
I
C
E
12
1
OF
F
I
C
E
12
2
WO
M
E
N
'
S
11
7
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
10
3
OP
E
N
O
F
F
I
C
E
11
1
CO
N
F
R
E
N
C
E
R
O
O
M
(N
.
I
.
C
.
)
11
4
OF
F
I
C
E
11
2
BR
E
A
K
R
O
O
M
11
1
B
OF
F
I
C
E
11
0
VE
S
T
I
B
U
L
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
11
1
A
CO
N
C
R
E
T
E
T
O
O
L
S
13
7
A
HIG
H
B
A
Y
S
H
O
P
13
7
CU
R
I
N
G
C
L
O
S
E
T
13
7
B
C
M
T
O
O
L
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
1
3
7
C
ST
U
D
E
N
T
CO
L
L
A
B
O
R
A
T
I
O
N
13
6
CU
S
T
O
D
I
A
L
13
8
A
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
13
9
OF
F
I
C
E
13
3
OF
F
I
C
E
13
4
I.
T
.
13
5
CM
/
C
E
T
O
O
L
R
O
O
M
13
2
A
CM
/
C
E
L
A
B
13
2
AU
T
O
M
O
T
I
V
E
S
H
O
P
13
8
AU
T
O
T
O
O
L
R
O
O
M
13
8
B
CE
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
14
0
ME
C
H
14
1
AU
T
O
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
14
2
EN
G
I
N
E
S
L
A
B
14
3
FS
-
1
OIL
S
E
P
A
R
A
T
O
R
AI
R
D
R
Y
E
R
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
C
W
18
4
'
-
0
"
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC-3 AC-3
C-1
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
3
AC
-
2
AC
-
2
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
11
3
HB
-
3
4
M2
0
1
29
AC
-
2
15
HB
-
3
SO
I
L
S
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
AN
D
C
O
M
P
A
C
T
I
O
N
14
4
OF
-
1
RD
-
1
12
9
2
S
Q
.
F
T
.
RO
O
F
A
R
E
A
OF
-
1
RD
-
1
12
9
2
S
Q
.
F
T
.
RO
O
F
A
R
E
A
3"
R
D
3"
O
F
3"
R
D
3"
O
F
FS
-
1
FC 2A
FC 2B
FC 3B
26
26
FC 3A
14
30
AC
-
3
AC
-
1
15
3/
4
"
A
I
R
B
E
L
O
W
ME
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
31
PW
-
1
HB
-
3
TD
-
1
TD
-
1
TD
-
2
S-1
6
4"
V
T
R
6
4"
V
T
R
L
-
1
1 1
/
2
"
V
2"
V
30
S-1
RD
-
1
OF
-
1
WF-
1
AT
6
"
A
B
O
V
E
SID
E
W
A
L
K
AT
6
"
A
B
O
V
E
AS
P
H
A
L
T
CO
T
G
WF
-
1
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
2"
V
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
FH
-
1
2"
V
T
R
1/2
"
C
W
19
2"
V
T
R
W
I
T
H
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
CP 2
TP
-
1
15
15
DR
O
P
3
"
R
O
O
F
D
R
A
I
N
P
I
P
I
N
G
D
O
W
N
I
N
S
I
D
E
CO
L
U
M
N
T
U
B
E
S
T
E
E
L
.
C
O
O
R
D
I
N
A
T
E
W
I
T
H
ST
R
U
C
T
U
R
A
L
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
.
3"
R
D
3"
O
F
CO
N
N
E
C
T
T
O
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
4
"
R
O
O
F
DR
A
I
N
L
I
N
E
A
B
O
V
E
CE
I
L
I
N
G
.
1 1
/
2
"
V
3/4
"
A
1"
A
3/4
"
A
1"
A
1"
A
3/4
"
A
3/4
"
A
1"
A
1"
A
3/4
"
A
1"
A
1"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
3/4
"
C
W
3/4
"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
1"
C
W
1/2
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
1"
C
W
1 1/4" A
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
3/4
"
C
W
1"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
1"
C
W
1"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
4
"
A
1"
C
W
3/4
"
W
3/4
"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1/4" A
1"
C
W
1414
14 14
14 14
1414
14 14
FD
-
1
2"
V
2"
V
1/2
"
C
W
PR
O
V
I
D
E
A
N
D
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
C
O
N
C
R
E
T
E
C
U
R
I
N
G
MIS
T
S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
I
M
I
L
A
R
T
O
C
O
R
R
I
G
A
N
VA
P
O
R
P
L
U
S
C
O
M
P
L
E
T
E
W
I
T
H
K
D
F
A
N
T
I
-
BA
C
T
E
R
I
A
L
F
I
L
T
E
R
,
R
E
M
O
T
E
T
I
M
E
R
A
N
D
HU
M
I
D
I
T
Y
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
,
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
TE
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
A
N
D
H
U
M
I
D
I
T
Y
R
E
C
O
R
D
E
R
,
AN
D
L
O
W
P
R
O
F
I
L
E
C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
W
I
T
H
AD
J
U
S
T
A
B
L
E
W
A
T
E
R
R
E
G
U
L
A
T
O
R
.
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
WA
T
E
R
A
N
D
A
I
R
P
I
P
I
N
G
A
N
D
S
P
R
A
Y
NO
Z
Z
L
E
S
A
S
R
E
C
O
M
M
E
N
D
E
D
B
Y
MA
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
R
.
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
D
E
T
A
I
L
6
/
P
2
0
1
TI
M
E
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
F
O
R
MIS
T
S
P
R
A
Y
S
Y
S
T
E
M
10/27/20GD A H W5762TA ENAYWSDDTEO C .I S D UFSREPROFNESGIEERTAISONLEEEKSOIREEN Engineered Systems Associates ESA JOB NUMBER 200483 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1 8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2 sheet:title:revisions :p r o j e c t # :d a t e :UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND I S NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS & MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.project:
E D C B A
E D C B A
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6 b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005 P101PLUMBINGFLOOR PLAN20.0220 oct. 27,2020BYUIEngineeringTechnologyCenter (ETC)100% construction documents
1/
8
"
=
1
'
-
0
"
P1
0
1
1
PL
U
M
B
I
N
G
F
L
O
O
R
P
L
A
N
PLAN NOTES:1 EXISTING ROOF DRAIN AND OVERFLOW DRAIN TO REMAIN. PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION.EXISTING ROOF DRAIN OR OVERFLOW DRAIN PIPING NEAR R OOF TO REMAIN. PROTECT EXISTING PIPING DURING CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTAIN CONNECT TO EXISTING DRAINS IN ROOF AND WAL L FLANGE IN EXTERIOR WALL.EXISTING ROOF DRAIN PIPING DOWN NEAR COLUMN OR WALL TO REMAIN. PIPING TO BE PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION . REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ANY CHASE WALLS AROUN D PIPING. PROVIDE CLEANOUT EXTENSION AS REQUIRED FOR ANY NEW WALLS AROUND EXISTING PIPING.EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN OR FLOOR SINK TO REMAIN. COVE R EXISTING DRAIN TO KEEP CLEAN. PROTECT DRAIN AND VENT PIPING DURING CONSTRUCTION. MAINTAIN ANY EXISTING COLD WATER PIPI NG TO TRAP PRIMER AND/OR ANY FLOOR CLEAN OUT ASSOCIATED W ITH DRAIN OR FLOOR SINK.EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURE TO REMAIN. DISCONNECT AN D REMOVE AS REQUIRED FOR NEW WALL AND/OR FLOOR FINISHES AND REINSTALL AFTER FINISH WORK IS COMPLETE. PROVIDE NE W P-TRAP AND STOPS FOR EXISTING FIXTURE.EXISTING VENT THRU ROOF TO REMAIN. DISCONNECT ALL E XISTING VENT PIPING BELOW ROOF TO EXISTING FIXTURES. REFER TO NEW VENT PIPING TO BE CONNECTED TO EXISTING VENT THRU R OOF. FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION OF EXISTING VT R.EXISTING VENT PIPING ABOVE CEILINGS TO REMAIN. FIEL D VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW EMERGENCY SHOWER AND EYE WA SH AS SPECIFIED. RISE 1-1/4" COLD AND 3/4" HOT WATER LIN ES UP AND CONNECT TO EXISTING WATER PIPING NEAR ROOF. PROVID E TEMPERING VALVE AT TOP OF SHOWER. FIELD VERIFY EXAC T SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF EXISTING PIPING. SHOWER DRAIN TO R UN ON FLOOR TO NEARBY FLOOR DRAIN. REFER TO DETAIL C/P301 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION.RUN NEW HOT AND COLD WATER LINES ABOVE CEILINGS TO EXISTING FIXTURES. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND SIZES O F EXISTING PIPING IN WALL AND PROVIDE NEW FITTINGS AS REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION.EXISTING FIRE RISER ASSEMBLY AND ALARM VALVE TO REM AIN. PROTECT PIPING, DRAIN LINE, AND FIRE DEPARTMENT CON NECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION. ENTIRE BUILDING IS FIRE SPRIN KLED. FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO ENSURE PROP ER WATER PRESSURE TO BUILDING FOR NEW AND EXISTING HEA DS AS PER CODE REQUIREMENTS.EXISTING COLD WATER LINE TO REMAIN. PROTECT PIPING DURING CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTAIN CONNECTION TO EXISTING PR ESSURE REGULATOR LOCATED IN MEZZANINE MECHANICAL ROOM. REF ER TO SHEET P101 FOR NEW FIXTURES TO BE CONNECTED TO EXIS TING COLD WATER PIPING. EXISTING HOT WATER PIPING TO BE REMOVED.EXISTING COMPRESSED AIR PIPING NEAR ROOF TO REMAIN. PROTECT EXISTING PIPING DURING CONSTRUCTION. CONNECT NEW H OSE REELS AND WALL OUTLETS TO EXISTING PIPING AS SHOWN.MOUNT EXISTING (RELOCATED) HOSE REEL TO ROOF STRUCT URE ABOVE NEW WORK STATION. CONNECT RELOCATED REEL TO EXISTING PIPING WITH NEW 3/4" LINE. REFER TO DETAIL F/P301 FOR TYPICAL PIPING CONNECTIONS.PROVIDE NEW HOSE REEL AS SPECIFIED. MOUNT TO ROOF STRUCTURE ABOVE NEW WORK STATION. CONNECT TO EXISTI NG PIPING WITH NEW 3/4" LINE. REFER TO DETAIL F/P301 F OR TYPICAL PIPING CONNECTIONS.PROVIDE NEW WALL MOUNTED HOSE REEL FOR COMPRESSED A IR. MOUNT ON WALL AT 48" ABOVE FLOOR. RISE 1/2" AIR LI NE UP AND CONNECT TO NEW OR EXISTING PIPING NEAR ROOF. REFER TO DETAIL B/P301 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION AND PIPING CONNECTIONS.EXTEND EXISTING 1" COMPRESSED AIR LINE INTO AUTOMOT IVE SHOP AND CONNECT TO NEW AIR PIPING. PROVIDE SHUT-OFF VAL VE IN LINE INSIDE CM/CE CLASSROOM. FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION OF EXISTING AIR PIPING IN CLASSROOM AND PROVIDE FIT TINGS AS REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION.RUN NEW COMPRESSED AIR AND COLD WATER PIPING AT 8'-0" ABOVE FLOOR. COORDINATE PIPING WITH OTHER PIPING, ELECTRI CAL CONDUITS AND BUILDING STRUCTURE.RISE PIPING UP ABOVE OVERHEAD DOORS AS REQUIRED.DROP 3/4" COLD WATER LINE DOWN WALL AND CONNECT TO HOSE BIBB. INTERIOR HOSE BIBBS TO BE AT 36" ABOVE FLOOR AND EXTERIOR HOSE BIBBS TO BE 24" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE. REFER TO DETAIL D/P301 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION.RUN NEW 1-1/4" COLD WATER MAIN LINE ACROSS AUTOMOTI VE SHOP THRU ROOF JOISTS. COORDINATE NEW PIPING WITH EXIST ING DUCTWORK. OTHER PIPING, ELECTRICAL CONDUITS AND BUI LDING STRUCTURE. LINE TO BE PROTECTED WITH BACK-FLOW PREV ENTION DEVICE. (REFER TO MEZZANINE PLAN ON SHEET M102.)CONNECT NEW 1-1/4" COLD WATER LINE TO EXISTING 1-1/2" LINE NEAR ROOF. EXTEND NEW PIPING TO FIXTURES AS SHOWN. MAT CH EXISTING ELEVATION OF EXISTING PIPING.CONNECT NEW 3/4" COLD WATER LINE TO EXISTING 1-1/2" LINE NEAR ROOF. DROP PIPING DOWN WALL TO BELOW NEW FIXTURES AND RUN EXPOSED ON WALL. CONNECT TO NEW FIXTURES AS SHOWN.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW PLASTER TRAP ON FLOOR. CONN ECT TO WASTE LINES FROM (3) SINKS. DROP DISCHARGE WASTE LI NE DOWN THRU FLOOR INTO PIPING TUNNEL AND CONNECT TO EXISTI NG 4" WASTE LINE IN TUNNEL. REFER TO FOUNDATION PLAN ON S HEET P1.0 FOR CONTINUATION OF WASTE PIPING.PROVIDE NEW CUSTODIAL SINK AS SPECIFIED. SINK TO B E INSTALLED BELOW EXISTING STAIRS. RISE WATER AND VENT PIPING UP AND OFFSET AS REQUIRED FOR STAIRS. CONNECT HOT AND COLD WATER LINES TO EXISTING WATER PIPING IN MEZZANINE MECHANI CAL ROOM. (SEE SHEET M102.) RISE 2" VENT UP THRU ROOF TO 3" V TR. DROP 2" WASTE PIPING DOWN THRU FLOOR. REFER TO FOUNDATION P LAN FOR CONTINUATION.PROVIDE NEW WASH BASIN FIXTURES AS SPECIFIED. RISE WATER PIPING UP EXPOSED ON WALL AND CONNECT TO EXISTING W ATER PIPING IN MEZZANINE MECHANICAL ROOM. (SEE SHEET M10 2.) RISE 2" VENT UP AND CONNECT TO NEW 3" VTR AS SHOWN. DROP 2 " WASTE PIPING DOWN THRU FLOOR. REFER TO FOUNDATION PLAN FO R CONTINUATION.MINI SPLIT FAN COIL SYSTEM SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED B Y MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO ROUGH -IN AND CONNECT 3/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE TO INDOOR UN IT AND RUN TO NEAREST FLOOR DRAIN. COORDINATE DRAIN PIPIN G WITH OTHER PIPING AND SECURE TO EXISTING WALL. PIPING N OT TO INTERFER WITH MEZZANINE ACCESS DOORS.INDOOR AIR HANDLER SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY MECHAI NCAL CONTRACTOR. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO ROUGH-IN AND CON NECT 1" DRAIN LINE TO DX COOLING COIL AND DRAIN PAN BELO W UNIT. RUN 1" DRAIN LINE THRU EXTERIOR WALL AND TERMINATE WITH 45 DEGREE ELBOW. DRAIN LINE TO BE LOCATED ABOVE LOWER ROOF AND BE AT LEAST 4" AWAY FROM WALL.MANHOLE ACCESS POINTS FOR UNDER GROUND INTERCEPTORS . REFER TO SHEET P100 FOR INTERCEPTOR LOCATIONS AND P IPING CONNECTIONS. REFER TO DETAIL N/P301 FOR TYPICAL INS TALLATION.RELOCATE EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURE TO THIS LOCATION . COORDINATE WITH NEW FIXTURES AND CONNECT TO NEW WAS TE, WATER, AND VENT PIPING AS SHOWN.DROP 1-1/2" WASTE LINE FROM NEW S-1 SINK IN BREAK R OOM AND NEW DF-1 IN HIGH BAY ROOM DOWN THRU FLOOR. REFER TO SHEET P100 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING IN PIPE TUNNEL BELO W.RELOCATE EXISTING AIR COMPRESSOR TO THIS LOCATION. PROVIDE NEW EXHAUST PIPING TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING COMPLETE WITH MUFFLER. CONNECT NEW 1-1/4" COMPRESSED AIR LINE TO EXISTING COMPRESSOR AND RUN TO CE/CM LAB AS SHOWN ON PLANS. REFER TO DETAIL E/P301 FOR TYPICAL PIPING CONNECTIONS TO COMPRESSOR.2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 313
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m
#
3
1
1
-
1
3
/
2
0
3
3
VA
P
O
R
P
L
U
S
S
P
R
A
Y
N
O
Z
Z
L
E
3/8
"
A
I
R
L
I
N
E
1/4
"
W
A
T
E
R
L
I
N
E
3/8
"
A
I
R
T
U
B
I
N
G
1/4
"
W
A
T
E
R
T
U
B
I
N
G
24
V
A
C
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
W
I
R
E
TIM
E
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
U
N
I
T
3/8
"
A
D
A
P
T
E
R
VA
P
O
R
P
L
U
S
S
P
R
A
Y
N
O
Z
Z
L
E
DU
A
L
F
I
L
T
E
R
S
MO
U
N
T
E
D
O
N
WA
L
L
VA
P
O
R
P
L
U
S
S
P
R
A
Y
N
O
Z
Z
L
E
1/4
"
W
A
T
E
R
T
U
B
I
N
G
3/8
"
A
I
R
T
U
B
I
N
G
1/4
"
U
N
I
O
N
CA
P
I
L
L
A
R
Y
F
L
O
W
RE
S
T
R
I
C
T
O
R
CO
N
C
R
E
T
E
C
U
R
E
M
I
S
T
I
N
G
S
Y
S
T
E
M
T
O
B
E
S
I
M
I
L
A
R
TO
C
O
R
R
I
G
A
N
V
A
P
O
R
P
L
U
S
C
O
M
P
L
E
T
E
K
D
F
AN
T
I
-
B
A
C
T
E
R
I
A
L
F
I
L
T
E
R
,
S
T
A
I
N
L
E
S
S
S
T
E
E
L
A
I
R
AT
O
M
I
Z
I
N
G
N
O
Z
Z
L
E
S
,
R
E
M
O
T
E
T
I
M
E
R
A
N
D
H
U
M
I
D
I
T
Y
CO
N
T
R
O
L
,
A
N
L
O
W
P
R
O
F
I
L
E
C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
W
I
T
H
AD
J
U
S
T
A
B
L
E
W
A
T
E
R
R
E
G
U
L
A
T
O
R
.
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
W
A
T
E
R
AN
D
A
I
R
P
I
P
I
N
G
A
N
D
S
P
R
A
Y
N
O
Z
Z
L
E
S
A
S
RE
C
O
M
M
E
N
D
E
D
B
Y
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
R
.
CU
R
I
N
G
R
O
O
M
M
I
S
T
S
P
R
A
Y
S
Y
S
T
E
M
D
E
T
A
I
L
6
NO
S
C
A
L
E
5
D
L-1
W
C
-
1
FD
-
1
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
U
-
1
U
-
1
U
-
2
W
C
-
1
F
D
-
1
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
W
C
-
2
DF-2
HB
-
4
EW-1
L-1
5
D
2"
V
E
N
T
U
P
F
R
O
M
FL
O
O
R
D
R
A
I
N
S
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
4
"
O
V
E
R
F
L
O
W
DR
A
I
N
T
O
R
E
M
A
I
N
.
1-
1
/
2
"
W
A
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
B
E
L
O
W
1-
1
/
2
"
V
E
N
T
L
I
N
E
A
B
O
V
E
DR
O
P
2
"
W
A
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
B
E
L
O
W
F
L
O
O
R
.
RE
F
E
R
T
O
F
O
U
N
D
A
T
I
O
N
P
L
A
N
O
N
SH
E
E
T
P
1
0
0
F
O
R
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
A
T
I
O
N
.
LI
N
E
O
F
P
I
P
E
T
U
N
N
E
L
B
E
L
O
W
F
L
O
O
R
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
1 1
/
2
"
V
3/4" HW4" V
1 1
/
2
"
V
4"
V
4"
V
3"
V
2"
V
3"
V
4"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
3/4" HW
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
1-
1
/
2
"
W
A
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
B
E
L
O
W
1-
1
/
2
"
V
E
N
T
L
I
N
E
A
B
O
V
E
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
DR
O
P
4
"
W
A
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
DO
W
N
T
H
R
U
F
L
O
O
R
.
SE
E
F
O
U
N
D
A
I
T
O
N
P
L
A
N
FO
R
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
A
T
I
O
N
.
FLOOR ACCESS2" CW
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
2"
C
W
9
1
10
JS
-
1
1/2" CW
3/4
"
C
W
TP-111
5
D
1
1
1
2 1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
3
4
6
8
5
4"
V
T
R
2"
V
T
R
3
6
8
6
8
6
67
4 4
5
D
4"
V
4"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
1 1
/
2
"
W
2"
W
2"
W
2"
W
2"
W
2"
W
2"
W
4"
W
4"
W
2"
W
4"
W
2"
W
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
4"
W
2"
W
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
W
2"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
1 1
/
2
"
V
2"
V
3"
V
2"
V
2"
V
2"
V
3"
V
2"
V
4"
V
2"
V
2"
V
4"
W
1 1
/
2
"
V
A
AC
-
1
HB
-
1
12
13
CE
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
14
0
ME
C
H
14
1
AU
T
O
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
14
2
FS
-
1
PR
O
V
I
D
E
N
E
W
O
I
L
S
E
P
A
R
A
T
O
R
T
O
MA
T
C
H
C
A
P
A
C
I
T
Y
O
F
B
O
T
H
N
E
W
AN
D
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
S
.
PR
O
V
I
D
E
N
E
W
A
I
R
D
R
Y
E
R
TO
M
A
T
C
H
C
A
P
A
C
I
T
Y
O
F
BO
T
H
N
E
W
A
N
D
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
S
C-1 FS
-
1
14
PW
-
1
HB
-
3
AT
6
"
A
B
O
V
E
AS
P
H
A
L
T
CO
T
G
2"
V
T
R
W
I
T
H
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
CP 2
TP
-
1
1 1
/
4
"
C
W
1"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
3/4
"
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
1"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
1"
C
W
1 1
/
4
"
A
1 1
/
2
"
A
1 1
/
2
"
A
1 1
/
2
"
A
3/4
"
C
W
3"
R
D
3"
O
F
3"
R
D
3"
O
F
3"
R
D
3"
O
F
1 1
/
2
"
A
1 1
/
2
"
A
WF
-
1
15
BY
-
P
A
S
S
V
A
L
V
E
1/2
"
H
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
1/2
"
C
W
2"
C
W
1"
C
W
2"
C
W
1"
C
W
3/4
"
C
W
1"
C
W
1"
C
W
2"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
3/4
"
H
W
1/2
"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
1/2
"
H
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
H
W
2"
C
W
3/4
"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
H
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
1/2
"
H
W
2"
C
W
1/2
"
C
W
3/4
"
H
W
10/27/20GD A H W5762TA ENAYWSDDTEO C .I S D UFSREPROFNESGIEERTAISONLEEEKSOIREEN Engineered Systems Associates ESA JOB NUMBER 200483 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1 8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2 sheet:title:revisions :p r o j e c t # :d a t e :UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND I S NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS & MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.project:
E D C B A
E D C B A
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6 b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005 P201LARGESCALEPUMBINGPLANS20.0220 oct. 27,2020BYUIEngineeringTechnologyCenter (ETC)100% construction documents
1/
4
"
=
1
'
-
0
"
P2
0
1
2
LA
R
G
E
S
C
A
L
E
T
O
I
L
E
T
R
O
O
M
S
1/
4
"
=
1
'
-
0
"
P2
0
1
1
LA
R
G
E
S
C
A
L
E
T
O
I
L
E
T
R
O
O
M
D
E
M
O
P
L
A
N
PLAN NOTES:1 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURE. RE MOVE ALL WASTE, WATER AND VENT PIPING IN WALL, THRU FLOO R AND/OR THRU CEILING AS REQUIRED. CAP ALL EXISTING PIPING B ELOW FLOOR OR ABOVE CEILING. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF EXISTING PIPING AND PROVIDE FITTING AS REQUIRED TO CAP.DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN OR FLOOR SINK. CAP EXISTING WASTE LINE IN TUNNEL BELOW FLOOR. ABAN DON ALL WASTE AND/OR VENT PIPING WHERE NOT ACCESSIBLE. REFE R TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR PATCHING OF EXISTING CON CRETE FLOORS.REMOVE EXISTING VENT PIPING UP THRU ROOF AND/OR UP IN EXISTING WALL. CAP EXISTING PIPING BELOW FLOOR. REF ER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR PATCHING OF EXISTING ROO F.EXISTING ROOF DRAIN AND OVERFLOW DRAIN AND ALL ASS OCIATED PIPING TO REMAIN. PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION. PIP ING DOWN NEAR WALL TO REMAIN. PIPING TO BE PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR A NY CHASE WALLS AROUND PIPING. PROVIDE CLEANOUT EXTENSI ON AS REQUIRED FOR ANY NEW WALLS AROUND EXISTING PIPING.EXISTING 4" VENT THRU ROOF TO REMAIN. DISCONNECT AL L EXISTING VENT PIPING BELOW ROOF TO EXISTING FIXTURES. REFER TO NEW VENT PIPING TO BE CONNECTED TO EXISTING VENT THRU R OOF. FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION OF EXISTING VT R.DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL EXISTING WATER PIPING ABO VE CEILINGS WHERE EXPOSED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CAP AND ABANDON ANY PIPING WHERE CEILINGS ARE NOT BEING REM OVED. REFER TO SHEET P101 FOR NEW WATER LINES TO BE RUN T O NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES.EXISTING COLD WATER LINE TO REMAIN. PROTECT PIPING DURING CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTAIN CONNECT TO EXISTING PRESS URE REGULATOR LOCATED IN MEZZANINE MECHANICAL ROOM. REF ER TO SHEET P101 FOR NEW FIXTURES TO BE CONNECTED TO EXIS TING COLD WATER PIPING. EXISTING HOT WATER PIPING TO BE REMOVED.DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL VENT PIPING IN CEILING SP ACE AS SHOWN. REFER TO LARGE SCALE TOILET ROOM PLAN (THIS SHEET) FOR NEW FIXTURES AND VENT PIPING.MOUNT EMERGENCY EYEWASH ON WALL. CONNECT 1/2" HOT A ND COLD WATER LINES WITH TEMPERING VALVE TO EYEWASH. R UN DRAIN LINE TO ADJACENT SERVICE SINK. REFER TO DETA IL G/P301 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION.EXTEND NEW 4" VENT PIPING TO EXISTING 4" VTR AND CO NNECT. SEE PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN -
S
H
E
E
T
P
1
0
1
F
O
R
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
A
T
I
O
N
.
PROVIDE AND INSTAL MULTI-DRAIN TRAP PRIMER NEAR FLO OR. DROP 1/2" COLD WATER LINE TO EACH FLOOR DRAIN. REFER TO FOUNDATION PLAN -
S
H
E
E
T
P
1
0
0
F
O
R
C
O
L
D
W
A
T
E
R
L
I
N
E
S
T
O
FLOOR DRAIN. REFER TO DETAIL M/P301 FOR TYPICAL TRAP PRI MER INSTALLATION AND PIPING CONNECTIONS.PROVIDE NEW WALL MOUNTED HOSE REEL FOR COMPRESSED A IR. MOUNT ON WALL AT 48" ABOVE FLOOR. RISE 1/2" AIR LI NE UP AND CONNECT TO NEW OR EXISTING PIPING NEAR ROOF. REFER TO DETAIL B/P301 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION AND PIPING CONNECTIONS.DROP 3/4" COLD WATER LINE DOWN WALL AND CONNECT TO HOSE BIBB. INTERIOR HOSE BIBBS TO BE AT 36" ABOVE FLOOR AND EXTERIOR HOSE BIBBS TO BE 24" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE. REFER TO DETAIL D/P301 FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION.RELOCATE EXISTING AIR COMPRESSOR TO THIS LOCATION. PROVIDE NEW EXHAUST PIPING TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING COMPLETE WITH MUFFLER. CONNECT NEW 1-1/4" COMPRESSED AIR LINE TO EXISTING COMPRESSOR AND RUN TO CE/CM LAB AS SHOWN ON PLANS. PROVIDE BY-PASS PIPE AND VALVE IN SYSTEM AND CONNEC T TO NEW COMPRESSOR PIPING TO AUTO SHOP. REFER TO DETAIL E/P 301 FOR TYPICAL PIPING CONNECTIONS TO COMPRESSOR.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW AIR COMPRESSOR AS SPECIFIED . PROVIDE EXHAUST PIPING TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING COMP LETE WITH MUFFLER. CONNECT 1-1/4" COMPRESSED AIR LINE TO COMPRESSOR AND RUN TO AUTOMOTIVE SHOP AS SHOWN ON P LANS. REFER TO DETAIL E/P301 FOR TYPICAL PIPING CONNECTIO NS TO COMPRESSOR. PROVIDE BY-PAS PIPE AND VALVE IN SYSTEM AND CONNECT TO EXISTING COMPRESSOR PIPING TO EM/EC LAB.2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P2
0
1
3
WA
S
T
E
A
N
D
V
E
N
T
R
I
S
E
R
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
CO
N
N
E
C
T
N
E
W
4
"
V
E
N
T
LI
N
E
T
O
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
4
"
VE
N
T
T
H
R
U
R
O
O
F
CO
N
N
E
C
T
N
E
W
2
"
W
A
S
T
E
LI
N
E
T
O
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
4
"
WA
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
B
E
L
O
W
F
L
O
O
R
CO
N
N
E
C
T
N
E
W
4
"
W
A
S
T
E
LI
N
E
T
O
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
4
"
W
A
S
T
E
LI
N
E
B
E
L
O
W
F
L
O
O
R
.
CO
N
N
E
C
T
N
E
W
2
"
W
A
S
T
E
LIN
E
T
O
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
4
"
WA
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
B
E
L
O
W
F
L
O
O
R
RU
N
W
A
S
T
E
A
N
D
VE
N
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
I
N
W
A
L
L
.
RI
S
E
V
E
N
T
L
I
N
E
U
P
IN
W
A
L
L
T
O
A
B
O
V
E
CE
I
L
I
N
G
S
.
DR
O
P
W
A
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
D
O
W
N
TH
R
U
F
L
O
O
R
A
N
D
R
U
N
T
H
R
U
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
P
I
P
E
T
U
N
N
E
L
.
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
FD
-
1
DF
-
2
JS
-
1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
WC
-
2
WC
-
2
U
-
1
WC
-
2
U-1
U-2
9 10 11
1/
4
"
=
1
'
-
0
"
P2
0
1
4
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
R
O
O
M
P2
0
1
5
WA
T
E
R
I
S
O
M
E
T
R
I
C
12 1413 15
WC
-
2
WC
-
1
WC
-
1
WC
-
2
FD
-
1
FD
-
1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
WC
-
1
WC
-
2
WC
-
1
WC
-
2
WC
-
2
WC
-
2
WC
-
2
WC
-
2
U-1
U-1
U-2
WC
-
2
HB
-
4
JS
-
1
TP
-
1
EW
-
1
DF
-
2
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
L-1
RIS
E
3
/
4
"
H
O
T
W
A
T
E
R
L
I
N
E
U
P
I
N
T
O
M
E
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
ME
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
R
O
O
M
A
N
D
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
A
T
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
WA
T
E
R
H
E
A
T
E
R
.
C
O
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
T
O
F
I
E
L
D
V
E
R
I
F
Y
EX
A
C
T
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
O
F
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
W
A
T
E
R
H
E
A
T
E
R
.
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
P
I
P
I
N
G
TO
R
E
M
A
I
N
.
S
E
E
SH
E
E
T
P
D
1
0
0
CO
N
N
E
C
T
N
E
W
2
"
C
O
L
D
W
A
T
E
R
LIN
E
T
O
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
2
"
(
O
R
L
A
R
G
E
R
)
CO
L
D
W
A
T
E
R
L
I
N
E
I
N
C
H
A
S
E
O
R
I
N
ME
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
R
O
O
M
.
RU
N
N
E
W
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
O
N
E
W
T
O
I
L
E
T
RO
O
M
F
I
X
T
U
R
E
S
A
S
S
H
O
W
N
.
FR
O
N
T
V
I
E
W
S
I
D
E
V
I
E
W
FR
O
N
T
V
I
E
W
S
I
D
E
V
I
E
W
M
O
U
N
T
A
T
4
8
"
A
B
O
V
E
F
L
O
O
R
HO
S
E
C
L
A
M
P
1/
2
"
A
I
R
P
I
P
I
N
G
WA
L
L
OU
T
IN
HE
R
S
E
Y
M
O
D
E
L
F
R
P
-
I
I
R
E
D
U
C
E
D
PR
E
S
S
U
R
E
B
A
C
K
F
L
O
W
P
R
E
V
E
N
T
E
R
SI
Z
E
T
O
M
A
T
C
H
L
I
N
E
S
I
Z
E
A
S
SH
O
W
N
O
N
P
L
A
N
S
.
HE
R
S
E
Y
A
I
R
G
A
P
DR
A
I
N
F
U
N
N
E
L
1"
D
R
A
I
N
L
I
N
E
T
O
N
E
A
R
E
S
T
FL
O
O
R
D
R
A
I
N
O
R
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
S
I
N
K
RE
D
U
C
E
D
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
BA
C
K
-
F
L
O
W
P
R
E
V
E
N
T
E
R
T
O
BE
L
O
C
A
T
E
D
I
N
A
C
C
E
S
S
I
B
L
E
LO
C
A
T
I
O
N
.
(
A
P
P
R
O
X
I
M
A
T
E
L
Y
48
"
T
O
6
0
"
A
B
O
V
E
F
L
O
O
R
.
)
TY
P
.
H
O
S
E
C
L
A
M
P
MO
U
N
T
I
N
G
B
R
A
C
E
PI
P
E
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
MA
I
N
L
I
N
E
G
A
U
G
E
1-
1
/
2
"
N
P
T
AI
R
C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
AL
A
R
M
S
W
I
T
C
H
CO
N
T
R
O
L
P
A
N
E
L
DR
A
I
N
MU
F
F
L
E
R
CO
N
C
R
E
T
E
F
I
L
L
SL
A
B
ST
R
U
C
T
U
R
A
L
FL
O
O
R
D
R
A
I
N
OU
T
L
E
T
T
O
P
-
T
R
A
P
CE
M
E
N
T
B
E
D
FL
O
O
R
I
N
G
I
F
A
P
P
L
I
C
A
B
L
E
1/
2
"
P
E
X
M
PO
W
E
R
B
O
X
W
I
T
H
2
4
HO
U
R
T
I
M
E
C
L
O
C
K
12
0
V
-
1
P
O
W
E
R
BA
L
L
T
Y
P
E
SH
U
T
-
O
F
F
V
A
L
V
E
TY
P
I
C
A
L
U
N
I
O
N
SO
L
E
N
O
I
D
VA
L
V
E
CA
P
A
L
L
UN
U
S
E
D
P
O
R
T
S
RE
C
E
S
S
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
T
R
A
P
P
R
I
M
E
R
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
B
O
X
C
O
M
P
L
E
T
E
WIT
H
C
O
V
E
R
.
M
O
U
N
T
W
H
E
R
E
S
H
O
W
N
O
N
P
L
A
N
S
.
VA
C
U
U
M
B
R
E
A
K
E
R
3/
4
"
C
O
L
D
W
A
T
E
R
L
I
N
E
1/2
"
'
P
E
X
'
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
O
A
D
D
I
T
I
O
N
A
L
FL
O
O
R
D
R
A
I
N
A
S
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
.
3/
4
"
C
W
L
I
N
E
OV
E
R
R
I
D
E
SW
I
T
C
H
WA
T
E
R
P
R
O
O
F
ME
M
B
R
A
N
E
W
H
E
R
E
RE
Q
U
I
R
E
D
WA
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
FL
O
O
R
L
I
N
E
FI
N
I
S
H
G
R
A
D
E
1'-
0
"
1/8
B
E
N
D
FL
O
O
R
L
I
N
E
WA
L
L
BR
A
S
S
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
P
L
U
G
WIT
H
C
O
U
N
T
E
R
S
U
N
K
H
E
A
D
16
"
S
Q
U
A
R
E
C
O
N
C
P
A
D
TR
O
W
E
L
S
M
O
O
T
H
CL
E
A
N
O
U
T
A
N
D
A
C
C
E
S
S
CO
V
E
R
.
T
O
P
O
F
C
O
V
E
R
TO
B
E
F
L
U
S
H
W
I
T
H
T
O
P
OF
F
L
O
O
R
.
BA
L
A
N
C
E
O
F
P
I
P
I
N
G
SA
M
E
A
S
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
TO
G
R
A
D
E
.
CL
E
A
N
O
U
T
S
H
O
U
L
D
NO
T
B
E
L
O
C
A
T
E
D
I
N
CA
R
P
E
T
E
D
A
R
E
A
.
1/8
B
E
N
D
I
F
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
OC
C
U
R
S
A
T
E
N
D
O
F
L
I
N
E
.
WA
S
T
E
L
I
N
E
.
LE
N
G
T
H
T
O
S
U
I
T
.
CH
R
O
M
E
WA
L
L
C
O
V
E
R
AN
D
S
C
R
E
W
MA
Y
E
X
T
E
N
D
A
S
A
WA
S
T
E
O
R
V
E
N
T
PL
U
G
G
E
D
T
E
E
WIT
H
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
BA
L
A
N
C
E
O
F
P
I
P
I
N
G
SA
M
E
A
S
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
T
O
GR
A
D
E
.
1/
8
B
E
N
D
1/
8
B
E
N
D
FLOORVALVE HOUSING REMOVABLE KEY GRADE
3/
4
"
C
O
L
D
W
A
T
E
R
L
I
N
E
NE
A
R
W
A
L
L
W
H
E
R
E
E
X
P
O
S
E
D
PIPE SUPPORT GROUT AROUND BIBB IN WALL 3/4" HOSE CONNECTION WITH ANTI-SIPHON VACUUM BREAKER 12" MIN.24" MAX.ADJUSTABLE CLAMPEXTERIOR WALL REMOVABLE KEY
3/
4
"
H
O
S
E
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
WI
T
H
A
N
T
I
-
S
I
P
H
O
N
VA
C
U
U
M
B
R
E
A
K
E
R
36" MIN.48" MAX.
6
"
4
'
-
0
"
6
"
CL
E
A
N
O
U
T
3"
V
E
N
T
L
I
N
E
T
O
BU
I
L
D
I
N
G
.
S
E
E
F
L
O
O
R
PL
A
N
.
1
0
"
4'-
0
"
6"
1
0
"
6"
11
'
-
4
"
6"
WA
T
E
R
LE
V
E
L
1
5
"
2
3
"
4
8
"
4"
EA
C
H
W
A
Y
-
B
O
T
T
O
M
,
PA
R
T
I
T
I
O
N
(
T
Y
P
I
C
A
L
)
SI
D
E
S
A
N
D
V
E
R
T
I
C
A
L
6"
C
O
N
C
R
E
T
E
#4
B
A
R
S
A
T
1
2
"
O
.
C
.
5'-
1
0
"
1
0
"
6"
WA
L
L
S
.
1
0
"
4"
4"
O
U
T
L
E
T
GR
A
D
E
CL
E
A
N
O
U
T
T
O
G
R
A
D
E
3"
V
E
N
T
T
O
BU
I
L
D
I
N
G
PR
O
V
I
D
E
C
O
N
C
R
E
T
E
B
A
R
R
E
L
AN
D
/
O
R
R
I
N
G
A
S
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
T
O
EX
T
E
N
D
M
A
N
H
O
L
E
C
O
V
E
R
S
T
O
GR
A
D
E
L
E
V
E
L
.
24
"
T
R
A
F
F
I
C
R
A
T
E
D
M
A
N
HO
L
E
F
R
A
M
E
A
N
D
C
O
V
E
R
4"
R
I
S
E
R
W
I
T
H
G
A
S
T
I
G
H
T
C
A
P
4"
I
N
L
E
T
F
R
O
M
F
I
X
T
U
R
E
S
OR
T
R
E
N
C
H
D
R
A
I
N
S
CL
E
A
N
G
R
A
V
E
L
1
2
"
TH
I
C
K
A
L
L
A
R
O
U
N
D
TR
A
P
.
4"
O
U
T
L
E
T
4"
I
N
L
E
T
PLASTER TRAP TO SANITARY SEWERSINK BEYOND
15
"
M
I
N
.
C
L
E
A
R
A
N
C
E
F
O
R
FL
O
O
R
BA
S
K
E
T
R
E
M
O
V
A
L
TO TOP OF PLASTER TRAPCABINET AND FLOW CONTROL FITTINGWALL2" VENT TO ATMOSPHERE SANITARY TEE SANITARY TEE TRAP
24
"
C.I
.
P
A
R
K
W
A
Y
G
R
A
T
E
LOCATE ROOF DRAINS IN ROOF SUMPDRAINOVERFLOWUNDERDECKOVERFLOW LINE
RD
L
CLAMP SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
RO
O
F
D
R
A
I
N
3'-0"36" SQUARE LEAD FLASHING UNDER SINGLE PLY ROOF MEMBRANE DECKROOFDAM2" HIGH WATER
CO
N
C
R
E
T
E
F
I
L
L
WA
T
E
R
P
R
O
O
F
M
E
M
B
R
A
N
E
WH
E
R
E
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
HO
R
I
Z
O
N
T
A
L
RU
N
I
N
P
I
P
E
12
"
M
I
N
.
T
O
SL
A
B
ST
R
U
C
T
U
R
A
L
BR
E
A
K
I
N
G
P
O
R
T
S
AI
R
G
A
P
V
A
C
U
U
M
FI
X
T
U
R
E
NE
A
R
E
S
T
FL
O
W
T
O
FLOOR DRAIN OUTLET TO P-TRAPCEMENT BEDFLOORING IF APPLICABLE
1/
2
"
P
E
X
TR
A
P
P
R
I
M
E
R
BA
L
L
T
Y
P
E
S
H
U
T
-
O
F
F
V
A
L
V
E
MO
U
N
T
I
N
R
E
C
E
S
S
E
D
B
O
X
I
N
W
A
L
L
.
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
8X
8
B
O
X
W
I
T
H
W
I
T
H
D
O
O
R
.
NO
T
E
:
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
E
D
A
I
R
H
O
S
E
R
E
E
L
S
H
O
W
N
H
E
R
E
.
WAT
E
R
H
O
S
E
R
E
E
L
S
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
S
I
M
I
L
A
R
L
Y
.
BA
S
E
2"
6"
6"
ST
E
E
L
F
R
A
M
E
2-1
/
4
"
1"26
-
1
/
4
"
C.A
.
P
A
R
K
W
A
Y
G
R
A
T
E
26-
1
/
4
"
J &
R
C
B
2
4
2
4
S
E
R
I
E
S
24
"
x
2
4
"
C
A
T
C
H
B
A
S
I
N
*C
A
T
C
H
B
A
S
I
N
H
E
I
G
H
T
*
K
N
O
C
K
O
U
T
S
I
Z
E
12
"
H
I
G
H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
1
4
"
W
x
7
"
H
18
H
I
G
H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
1
4
"
W
x
1
1
"
H
24
"
H
I
G
H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
1
4
"
W
x
1
7
"
H
28
"
H
I
G
H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
1
4
"
W
x
2
2
"
H
32
"
32
"
24
"
24
"
BO
X
2"
4"
TH
I
N
W
A
L
L
KN
O
C
K
O
U
T
SHUT-OFF VALVE
MU
L
T
I
-
D
R
A
I
N
T
R
A
P
P
R
I
M
E
R
P
I
P
I
N
G
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
M
SO
L
I
D
S
O
R
G
R
E
A
S
E
I
N
T
E
R
C
E
P
T
O
R
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
T
A
I
L
N
SI
N
G
L
E
T
R
A
P
P
R
I
M
E
R
D
E
T
A
I
L
O
CL
E
A
N
O
U
T
D
E
T
A
I
L
J
CA
T
C
H
B
A
S
I
N
C
O
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
D
E
T
A
I
L
K
RO
O
F
D
R
A
I
N
D
E
T
A
I
L
L
AI
R
C
O
M
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
P
I
P
I
N
G
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
E
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
E
D
A
I
R
H
O
S
E
R
E
E
L
D
E
T
A
I
L
F
PL
A
S
T
E
R
T
R
A
P
D
E
T
A
I
L
H
BA
C
K
-
F
L
O
W
P
R
E
V
E
N
T
E
R
D
E
T
A
I
L
A
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
E
D
A
I
R
O
U
T
L
E
T
D
E
T
A
I
L
B
HO
S
E
B
I
B
B
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
T
A
I
L
D
EM
E
R
G
E
N
C
Y
E
Y
E
W
A
S
H
D
E
T
A
I
L
G
EM
E
R
G
E
N
C
Y
S
H
O
W
E
R
D
E
T
A
I
L
C
FL
O
O
R
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
(
F
C
O
)
CL
E
A
N
O
U
T
T
O
G
R
A
D
E
(
C
O
T
G
)
W
A
L
L
C
L
E
A
N
O
U
T
(
W
C
O
)
SHEET P301
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO SCALE
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO SCALE
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO SCALE
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO SCALE
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
FL
E
X
I
B
L
E
H
O
S
E
TO
E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
BY
O
W
N
E
R
SE
C
U
R
E
T
O
W
A
L
L
WIT
H
P
I
P
E
C
L
A
M
P
BA
L
L
T
Y
P
E
SH
U
T
-
O
F
F
V
A
L
V
E
MIL
T
O
N
M
-
S
T
Y
L
E
'Q
U
I
C
K
-
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
'
C
O
U
P
L
I
N
G
OR
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
E
Q
U
A
L
MA
L
E
E
N
D
T
O
B
E
SU
P
P
L
I
E
D
W
I
T
H
EQ
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
.
SU
P
P
O
R
T
H
O
S
E
R
E
E
L
FR
O
M
R
O
O
F
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
E
AS
R
E
C
O
M
M
E
N
D
E
D
B
Y
MA
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
R
1/
2
"
D
i
a
.
R
U
B
B
E
R
H
O
S
E
F
O
R
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
E
D
A
I
R
R
E
E
L
S
.
3/
8
"
D
i
a
.
R
U
B
B
E
R
H
O
S
E
F
O
R
WA
T
E
R
H
O
S
E
R
E
E
L
S
.
MO
U
N
T
A
T
S
E
E
F
L
O
O
R
PL
A
N
A
N
D
F
I
X
T
U
R
E
SC
H
E
D
U
L
E
F
O
R
MO
U
N
T
I
N
G
H
E
I
G
H
T
S
MIL
T
O
N
M
-
S
T
Y
L
E
'
Q
U
I
C
K
-
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
'
CO
U
P
L
I
N
G
O
R
A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
E
Q
U
A
L
F
O
R
CO
M
P
R
E
S
S
E
D
A
I
R
R
E
E
L
S
.
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
FR
O
N
T
B
U
T
T
O
N
S
P
R
A
Y
N
O
Z
Z
L
E
O
N
AL
L
W
A
T
E
R
H
O
S
E
R
E
E
L
S
.
HO
S
E
G
U
I
D
E
W
I
T
H
RO
L
L
E
R
S
RE
E
L
S
P
O
O
L
C
O
M
P
L
E
T
E
WI
T
H
M
O
T
O
R
S
P
R
I
N
G
A
N
D
AR
B
O
R
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
1/
2
"
S
W
I
V
E
L
JO
I
N
T
W
I
T
H
O-
R
I
N
G
FL
E
X
I
B
L
E
HO
S
E
T
O
RE
E
L
BA
L
L
T
Y
P
E
SH
U
T
-
O
F
F
V
A
L
V
E
1-
1
/
2
"
M
A
I
N
LI
N
E
T
O
BU
I
L
D
I
N
G
MA
I
N
L
I
N
E
SH
U
T
-
O
F
F
VA
L
V
E
FL
E
X
I
B
L
E
CO
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
AI
R
D
R
Y
E
R
A
N
D
PR
E
S
S
U
R
E
RE
G
U
L
A
T
O
R
VI
B
R
A
T
I
O
N
I
S
O
L
A
T
O
R
S
DR
I
P
L
E
G
AN
D
D
R
A
I
N
VA
L
V
E
FL
E
X
I
B
L
E
CO
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
TO
A
L
A
R
M
AT
A
T
C
PA
N
E
L
1-
1
/
2
"
I
N
T
A
K
E
LI
N
E
F
R
O
M
OU
T
S
I
D
E
TU
R
N
D
O
W
N
AN
D
S
C
R
E
E
N
EN
D
.
DR
I
P
L
E
G
AN
D
D
R
A
I
N
VA
L
V
E
PL
U
G
G
E
D
FL
O
O
R
1-
1
/
4
"
T
E
M
P
E
R
E
D
W
A
T
E
R
PU
L
L
R
O
D
WA
L
L
1-
1
/
4
"
W
A
S
T
E
TO
F
L
O
O
R
PU
S
H
HA
N
D
L
E
OP
E
R
A
T
O
R
EY
E
W
A
S
H
FO
U
N
T
A
I
N
EM
E
R
G
E
N
C
Y
SH
O
W
E
R
ST
A
Y
O
P
E
N
BA
L
L
V
A
L
V
E
EY
E
W
A
S
H
FO
U
N
T
A
I
N
ST
A
Y
O
P
E
N
BA
L
L
V
A
L
V
E
CE
I
L
I
N
G
EY
E
W
A
S
H
FO
U
N
T
A
I
N
FL
O
O
R
33
"
M
I
N
.
45
"
M
A
X
.
1-
1
/
2
"
D
R
A
I
N
1/
2
"
T
E
M
P
E
R
E
D
W
A
T
E
R
MO
U
N
T
I
N
G
B
R
A
C
K
E
T
FA
S
T
E
N
E
D
T
O
W
A
L
L
MO
U
N
T
I
N
G
B
R
A
C
K
E
T
FA
S
T
E
N
E
D
T
O
W
A
L
L
AD
J
A
C
E
N
T
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
S
I
N
K
PU
S
H
HA
N
D
L
E
OP
E
R
A
T
O
R
1/2
"
H
&
C
W
A
T
E
R
L
I
N
E
S
WIT
H
S
Y
M
M
O
N
S
7
-
1
0
2
MIX
I
N
G
V
A
L
V
E
10/27/20GD A H W5762TA ENAYWSDDTEO C .I S D UFSREPROFNESGIEERTAISONLEEEKSOIREEN Engineered Systems Associates ESA JOB NUMBER 200483 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1 8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2 sheet:title:revisions :p r o j e c t # :d a t e :UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND I S NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS & MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.project:
E D C B A
E D C B A
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6 b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005 P301PLUMBINGDETAILS20.0220 oct. 27,2020BYUIEngineeringTechnologyCenter (ETC)100% construction documents3
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m
#
3
1
1
-
1
3
/
2
0
3
3
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B C D E
1
M2
0
1
2 M2
0
1
OF
F
I
C
E
12
0
OF
F
I
C
E
12
1
OF
F
I
C
E
12
2
OF
F
I
C
E
12
3
OF
F
I
C
E
12
4
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
11
8
OF
F
I
C
E
12
5
SE
A
T
I
N
G
12
6
OF
F
I
C
E
11
9
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
13
1
OF
F
I
C
E
12
7
OF
F
I
C
E
12
8
OF
F
I
C
E
12
9
BR
E
A
K
R
O
O
M
13
0
VE
S
T
I
B
U
L
E
10
1
ME
N
'
S
11
5
JA
N
I
T
O
R
11
6
WO
M
E
N
'
S
11
7
CO
N
F
R
E
N
C
E
R
O
O
M
(N
.
I
.
C
.
)
11
4
OF
F
I
C
E
11
2
OF
F
I
C
E
11
0
OP
E
N
O
F
F
I
C
E
11
1
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
10
3
RE
C
E
P
T
I
O
N
10
2
OF
F
I
C
E
10
4
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
5
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
6
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
7
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
8
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
10
9
FIRE RISER 132B
CM
/
C
E
L
A
B
13
2
CM
/
C
E
T
O
O
L
R
O
O
M
13
2
A
OF
F
I
C
E
13
4
I.
T
.
13
5
OF
F
I
C
E
13
3
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
13
9
ST
U
D
E
N
T
CO
L
L
A
B
O
R
A
T
I
O
N
13
6
CU
R
I
N
G
C
L
O
S
E
T
13
7
B
HIG
H
B
A
Y
S
H
O
P
13
7
AU
T
O
M
O
T
I
V
E
S
H
O
P
13
8
AU
T
O
T
O
O
L
R
O
O
M
13
8
B
CE
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
14
0
ME
C
H
14
1
AU
T
O
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
14
2
EN
G
I
N
E
S
L
A
B
14
3
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
13
9
CO
R
R
I
D
O
R
13
1
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
2
2
1
1
S
4
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
21
4
SS
1
6
F
C
-
1
FC
-
2
FC
-
3
FC
-
5
FC
-
6
22
3
1
5
1
2
S
4
3 3
S
4
20
0
C
F
M
2
2
CD
-
1
20
0
CD
-
1
20
0
CD
-
1
20
0
CD
-
1
20
0
6
6
6
CD
-
1
20
0 6
S
4
FC
-
8
FC
-
7
CD
-
1
20
0
7
FG
-
1
FG
-
1
FG
-
1
FG
-
2
6
6
6
6 CD
-
1
25
0
CD
-
1
25
0
FG
-
2
FG
-
2
FG
-
1
FG
-
1
FG
-
1
77
7
7
FC
-
9
S
5
10
0
CF
M
62
CD
-
1
25
0
2
2
CD
-
2
15
0
CD
-
2
15
0
S
4
CD
-
2
15
0
CD
-
2
15
0
CD
-
2
15
0
6
6
6
2
F
G
-
2
F
G
-
2
6"ø
E
A
8"ø
E
A
6"ø
E
A
8"ø
E
A
6"ø
E
A
6"ø
E
A
8"ø
E
A
6"ø
E
A
6"ø
E
A
10
10
13
13
13
2
2 2
13
13
HD
HD
HD HD
HD
H
D
HD
HD
HD
HDHDHD
HD
HD
10
1
HD
10
7
7
EF 1
19
ER
-
1
40
0
ER
-
1
40
0
EF 2
20
1
12
0
0
CF
M
1
12
0
0
CF
M
11200 CFM11200CFM
1
12
0
0
CF
M
1
12
0
0
CF
M
2
2
2
RT 811
RG
-
2
9
RG
-
1
RG
-
1
8
RT 6
16
RT 7
16
RT
-
8
S
4
FC
-
4
S
4
RT 4
16
RT 5
16
RT 2
16
RT 3
16
RT 1
16
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
1818
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
EF 4
17
ON
R
O
O
F
ON
R
O
O
F
S
S
4
CO
N
C
R
E
T
E
TO
O
L
S
13
7
A
4
S
4
S
4
S
4
AH 1
21
FC 1A
23
FC 1B
23
ON
R
O
O
F
C
24
SR
-
1
50
0
22
SR
-
1
50
0
22
SR
-
1
50
0
22
SR
-
1
15
0
SR
-
1
20
0
14
"
ø
S
A
18
"
x
1
6
"
S
A
12
"
ø
S
A
12
"
ø
S
A
22
22
S
4
S
4
S
4
S
AH
-
1
4
KE
E
P
D
U
C
T
W
O
R
K
U
P
A
S
T
I
G
H
T
TO
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
E
A
S
P
O
S
S
I
B
L
E
.
KE
E
P
D
U
C
T
W
O
R
K
U
P
A
S
T
I
G
H
T
TO
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
E
A
S
P
O
S
S
I
B
L
E
.
18
RG
-
3
10
"
ø
S
A
CD
-
3
30
0
8"ø
S
A
6
CD
-
3
30
0
8"ø
S
A
CD
-
4
10
0
6
6
8"ø
S
A
10
"
ø
S
A
8"ø
S
A
8"ø
S
A
6
6
10
"
ø
S
A
10
"
ø
S
A
10
"
ø
S
A
10
"
ø
S
A
10
"
ø
S
A
10
"
ø
S
A
4
10
"
ø
S
A
8"ø
S
A
8"ø
S
A
8"ø
S
A
BR
E
A
K
R
O
O
M
11
1
B
2
2
25
25
25
25
25
25
2525
13
13
13
66
2
2
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
3
6
x
3
0
S
A
PR
O
V
I
D
E
ME
T
A
L
CO
V
E
R
S4
PR
O
V
I
D
E
ME
T
A
L
CO
V
E
R
13
13
13
13
13
13
12
12
12
12
15
15
SE
E
S
H
E
E
T
M
1
0
2
15
15
151515
14
14 14
14
14
14
15
SE
E
M
E
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
F
L
O
O
R
P
L
A
N
ON
S
H
E
E
T
M
1
0
2
F
O
R
P
I
P
I
N
G
AN
D
E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
A
B
O
V
E
.
8"ø
E
A
6"ø
E
A
8"ø
E
A
8"ø
E
A
6"
ø
E
A
SE
E
L
A
R
G
E
SC
A
L
E
ME
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
P
L
A
N
ON
S
H
E
E
T
M
1
0
2
FO
R
P
I
P
I
N
G
A
N
D
EQ
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
AB
O
V
E
.
3
M2
0
1
4 M2
0
1
OF
F
I
C
E
(
N
.
I
.
C
.
)
11
3
EF 5
17
ON
R
O
O
F
EF 6
17
ON
R
O
O
F
EF 7
17
ON
R
O
O
F
FG
-
2
7
SN
O
W
M
E
L
T
A
R
E
A
5
3
7
S
Q
.
F
T
.
,
80
,
5
5
0
B
T
U
W
I
T
H
4
L
O
O
P
S
A
T
20
0
F
T
L
E
N
G
T
H
E
A
C
H
.
(
8
G
P
M
)
EX
T
E
N
D
S
N
O
W
ME
L
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
4
'
-
0
"
BE
Y
O
N
D
S
T
A
I
R
S
.
EF 8
34
EF 3
ON
R
O
O
F
28
FC 2A
23
FC 3A
23
C C
UH 1
26
UH 2
26
1 1
/
4
"
S
T
E
A
M
1"
C
R
1 1
/
4
"
S
T
E
A
M
1 1
/
2
"
C
R
1 1
/
2
"
C
R
1 1/4" CR 2" STEAM
2"
S
T
E
A
M
SO
I
L
S
S
T
O
R
A
G
E
AN
D
C
O
M
P
A
C
T
I
O
N
14
4
S
PR
O
V
I
D
E
ME
T
A
L
C
O
V
E
R
PR
O
V
I
D
E
ME
T
A
L
C
O
V
E
R
4
FC 2B
23
ON
R
O
O
F
FC 3B
23
ON
R
O
O
F
8"ø
E
A
20
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
45
0
C
F
M
45
0
C
F
M
45
0
C
F
M
30
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
CD
-
1
30
0HD
FG
-
2
7
29
HD
ER
-
2
27
20
0
C
F
M
20
0
C
F
M
10
"
x
8
"
E
A
10
"
x
8
"
E
A
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
R
T
U
T
O
R
E
M
A
I
N
12
PR
O
V
I
D
E
ME
T
A
L
CO
V
E
R
PR
O
V
I
D
E
ME
T
A
L
CO
V
E
R
PR
O
V
I
D
E
ME
T
A
L
CO
V
E
R
TY
P
I
C
A
L
6
"
D
i
a
.
TY
P
I
C
A
L
6
"
D
i
a
.
TY
P
I
C
A
L
6
"
D
i
a
.
TY
P
I
C
A
L
6"
D
i
a
.
2"
S
T
E
A
M
1 1
/
4
"
C
R
14
"
ø
E
A
14
"
ø
E
A
14
"
ø
E
A
14
"
ø
E
A
CO
N
N
E
C
T
T
O
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
4
"
S
T
E
A
M
AN
D
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
2-
1
/
2
"
C
R
L
I
N
E
S
.
UH 3
26
1"
C
R
1 1
/
2
"
S
T
E
A
M
RT 9
31
EH 1
33
3 1
/
2
"
S
T
E
A
M
2"
C
R
3 1
/
2
"
S
T
E
A
M
1 1
/
4
"
C
R
3" STEAM3" STEAM 2" STEAM1 1/4" CR ER-2 27EF9
2 1
/
2
"
S
T
E
A
M
1 1/2" CR
12
1 1
/
2
"
C
R
2"
S
T
E
A
M
1 1
/
4
"
S
T
E
A
M
1"
C
R
1"
C
R
1 1
/
2
"
H
W
R
1 1
/
2
"
H
W
S
1 1
/
2
"
H
W
S
1 1
/
2
"
H
W
R
1 1
/
2
"
H
W
S
1 1
/
2
"
H
W
R
1 1
/
2
"
C
R
RU
N
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
H
R
U
JO
I
S
T
S
P
A
C
E
RU
N
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
H
R
U
JO
I
S
T
S
P
A
C
E
1 1
/
2
"
C
R
CP 2
1 1
/
2
"
C
R
30
SE
E
S
H
E
T
M
2
0
1
F
O
R
CO
N
T
I
N
U
A
T
I
O
N
.
PH
-
1
ON
R
O
O
F
18
ON
R
O
O
F
SR
-
1
10
022
RG
-
4
RG
-
4
RG
-
5
RG
-
5
14
"
x
1
0
"
R
A
RE
F
E
R
T
O
F
O
U
N
D
A
T
I
O
N
P
L
A
N
O
N
S
H
E
E
T
P1
0
0
F
O
R
D
U
C
T
W
O
R
K
B
E
L
O
W
F
L
O
O
R
A
N
D
TO
L
A
R
G
E
S
C
A
L
E
P
L
A
N
5
/
M
2
0
1
F
O
R
BA
S
E
M
E
N
T
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
R
O
O
M
EF 10
ON
R
O
O
F
ER
-
2
27
RI
S
E
1
0
"
R
O
U
N
D
D
U
C
T
U
P
T
H
R
U
R
O
O
F
W
I
T
H
WE
A
T
H
E
R
C
A
P
F
O
R
O
U
T
S
I
D
E
A
I
R
.
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
MA
N
U
A
L
D
A
M
P
E
R
A
N
D
M
O
T
O
R
I
Z
E
D
D
A
M
P
E
R
I
N
DU
C
T
.
B
A
L
A
N
C
E
T
O
4
0
0
C
F
M
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
F
L
O
W
.
CU 1
ON
R
O
O
F
PR
O
V
I
D
E
S
T
E
A
M
P
R
E
-
H
E
A
T
C
O
I
L
I
N
DU
C
T
W
I
T
H
F
A
C
E
A
N
D
B
Y
P
A
S
S
DA
M
P
E
R
.
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
D
E
T
A
I
L
O
/
M
3
0
1
FO
R
T
Y
P
I
C
A
L
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
1 1
/
4
"
S
T
E
A
M
1"
C
R
MI
S
T
S
P
R
A
Y
EQ
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
.
SE
E
S
H
E
E
T
P1
0
1
10/27/20GD A H W5762TA ENAYWSDDTEO C .I S D UFSREPROFNESGIEERTAISONLEEEKSOIREEN Engineered Systems Associates ESA JOB NUMBER 200483 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1 8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2 sheet:title:revisions :p r o j e c t # :d a t e :UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND I S NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS & MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.project:
E D C B A
E D C B A
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6 b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005 M101MECHANICALFLOOR PLAN20.0220 oct. 27,2020BYUIEngineeringTechnologyCenter (ETC)100% construction documentsPLAN NOTES:1 EXISTING DIFFUSER OR RETURN GRILLE AND ASSOCIATED B RANCH DUCT TO REMAIN. PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION AND MAI NTAIN CONNECT TO EXISTING DUCTWORK AND EXISTING FAN COIL UNIT LOCATED IN MEZZANINE MECHANICAL ROOM. RE-BALANCE EX ISTING DIFFUSER TO MAXIMUM CFM WHERE INDICATED.EXISTING MAIN SUPPLY AIR TRUNK DUCTWORK IN CEILING SPACE TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZES AND LOCATION OF EXISTING DUCTWORK. CONN ECT NEW DUCTWORK TO EXISTING WHERE INDICATED. PROVIDE TRANS ITION AS REQUIRED FOR NEW CONNECTIONS.EXISTING FLOOR GRILLE AND BOOT TO REMAIN. PROTECT D URING CONSTRUCTION. KEEP GRILLE AND BOOT CLEAN OF ANY DEB RIS.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW WALL MOUNTED ROOM SENSOR AS SPECIFIED. SENSOR TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH JCI MEDISYS , VERSION 10. CONNECT NEW SENSOR TO EXISTING CORRESPONDING FA N COIL IN MEZZANINE MECHANICAL ROOM OR ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPM ENT AS INDICATED, AND TO BUILDING (CAMPUS) CONTROL SYS TEM.RELOCATE EXISTING CEILING DIFFUSER TO NEW CIELING G RID AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE NEW BRANCH DUCT AS REQUIRED TO CO NNECT TO EXISTING MAIN TRUNK DUCT. BALANCE EXISTING DIFFU SER TO CFM AS INDICATED.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW CEILING DIFFUSER OR EXHAUST GRILLE AS SPECIFIED. PROVIDE NEW BRANCH DUCT AS REQUIRED T O CONNECT TO EXISTING MAIN TRUNK DUCT AS SHOWN. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING DUCTWORK.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW FLOOR GRILLE AS SPECIFIED. COORDIANTE CUTTING AND PATCHING OF EXISTING CONCRET E FLOOR WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR. (REFER TO ARCHITECTU RAL SHEETS.) LOCATE NEW FLOOR GRILLES OVER EXISTING AIR TUNNEL BELOW FLOOR. SEE DETAIL G/M301 FOR TYPICL INSTALLAT ION. (SEE FOUNDATION PLAN ON SHEET P100.)PROVIDE AND INSTALL WALL MOUNTED RETURN GRILLE AT 6 " ABOVE FLOOR. DROP12x3 RETURN DUCT DOWN IN WALL TO BELOW FLOOR AND CONNECT TO EXISTING ROUND RETURN DUCT. REFER T O PLUMBING FOUNDATION PLAN ON SHEET PD100 FOR EXISTIN G DUCT LOCATION AND TO DETAIL H/M3O1 FOR DUCT CONNECTION.INSTALL RETURN GRILLE AT 12" ABOVE FLOOR AND EXTEND DUCTWORK THRU CHASE WALL AS SHOWN AND TURN UP WITH 90 DEGREE ELBOW.REFER TO MEZZANINE PLAN ON SHEET M102 FOR CONTINUAT ION OF DUCTWORK AND PIPING.PROVIDE NEW SECTION(S) OF DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED WHER E HUMIDIFIER COILS WERE REMOVED. (SEE SHEET MD100 AND PD100). NEW DUCTWORK TO MATCH EXISTING SIZE, SHAPE AND ELEV ATION. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS.EXISTING STEAM UNIT HEATER OR STEAM DUCT COIL TO RE MAIN. ALL ASSOCIATED STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING TO RE MAIN. CONNECT EXISTING UNIT HEATER OR DUCT COIL TO NEW W ALL MOUNTED CONTROL AS SHOWN.EXISTING STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING RISING UP FROM BELOW FLOOR AND PIPING NEAR ROOF TO REMAIN. FIELD V ERIFY EXACT SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF PIPING AND PROTECT DUR ING CONSTRUCTION. PROVIDE NEW FITTINGS AS REQUIRED IN E XISTING PIPING FOR RELOCATED UNIT HEATERS.EXISTING UNIT HEATER TO BE RELOCATED. (REFER TO SHE ET MD100 FOR ORIGINAL LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UNIT HEATERS.) C ONNECT NEW STEAM AND CONDENSATE LINES TO EXISTING UNIT AS SHOWN AND CONNECT TO EXISTING AND/OR NEW MAIN STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN LINES. PROVIDE NEW SHUT-OFF VALVE ON STEAM LINE AND NEW F&T TRAP ON CONDENSATE RETURN LI NES. KEEP ALL PIPING AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. VALVE AND TRAP TO MATCH SIZE OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT PIPE CONNECTIONS. (FIELD VERIFY)CONNECT NEW STEAM SUPPLY AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPI NG TO EXISTING MAIN LINES. EXTEND NEW PIPING THRU NEW AUT OMOTIVE SHOP AS SHOWN AND CONNECT TO RELOCATED UNIT HEATERS . KEEP ALL PIPING AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE AND SUPPORT FROM ROO F STRUCTURE.EXISTING ROOF TOP COOLING UNIT AND ROOF CURB TO REM AIN. EXISTING DUCT THRU ROOF AND CONCENTRIC DIFFUSER TO REMAIN. PROTECT EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK DURING PROJECT.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW ROOF MOUNTED (VENT SET) EXH AUST FAN AS SPECIFIED. MOUNT FAN ON ROOF CURB AND DROP 14" ROUND DUCT DOWN THRU ROOF. CONNECT (2) 8" ROUND DUCTS FRO M CAR EXHAUST SYSTEM TO 14" ROUND DUCT. PROVIDE VFD ON EX HAUST FAN MOTOR AND CONTROL WITH MANUAL OVER-RIDE SWITCH ON WALL AND WITH AIR FLOW SENSOR IN DUCT. SEE SECTION 1/M201 PROVIDE AND INSTALL SPRING LOADED VEHICLE EXHAUST H OSE REEL WITH 25'-0" x 4" DIA HOSE COMPLETE WITH EXHAUST ADA PTER, HOSE STOP, AND PULL KIT WITH CLAMP. REFER TO DETAIL L/M3 01.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN AS SPECIFIED. RISE 6" ROUND DUCT UP THRU EXISTING ROOF WITH ROOF CAP. REFER TO DETAIL A/M301 FOR TYPICAL FAN INSTALL ATION.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN AS SPECIFIED. MOUNT FAN ON ROOF CURB AND DROP 14x14 D UCT DOWN THRU ROOF AND CONNECT TO (2) 10x8 DUCTS AS SHOWN. R EFER TO DETAIL B/M301 FOR TYPICAL FAN INSTALLATION.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW HVAC UNIT WITH HOT WATER CO IL AS SPECIFIED. SUPPORT NEW UNIT FROM ROOF STRUCTURE. DR OP 18x18 SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTS DOWN AND EXTEND THRU WALL B ELOW LOWER ROOF LEVEL.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW ROOF MOUNTED HVAC UNIT AS SPECIFIED. EXTEND 18" ROUND SUPPLY DUCT AS SHOWN WI TH SUPPLY GRILLES MOUNTED IN SIDE OF DUCT AT 45 DEGREE D DOWN FROM HORIZONTAL. REFER TO DETAIL F/M301 FOR TYPICAL GRILLE INSTALLTION.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW MINI-SPLIT SYSTEM AS SPECIF IED. MOUNT INDOOR UNIT ON WALL AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. LOCA TE CONTROLLER ON WALL NEAR DOORWAY. EXTEND REFRIGERANT PIPING THRU EXISTING WALL AND RISE UP IN CE/CM TOOL ROOM TO ROOF LEVEL. MOUNT OUTDOOR UNIT ON ROOF WITH PYRAMID TYPE SUPPORTS. KEEP UNIT AT LEAST 6" ABOVE ROOF LEVEL. C ONNECT REFRIGERANT LINES TO OUTDOORS UNIT. REFER TO PIPING DIAGRAM K/M301 FOR TYPICAL CONNECTIONS.RISE REFRIGERANT PIPING UP THRU ROOF WITH 4" DIAMET ER GOOSENECK PIPE. CONNECT REFRIGERANT LINES TO OUTDOO R UNIT OF MINI-SPLIT SYSTEM. REFER TO DETAIL N/M301 FOR TY PICAL REFRIGERANT PIPE PENETRATION THRU ROOF. RUN 3/4" DR AIN LINE THRU WALL AND DROP DOWN TO EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN.EXISTING FINTUBE HEATERS TO REMAIN. LEAVE ZONE PIPI NG SHUT-OFF. NO WORK REQUIRED.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW STEAM FIRED UNIT HEATER. MO UNT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE AND CONNECT TO NEW STEAM SYSTEM PI PING. REFER TO DETAIL D/M301 FOR TYPICAL STEAM AND CONDEN SATE PIPING CONNECTIONS.DROP 14x14 EXHAUST AIR DUCT THRU ROOF AND TRANSITIO N AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO 18x18 GRILLE. MOUNT GRILLE A T 6" BELOW ROOF DECK.PROVIDE 24" x 24" x 24" CONCRETE VAULT IN GROUND FO R SNOWMELT MANIFOLDS AND/OR ZONE VALVES. REFER TO DETAILS ON S HEET M302 FOR TYPICAL MANIFOLD PIPING AND VALVES.EXTEND EXISTING 12x6 SUPPLY AIR DUCT THRU WALL AS H IGH AS POSSBILE. CONNECT TO EXISTING DIFFUSERS AS SHOWN. R EFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR CUTTING AND PATCHING EXISTI NG WALLS.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW CONDENSATE RETURN PUMP AS SPECIFIED. RISE DISCHARGE LINE UP INTO JOIST SPACE OF AUTO SHOP AND RUN BACK TO MEZZANINE MECHANICAL ROOM AS S HOWN. REFER TO DETAIL G/M302 FOR TYPICAL CONDENSATE PUMP PIPING.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW ROOF MOUNTED COOLING UNIT. MOUNT ON NEW ROOF CURB. UNIT TO BE COMPLETE WITH ECONOMIZ ER INLET HOOD AND STEP-DOWN CONCENTRIC DIFFUSER BELOW CEILING. CONNECT DIFFUSER WITH 18" DIAMETER SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTS AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER.PROVIDE AND INSTALL 36"x60"x30-1/2" PENTHOUSE ON RO OF. MOUNT ON NEW ROOF CURB. PROVIDE MOTORIZED DAMPER IN DUCT AT BOTTOM OF ROOF AND INTERLOCK WITH EF-4, EF-5, EF-6, AND EF-7 TO OPEN WHEN ANY FAN IS IN OPERATION.PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW WATERPROOF WASHDOWN ELECTRI C HEATER AS SPECIFIED. SUPPORT FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE.FUME HOOD PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY PLUMBING CONTRA CTOR. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR CONNECT 10" ROUND DUCT TO HOO D AND RISE UP TO CONNECT TO ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN.2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2416 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
1 M1
0
1
ME
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
F
L
O
O
R
P
L
A
N
1/
1
6
"
=
1
'
-
0
"
3
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m
#
3
1
1
-
1
3
/
2
0
3
M
RE
F
R
I
G
E
R
A
N
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
TO
D
X
C
O
O
L
I
N
G
C
O
I
L
RE
F
R
I
G
E
R
A
N
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
TO
C
O
N
D
E
N
S
I
N
G
U
N
I
T
SC
H
E
D
U
L
E
4
0
C
P
V
C
VE
N
T
T
H
R
U
R
O
O
F
W
I
T
H
GO
O
S
E
N
E
C
K
.
RO
U
T
E
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
PIP
I
N
G
U
P
T
H
R
U
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
R
O
O
F
MO
U
N
T
U
N
I
T
O
N
PY
R
A
M
I
D
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
S
PR
E
-
C
H
A
R
G
E
L
I
N
E
S
E
T
S
A
R
E
AV
A
I
L
A
B
L
E
I
N
L
E
N
G
T
H
S
O
F
1
6
,
2
0
,
3
2
AN
D
4
9
F
E
E
T
.
L
E
N
G
T
H
S
A
R
E
T
O
B
E
KE
P
T
A
S
S
H
O
R
T
A
S
P
O
S
S
I
B
L
E
.
C
O
I
L
I
N
G
OF
L
I
N
E
S
T
H
A
T
A
R
E
T
O
O
L
O
N
G
W
I
L
L
NO
T
B
E
A
C
C
E
P
T
A
B
L
E
A
N
D
W
I
L
L
B
E
RE
P
L
A
C
E
D
A
T
C
O
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
'
S
EX
P
E
N
S
E
.
GRILLESUPPLY FLOOR 6"CUT EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO LOCATE EXISTING DUCT AND INSTALL NEW BOOT.
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
D
U
C
T
B
E
L
O
W
F
L
O
O
R
AN
G
L
E
N
E
W
B
O
O
T
A
S
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
TO
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
T
O
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
D
U
C
T
.
SEAL DUCT CONNECTION WATER TIGHT AND FASTEN WITH SHEET METAL SCREW.DUCT IN WALL CAVITY TO BE UN-LINED NEW WALL
14
"
26
"27
"
3
3
-
1
/
2
"
3
3
"
6"
D
4"
D
F
L
E
X
I
B
L
E
H
O
S
E
F
U
R
N
I
S
H
E
D
A
N
D
IN
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
B
Y
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
C
O
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
.
SPECIFICATIONS:MODEL: HRA400L WITH 35' HOSE CAPACITY.DRUM: REINFORCED 14 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL.DRUM SIDE PLATE: REINFORCED 16 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL.FRAME BRACKETS: POWDER COATED 12 GA. GALVANIZED ANGULAR STEEL.FRAME SIDE PLATE: DOUBLE REINFORCES 12 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL.BEARINGS: SLEEVE BEARINGS.SPRING ASSEMBLY: TWO FULLY ENCLOSED HEAVY DUTY CARBON SPRING. LOCK ING LATCH MECHANISM.FOUR 1/2" DIAMETER MOUNTING HOLES, 14" x 40-1/4" RE CTANGULAR PATTERN.42-1/2"40-1/4"HOSE STOP BAR HOSE GUIDESPRING PACK4" D INLET20"18"
RU
N
3
/
4
"
C
O
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
DR
A
I
N
L
I
N
E
T
O
N
E
A
R
E
S
T
FL
O
O
R
S
I
N
K
.
S
E
E
F
L
O
O
R
PLA
N
S
MO
U
N
T
C
O
N
D
E
N
S
I
N
G
UN
I
T
O
N
R
O
O
F
M
CE
I
L
I
N
G
D
I
F
F
U
S
E
R
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
T
A
I
L
M
RE
G
R
I
G
E
R
A
N
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
H
R
U
C
E
I
L
I
N
G
D
E
T
A
I
L
N
MA
K
E
-
U
P
A
I
R
P
E
N
T
H
O
U
S
E
W
I
T
H
B
Y
-
P
A
S
S
D
A
M
P
E
R
D
E
T
A
I
L
O
DU
C
T
C
O
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
A
N
D
H
A
N
G
E
R
D
E
T
A
I
L
S
J
RE
F
R
I
G
E
R
A
N
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
K
CA
R
E
X
H
A
U
S
T
H
O
S
E
R
E
E
L
D
E
T
A
I
L
L
FL
E
X
I
B
L
E
D
U
C
T
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
D
E
T
A
I
L
E
IN
-
D
U
C
T
R
E
G
I
S
T
E
R
D
E
T
A
I
L
F
WA
L
L
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
R
E
T
U
R
N
A
I
R
G
I
R
L
L
E
H
CE
I
L
I
N
G
E
X
H
A
U
S
T
F
A
N
D
E
T
A
I
L
A
RO
O
F
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
E
X
H
A
U
S
T
F
A
N
D
E
T
A
I
L
B
ST
E
A
M
U
N
I
T
H
E
A
T
E
R
A
N
D
T
R
A
P
D
E
T
A
I
L
D
FL
O
O
R
G
R
I
L
L
E
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
D
E
T
A
I
L
G
RE
F
R
I
G
E
R
A
N
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
C
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO SCALE
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO SCALE
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO SCALE
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO SCALE
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
EX
H
A
U
S
T
D
U
C
T
(S
E
E
P
L
A
N
F
O
R
S
I
Z
E
)
CE
I
L
I
N
G
G
R
I
L
L
E
CE
I
L
I
N
G
EX
H
A
U
S
T
F
A
N
FA
N
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
CA
B
I
N
E
T
IN
S
U
L
A
T
E
D
RO
O
F
IN
S
T
A
L
L
U
N
D
E
R
R
O
O
F
ME
M
B
R
A
N
E
A
N
D
S
E
A
L
WA
T
E
R
T
I
G
H
T
BA
C
K
-
D
R
A
F
T
DA
M
P
E
R
RO
O
F
C
A
P
(F
L
A
T
R
O
O
F
)
RO
O
F
C
U
R
B
W
H
E
R
E
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
BY
R
O
O
F
M
A
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
R
2 ' - 0 " M A X I M U M
FO
O
T
O
F
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
SP
A
C
I
N
G
.
MA
X
.
S
A
G
1
/
2
"
P
E
R
BA
N
D
C
L
A
M
P
1"x
1
8
G
A
G
E
PO
W
E
R
E
X
H
A
U
S
T
E
R
BIR
D
S
C
R
E
E
N
SE
C
U
R
E
&
C
A
U
L
K
TO
C
U
R
B
RO
O
F
I
N
G
BA
C
K
D
R
A
F
T
D
A
M
P
E
R
EX
H
A
U
S
T
D
U
C
T
U
P
F
R
O
M
BE
L
O
W
,
S
I
Z
E
A
S
S
H
O
W
N
ON
P
L
A
N
S
FA
C
T
O
R
Y
C
U
R
B
T
O
MA
T
C
H
R
O
O
F
S
L
O
P
E
WI DT H O F RE GIS TE R C L
RE
I
N
F
O
R
C
I
N
G
ME
N
D
E
D
GA
G
E
2426
DR
I
V
E
RE
C
O
M
-
SL
I
P
19
-
3
0
13
-
1
8
UP
T
H
R
U
1
2
LO
N
G
E
S
T
IN
C
H
E
S
SID
E
,
DIM
E
N
S
I
O
N
NO
N
E
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
26
NO
N
E
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
1"x
1
"
x
1
/
8
"
@
6
0
I
N
2424
(A
L
L
FO
U
R
SID
E
S
)
OF
GA
G
E
ME
T
A
L
SH
E
E
T
BE
T
W
E
E
N
IN
T
E
R
M
E
D
I
A
T
E
RE
I
N
F
O
R
C
I
N
G
JO
I
N
T
S
&
/
O
R
TR
A
N
S
V
E
R
S
E
AN
G
L
E
S
I
Z
E
SP
A
C
I
N
G
LO
N
G
I
T
U
D
I
N
A
L
AN
D
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
2"
2"
26 MA
X
.
12
"
O
C
24 24
-
S S
L
I
P
RE
C
O
M
-
ME
N
D
E
D
GA
G
E
HE
M
M
E
D
1"
TR
A
N
S
V
E
R
S
E
R
E
I
N
F
O
R
C
I
N
G
(
1
)
MIN
I
M
U
M
A
T
J
O
I
N
T
S
(1
)
T
R
A
N
S
V
E
R
S
E
R
E
I
N
F
O
R
C
I
N
G
S
I
Z
E
I
S
D
E
T
E
R
M
I
N
E
D
B
Y
DIM
E
N
S
I
O
N
O
F
S
I
D
E
T
O
W
H
I
C
H
A
N
G
L
E
I
S
A
P
P
L
I
E
D
.
GR
I
P
N
A
I
L
S
S
H
A
L
L
B
E
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
E
D
BY
G
R
I
P
N
A
I
L
A
I
R
H
A
M
M
E
R
O
R
B
Y
AU
T
O
M
A
T
I
C
F
A
S
T
E
N
E
R
E
Q
U
I
P
.
ME
T
A
L
F
A
S
T
E
N
E
R
S
-
O
M
A
R
K
I
N
S
U
L
P
I
N
S
,
DU
R
O
D
Y
N
E
F
A
S
T
E
N
E
R
S
O
R
G
R
I
P
N
A
I
L
S
.
ST
R
A
P
S
T
O
B
E
TIG
H
T
A
G
A
I
N
S
T
DU
C
T
W
O
R
K
HA
N
G
D
U
C
T
S
U
P
T
O
3
0
"
WID
T
H
W
I
T
H
1
"
x
1
8
G
A
G
E
ST
R
A
P
S
A
T
1
0
'
-
0
"
MA
X
I
M
U
M
S
P
A
C
I
N
G
.
SE
L
F
-
T
A
P
P
I
N
G
C
A
D
M
I
U
M
PL
A
T
E
D
H
E
X
H
E
A
D
S
H
E
E
T
ME
T
A
L
S
C
R
E
W
NO
P
O
P
R
I
V
E
T
S
A
L
L
O
W
E
D
HA
N
G
E
R
S
T
R
A
P
S
SH
E
E
T
M
E
T
A
L
D
U
C
T
NO
T
M
O
R
E
T
H
A
N
2
"
FR
O
M
E
D
G
E
O
F
L
I
N
E
R
AL
L
E
N
D
S
O
F
L
I
N
E
R
T
O
B
E
CO
A
T
E
D
W
I
T
H
A
D
H
E
S
I
V
E
.
SE
E
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
1"
T
H
I
C
K
D
U
C
T
LIN
E
R
TO
P
A
N
D
B
O
T
T
O
M
SE
C
T
I
O
N
O
F
L
I
N
E
R
SH
A
L
L
O
V
E
R
L
A
P
TH
E
S
I
D
E
S
EN
D
S
O
F
L
I
N
E
R
S
H
A
L
L
B
E
BU
T
T
E
D
F
I
R
M
L
Y
T
O
G
E
T
H
E
R
LIN
E
R
T
O
B
E
A
D
H
E
R
E
D
T
O
DU
C
T
W
/
1
0
0
%
A
D
H
E
S
I
V
E
SE
E
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
DU
C
T
SU
P
P
O
R
T
1"
A
C
O
U
S
T
I
C
A
L
D
U
C
T
LIN
E
R
O
N
I
N
T
E
R
I
O
R
OF
D
U
C
T
.
24
"
M
A
X
T
O
FIR
S
T
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
RIG
I
D
S
P
I
N
-
IN
F
I
T
T
I
N
G
HA
N
D
D
A
M
P
E
R
HA
N
D
L
E
RO
U
N
D
R
I
G
I
D
D
U
C
T
.
WIN
G
N
U
T
RE
C
T
A
N
G
U
L
A
R
SU
P
P
L
Y
D
U
C
T
GLU
E
F
L
E
X
D
U
C
T
T
O
F
I
T
T
I
N
G
,
CL
A
M
P
D
O
W
N
W
I
T
H
S
T
R
A
P
A
N
D
SC
R
E
W
S
O
L
I
D
T
O
R
I
G
I
D
F
I
T
T
I
N
G
AT
T
A
C
H
T
O
R
I
G
I
D
D
U
C
T
WIT
H
D
R
A
W
B
A
N
D
OP
P
O
S
E
D
B
L
A
D
E
DA
M
P
E
R
W
H
E
R
E
SP
E
C
I
F
I
E
D
LA
Y
-
I
N
D
I
F
F
U
S
E
R
LA
Y
-
I
N
C
E
I
L
I
N
G
RO
U
N
D
T
O
SQ
U
A
R
E
TR
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
GL
U
E
F
L
E
X
D
U
C
T
T
O
AD
A
P
T
E
R
&
C
L
A
M
P
DO
W
N
W
I
T
H
S
T
R
A
P
.
RO
U
N
D
F
L
E
X
I
B
L
E
S
U
P
P
L
Y
DU
C
T
T
O
C
E
I
L
I
N
G
D
I
F
F
U
S
E
R
8'-
0
"
M
A
X
.
L
E
N
G
T
H
24
"
M
A
X
T
O
FIR
S
T
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
DU
C
T
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
EX
T
E
R
N
A
L
D
U
C
T
I
N
S
U
L
A
T
I
O
N
ON
A
L
L
R
O
U
N
D
R
I
G
I
D
DU
C
T
-
W
O
R
K
A
N
D
F
I
T
T
I
N
G
S
.
FC 1A
FC 1B
NO
T
E
:
RO
O
F
TY
P
.
R
O
O
F
J
O
I
S
T
PR
O
V
I
D
E
C
O
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
PU
M
P
W
I
T
H
U
N
I
T
A
N
D
P
I
P
E
DR
A
I
N
L
I
N
E
U
P
T
H
R
U
R
O
O
F
.
CA
U
L
K
NO
N
-
H
A
R
D
E
N
I
N
G
CO
L
L
A
R
ST
O
R
M
FL
A
S
H
I
N
G
4"
M
I
N
.
2
'
-
0
"
AN
D
S
E
A
L
W
A
T
E
R
T
I
G
H
T
FL
A
S
H
O
N
T
O
R
O
O
F
AIR
RE
T
U
R
N
FL
O
O
R
4"
SE
C
U
R
E
T
O
ST
R
U
C
T
U
R
E
.
DO
U
B
L
E
D
E
F
L
E
C
T
I
O
N
C
O
R
E
WIT
H
A
D
J
U
S
T
A
B
L
E
B
L
A
D
E
S
SP
I
R
A
L
W
O
U
N
D
DU
C
T
W
O
R
K
.
SE
C
U
R
E
S
U
P
P
L
Y
R
E
G
I
S
T
E
R
TO
R
O
U
N
D
D
U
C
T
W
O
R
K
W
I
T
H
SH
E
E
T
M
E
T
A
L
S
C
R
E
W
S
SP
I
R
A
L
D
U
C
T
R
E
G
I
S
T
E
R
SIM
I
L
A
R
T
O
P
R
I
C
E
S
D
G
E
AIR
S
C
O
O
P
BA
L
A
N
C
I
N
G
DA
M
P
E
R
BA
L
A
N
C
I
N
G
R
O
D
SU
P
P
O
R
T
D
U
C
T
4
'
O
.
C
.
FR
O
M
S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
E
12
"
M
I
N
.
WA
L
L
M
O
U
N
T
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
CO
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
CO
N
C
E
A
L
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
WIR
I
N
G
I
N
W
A
L
L
.
PR
O
V
I
D
E
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
A
T
RO
O
F
P
E
N
E
T
R
A
T
I
O
N
SE
A
L
R
O
O
F
PE
N
E
T
R
A
T
I
O
N
WEA
T
H
E
R
T
I
G
H
T
.
MO
U
N
T
O
U
T
D
O
O
R
U
N
I
T
O
N
PY
R
A
M
I
D
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
S
RIS
E
R
E
F
R
I
G
E
R
A
N
T
A
N
D
CO
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
P
I
P
I
N
G
U
P
T
H
R
U
RO
O
F
.
R
E
F
E
R
T
O
S
P
L
I
T
A
/
C
U
N
I
T
SC
H
E
D
U
L
E
F
O
R
L
I
N
E
S
I
Z
E
S
.
3/
8
"
D
I
A
.
R
O
D
S
AT
T
A
C
H
T
O
O
V
E
R
H
E
A
D
CO
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
HO
R
I
Z
O
N
T
A
L
UN
I
T
H
E
A
T
E
R
BALL VALVE
DI
R
T
L
E
G
CO
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
R
E
T
U
R
N
L
I
N
E
BA
L
L
V
A
L
V
E
STRAINERMOTORIZED VALVE UNIONVACUUM BREAKER LINESUPPLYSTEAM
UN
I
O
N
F&
T
T
R
A
P
F & T TRAPDIRT LEG RETURNBALL VALVESTEAM MAIN STRAINER UNION
BY
P
A
S
S
D
A
M
P
E
R
S
OU
T
S
I
D
E
A
I
R
FA
C
E
D
A
M
P
E
R
S
MOUNT COIL BELOW ROOF JOISTS. PROVIDE DUCT TRANSITION AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO FACE AND BYPASS DAMPER.PRE-HEAT STEAM COIL AS SPECIFIED.
RO
O
F
RO
O
F
I
N
G
ST
O
R
M
-
P
R
O
O
F
LO
U
V
E
R
B
L
A
D
E
S
BI
R
D
S
C
R
E
E
N
LOUVERED PENTHOUSE WITH BIRDSCREEN AND WEATHER SHIELD.FACTORY CURB TO MATCH ROOF SLOPE LEAVE DUCT OPEN TO SHOP
EX
P
A
N
S
I
O
N
V
A
L
V
E
SE
E
D
E
T
A
I
L
N
/
M
3
0
1
RO
O
F
P
E
N
E
T
R
A
T
I
O
N
SI
G
H
T
G
L
A
S
S
FI
L
T
E
R
D
R
Y
E
R
PI
P
E
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
A
T
R
I
S
E
3/
4
"
C
D
T
O
N
E
A
R
E
S
T
F
L
O
O
R
S
I
N
K
AI
R
H
A
N
D
L
E
R
DX
C
O
I
L
SH
U
T
-
O
F
F
D
A
M
P
E
R
.
I
N
T
E
R
L
O
C
K
WIT
H
E
X
H
A
U
S
T
F
A
N
S
#
4
T
H
R
U
#
7
10/27/20GD A H W5762TA ENAYWSDDTEO C .I S D UFSREPROFNESGIEERTAISONLEEEKSOIREEN Engineered Systems Associates ESA JOB NUMBER 200483 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1 8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2 sheet:title:revisions :p r o j e c t # :d a t e :UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND I S NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS & MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.project:
E D C B A
E D C B A
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6 b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005 M301MECHANICALDETAILS20.0220 oct. 27,2020BYUIEngineeringTechnologyCenter (ETC)100% construction documents3
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m
#
3
1
1
-
1
3
/
2
0
3
3
M
MM
MM
60
32
50
250
120
100
80
40 0 °C
200
100
150
60
32
50
250
120
100
80
40 0 °C
200
100
150 NO
S
C
A
L
E
RIS
E
P
I
P
I
N
G
U
P
T
O
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
R
E
F
E
R
TO
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
D
E
T
A
I
L
TY
P
I
C
A
L
L
A
Y
O
U
T
O
F
P
I
P
I
N
G
.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
S
P
E
R
MA
N
U
F
A
C
T
U
R
E
R
'
S
R
E
C
O
M
M
E
N
D
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
9"
9"
9"
9"
9
"
9
"
9
"
4-1
/
2
"
8
"
NO
T
E
:
RE
F
E
R
T
O
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
F
O
R
NU
M
B
E
R
O
F
L
O
O
P
S
A
N
D
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
L
E
N
G
T
H
S
FO
R
E
A
C
H
Z
O
N
E
MA
X
I
M
U
M
Z
O
N
E
L
E
N
G
T
H
=
3
0
0
'
U
S
I
N
G
5
/
8
"
I
.
D
.
PE
X
-
P
I
P
I
N
G
.
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
N
U
M
B
E
R
O
F
L
O
O
P
S
A
N
D
MA
N
I
F
O
L
D
S
F
O
R
C
O
V
E
R
A
G
E
I
N
A
R
E
A
S
S
H
O
W
N
.
CO
N
C
R
E
T
E
S
L
A
B
"P
E
X
"
P
I
P
E
2"
I
N
S
U
L
A
T
I
O
N
UN
L
E
S
S
N
E
X
T
TO
B
U
I
L
D
I
N
G
SE
C
U
R
E
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
O
R
E
-
B
A
R
WIT
H
T
I
E
W
I
R
E
2"
T
H
I
C
K
R
I
G
I
D
I
N
S
U
L
A
T
I
O
N
BA
S
E
G
R
A
D
E
2"
I
N
S
U
L
A
T
I
O
N
U
N
L
E
S
S
N
E
X
T
T
O
BU
I
L
D
I
N
G
.
H
O
L
D
T
O
P
O
F
I
N
S
U
L
A
T
I
O
N
DO
W
N
2
"
B
E
L
O
W
G
R
A
D
E
F
O
R
LA
N
D
S
C
A
P
I
N
G
.
RE
T
U
R
N
SU
P
P
L
Y
6"
S
P
A
C
I
N
G
O
N
ST
A
I
R
S
F
O
R
S
T
A
I
R
RA
I
L
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
EN
D
C
A
P
W
/
V
E
N
T
G
A
S
K
E
T
3 L
O
O
P
V
A
L
V
E
D
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
2 L
O
O
P
V
A
L
V
E
D
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
EN
D
C
A
P
W
I
T
H
V
E
N
T
3 L
O
O
P
V
A
L
V
E
L
E
S
S
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
AD
A
P
T
E
R
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
W
I
T
H
T
H
E
R
M
O
M
E
T
E
R
P
R
O
P
E
X
F
I
T
T
I
N
G
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
(
5
/
8
"
)
2 L
O
O
P
V
A
L
V
E
L
E
S
S
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
8-
PR
O
P
E
X
R
I
N
G
9-3-5-7-6-4-2-1-
8
9
5
2
6
2
1
77
2
4
3
2
1
12
0
V
1-1
/
2
"
1-1
/
2
"
S
Y
S
T
E
M
TY
P
.
A
I
R
V
E
N
T
FL
O
W
S
W
I
T
C
H
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
T
O
D
D
C
TE
M
P
.
FL
O
O
R
SE
N
S
O
R
CIR
C
U
L
A
T
I
N
G
P
U
M
P
1CP
FL
O
O
R
S
I
N
K
1-
1
/
2
"
CO
N
C
R
E
T
E
W
A
L
K
W
A
Y
NO
T
E
:
SN
O
W
M
E
L
T
I
N
G
S
Y
S
T
E
M
TO
B
E
F
I
L
L
E
D
W
I
T
H
5
0
%
AN
T
I
F
R
E
E
Z
E
S
O
L
U
T
I
O
N
.
US
E
O
N
L
Y
A
N
T
I
F
R
E
E
Z
E
RA
D
I
A
N
T
S
N
O
W
ME
L
T
S
Y
S
T
E
M
MA
N
I
F
O
L
D
S
5/
8
"
P
E
X
P
I
P
I
N
G
TO
S
I
D
E
W
A
L
K
R
A
D
I
A
N
T
SN
O
W
M
E
L
T
L
O
O
P
S
MI
N
I
M
U
M
B
U
R
Y
I
S
1
8
"
BE
L
O
W
F
I
N
I
S
H
E
D
G
R
A
D
E
UN
D
E
R
G
R
O
U
N
D
P
I
P
I
N
G
S
H
A
L
L
B
E
U
P
O
N
O
R
P
R
E
-
I
N
S
U
L
A
T
E
D
PE
X
-
A
-
P
I
P
E
S
Y
S
T
E
M
W
I
T
H
A
S
T
M
F
-
1
9
0
F
I
T
T
I
N
G
S
.
A
V
O
I
D
CO
U
P
L
I
N
G
S
I
N
P
I
P
I
N
G
.
P
R
O
V
I
D
E
T
E
E
F
I
T
T
I
N
G
S
O
N
L
Y
W
H
E
RE
NE
C
E
S
S
A
R
Y
RU
N
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
H
R
U
TU
N
N
E
L
S
T
O
BA
S
E
M
E
N
T
ME
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
R
O
O
M
DIE
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
U
N
I
O
N
IF
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
N
G
DIS
S
I
M
I
L
A
R
ME
T
A
L
S
SN
Y
D
E
R
P
O
W
E
R
LO
G
I
C
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
PA
N
E
L
B
Y
D
I
V
.
2
6
NO
T
E
:
SE
E
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
A
L
D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S
F
O
R
IN
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
O
F
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
A
L
E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
.
NO
T
E
:
1-
1
/
2
"
1-
1
/
2
"
PR
O
V
I
D
E
E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C
A
L
V
A
U
L
T
IN
G
R
O
U
N
D
W
I
T
H
M
E
T
A
L
TR
A
F
F
I
C
R
A
T
E
D
C
O
V
E
R
SN
O
W
M
E
L
T
MA
N
I
F
O
L
D
SE
E
E
/
M
3
0
2
TY
P
I
C
A
L
TH
E
R
M
O
M
E
T
E
R
0-1
0
0
P
S
I
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
GA
U
G
E
3/4
"
C
O
L
D
W
A
T
E
R
F
I
L
L
L
I
N
E
W
I
T
H
R
P
VA
L
V
E
.
S
E
E
D
E
T
A
I
L
A
/
P
3
0
1
SP
I
R
O
T
H
E
R
M
1-1
/
2
"
I
N
-
L
I
N
E
AIR
S
E
P
A
R
A
T
O
R
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
R
E
L
O
C
A
T
E
D
EX
T
R
O
L
E
X
P
A
N
S
I
O
N
T
A
N
K
ALL
D
I
S
T
R
I
B
U
T
I
O
N
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
O
MA
N
I
F
O
L
D
S
T
O
B
E
I
N
S
U
L
A
T
E
D
(A
B
O
V
E
O
R
B
E
L
O
W
G
R
O
U
N
D
)
SE
E
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
.
TY
P
I
C
A
L
L
O
O
P
S
.
R
E
F
E
R
S
H
E
E
T
M1
.
1
F
O
R
M
A
X
I
M
U
M
L
E
N
G
T
H
S
AN
D
L
O
O
P
S
F
O
R
E
A
C
H
Z
O
N
E
5/8
"
"
P
E
X
"
PIP
E
(
T
Y
P
)
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
REL
O
C
A
T
E
D
G
L
Y
C
O
L
FIL
L
S
T
A
T
I
O
N
W
I
T
H
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
P
U
M
P
NO
S
C
A
L
E
NO
S
C
A
L
E
1 1
/
2
"
SN
Y
D
E
R
P
O
W
E
R
L
O
G
I
C
CO
N
T
R
O
L
P
A
N
E
L
B
Y
D
I
V
.
2
6
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
C
O
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
RE
T
U
R
N
P
U
M
P
S
A
N
D
R
E
C
E
I
V
E
R
.
SY
M
.
G.P
.
M
.
TY
P
E
HE
A
D
H.P.CHAR RPM REMARKS MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO.
IN
-
L
I
N
E
8
1
5
'
1
/
4
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
1
7
5
0
S
N
O
W
M
E
L
T
S
Y
S
T
E
M
GRUNDFOS MAGNA3 32-60 F
CP 1
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
R
E
L
O
C
A
T
E
D
SH
E
L
L
A
N
D
T
U
B
E
H
E
A
T
EX
C
H
A
N
G
E
R
.
S
E
E
D
E
T
A
I
L
D/M
3
0
2
F
O
R
T
Y
P
I
C
A
L
PIP
I
N
G
.
UH 2UH1 UH 3
CO
N
D
.
R
E
T
U
R
N
P
U
M
P
1
8
2
0
'
(
2
)
1
/
2
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
3
5
0
0
C
O
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
RETURN PUMPSHIPCO 150 LPD-30 WITH 21 GALLON RECEIVING TANK AND DUPLEX CONTROL PANEL.
CP 2
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
2
-
1
/
2
"
PU
M
P
E
D
C
R
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
3
"
C
R
NO
S
C
A
L
E
1-
1
/
2
"
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
I
Z
E
D
CO
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
R
E
T
U
R
N
LI
N
E
B
A
C
K
T
O
M
E
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
ME
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
R
O
O
M
A
N
D
CE
N
T
R
A
L
E
N
E
R
G
Y
FA
C
I
L
I
T
Y
.
S
E
E
S
H
E
E
T
M
1
0
1
.
RIS
E
T
O
A
B
O
V
E
R
O
O
F
NO
S
C
A
L
E
TY
P
.
A
I
R
V
E
N
T
TY
P
I
C
A
L
TH
E
R
M
O
M
E
T
E
R
0-1
0
0
P
S
I
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
G
A
U
G
E
1 1
/
2
"
H
W
S
1 1
/
2
"
H
W
R
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
S
H
E
L
L
A
N
D
TU
B
E
H
E
A
T
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
R
IN
M
E
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
MEC
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
R
O
O
M
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
H
W
R
PIP
I
N
G
F
R
O
M
F
A
N
CO
I
L
L
O
O
P
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
H
W
S
PIP
I
N
G
T
O
F
A
N
C
O
I
L
LO
O
P
IN
-
L
I
N
E
4
1
5
'
1
/
4
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
1
7
5
0
A
I
R
H
A
N
D
L
E
R
H
O
T
W
A
T
E
R
C
O
I
L GRUNDFOS MAGNA3 32-60 F
CP 3
CIR
C
U
L
A
T
I
N
G
P
U
M
P
3CP
1 1
/
2
"
1-1
/
4
"
S
U
P
P
L
Y
L
I
N
E
.
S
E
E
D
E
T
A
I
L
F/M
3
0
2
F
O
R
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
A
T
I
O
N
O
F
PIP
I
N
G
T
O
S
N
O
W
M
E
L
T
S
Y
S
T
E
M
.
1-1
/
4
"
R
E
T
U
R
N
L
I
N
E
.
S
E
E
DE
T
A
I
L
F
/
M
3
0
2
F
O
R
CO
N
T
I
N
U
A
T
I
O
N
O
F
P
I
P
I
N
G
T
O
SN
O
W
M
E
L
T
S
Y
S
T
E
M
.
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
V
A
L
V
E
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
V
A
L
V
E
F
E
B
S
N
O
W
M
E
L
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
D
E
T
A
I
L
S
D
S
N
O
W
M
E
L
T
H
E
A
T
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
R
&
C
O
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
P
U
M
P
A
TY
P
I
C
A
L
S
N
O
W
M
E
L
T
P
I
P
I
N
G
L
A
Y
-
O
U
T
C
SN
O
W
M
E
L
T
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
B
O
X
D
E
T
A
I
L
SN
O
W
M
E
L
T
M
A
N
I
F
O
L
D
D
E
T
A
I
L
SN
O
W
M
E
L
T
S
Y
S
T
E
M
P
I
P
I
N
G
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
CIRCULATING PUMP SCHEDULE SPLIT SYSTEM A/C UNIT SCHEDULEUNIT HEATER SCHEDULE
AIR
H
A
N
D
L
I
N
G
U
N
I
T
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
G
CO
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
R
E
T
U
R
N
P
U
M
P
P
I
P
I
N
G
D
I
A
G
R
A
M
H
HO
T
W
A
T
E
R
C
O
I
L
P
I
P
I
N
G
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
S
CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE ELECTRIC HEATER SCHEDULEPRICE MODEL SMD IN 24x24 LAY-IN MODULE PRICE MODEL SMD IN 24x24 LAY-IN MODULE PRICE MODEL SMD WITH BEVELED FRAME PRICE MODEL 535PRICE MODEL LBPH25C WITH 750 FLANGED BORDER PRICE MODEL LBPH25C WITH 750 FLANGED BORDERPRICE MODEL 535L - MOUNT AT 6" ABOVE FLOOR PRICE MODEL 535S - MOUNT AT 12" ABOVE FLOOREXISTING COOLING ONLY ROOF TOP UNIT TO REMAIN.EXISTING COOLING ONLY ROOF TOP UNIT TO REMAIN.EXISTING COOLING ONLY ROOF TOP UNIT TO REMAIN.EXISTING COOLING ONLY ROOF TOP UNIT TO REMAIN.EXISTING COOLING ONLY ROOF TOP UNIT TO REMAIN.EXISTING COOLING ONLY ROOF TOP UNIT TO REMAIN.EXISTING COOLING ONLY ROOF TOP UNIT TO REMAIN.EXISTING COOLING ONLY ROOF TOP UNIT TO REMAIN.
FC 1A
60
0
-
7
0
0
1
208/60/1
MIT
S
U
B
I
S
H
I
M
O
D
E
L
P
K
A
-
A
3
0
K
A
W
I
T
H
W
A
L
L
MO
U
N
T
E
D
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
A
N
D
C
O
N
D
.
P
U
M
P
30
,
0
0
0
REFRIG. LINES LIQUID SUCTION FC 1B30,000
1
6
CHAR SEER BTU SYM.
MC
A
BT
U
CF
M
SY
M
.
OUTDOOR UNIT
IN
D
O
O
R
U
N
I
T
20
8
/
6
0
/
1
CH
A
R
MITSUBISHI MODEL PUY-A30NHA3 WITH LOW AMBIENT 'HARD-START' KITMANUFACTURER3/8"
5
/
8
"
25MCA
FC 2A
60
0
-
7
0
0
1
208/60/1
MIT
S
U
B
I
S
H
I
M
O
D
E
L
P
K
A
-
A
3
0
K
A
W
I
T
H
W
A
L
L
MO
U
N
T
E
D
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
A
N
D
C
O
N
D
.
P
U
M
P
30
,
0
0
0
FC 2B30,000
1
6
20
8
/
6
0
/
1
MITSUBISHI MODEL PUY-A30NHA3 WITH LOW AMBIENT 'HARD-START' KIT3/8"
5
/
8
"
25
FC 3A
60
0
-
7
0
0
1
208/60/1
MIT
S
U
B
I
S
H
I
M
O
D
E
L
P
K
A
-
A
3
0
K
A
W
I
T
H
W
A
L
L
MO
U
N
T
E
D
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
A
N
D
C
O
N
D
.
P
U
M
P
30
,
0
0
0
FC 3B30,000
1
6
20
8
/
6
0
/
1
MITSUBISHI MODEL PUY-A30NHA3 WITH LOW AMBIENT 'HARD-START' KIT3/8"
5
/
8
"
25CARRIER MODEL 48FC-A04. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB. NO HEAT REQUIRED. (14.0 SEER)PRICE MODEL LG100-A-STL-B12PRICE MODEL SDGE IN 10" ROUND DUCT WITH EXTRACTION DAMPER PRICE MODEL SDGE IN 10" ROUND DUCT WITH EXTRACTION DAMPERPRICE MODEL SMD IN 24x24 LAY-IN MODULE PRICE MODEL 535S - MOUNT AT 11'-0" ABOVE FLOOR PRICE MODEL 535L PENNBARRY MODEL PH WITH MOTORIZED DAMPER. INTERLOCK WITH EF-4, EF-5, EF-6 AND EF-7.INTERTEK MODEL 07130402 COMPLETE WITH WALL MOUNTED RAIN-TIGHT THERMOSTAT.EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE GRILLE AND REGISTER SCHEDULE
RO
O
F
T
O
P
H
E
A
T
I
N
G
&
A
I
R
C
O
N
D
I
T
I
O
N
I
N
G
U
N
I
T
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S.P.E.
1EF
SY
M
.
TY
P
E
RO
O
F
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
C.F
.
M
.
CONTROL CHAR.WATTS R.P.M.WALL SWITCHREMARKS
TH
R
O
W
CD
-
1
SY
M
.
12
x
1
2
SIZ
E
BRANCH
CO
N
S
T
R
.
20
0
-
4
0
0
CF
M
STEELFINISH WHITE
1
0
"
D
i
a
.
DUCT NOF.D.NOO.B.REMARKSWEIGHT
RT 1
800#
SY
M
.
EAT 75°FCOOLING
MC
A
28
.
0
H.P
.
---
BL
O
W
E
R
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
CH
A
R
HEATING BTU OUT BTU IN ---
-
-
-
LAT MBH EAT --- --- 60LAT 55°FREMARKS
CF
M
19
4
0
GAS CONN ---
SP ---E
2EF 3EF 4EF 5EF 6EF CD
-
2
CD
-
3
CD
-
4
RG
-
1
RG
-
2
FG
-
1
FG
-
2
ER
-
1
RT 2 RT 3 RT 4 RT 5 RT 6 RT 7 RT 8
9 x
9
5
0
-
1
9
9
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
8
"
D
i
a
.
N
O
N
O
12
x
1
2
STEEL
W
H
I
T
E
N
O
N
O
9 x
9
5
0
-
1
9
9
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
8
"
D
i
a
.
N
O
N
O
12
x
1
2
5
0
-
4
0
0
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
1
2
x
8
N
O
N
O
---
12
x
6
5
0
-
2
0
0
A
L
U
M
A
N
O
D
I
Z
E
D
1
2
x
6
B
O
O
T
N
O
N
O
---
18
x
6
2
0
1
-
3
0
0
A
L
U
M
A
N
O
D
I
Z
E
D
1
8
x
6
B
O
O
T
N
O
N
O
---
12
x
6
5
0
-
1
5
0
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
1
2
x
3
N
O
N
O
---
RO
O
F
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
80
0
1
/
4
H
P
.25"
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
9
0
0
T
I
M
E
C
L
O
C
K
TWIN CITY MODEL 100C BCRD WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB
RO
O
F
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
80
0
1
/
4
H
P
.25"
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
9
0
0
W
A
L
L
S
W
I
T
C
H
TWIN CITY MODEL 100C BCRD WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB
18
x
2
0
8
0
0
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
1
8
x
2
0
N
O
N
O
---
800#75°F
28
.
0
---
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
0
5
5
°
F
19
4
0
---
---
800#75°F
28
.
0
---
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
0
5
5
°
F
19
4
0
---
---
800#75°F
28
.
0
---
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
0
5
5
°
F
19
4
0
---
---
800#75°F
28
.
0
---
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
0
5
5
°
F
19
4
0
---
---
800#75°F
28
.
0
---
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
0
5
5
°
F
19
4
0
---
---
500#75°F
20
.
0
---
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
6
5
5
°
F
12
0
0
---
---
2200#75°F
99
.
0
---
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
1
0
5
5
°
F
72
0
0
---
---
VE
N
T
S
E
T
21
0
0
3
H
P
4.0"
2
0
8
/
6
0
/
3
1
7
2
5
W
A
L
L
S
W
I
T
C
H
MONOXIVENT 135-BI WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. PROVIDE F AN WITH VFD. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB. INTERLOCK WITH PH-1.
VE
N
T
S
E
T
21
0
0
4
.
0
"
2
0
8
/
6
0
/
3
1
7
2
5
W
A
L
L
S
W
I
T
C
H
7EF
VE
N
T
S
E
T
VE
N
T
S
E
T
18
0
0
2
H
P
4.0"
2
0
8
/
6
0
/
3
3
4
5
0
W
A
L
L
S
W
I
T
C
H
MONOXIVENT 120-BI WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. PROVIDE FAN WITH VFD. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB. INTERLOCK WITH PH -1.
18
0
0
4
.
0
"
2
0
8
/
6
0
/
3
3
4
5
0
W
A
L
L
S
W
I
T
C
H
3 HP 2 HP
8EF 10EF
CE
I
L
I
N
G
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
10
0
8
7
.25"
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
6
4
0
W
A
L
L
S
W
I
T
C
H
TWIN CITY MODEL T100 WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER AND 6" ROUND DUCT TO ROOF CAP
RO
O
F
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
U
P
-
B
L
A
S
T
10
0
0
1
/
4
H
P
.50"
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
1
3
7
5
S
W
I
T
C
H
O
N
H
O
O
D
TWIN CITY MODEL 110-BCRU WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB
TY
P
E
SY
M
.
TRAP
CF
M
H.P
.
CH
A
R
.
PRESS SUP.EAT
R
E
T
.
STEAM REMARKS WEIGHT
PR
O
P
E
L
L
E
R
1" F&T
14
0
0
1
/
2
0
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
9
6
,
0
0
0
6
5
°
F
1
-
1
/
2
"
1
"
15 psi 100#TRANE UHSB096 HORIZONTAL UNIT
PR
O
P
E
L
L
E
R
1" F&T
14
0
0
1
/
2
0
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
9
6
,
0
0
0
6
5
°
F
1
-
1
/
2
"
1
"
15 psi 100#BTU VALVE AUTO 2 POSITION TRANE UHSB096 HORIZONTAL UNIT
RT 9
500#
23
.
0
M
C
A
1/2
2
0
8
/
6
0
/
3
12
0
0
.
4
0
"
---
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
---75°F 36 55°F
30
M
C
O
P
80
0
1
/
4
H
P
.25"
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
9
0
0
TWIN CITY MODEL 100C BCRD WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB
PR
O
P
E
L
L
E
R
3/4" F&T
48
0
1
/
2
0
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
3
6
,
0
0
0
6
5
°
F
1
-
1
/
4
"
3
/
4
"
15 psi 100#TRANE UHSB036 HORIZONTAL UNITAUTO 2 POSITION AUTO 2 POSITION
ER
-
2
18
x
1
8
4
0
0
-
8
0
0
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
1
4
x
1
4
N
O
N
O
---
SY
M
.
CF
M
EW
T
HEATING
CH
A
R
REMARKS EAT
L
A
T
M
B
H
COOLING EAT
S
U
C
RP
M
S
P
.
E
H
.
P
.
MB
H
T
D
G
P
M
LIQ.LAT
1AH
19
5
0
2
1
8
0
1
.
0
"
1
-
1
/
2
2
0
8
/
6
0
/
3
6
5
6
5
°
F
20°F
4
18
0
°
F
1
1
0
°
F
3
6
7
5
°
F
5
5
°
F
3
/
8
"
7
/
8
"
TRANE MODEL UCCAG060 WITH HOT WATER HEATING COIL, D X COOLING COIL, AND MIXING BOX WITH ANGLE FILTERS. PR OVIDE VFD WITH UNIT.
PH
-
1
36
W
-
6
0
L
-
3
0
1
/
2
H
5
0
0
0
-
7
8
0
0
A
L
U
M
A
N
O
D
I
Z
E
D
3
6
x
6
0
N
O
N
O
---
SR
-
1
12
x
1
0
2
0
0
-
3
0
0
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
I
N
1
8
"
D
i
a
.
D
U
C
T
N
O
N
O
SR
-
2
10
x
8
2
0
0
-
3
0
0
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
I
N
1
0
"
D
i
a
.
D
U
C
T
N
O
N
O
20
0
-
4
0
0
10" Dia.
RO
O
F
M
O
U
N
T
E
D
80
0
1
/
4
H
P
.25"
1
2
0
/
6
0
/
1
9
0
0
W
A
L
L
S
W
I
T
C
H
TWIN CITY MODEL 100C BCRD WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB
9EF
MONOXIVENT 135-BI WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. PROVIDE F AN WITH VFD. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB. INTERLOCK WITH PH-1.MONOXIVENT 120-BI WITH BACK-DRAFT DAMPER. PROVIDE FAN WITH VFD. MOUNT ON ROOF CURB. INTERLOCK WITH PH -1.
RG
-
3
RG
-
4
18
x
1
6
1
2
0
0
-
1
8
0
0
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
1
8
x
1
6
N
O
N
O
---
14
x
8
1
0
0
-
2
0
0
S
T
E
E
L
W
H
I
T
E
1
4
x
8
N
O
N
O
---
SUCTIONREFRIGERANT PIPING LIQUID TRANE 4TTR4060A1 WITH LOW AMBIENT 'HARD-START'KIT. MOUNT ON ROOF WITH PYRAMID TYPE SUPPORTS.REMARKS
MC
O
P
EA
T
BT
U
SY
M
.
CH
A
R
.
50
95
°
F
CU 1
56
,
0
0
0
2
0
8
/
6
0
/
1
1
4
.
0
SEER 3/8"
7
/
8
"
MC
A
31
.
0
2
5
0
#
WEIGHT
SY
M
.
EH 1
TY
P
E
B
T
U
KW CHAR CONTROL REMARKS
WA
T
E
R
P
R
O
O
F
W
A
S
H
D
O
W
N
F
A
N
1
1
,
2
0
0
3
.
3
2
0
8
/
6
0
/
1
I
N
T
E
G
R
A
L
1-1
/
4
"
F
&
T
T
R
A
P
AN
D
T
U
B
E
H
E
A
T
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
R
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
R
E
L
O
C
A
T
E
D
S
H
E
L
L
MO
D
U
L
A
T
I
N
G
S
T
E
A
M
V
A
L
V
E
ST
R
A
I
N
E
R
ST
E
A
M
EX
I
S
T
I
N
G
V
E
N
T
A
T
C
E
I
L
I
N
G
1 1
/
4
"
2"
DR
A
I
N
V
A
L
V
E
GL
A
S
S
SI
G
H
T
CP 2
VA
L
V
E
CH
E
C
K
FL
O
A
T
V
A
L
V
E
VA
L
V
E
BA
L
L
FR
O
M
S
Y
S
T
E
M
CO
N
D
.
R
E
T
U
R
N
P
I
P
I
N
G
AU
T
O
M
A
T
I
C
F
L
O
W
CO
N
T
R
O
L
D
E
V
I
C
E
TW
O
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
MO
T
O
R
I
Z
E
D
V
A
L
V
E
MA
N
U
A
L
A
I
R
V
E
N
T
H.W
.
CO
I
L
TY
P
I
C
A
L
U
N
I
O
N
BA
L
L
VA
L
V
E
1-
1
/
2
"
H
W
S
1-
1
/
2
"
H
W
R
10/27/20GD A H W5762TA ENAYWSDDTEO C .I S D UFSREPROFNESGIEERTAISONLEEEKSOIREEN Engineered Systems Associates ESA JOB NUMBER 200483 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1 8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2 sheet:title:revisions :p r o j e c t # :d a t e :UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND I S NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS & MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.project:
E D C B A
E D C B A
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6 b y u i d a h o p r o j e c t # : 12005 M302MECHANICALSCHEDULES20.0220 oct. 27,2020BYUIEngineeringTechnologyCenter (ETC)100% construction documents3
A
d
d
e
n
d
u
m
#
3
1
1
-
1
3
/
2
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1823 East Center Street Pocatello, Idaho 83201 (208) 232-4439 Fax (208) 232-1435
ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM #3
November 14, 2020
Method Studio
160 W. 2nd Street, Suite 201
Rexburg, ID 83440
RE: BYU-I Engineering Technology Center
General Clarifications:
1. Low voltage cabling and raceway installation shall meet current BYU-I cabling standards, refer
to Section 7 of the standards.
2. Basket tray installed in the Automotive Shop, Highbay Shop and CM/CE Lab shall be mounted
high in structural ceiling space; field verify routing and location with other trades and structure.
3. Sheet EE101b
a. Key Note 11: Electrical contractor shall route conduit and conductors for snow melt
manifold through tunnel with Mech. Piping, coordinate with Mechanical Contractor
(M.C.)
b. Key Note 5: Electrical contractor is responsible for field routing the new fiber to new IT
room, the existing tunnel may be use as necessary. At some location the fiber will have to
exit the tunnel to be routed overhead to the IT room.
Sheets ED101/ED102
1. Additional clarification was added to the existing electrical plans regarding demo, refer to
updated sheets.
Sheets ED131/ED132
1. Additional clarification was added to the existing lighting plans regarding the exterior lighting,
refer to updated sheets.
Sheets EE101b and EE102
1. Modifications and additional basket tray were added for low voltage cabling, refer to revised
sheets.
2. Card reader at Purchasing door relocated.
3. Receptacle changes in Purchasing Reception area.
Sheets EE131
1. Additional Exit signs were added, refer to revised sheet.
END OF ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM
(E)
(E)
(E)
2 3 4 5 6 7
B
C
1 8
A
D
E
'F''J'
'C''H'
'A''G'
'B'
'D'
'R'
'W'
'S'
'I'
'T2'
'T'
'EF'
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 2
3
2
HEAT
TRACE
'DUH-1(E)
STARTER'
4
'DUH-2(E)
STARTER'
'DUH-3(E)
STARTER'
5
5
'DUH-4(E)
STARTER'
6
7
8
8
8 8
8
8
4
8
8
2
2
8
2
9
2
9 2
A. IN GENERAL, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, ALL
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN SHALL BE REMOVED.
WHEN EXISTING SWITCH AND OR OUTLET BOXES FALL WITHIN OR
NEAR NEW OUTLETS/SWITCHES SHOWN IN NEW DESIGN, THE E.C.
MAY UTILIZE THE EXISTING ROUGH-IN, ETC. IN LIEU OF INSTALLING
NEW. CONTRACTOR MUST HOWEVER MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL
CONTINUITY TO DOWNSTREAM EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR MAY UTILIZE ANY EXISTING RACEWAYS WHERE THEY
ARE COMPATIBLE WITH NEW DESIGN/SYSTEMS. PROVIDE ALL NEW
DEVICES AND COVERS.
B. ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL MAY NOT APPEAR ON THESE PLANS,
HOWEVER THE ABOVE INFORMATION APPLIES.
C. PROVIDE AND INSTALL BLANK COVERS ON ALL UNUSED
SWITCH/OUTLET/J-BOXES WHERE REQUIRED.
D. ALL WALL DEVICES THAT ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN, SHALL BE
ADAPTED TO NEW WALL COVERINGS, REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL
DRAWINGS FOR EXACT WALL LOCATIONS, THICKNESS, ETC.
E. PRIOR TO THE START OF ANY DEMOLITION WORK, DISCONNECTING
ANY POWER AND OR TELE/DATA SYSTEMS, THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL COORDINATE DOWN-TIME WITH THE OWNER.
F. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION,
DETAILS, ETC.
G. REMOVE OR RELOCATE ELECTRICAL AS NECESSARY FOR NEW
WORK.
H. WHERE EXISTING CIRCUITS ARE TO BE RE-USED, EXTEND AS
NECESSARY. MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY TO DOWNSTREAM
EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN.
I. EXISTING SHOWN TO REMAIN, MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED AND RE-
INSTALLED ONLY AS NECESSARY FOR EXTENDING OR MODIFICATION
OF EXISTING CIRCUITS OR WIRING.
J. REFER TO MECHANICAL PLANS FOR EXTENT OF MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED.
K. REMOVE ALL UNUSED EQUIPMENT WIRING, CONDUIT AND BOXES IN
ALL AREAS. ABANDON ONLY IN CONCEALED AREAS.
L. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE MINIMUM WORKING CLEARANCES AS
PER NEC BEFORE INSTALLING ANY ELECTRICAL PANELS OR
CABINETS.
M. CONTRACTOR MY UTILIZE ANY EXISTING CONDUIT WHERE
COMPATIBLE WITH NEW DESIGN, AND IF IN GOOD CONDITION AND
COMPLIES WITH SPECIFICATIONS.
N. WHEN ANY MODIFICATIONS ARE MADE TO ANY EXISTING
ELECTRICAL PANEL TO REMAIN, CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE NEW
TYPE WRITTEN INDEX TO REFLECT ALL NEW AND EXISTING LOADS.
O. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT, RACEWAYS, CABLES,ETC. NOT USED IN
FINISHED AREAS.
GENERAL NOTES:
KEY NOTES:#
1 EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL TO BE DISCONNECT AND REMOVED;
REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO
SOURCE. FIELD VERIFY IF ANY BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE TO REMAIN,
IF SO CIRCUIT SHALL BE RE-ROUTED TO NEAREST ELECTRICAL
PANEL.
2 EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL TO REMAIN ACTIVE; LOCATE AND
PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION. PANEL SHALL BE RE-USED FOR
NEW CIRCUITING AS INDICATED, PROVIDE NEW BREAKERS AS
INDICATED IN SCHEDULE.
3 EXISTING PANEL 'B' TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACES WITH J-BOX;
DISCONNECT AND MAINTAIN EXISTING FEEDER. PROVIDE AND
INSTALL NEW FLUSH MOUNTED J-BOX WITH FLUSH MOUNTED COVER
TO SPLICE AND EXTEND EXISTING FEEDER TO NEW PANEL 'B'
LOCATION. J-BOX SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EXISTING WALL FACING
INTO EXISTING CONF. ROOM. EXTEND NEW FEEDER TO NEW PANEL
AS INDICATED.
4 EXISTING STARTER FOR EXISTING UNIT HEATER TO BE RELOCATED;
REFER TO NEW DRAWINGS FOR NEW LOCATION AND NEW CIRCUIT
INFORMATION.
5 EXISTING STARTERS FOR EXISTING UNIT HEATERS TO REMAIN;
LOCATE AND PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION. PROVIDE NEW
CIRCUITING AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS.
6 EXISTING PULLBOX AND ASSOCIATED FEEDER FOR EXISTING PANEL
TO REMAIN ACTIVE. FIELD LOCATE AND PROTECT DURING
CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL DISCONNECTED EXISTING
MOUNTING AND SUPPORT FOR REMOVAL OF STAIRCASE AND
RESUPPORT FROM NEW WING WALL.
7 E.C. SHALL REMOVE ALL EXISTING DATA CABLING IN THIS AREA AND
PROVIDE NEW AS INDICATED ON NEW DRAWINGS PER LATEST BYU-I
CABLING STANDARDS. EXISTING RACEWAY AND BOXES MAYBE
RE-USED IF POSSIBLE.
8 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICE; REMOVE
ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE.
MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH CONTINUITY TO ALL DOWNSTREAM
DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN.
9 ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES (RECEPTACLES,
SWITCHES, FIRE ALARM, DATA, J-BOXES), CABLE TRAY AND ETC.
WITHIN THIS AREA SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED,
UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. REMOVE ALL
ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE. E.C.
SHALL MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH CONTINUITY TO ANY DOWNSTREAM
EQUIPMENT/DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN.
13053
ST ATE OF I D A HOSHAWNA.M E A D O R R E G I S TEREDRPOFESSIONALENGIN
E
E
R
Engineering Inc.
Consulting Engineers1823 E. Center
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
tel (208) 232-4439
www.payneengineeringinc.com
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
P.E. JOB #2060
byu idaho project # :12006
10/27/20
ED101
Level 1 -
Existing
Electrical Plan
20.0220
oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Level 1 - Existing Electrical Plan
1. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS FROM DEMOLITIONED PANELS SHALL BE
BOXED UP AND DELIVERED TO THE OWNER, TO AN ON CAMPUS
LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY OWNER.
2. ALL CONDUCTORS BEING REMOVED THAT ARE RATED 100 AMPS
AND ABOVE SHALL BE DELIVERED TO THE CAMPUS RECYCLING
CENTER.
3. ALL TRANSFORMERS BEING REMOVED SHALL BE DELIVERED TO
THE OWNER, TO AN ON CAMPUS LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY
OWNER.
4. UNLESS INDICATED ABOVE, ALL OTHER MATERIAL SHALL BE
DISPOSED OF LEGALLY BY THE CONTRACTOR.
SPECIAL DEMOLITION NOTES:
NORTH
16'8'0"
2 Addendum #3 11/14/20
2
M
M
M
MM
T
MM
T
MM
T
MM
T
MM
T
MM
T
MM
T
M
2 3
4 5 6 7
B
C
1
8
A
D
E
EXISTING MECH.
MEZZANINE TO REMAIN
FIELD LOCATE, PROTECT
AND MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH
FUNCTIONALITY TO ALL
EQUIPMENT AND DEVICESEXISTING IT ROOM TO BE RELCOATED.
DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL EXISTING
CABLING, EQUIPMENT AND ETC.
WP
'FC'
'AC'
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
DUH-1(E)
208 V/3P3/4HP
DUH-3(E)
208 V/3P3/4HP
DUH-4(E)
208 V/3P3/4HP
UH-1(E)
120 V/1P1/4HP
UH-2(E)
120 V/1P1/4HP
UH-6(E)
120 V/1P1/4HP
UH-5(E)
120 V/1P1/4HP
UH-3(E)
120 V/1P1/4HP
UH-4(E)
120 V/1P1/4HP
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
4
5
5
6
UH-7(E)
120 V/1P1/6HP
4
DUH-2(E)
208 V/3P3/4HP
7
2
13053
ST ATE OF I D A HOSHAWNA.M E A D O R R E G I S TEREDRPOFESSIONALENGIN
E
E
R
Engineering Inc.
Consulting Engineers1823 E. Center
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
tel (208) 232-4439
www.payneengineeringinc.com
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
P.E. JOB #2060
byu idaho project # : 12006
10/27/20
ED102
Level 2 &
Roof -
Existing
Electrical Plan
20.0220
oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
A. IN GENERAL, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, ALL
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN SHALL BE REMOVED.
WHEN EXISTING SWITCH AND OR OUTLET BOXES FALL WITHIN OR
NEAR NEW OUTLETS/SWITCHES SHOWN IN NEW DESIGN, THE E.C.
MAY UTILIZE THE EXISTING ROUGH-IN, ETC. IN LIEU OF INSTALLING
NEW. CONTRACTOR MUST HOWEVER MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL
CONTINUITY TO DOWNSTREAM EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR MAY UTILIZE ANY EXISTING RACEWAYS WHERE THEY
ARE COMPATIBLE WITH NEW DESIGN/SYSTEMS. PROVIDE ALL NEW
DEVICES AND COVERS.
B. ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL MAY NOT APPEAR ON THESE PLANS,
HOWEVER THE ABOVE INFORMATION APPLIES.
C. PROVIDE AND INSTALL BLANK COVERS ON ALL UNUSED
SWITCH/OUTLET/J-BOXES WHERE REQUIRED.
D. ALL WALL DEVICES THAT ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN, SHALL BE
ADAPTED TO NEW WALL COVERINGS, REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL
DRAWINGS FOR EXACT WALL LOCATIONS, THICKNESS, ETC.
E. PRIOR TO THE START OF ANY DEMOLITION WORK, DISCONNECTING
ANY POWER AND OR TELE/DATA SYSTEMS, THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL COORDINATE DOWN-TIME WITH THE OWNER.
F. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION,
DETAILS, ETC.
G. REMOVE OR RELOCATE ELECTRICAL AS NECESSARY FOR NEW
WORK.
H. WHERE EXISTING CIRCUITS ARE TO BE RE-USED, EXTEND AS
NECESSARY. MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY TO DOWNSTREAM
EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN.
I. EXISTING SHOWN TO REMAIN, MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED AND RE-
INSTALLED ONLY AS NECESSARY FOR EXTENDING OR MODIFICATION
OF EXISTING CIRCUITS OR WIRING.
J. REFER TO MECHANICAL PLANS FOR EXTENT OF MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED.
K. REMOVE ALL UNUSED EQUIPMENT WIRING, CONDUIT AND BOXES IN
ALL AREAS. ABANDON ONLY IN CONCEALED AREAS.
L. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE MINIMUM WORKING CLEARANCES AS
PER NEC BEFORE INSTALLING ANY ELECTRICAL PANELS OR
CABINETS.
M. CONTRACTOR MY UTILIZE ANY EXISTING CONDUIT WHERE
COMPATIBLE WITH NEW DESIGN, AND IF IN GOOD CONDITION AND
COMPLIES WITH SPECIFICATIONS.
N. WHEN ANY MODIFICATIONS ARE MADE TO ANY EXISTING
ELECTRICAL PANEL TO REMAIN, CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE NEW
TYPE WRITTEN INDEX TO REFLECT ALL NEW AND EXISTING LOADS.
O. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT, RACEWAYS, CABLES,ETC. NOT USED IN
FINISHED AREAS.
GENERAL NOTES:
KEY NOTES:#
1 ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES (RECEPTACLES,
SWITCHES, FIRE ALARM, DATA, J-BOXES), CABLE TRAY AND ETC.
WITHIN THIS AREA SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED,
UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. REMOVE ALL
ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE. E.C.
SHALL MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH CONTINUITY TO ANY DOWNSTREAM
EQUIPMENT/DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN.
2 EXISTING ROOFTOP UNIT TO BE RECIRCUITED AS INDICATED ON
NEW DRAWINGS; FIELD COORDINATE ROUTING OF NEW CIRCUIT
WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION.
3 EXISTING ROOFTOP UNIT TO REMAIN ACTIVE; LOCATE AND PROTECT
EXISTING CIRCUITING AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN FUNCTIONALITY.
4 EXISTING UNIT HEATER TO BE RELOCATED BY M.C. E.C. SHALL
ELECTRICALLY DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED
CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS; PROVIDE NEW CIRCUITING AT NEW
LOCATION INDICATED ON NEW DRAWINGS.
5 EXISTING UNIT HEATER TO REMAIN; E.C. SHALL PROVIDE NEW
CIRCUITING AS INDICATED ON NEW DRAWINGS. ROUTE CIRCUIT
THROUGH EXISTING STARTERS.
6 EXISTING IT CLOSET TO BE DEMOLISHED, E.C. SHALL DISCONNECT
AND REMOVE ALL EXISTING DATA CABLING, EQUIPMENT AND ETC.
LOCATED IN ROOM. ALL EXISTING DATA CABLING IN BUILDING TO BE
REMOVED AND REPLACE WITH NEW CABLING TO NEW IT ROOM AS
INDICATED ON NEW DRAWINGS. E.C. SHALL PULL BACK EXISTING
SINGLE MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE TO ELEC. ROOM AT LEVEL 0,
FIBER OPTIC CABLE SHALL BE SPLICED IN ELECTRICAL ROOM AND
EXTENDED TO NEW IT ROOM AS REQUIRED. ALL EXISTING
MULTI-MODE FIBER AND COPPER BACKBONE CABLING SHALL BE
REMOVED FROM BUILDING OUT TO EXISTING VAULT BY E.C.
7 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICE; REMOVE
ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE.
MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH CONTINUITY TO ALL DOWNSTREAM
DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN.
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Level 2 - Existing Electrical Plan
1. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS FROM DEMOLITIONED PANELS SHALL BE
BOXED UP AND DELIVERED TO THE OWNER, TO AN ON CAMPUS
LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY OWNER.
2. ALL CONDUCTORS BEING REMOVED THAT ARE RATED 100 AMPS
AND ABOVE SHALL BE DELIVERED TO THE CAMPUS RECYCLING
CENTER.
3. ALL TRANSFORMERS BEING REMOVED SHALL BE DELIVERED TO
THE OWNER, TO AN ON CAMPUS LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY
OWNER.
4. UNLESS INDICATED ABOVE, ALL OTHER MATERIAL SHALL BE
DISPOSED OF LEGALLY BY THE CONTRACTOR.
SPECIAL DEMOLITION NOTES:
NORTH
16'8'0"
2 Addendum #3 11/14/20
2 3
4 5 6 7
B
C
1
8
A
D
E
LIGHTING IN PURCHASING AREA
TO REMAIN ACTIVE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)
LOCATE, PROTECT AND MAINTAIN FUNCTIONALITY
DURING CONSTRUCTION
1
1
2
2
3
3
4 4
2
13053
ST ATE OF I D A HOSHAWNA.M E A D O R R E G I S TEREDRPOFESSIONALENGIN
E
E
R
Engineering Inc.
Consulting Engineers1823 E. Center
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
tel (208) 232-4439
www.payneengineeringinc.com
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
P.E. JOB #2060
byu idaho project # : 12006
10/27/20
ED131
Level 1 -
Existing
Lighting Plan
20.0220
oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
A. IN GENERAL, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, ALL
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN SHALL BE REMOVED.
WHEN EXISTING SWITCH AND OR OUTLET BOXES FALL WITHIN OR
NEAR NEW OUTLETS/SWITCHES SHOWN IN NEW DESIGN, THE E.C.
MAY UTILIZE THE EXISTING ROUGH-IN, ETC. IN LIEU OF INSTALLING
NEW. CONTRACTOR MUST HOWEVER MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL
CONTINUITY TO DOWNSTREAM EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR MAY UTILIZE ANY EXISTING RACEWAYS WHERE THEY
ARE COMPATIBLE WITH NEW DESIGN/SYSTEMS. PROVIDE ALL NEW
DEVICES AND COVERS.
B. ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL MAY NOT APPEAR ON THESE PLANS,
HOWEVER THE ABOVE INFORMATION APPLIES.
C. PROVIDE AND INSTALL BLANK COVERS ON ALL UNUSED
SWITCH/OUTLET/J-BOXES WHERE REQUIRED.
D. ALL WALL DEVICES THAT ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN, SHALL BE
ADAPTED TO NEW WALL COVERINGS, REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL
DRAWINGS FOR EXACT WALL LOCATIONS, THICKNESS, ETC.
E. PRIOR TO THE START OF ANY DEMOLITION WORK, DISCONNECTING
ANY POWER AND OR TELE/DATA SYSTEMS, THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL COORDINATE DOWN-TIME WITH THE OWNER.
F. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION,
DETAILS, ETC.
G. REMOVE OR RELOCATE ELECTRICAL AS NECESSARY FOR NEW
WORK.
H. WHERE EXISTING CIRCUITS ARE TO BE RE-USED, EXTEND AS
NECESSARY. MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY TO DOWNSTREAM
EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN.
I. EXISTING SHOWN TO REMAIN, MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED AND RE-
INSTALLED ONLY AS NECESSARY FOR EXTENDING OR MODIFICATION
OF EXISTING CIRCUITS OR WIRING.
J. REFER TO MECHANICAL PLANS FOR EXTENT OF MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED.
K. REMOVE ALL UNUSED EQUIPMENT WIRING, CONDUIT AND BOXES IN
ALL AREAS. ABANDON ONLY IN CONCEALED AREAS.
L. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE MINIMUM WORKING CLEARANCES AS
PER NEC BEFORE INSTALLING ANY ELECTRICAL PANELS OR
CABINETS.
M. CONTRACTOR MY UTILIZE ANY EXISTING CONDUIT WHERE
COMPATIBLE WITH NEW DESIGN, AND IF IN GOOD CONDITION AND
COMPLIES WITH SPECIFICATIONS.
N. WHEN ANY MODIFICATIONS ARE MADE TO ANY EXISTING
ELECTRICAL PANEL TO REMAIN, CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE NEW
TYPE WRITTEN INDEX TO REFLECT ALL NEW AND EXISTING LOADS.
O. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT, RACEWAYS, CABLES,ETC. NOT USED IN
FINISHED AREAS.
GENERAL NOTES:
KEY NOTES:#
1 ALL EXISTING LIGHTING AND CONTROLS WITHIN THIS AREA SHALL
BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY
INDICATED OTHERWISE. REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND
CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE UNLESS THEY CAN BE UTILIZED
FOR NEW INSTALLATION. E.C. SHALL MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH
CONTINUITY TO ALL DOWNSTREAM EQUIPMENT/DEVICES THAT ARE
TO REMAIN.
2 EXISTING LIGHTING TO REMAIN ACTIVE, LOCATE AND PROTECT
DURING CONSTRUCTION.
3 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICE; REMOVE
ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE.
MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH CONTINUITY TO ALL DOWNSTREAM
DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN.
4 EXISTING EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE REMOVED AND
REPLACED WITH NEW EXTERIOR LIGHTING AS INDICATED ON NEW
LIGHTING PLAN(S). FIELD LOCATE EXISTING EXTERIOR LIGHTING
CIRCUIT AND EXTEND TO NEW LIGHTING.
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Level 1 - Existing Lighting Plan
1. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS FROM DEMOLITIONED PANELS SHALL BE
BOXED UP AND DELIVERED TO THE OWNER, TO AN ON CAMPUS
LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY OWNER.
2. ALL CONDUCTORS BEING REMOVED THAT ARE RATED 100 AMPS
AND ABOVE SHALL BE DELIVERED TO THE CAMPUS RECYCLING
CENTER.
3. ALL TRANSFORMERS BEING REMOVED SHALL BE DELIVERED TO
THE OWNER, TO AN ON CAMPUS LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY
OWNER.
4. UNLESS INDICATED ABOVE, ALL OTHER MATERIAL SHALL BE
DISPOSED OF LEGALLY BY THE CONTRACTOR.
SPECIAL DEMOLITION NOTES:
NORTH
16'8'0"
2 Addendum #3 11/14/20
2 3
4 5 6 7
B
C
1
8
A
D
E
EXISTING MECH.
MEZZANINE TO REMAIN
FIELD LOCATE, PROTECT
AND MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH
FUNCTIONALITY TO ALL
EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES
1
2
2
2
2 2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2
2
13053
ST ATE OF I D A HOSHAWNA.M E A D O R R E G I S TEREDRPOFESSIONALENGIN
E
E
R
Engineering Inc.
Consulting Engineers1823 E. Center
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
tel (208) 232-4439
www.payneengineeringinc.com
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
P.E. JOB #2060
byu idaho project # : 12006
10/27/20
ED132
Level 2 -
Existing
Lighting Plan
20.0220
oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
A. IN GENERAL, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, ALL
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN SHALL BE REMOVED.
WHEN EXISTING SWITCH AND OR OUTLET BOXES FALL WITHIN OR
NEAR NEW OUTLETS/SWITCHES SHOWN IN NEW DESIGN, THE E.C.
MAY UTILIZE THE EXISTING ROUGH-IN, ETC. IN LIEU OF INSTALLING
NEW. CONTRACTOR MUST HOWEVER MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL
CONTINUITY TO DOWNSTREAM EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR MAY UTILIZE ANY EXISTING RACEWAYS WHERE THEY
ARE COMPATIBLE WITH NEW DESIGN/SYSTEMS. PROVIDE ALL NEW
DEVICES AND COVERS.
B. ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL MAY NOT APPEAR ON THESE PLANS,
HOWEVER THE ABOVE INFORMATION APPLIES.
C. PROVIDE AND INSTALL BLANK COVERS ON ALL UNUSED
SWITCH/OUTLET/J-BOXES WHERE REQUIRED.
D. ALL WALL DEVICES THAT ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN, SHALL BE
ADAPTED TO NEW WALL COVERINGS, REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL
DRAWINGS FOR EXACT WALL LOCATIONS, THICKNESS, ETC.
E. PRIOR TO THE START OF ANY DEMOLITION WORK, DISCONNECTING
ANY POWER AND OR TELE/DATA SYSTEMS, THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL COORDINATE DOWN-TIME WITH THE OWNER.
F. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION,
DETAILS, ETC.
G. REMOVE OR RELOCATE ELECTRICAL AS NECESSARY FOR NEW
WORK.
H. WHERE EXISTING CIRCUITS ARE TO BE RE-USED, EXTEND AS
NECESSARY. MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY TO DOWNSTREAM
EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN.
I. EXISTING SHOWN TO REMAIN, MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED AND RE-
INSTALLED ONLY AS NECESSARY FOR EXTENDING OR MODIFICATION
OF EXISTING CIRCUITS OR WIRING.
J. REFER TO MECHANICAL PLANS FOR EXTENT OF MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED.
K. REMOVE ALL UNUSED EQUIPMENT WIRING, CONDUIT AND BOXES IN
ALL AREAS. ABANDON ONLY IN CONCEALED AREAS.
L. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE MINIMUM WORKING CLEARANCES AS
PER NEC BEFORE INSTALLING ANY ELECTRICAL PANELS OR
CABINETS.
M. CONTRACTOR MY UTILIZE ANY EXISTING CONDUIT WHERE
COMPATIBLE WITH NEW DESIGN, AND IF IN GOOD CONDITION AND
COMPLIES WITH SPECIFICATIONS.
N. WHEN ANY MODIFICATIONS ARE MADE TO ANY EXISTING
ELECTRICAL PANEL TO REMAIN, CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE NEW
TYPE WRITTEN INDEX TO REFLECT ALL NEW AND EXISTING LOADS.
O. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT, RACEWAYS, CABLES,ETC. NOT USED IN
FINISHED AREAS.
GENERAL NOTES:
KEY NOTES:#
1 ALL EXISTING LIGHTING AND CONTROLS WITHIN THIS AREA SHALL
BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY
INDICATED OTHERWISE. REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND
CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE UNLESS THEY CAN BE UTILIZED
FOR NEW INSTALLATION. E.C. SHALL MAINTAIN/RE-ESTABLISH
CONTINUITY TO ALL DOWNSTREAM EQUIPMENT/DEVICES THAT ARE
TO REMAIN.
2 EXISTING EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE REMOVED AND
REPLACED WITH NEW EXTERIOR LIGHTING AS INDICATED ON NEW
LIGHTING PLAN(S). FIELD LOCATE EXISTING EXTERIOR LIGHTING
CIRCUIT AND EXTEND TO NEW LIGHTING.
3 EXISTING HIGH BAY LED FIXTURES IN THIS AREA SHALL BE
DISCONNECTED, REMOVED AND STORED FOR RE-USE IN NEW
CONSTRUCTION AREAS AS INDICATED ON NEW LIGHTING PLANS.
E.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR STORING FIXTURES, ANY DAMAGED
FIXTURES SHALL BE REPLACED BY THE E.C. ANY EXTRA FIXTURES
THAT ARE NOT RE-USED SHALL BE TURNED OVER TO BYU-I
ELECTRICAL SHOP. ALL OTHER LIGHTING, CONTROLS AND ETC. IN
THIS AREA ARE TO BE REMOVED.
1. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS FROM DEMOLITIONED PANELS SHALL BE
BOXED UP AND DELIVERED TO THE OWNER, TO AN ON CAMPUS
LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY OWNER.
2. ALL CONDUCTORS BEING REMOVED THAT ARE RATED 100 AMPS
AND ABOVE SHALL BE DELIVERED TO THE CAMPUS RECYCLING
CENTER.
3. ALL TRANSFORMERS BEING REMOVED SHALL BE DELIVERED TO
THE OWNER, TO AN ON CAMPUS LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY
OWNER.
4. UNLESS INDICATED ABOVE, ALL OTHER MATERIAL SHALL BE
DISPOSED OF LEGALLY BY THE CONTRACTOR.
SPECIAL DEMOLITION NOTES:
NORTH
16'8'0"SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Level 2 - Existing Lighting Plan
2 Addendum #3 11/14/20
JCD1 JCD1 JCD1
JCD1JCD1JCD1
MM
T
JCD1
JCD1
J
CR1
JCR1
JCR1
J
CR1
J
CR1
J
CR1
JCR1
J
CR1
J
CR1
AV
(E)
(E)
J
(E)
JCD1 JCD1
F
F
M
MM
T
MM
T
TV
R
N/S
N/RN/R
N/S TVS
J
CR1
CA
M
CAM
CAM
CAM
CA
M
CAM
CA
M
CA
M
CAM
F
F
F
F
CR
CRCR
F
F
F
CR
F
F
F
F F F F
F
FF
F F FF
F
F
F
DC
F
CR
S
S RT-7
S
RT-6
SFC
-
4
S
RT-8
S
FC-8
S
FC
-
9
SFC-7
MM
T
FLOOR KEY PLAN
A
B
2 3 4 5 6 7
C
1 8
D
E
AC AC
'C''H'
'A''G'
HIGH BAY SHOP
137
CM / CE LAB
132
VESTIBULE
101
BREAK ROOM
130
OFFICE
129 OFFICE
128
OFFICE
127
FIRE RISER
132B
CURING CLOSET
137B
CM/CE TOOL ROOM
132A
STUDENT
COLLABORATION
136
CORRIDOR
139
I.T.
135
OFFICE
133
OFFICE
134
CUSTODIAL
138A
WOMEN'S
117
MEN'S
115
JANITOR
116
OFFICE
121
OFFICE
124
OFFICE
122
OFFICE
123
OFFICE
119
OFFICE
120
OFFICE
125
CORRIDOR
118
CORRIDOR
131
SEATING
126
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
109
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
108
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
107
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
106
CONFRENCE ROOM
(N.I.C.)
114
RECEPTION
102
OFFICE
104
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
105
OFFICE
110
OPEN OFFICE
111
OFFICE
112
CORRIDOR
103
CONCRETE TOOLS
137A
CM TOOL STORAGE
137C
2D-4 2D-4 2D-4
2D-4 2D-4
2D-4
4D-4
3D-4
4D-5
'B'
'W''D'
'IT'
42"
42"42"42"
42"
42"
42"
42"
42"
42"
1
HB-7HB-8
HB-6
HB-15
42"
HB-10 HB-5 HB-9
HB-14 HB-12
HB-4
2D-4
3D-4
42"42"
CS-18
CS-17
AC
AC
EF-1
AC
42"42"
DUH-1(E)
208 V/3P3/4HP
'DUH-1(E)
STARTER'
UH-1(E)
120 V/1P1/4HP
UH-2(E)
120 V/1P1/4HP
2D-4
ACAC
AC
2D-4
AC AC
AC
2D-4
3D-5
90"
6D-6
2
2
2D-4
2D-4
4D-4
4D-5
4D-4
2D-4
2D-4
3
3D-4
WAP
2D-4
2D-4
2D-4
2D-4
2D-4
2D-4
2D-42D-4
2D-4 2D-4
3D-4
WAP
3D-4
WAP
3D-4
WAP
3D-4
WAP
2D-4
2D-4
2D-4
2D-4
3D-5
72"
3D-4
WAP
AC
AC AC
2D-4
AC
CS-10
AC CS-15
CS-14
CS-4
CS-4
AC
CS-15
CS-15
AC
AC
AC
AC
42"42"
CS-22 CS-24
CS-27
HB-19
42"
42"
42"42"42"42"42"42"
ST-4
42"42"42"
HB-18
4
EE101b
3
1D-3
1D-3
1D-3
1D-3
1D-3
1D-3
1D-3
1D-3
1D-3
6
6
A-1
A-3
G-34
G-9
H-6
B-13
12"x2"
12"x2"
12
"
x
2
"
12"x2"
12
"
x
2
"
7
7
7
(1/EE101a)
(1/EE101a)
WP
H-26,28,30
H-1,3,5
H-11 H-13 H-15 H-7 H-9
C-4
H-4
H-17 H-19
C-2
C-18
C-12,14,16
C-6,8,10
H-2
9
C-13,15 C-17,19
D-12D-10 D-2,4,6
D-16
D-14 D-8
D-26
D-24
B-15
B-18
B-12,14,16
B-8,10
B-19,21,23
B-2,4,6
B-17
TO EF-3FOR CONTROL
EF-8
CONTROL
H-1
FC-2A
FC-3A
TO EF-9FOR CONTROL
SNOWMELTMANIFOLD BY
M.C.
11
TP-1
12
2
2
12"x2"
7
14
12"x2"
7 2
2D-4
1
D
EXISTING INCOMING
COPPER AND FIBER OPTIC COMM. CABLING
FROM CAMPUS VAULTS'M'
'E''P'
'Z''X'NEW SINGLE-MODEFIBER TO NEW IT ROOM
3D-4
5CP-1
'SIDEWALK HT'
SNOW
MELT
CONTROLLER
P-5
I.T.
135
'IT'FC-1A
L6-30R
L6-20R L6-20R
L6-30R
IT-6,8#10's IT-2,4#10's
IT-14,16 IT-10,12
IT-13,15
IT-17,19
8
GND
BAR
10
1D-413
13053
ST ATE OF I D A HOSHAWNA.M E A D O R R E G I S TEREDRPOFESSIONALENGIN
E
E
R
Engineering Inc.
Consulting Engineers1823 E. Center
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
tel (208) 232-4439
www.payneengineeringinc.com
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
P.E. JOB #2060
byu idaho project # : 12006
10/27/20
EE101b
Level 1 -
Power/Data
Plan - Area 'B'
20.0220
oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
A. REFER TO SYMBOL SCHEDULE SHEET FOR PROJECT GENERAL
NOTES AND GENERAL NOTES ASSOCIATED WITH THE
INSTALLATION OF EACH SYSTEM, INCLUDINB BUT NOT LIMITED TO;
LIGHTING, POWER, FIRE ALARM, SPECIAL SYSTEMS, ETC.
GENERAL NOTES:
KEY NOTES:
1 EXISTING PANEL 'B' TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACES WITH J-BOX;
DISCONNECT AND MAINTAIN EXISTING FEEDER. PROVIDE AND
INSTALL NEW FLUSH MOUNTED J-BOX WITH FLUSH MOUNTED COVER
TO SPLICE AND EXTEND EXISTING FEEDER TO NEW PANEL 'B'
LOCATION. J-BOX SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EXISTING WALL FACING
INTO EXISTING CONF. ROOM. EXTEND NEW FEEDER TO NEW PANEL
AS INDICATED.
2 PROVIDE AND INSTALL 10FT OF PLUG MOLD ABOVE FIRST SHELF. (2)
HUBBELL #PT205115 MOUNTED END TO END. PROVIDE ALL
COMPONENTS FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. SPACE
RECEPTACLES 6" ON CENTER.
3 E.C. SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW POWER AND DATA IN
PURCHASING AREA AT LOCATIONS SHOWN; PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED
CUTTING AND PATCHING OF EXISTING WALLS AND ROUTING ABOVE
EXISTING ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE OR TUNNEL SPACES AS
NEEDED. FIELD VERIFY ROUTING OF ALL NEW DATA CABLING AND
POWER.
4 CONNECTION TO OVERHEAD DOOR MOTOR, COORDINATE
CONNECTION WITH EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE
CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS TO PUSH-BUTTON STATION PER
MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS.
5 E.C. SHALL SPLICE AND EXTEND EXISTING 48-STRAND SINGLE-MODE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND EXTEND TO NEW IT ROOM AND TERMINATE
IN RACK PER BYU-I STANDARDS. FIBER OPTIC CABLE SHALL BE
INSTALLED IN INNER-DUCT AND ROUTED TO NEW IT ROOM AS
REQUIRED, CABLE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT IF ROUTED
THROUGH EXPOSED AREAS. FIELD VERIFY ROUTING. DEMO ALL
EXISTING MULTI-MODE FIBER AND COPPER BACKBONE WITHIN
BUILDING BACK TO CLOSEST COMMUNICATIONS VAULT.
6 CONNECTION TO AUTOMATIC ADA DOORS; FIELD VERIFY
CONNECTION LOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS WITH EQUIPMENT
INSTALLERS. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED ROUGH-IN AND
CONNECTIONS TO PUSH-BUTTONS.
7 PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW WIRE CABLE TRAY SYSTEM; PROVIDE
AND INSTALL ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE AND
ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. REFER TO DETAILS
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
8 PROVIDE AND INSTALL (4) 30A/240V TWIST-LOCK RECEPT. AS
INDICATED; FIELD VERIFY MOUNTING LOCATION WITH BYU-I IT DEPT.
PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
9 EXISTING PULLBOX AND ASSOCIATED FEEDER FOR EXISTING PANEL
TO REMAIN ACTIVE. FIELD LOCATE AND PROTECT DURING
CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL DISCONNECTED EXISTING
MOUNTING AND SUPPORT FOR REMOVAL OF STAIRCASE AND
RESUPPORT FROM NEW WING WALL.
10 PROVIDE AND INSTALL GROUND BAR(S) AS PER BYU-I CABLE
STANDARD. PROVIDE AND INSTALL (1) 1"C WITH 1#6 GND TO BLDG
GROUND SYSTEM LOCATED NEXT TO PANEL 'M', FIELD VERIFY
LOCATION.
11 E.C. SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL 1"C FROM SNOWMELT MANIFOLD
BOX TO SNOW MELT CONTROL PANEL LOCATED IN LEVEL 0 ELEC.
ROOM. ROUTE CONDUIT THRU EXISTING TUNNEL WITH PIPING;
COORDINATE WITH M.C. PROVIDE CONDUCTORS AS DIRECTED BY
M.C. SEE MECH. DRAWINGS M302.
12 PROVIDE 120V POWER TO TRAP-PRIMER FROM NEAREST
RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT; COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH M.C.
PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN; SEE P301 FOR DETAIL.
13 PROVIDE DATA CONNECTION FOR ACCESS CONTROL PANEL; FIELD
VEIRY MTG LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
14 PROVIDE AND INSTALL (2) 4" CONDUITS TO CONNECT CABLE BASKET
TRAY SYSTEMS THROUGHT "MECH RM 201". TERMINATE WITH
INSULATED THROAT BUSHINGS, FIELD LOCATE TO AVOID CONFLICT
WITH OTHER TRADES AND UTILITIES.
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Level 1 - Power/Data Plan - Area 'B'
16'8'0"
NORTH
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"2 Level 0 - Power/Data Plan
SHOP EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
ID DESCRIPTION VOLTS PH. HP AMPS PANEL CIRCUIT FEEDER CONNECTION TYPE
MTG
HEIGHT NOTES
A-8 TRANMISSION JACK 120 V 1 N/A 12 A 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
A-11 PARTS WASHER 208 V 3 N/A 40 A AB 79,81,83 1"C.,3#6+1#6G DISC. - 60A/3P VERIFY 1,2,4
A-14 2-POST HOIST 208 V 1 2 12 A 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G DIRECT VERIFY 1,2
A-A1 AIR COMPRESSOR #1 208 V 3 7.5 23 A AB 68,70,72 1"C.,3#6+1#6G DISC. - 60A/3P VERIFY 1,2,4
A-A2 AIR COMPRESSOR #2 208 V 3 10 32 A AB 74,76,78 1"C.,3#6+1#6G DISC. - 60A/3P VERIFY 1,2,4
AT-6 PHAROS PRINTING STATION 120 V 1 N/A 5 A AA 17 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G (2) RECPT. NEMA 5-20R 42" AFF 1,2
CC-1 CURING TANK 120 V 1 N/A 5 A AA 31 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) VERIFY 1,2
CS-4 SOIL ASPHALT OVENS 120 V 1 N/A 10 A D 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
CS-10 SLEEVE CLEANER 120 V 1 N/A 10 A D 15 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) AC 1,2
CS-14 SMALL SOIL MIXER 120 V 1 N/A 10 A D 21 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
CS-15 LARGE SOIL MIXER 120 V 1 N/A 10 A D 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
CS-17 ASPHALT GYRATORY COMPACTOR 208 V 1 N/A 12 A D 39,41 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA L6-20R 42" AFF 1,2
CS-18 INSTRON TESTING MACHINE 120 V 1 N/A 12 A D 35 3/4"C.,2#10+1#10G RECPT. NEMA L6-20R 42" AFF 1,2
CS-22 VACUUM PUMP 120 V 1 N/A 10 A D 18 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 18" AFF 1,2
CS-24 PRO-LOADER AND TRIAXIAL CELL 120 V 1 N/A 10 A D 17 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) AC 1,2
CS-27 SULFER CAPPING COMPOUND
MELTING POT
120 V 1 N/A 10 A H 18 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) AC 1,2
HB-4 TABLE SAW 208 V 1 N/A 20 A H 36,38 3/4"C.,2#10+1#10G 30A/250V RECEPTACLE 42" AFF 1,2
HB-5 BAND SAW 120 V 1 N/A 14 A H 12 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
HB-6 JOINTER 208 V 1 N/A 8 A H 32,34 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G 20A/250V RECEPTACLE 42" AFF 1,2
HB-7 HORIZONTAL BELT SANDER 208 V 3 N/A 12 A H 31,33,35 3/4"C.,3#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA L6-20R 42" AFF 1,2
HB-8 DISC/VERTICAL BELT SANDER 208 V 3 N/A 12 A H 37,39,41 3/4"C.,3#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA L6-20R 42" AFF 1,2
HB-9 DRILL PRESS 120 V 1 N/A 8 A H 10 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
HB-10 PANEL SAW 120 V 1 N/A 10 A H 8 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
HB-12 METAL ABRASIVE CHOP SAW 120 V 1 N/A 12 A H 22 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
HB-14 TILE SAW 120 V 1 N/A 10 A H 20 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
HB-15 TABLE SAW DUST COLLECTOR 120 V 1 N/A 12 A H 16 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G DIRECT VERIFY 1,2
HB-18 MASONRY SAW 208 V 1 N/A 12 A H 40,42 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA L6-20R 42" AFF 1,2
HB-19 CONCRETE COMPRESSION TESTER 120 V 1 N/A 10 A H 24 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
ST-4 CONCRETE MIXER 120 V 1 N/A 10 A H 14 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G RECPT. NEMA 5-20R (GFCI) 42" AFF 1,2
1. COORDINATE CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS WITH EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
2. FIELD VERIFY CONNECTION AND ROUGH-IN LOCATION WITH OWNER/EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER.
3. MOUNT RECEPTACLE AT 42"AFF.
4. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE LOCAL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR EQUIPMENT; SIZE AND TYPE AS INDICATED. IF FUSED DISCONNECT IS SPECIFIED FOR EQUIPMENT, FUSE PER
EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATING.
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NOTES:
CORD-DROP SCHEDULE
ID DESCRIPTION NOTES
CD1 CORD DROP WITH (2) GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLES REFER TO CORD DROP DETAIL ON DETAIL SHEET
CORD-REEL SCHEDULE
ID DESCRIPTION MFG. PART # NOTES
CR1 20A, 120V 45FT RETRACTABLE CORD-REEL
W/(2) 20A RECPT. & GFCI MODULE
HUBBELL-WIRING HBLI45123GF220M1 PROVIDE REQUIRED MTG HARDWARE
CR2 45FT RETRACTABLE DROP-LIGHT WITH
RECEPTACLE
HUBBELL-WIRING HBLC40163FL PROVIDE REQUIRED MTG HARDWARE
CR3 50A, 240V HEAVY-DUTY CORD REEL
W/WELDER RECEPT.
K-H INDUSTRIES RTMH4L-WW-K6K E.C. TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL 50A RECPT.
FOR WELDER
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"3 Enlarged Plan - IT Room
1 Addendum #1 11/06/20
2 Addendum #3 11/14/20
MECHANICAL - EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE
ID # VOLTS PH. HP WATTS PANEL CIRCUIT FEEDER CONTROL
DISCONNECT
TYPE
DISCONNECT
SIZE NOTES
EF 1 120 V 1 87 W B 15 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G WALL TIMER
SWITCH
N/A 0 A
EF 2 120 V 1 1/4 W 18 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G POWER-LINK
TIME-CLOCK
3R 30 A 3
EF 3 120 V 1 1/4 C 20 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G WALL SWITCH 3R 30 A 3
EF 4 208 V 3 3 AB 53,55,57 3/4"C.,3#12+1#12G VFD/SWITCH FUSED/3R 30 A 2,6
EF 5 208 V 3 3 AA 62,64,66 3/4"C.,3#12+1#12G VFD/SWITCH FUSED/3R 30 A 2,6
EF 6 208 V 3 2 AA 68,70,72 3/4"C.,3#12+1#12G VFD/SWITCH FUSED/3R 30 A 2,6
EF 7 208 V 3 2 AB 54,56,58 3/4"C.,3#12+1#12G VFD/SWITCH FUSED/3R 30 A 2,6
EF 8 120 V 1 1/4 C 22 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G SWITCH ON
HOOD
3R 30 A 3
EF 9 120 V 1 1/4 D 28 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G WALL SWITCH 3R 30 A 3
EF 10 120 V 1 1/4 AB 36 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G WALL SWITCH 3R 30 A 3
MECHANICAL - HUMIDIFIER SCHEDULE
ID # VOLTS PH. KW PANEL CIRCUIT FEEDER
DISCONNECT
SIZE
DISCONNECT
TYPE NOTES
H 1 208 V 3 10 kW C 32,34,36 1"C.,2#8+1#8G 30 A FUSED/3R 2
1. CIRCUIT FAN WITH ROOM LTG CIRCUIT AND CONTROL WITH ROOM LIGHTING.
2. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE LOCAL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR EQUIPMENT; SIZE AND TYPE AS INDICATED IN SCHEDULE. IF FUSED DISCONNECT IS
SPECIFIED FOR EQUIPMENT, FUSE PER EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATING.
3. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE LOCAL DISCONNECT RATED, THERMAL-OVERLOAD SWITCH FOR EQUIPMENT; SWITCH RATING SHALL NOT BE LESS THEN
CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPPLYING EQUIPMENT.
4. EQUIPMENT IS FACTORY SUPPLYED WITH DISCONNECT AND CONVIENENCE OUTLET; E.C. SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY CONNECTIONS.
5. INDOOR UNIT IS POWERED FROM OUTDOOR UNIT; COORDINATE EXACT NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS BETWEEN UNITS WITH M.C. PRIOR TO
ROUGH-IN.
6. EQUIPMENT PROVIDED WITH VFD; VFD BY M.C. AND CONNECTED AND INSTALLED BY E.C. COORDINATE WITH M.C PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
7. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR EQUIPMENT; SIZE AND TYPE AS INDICATED IN SCHEDULE. PROVIDE
WITH CONTROL XFMR (2) SETS OF NO/NC CONTACTS, CONTROLS WITH M.C. PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. FUSE DISCONNECT PER EQUIPMENT
NAMEPLATE RATING.
8. PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW 30A/2P BREAKER IN EXISTING SQ. D NQ PANELBOARD.
MECHANICAL SCHEDULE NOTES:
2
M
MM
T
M
MM
T
M M
M
MM
T
MM
T
J
MM
T
EP
F
4
EP
F
4
EP
F
4
EPF4
EPF4
MM
MM
T
EP
F
4
EP
F
4
EP
F
4
EPF4
EPF4
2 3 4 5 6 7
B
C
1 8
A
D
E
(ON ROOF)
RT-9
(ON ROOF)
AH-1
(ON ROOF)
FC-1B
(ON ROOF)
EF-3
(ON ROOF)
EF-4
(ON ROOF)
EF-2
(ON ROOF)
RT-8(E)
(ON ROOF)
EF-6
(ON ROOF)
EF-7
WP
CONNECT TONEAREST
120V CRKT
WP
2
CONNECT TONEAREST 120V
RECPT. CRKT.
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
(ON ROOF)
EF-5
(ON ROOF)
EF-8
(ON ROOF)
FC-2B
(ON ROOF)
FC-3B
WP
2
CONNECT TONEAREST 120V
RECPT. CRKT.
(ON ROOF)
EF-9
5
6
W-20
5
(9/EE603)
(ON ROOF)
EF-10
(ON ROOF)
CU-1
5 6
C
D
'FC'
'AC'
MECH
202
1
CP-3
12"x2"
7
2
13053
ST ATE OF I D A HOSHAWNA.M E A D O R R E G I S TEREDRPOFESSIONALENGIN
E
E
R
Engineering Inc.
Consulting Engineers1823 E. Center
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
tel (208) 232-4439
www.payneengineeringinc.com
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
P.E. JOB #2060
byu idaho project # : 12006
10/27/20
EE102
Level 2 &
Roof -
Electrical Plan
20.0220
oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
A. REFER TO SYMBOL SCHEDULE SHEET FOR PROJECT GENERAL
NOTES AND GENERAL NOTES ASSOCIATED WITH THE
INSTALLATION OF EACH SYSTEM, INCLUDINB BUT NOT LIMITED TO;
LIGHTING, POWER, FIRE ALARM, SPECIAL SYSTEMS, ETC.
GENERAL NOTES:
KEY NOTES:#
1 PROVIDE AND INSTALL (3) 4" CONDUIT SLEEVES FROM "MECH RM
201" TO "IT RM 135" FOR ROUTING LOW VOLTAGE CABLING.
TERMINATE WITH INSULATED THROAT BUSHINGS, FIELD LOCATE TO
AVOID CONFLICT WITH OTHER TRADES AND UTILITIES.
2 RECEPTACLE MOUNTED TO HVAC UNIT, COORDINATE MOUNTING
WITH M.C. PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
3 EXISTING ROOFTOP UNIT TO BE RECIRCUITED AS INDICATED ON
NEW DRAWINGS; FIELD COORDINATE ROUTING OF NEW CIRCUIT
WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION.
4 EXISTING ROOFTOP UNIT TO REMAIN ACTIVE; LOCATE AND PROTECT
EXISTING CIRCUITING AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN FUNCTIONALITY.
5 CIRCUIT TO EXISTING POWER-LINK PANEL INDICATED, PROVIDE AND
INSTALL NEW 20A/1P POWER-LINK CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL.
COORDINATE PROGRAMMING WITH BYU-I ELECTRICAL SHOP.
6 PROVIDE HEAT TRACING OF ROOF AND OVERFLOW DRAINS. COIL
HEAT TAPE AROUND ROOF AND OVERFLOW DRAINS AND EXTEND
INTO DRAIN. WHERE DRAIN PIPES EXTEND INTO UNCONDITIONED
SPACE, HEAT TRACE SHALL EXTEND DOWN PIPE AND OUT END OF
DOWNSPOUT APPROX. 6". EXACT TAPE LENGTH TO BE DETERMINED
IN FIELD. UTILIZE RAYCHEM 120V, GM-1XT CABLE. PROVIDE ALL
COMPONENTS FOR A COMPETE INSTALLATION INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO: POWER CONNECTOR, JUNCTION BOX, CABLE END
SEALS, CABLE SUPPORT CLIPS, ETC. COORDINATE ALL ROOF
PENETRATIONS WITH ROOF CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE PROPER
FLASHING AND SEALING OF PENETRATIONS. UTILIZE GFEPD TYPE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR ALL HEAT TRACE CIRCUITS.
7 PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW WIRE CABLE TRAY SYSTEM; PROVIDE
AND INSTALL ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE AND
ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. REFER TO DETAILS
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Electrical Roof Plan
16'8'0"
NORTH
MECHANICAL - AIR HANDLER SCHEDULE
ID # VOLTS PH. MCA MOCP PANEL CIRCUIT FEEDER
DISCONNECT
SIZE
DISCONNECT
TYPE NOTES
AH 1 208 V 3 8 A 15 A AB 38,40,42 3/4"C.,3#12+1#12G 30 A FUSED/3R 2,6
MECHANICAL - SPLIT A/C UNIT SCHEDULE
ID # VOLTS PH. MCA PANEL CIRCUIT FEEDER
DISCONNECT
TYPE
DISCONNECT
SIZE NOTES
INDOOR UNIT
FC 1A 208 V 1 1 A PER MANUFACTURER N/A 0 A 5
FC 2A 208 V 1 1 A PER MANUFACTURER N/A 0 A 5
FC 3A 208 V 1 1 A PER MANUFACTURER N/A 0 A 5
OUTDOOR UNIT
FC 1B 208 V 1 25 A IT 22,24 3/4"C.2#10+1#10G 3R 30 A 2,5
FC 2B 208 V 1 25 A AC 31,33 3/4"C.2#10+1#10G 3R 30 A 2,5,8
FC 3B 208 V 1 25 A AC 35,37 3/4"C.2#10+1#10G 3R 30 A 2,5,8
1. CIRCUIT FAN WITH ROOM LTG CIRCUIT AND CONTROL WITH ROOM LIGHTING.
2. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE LOCAL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR EQUIPMENT; SIZE AND TYPE AS INDICATED IN SCHEDULE. IF FUSED DISCONNECT IS
SPECIFIED FOR EQUIPMENT, FUSE PER EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATING.
3. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE LOCAL DISCONNECT RATED, THERMAL-OVERLOAD SWITCH FOR EQUIPMENT; SWITCH RATING SHALL NOT BE LESS THEN
CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPPLYING EQUIPMENT.
4. EQUIPMENT IS FACTORY SUPPLYED WITH DISCONNECT AND CONVIENENCE OUTLET; E.C. SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY CONNECTIONS.
5. INDOOR UNIT IS POWERED FROM OUTDOOR UNIT; COORDINATE EXACT NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS BETWEEN UNITS WITH M.C. PRIOR TO
ROUGH-IN.
6. EQUIPMENT PROVIDED WITH VFD; VFD BY M.C. AND CONNECTED AND INSTALLED BY E.C. COORDINATE WITH M.C PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
7. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR EQUIPMENT; SIZE AND TYPE AS INDICATED IN SCHEDULE. PROVIDE
WITH CONTROL XFMR (2) SETS OF NO/NC CONTACTS, CONTROLS WITH M.C. PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. FUSE DISCONNECT PER EQUIPMENT
NAMEPLATE RATING.
8. PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW 30A/2P BREAKER IN EXISTING SQ. D NQ PANELBOARD.
MECHANICAL SCHEDULE NOTES:
MECHANICAL - ROOFTOP UNIT SCHEDULE
ID # VOLTS PH. MCA MOCP PANEL CIRCUIT FEEDER
DISCONNECT
SIZE
DISCONNECT
TYPE NOTES
RT 8(E) 208 V 3 99 A 125 A Z 2,4,6 1 1/2"C.,3#1+1#6G 200 A EXISTING
RT 9 208 V 3 23 A 30 A AA 74,76,78 3/4"C.,3#10+1#10G 30 A 3R 2
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"2 Level 2 - Power/Data Plan
2 Addendum #3 11/14/20
MECHANICAL - CIRCULATING PUMP SCHEDULE
ID # VOLTS PH. HP FLA PANEL CIRCUIT FEEDER NOTES
CP 1 120 V 1 1/4 6 A P 3 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G 3
CP 2 120 V 1 (2) 1/2 16 A AB 51 1"C.,2#8+1#8G
CP 3 120 V 1 1/4 6 A AC 1 3/4"C.,2#12+1#12G 3
MECHANICAL - CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE
ID # VOLTS PH. MCA MOCP PANEL CIRCUIT FEEDER
DISCONNECT
SIZE
DISCONNECT
TYPE NOTES
CU 1 208 V 1 31 A 50 A AB 44,46 1"C.,2#6+1#6G 60 A 3R 2
WP
1
WP
1
S CD2
nDCnDCnDC
nDC nDC
nDC nDC nDC nDC
nD
C
nD
C
nD
C
S
nD
1
S
nD
1
S
nD
1
S nD1
S nD1
S nD1SnD1
S nD1 S nD1 S nD1
S nD1
S nD1SnD1
S nD1
S nD1
S nD1
SnD1
nD
S nD1
S nD1
S nD1
SnD1
S nD1SnD1
n1
n2D
S CD2
S CD2
S CD2
SnD1
S CD2
SCD2
S nD1
SnD1
S
CD
2
S nD1
SnD1
n1
n1
n1
n1
n4 n4
n4
n4
n4
n4
n1
n2D
WP1
nD
S nD1
SnD1nD
WP
R
nR1
R
nR1
S nD1
R
nR1
R
nR2
R
nRER
R
nR2
R
nRER
nDC
S nD1
S CPC
2 3
4 5 6 7
B
C
1
8
A
D
E
(TYP)F3
(TYP)F1
(TYP)F1
(TYP)F1(TYP)F2
(TYP)F3n
F3nE
F3nE
FX1
FX1
(TYP)F1
(TYP)F2n
(TYP)F2n
F3nE
FX1
FX1
FX1
FX1
FX1
F1
FX1
FX1
F3nE
(TYP)F7
(TYP)F3n
(TYP)F2n (TYP)F2n (TYP)F2n
F3nEF3nE
F3nE
F3nE
(TYP)F2n (TYP)F2n
(TYP)F2n (TYP)F2n
F3nE
(TYP)F3n
(TYP)F2n (TYP)F2n
(TYP)F2n
F7E
F7E
F3n F3n
ENGINES LAB
143
AUTO STORAGE
142
CE STORAGE
140
AUTOMOTIVE SHOP
138
HIGH BAY SHOP
137 CM / CE LAB
132
VESTIBULE
101
AUTO TOOL ROOM
138B
BREAK ROOM
130
OFFICE
129
OFFICE
128
OFFICE
127
FIRE RISER
132B
CURING CLOSET
137B CM/CE TOOL ROOM
132A
STUDENT
COLLABORATION
136
CORRIDOR
139
I.T.
135
OFFICE
133
OFFICE
134
CUSTODIAL
138A
MECH
141
WOMEN'S
117
MEN'S
115
OFFICE
121
OFFICE
124
OFFICE
122
OFFICE
123
OFFICE
119
OFFICE
120
OFFICE
125
CORRIDOR
118
CORRIDOR
131
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
109
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
108
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
107
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
106
CONFRENCE ROOM
(N.I.C.)
114
RECEPTION
102
OFFICE
104
OFFICE (N.I.C.)
105
OFFICE
110
OPEN OFFICE
111
OFFICE
112
CORRIDOR
103
CONCRETE TOOLS
137A
CM TOOL STORAGE
137C
(TYP)F1
'B'
F3
1
F3F3F3
1
F3 F3 F3 F3 F31 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F31
F1F3F3F3F3F3F3F3F3F3F3F3F3F3
1 1
(TYP)F1n
F1 F1
TOOL BOX STORAGE
138C
2
2
(TYP)F7
FE1
12' -0"
(TYP)F3
(TYP)F4
FX1
FX1LIGHTING IN PURCHASING AREA
TO REMAIN ACTIVE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)
LOCATE, PROTECT AND MAINTAIN FUNCTIONALITY
DURING CONSTRUCTION
(TYP)F83
F7E (TYP)F7
F7E
(TYP)F7
(TYP)F4
'H''C''W'
4
5 5
FX1
X-29
(TYP)F4
(TYP)F4
'AB'
SEE
DETAIL
(5/EE603)
AB-5
SEE
DETAIL
(6/EE603)
AB-7
'AA'
AA-5
TO LEVEL 2
LIGHTING PLAN
(TYP)F1
F3
C-3
SEE
DETAIL
(6/EE603)
SEE
DETAIL
(6/EE603)SEE
DETAIL
(6/EE603)
'IT'
FROM LTGABOVE
(A/EE131)
(A/EE131)
(TYP)F3n
B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1
(5/EE603)(5/EE603)(5/EE603)(5/EE603)
(5/EE603)(5/EE603)
(5/EE603)
(5/EE603)(5/EE603)(5/EE603)(5/EE603)
B-1
B-1B-1
B-1B-1B-1B-1
SEE
DETAIL
(6/EE603)
SEE
DETAIL
(6/EE603)
B-3
F3nEF3n F3n
(TYP)F2n
(5/EE603)(5/EE603)
6
(5/EE603)
6
6 6
(5/EE603)
IT-5
(5/EE603)
(5/EE603)
B-5
B-5
B-5 B-5
IT-5
IT-5
B-5
IT-5
(5/EE603)
(5/EE603)
(5/EE603)
(5/EE603)
(5/EE603)
IT-5B-5
IT-5 B-5
B-5
IT-5
IT-5
IT-5
B-5
IT-5
IT-5
B-1
B-3
B-3
7
FX1
2
FX1
2
FX1 2
(TYP)F4
1/2"C FIXTURE SUPPORT
BAR BY G.C
ELEC. BOX MOUNTED
TO SUPPORT BAR
(TYP OF 3)
12/3 SO CORD
WITH PLUGRECPT. MOUNTED
FLUSH IN WALL
CONTROLLED BYLIGHTING CONTROLS
IN ROOM
13053
ST ATE OF I D A HOSHAWNA.M E A D O R R E G I S TEREDRPOFESSIONALENGIN
E
E
R
Engineering Inc.
Consulting Engineers1823 E. Center
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
tel (208) 232-4439
www.payneengineeringinc.com
3 6 0 w e s t a s p e n a v e n u e
s a l t l a k e c i t y , u t a h 8 4 1 0 1
8 0 1 5 3 2 4 4 2 2
sheet:
title:
revisions :
p r o j e c t # :
d a t e :
UNLESS A PROFESSIONAL SEAL WITH SIGNATURE AND
DATE IS AFFIXED, THIS DOCUMENT IS PRELIMINARY AND IS
NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, RECORDING
PURPOSES, OR IMPLEMENTATION
THE DESIGNS SHOWN AND DESCRIBED HEREIN INCLUDING
ALL TECHNICAL DRAWINGS, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS &
MODELS THEREOF, ARE PROPRIETARY & CAN NOT BE
COPIED, DUPLICATED, OR COMMERCIALLY EXPLOITED IN
WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SOLE AND EXPRESS
WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM METHOD STUDIO INC.
project:
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
P.E. JOB #2060
byu idaho project # : 12006
10/27/20
EE131
Level 1 -
Lighting Plan
20.0220
oct. 27, 2020
525 South Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83440
BYUI
Engineering
Technology
Center (ETC)
100% construction
documents
A. REFER TO SYMBOL SCHEDULE SHEET FOR PROJECT GENERAL
NOTES AND GENERAL NOTES ASSOCIATED WITH THE
INSTALLATION OF EACH SYSTEM, INCLUDINB BUT NOT LIMITED TO;
LIGHTING, POWER, FIRE ALARM, SPECIAL SYSTEMS, ETC.
GENERAL NOTES:
KEY NOTES:#
1 E.C. SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A CONTINUOUS RUN OF UNISTRUT
CHANNEL SUSPENDED FROM STRUCTURE WITH ALL-THREAD 8FT
AFF FOR MOUNTING OF STRIP LIGHTS ABOVE BENCH AREA; FIELD
COORDINATE MOUNTING WITH OWNER AND OTHER TRADES.
2 EXISTING LIGHTING TO REMAIN ACTIVE, LOCATE AND PROTECT
DURING CONSTRUCTION.
3 E.C. SHALL SUSPEND LIGHT FIXTURES FROM STRUCTURE IN
BETWEEN SLAT CEILING SYSTEM; BOTTOM OF FIXTURE SHALL BE
EVEN WITH CEILING SYSTEM. FIELD COORDINATE SUSPENSION
LENGTH WITH CEILING SYSTEM.
4 RECONNECT SWITCHES TO EXISTING LIGHTING/CONTROLS TO
MAINTAIN ORIGINAL FUNCTIONALITY.
5 PROVIDE CONNECTION TO SKY-LIGHT ACTUATOR; COORDINATE
CONNECTION WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
UTILIZE NEARES 120V UNSWITCHED CIRCUIT.
6 UTILIZED EXISTING LIGHTING CIRCUIT IN AREA FOR NEW LIGHTING
AND CONTROLS; FIELD VERIFY HOMERUN LOCATION.
7 LIGHTING IN VESTIBULE SHALL BE CONTROLLED VIA DAYLIGHTING
PHOTO SENSOR; PROVIDE UNSWITCH POWER TO SENSOR AND
REQUIRED CONTROLS TO FIXTURE(S).
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 Level 1 - Lighting Plan
16'8'0"
NORTH
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"A Student Table Ltg Detail
2 Addendum #3 11/14/20